コード V50-006: Smart Safety Observation Warning

 Smart safety observation target ax is (the parameters "#51101 SF_Disab le" = 0 / "#51301 SF_SDisable" = 0) is defined as a hypothetical axis (the parameter "#51015 safe_drv_test" = 1). In this case some alarms fail to occur, thus avoid this settin g while a drive unit is being connected.  NC system is set to a simulation mode (the parameter "#1168 test" = 1 ). During this mode some alarms fail to occur, thus do not use this mode while a safety I/O unit is connected. Remedy  Connect MDS-E Series drive to all the axes subjec t to safety observation, set the parameter ("#51015 safe_drv_test" = 0) and then turn OFF and ON the power.  Connect a safety I/O unit, set the parameter ("#1168 test" = 0) and then turn OFF and ON the power. Parameter 14 User Parameters OFF after the settings. Turn the power OFF and ON to base_I Base axis I Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specif ied respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z base_J Base axis J Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specif ied respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z base_K Base axis K Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specif ied respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z aux_I Flat axis I Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1026 base_I". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z #1030 aux_J Flat axis J Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1027 base_J". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z #1031 aux_K Flat axis K Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1028 base_K". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z #1084 RadErr Arc error Set the tolerable error range when the end point deviates from the center coordinat e in the circular command. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1.000 (mm) #1171 taprov Tap return override Set the tap return ov erride value for the synchronous tapping. When "0" is set, it will be regarded as 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #1185 spd_F1 F1 digit feedrate F1 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #1186 spd_F2 F1 digit feedrate F2 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #1187 spd_F3 F1 digit feedrate F3 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #1188 spd_F4 F1 digit feedrate F4 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) spd_F5 F1 digit feedrate F5 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) F1_FM Upper limit of F 1-digit feedrate Set the maximum value up to which the F 1-digit feedrate can be changed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) F1_K F 1-digit feedrate change constant Set the constant that determines the speed change ra te per manual handle graduation in F 1-digit feedrate change mode. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 WRK COUNT M Set the M code for counting the number of the workpiece repeated machining. The number of the M-codes set by this parameter is counted. The No. will not be counted when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 WRK COUNT Set the initial value of the number of workpiece machin ing. The number of current workpiece machining is displayed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 WRK COUNT LIMIT Set the maximum number of workpiece machining. A signal will be output to PLC when the number of machining times is counted to this limit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 SPEED Set the feedrate during automa tic tool length measurement. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) ZONE r Set the distance between the measurem ent point and deceleration start point. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) ZONE d Set the tolerable range of the measurement point. An alarm will occur when the sensor signal turns ON before the range, set by this parameter, has not been reached from the measurem ent point, or when the signal does not turn ON after the range is passed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #8007 OVERRIDE Set the override value for automatic corner override. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #8008 MAX ANGLE Set the maximum corner opening angle where deceleration should start automatically. When the angle is larger than this value, deceleration will not start. ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) #8009 DSC. ZONE Set the position where decelerat ion starts at the corner. Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #8010 ABS. MAX. Set the maximum value when inputting the tool compensation amount. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set. Absolute value of the input value is set. (If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.) When "0" is set, this parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applies) #8011 INC. MAX. Set the maximum value for when inputting the tool compensation amount in the incremental mode. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set. Absolute value of the input value is set. (If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.) When "0" is set, this parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applies) #8038 Path recog. range Path recognition range Specify the range to recognize the tool paths adjoi ning to the command positio n when the smooth fairing function is ON. If "0" is set, the range will be 1.000 (mm). ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #8039 Comp. range limit Compensation dist ance tolerance Specify the upper limit of the di stance between the command position and compensation position when the smooth fairing function is ON. If you specify a negative value, operati on is conducted with no tolerance limit. If "0" is set, the tolerance will be 0.005 (mm). ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 100.000 (mm) C-rot.R Set the length from the c enter of the normal line control axis to the tool tip. This is used to calculate the turning speed at the block joint. This is enabled during the normal line control type II. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) C-ins.R Set the radius of the arc to be automatically in serted into the corner during normal line control. This is enabled during the normal line control type I. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) Tool HDL FD OFS Set the length from the tool holder to the tool tip. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) UNIT*10 Set the command increment scale. The scale will be "1" when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (fold) 0: One fold Varying spd thread Select whether to enable the variable speed thread cutting function. 0: Disable 1: Enable G76 THICK Set the minimum cutting amount for co mpound type thread cutting cycle (G76). The value set in this parameter will be applied when the cutting amount in compound thread cutting cycle (G76) without Q command is smaller than that in this parameter. This parameter is valid only when "#1222 aux06/bit4" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) G76G78in-posn wdt. Not used. Set to "0.000". Turning cycle mode 1: If a zero-travel distance blo ck is given during turnin g cycle mode (G90 , G92 or G94), the turning cycle is executed again. 0: If a zero-travel distance blo ck is given during turnin g cycle mode (G90 , G92 or G94), the turning cycle is not executed. 3-D CMP (for M system only) Set the value of the denominator constants for 3-dimensional tool radius compensation. Set the value of "p" in the following formula. Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p Vx, Vy, Vz: X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes i, j, k: Program command value r: Offset p = √ ( i 2 + j 2 + k 2 ) when the set value is "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 #8072 SCALING P (for M system only) Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification in the machining program specified by G50 or G51 com- mand. This parameter will be valid when the program specifies no scale factor. ---Setting range--- -99.999999 to 99.999999 #8075 SpiralEndErr (for M system only) Set the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position, commanded by the spiral or con- ical interpolation command with the command format type 2, differs from the end point position obtained from the speed and incremen t/decrement amount. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #8077 Invlute error Set the tolerable error between the involute curve thro ugh the start point and the involute curve through the end point. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #8078 Screen Saver Timer Set the period of time before turn-OFF of the display unit backlight. When "0" is set, the backlight is not turned OFF. It is possible to turn OFF the backlight of the monitor screen as well by using the [SHIFT] + [C.B] keys, unless its window is displayed. ---Setting range--- 1 to 60 (min) 0: The backlight is not turned OFF #8081 Gcode Rotat (for L system only) Set the rotation angle when the coordinate rotation by program is commanded. This parameter is enabled when "1" is set in "#12 70 ext06/bit5" (Coordinate rotation angle without com- mand). This parameter is set as absolute command regardless of the "#8082 G68.1 R INC" setting. If the rotation angle is designated by an address R in G68.1 command, the designation by program will be applied. ---Setting range--- -360.000 to +360.000 (°) #8082 G68.1 R INC (for L system only) Select absolute command or incremental command to use for the rotation angle command R at L-system coordinate rotation. 0: Use absolute command in G90 modal, incremental command in G91 modal 1: Always use incremental command (Note) If G91 does not exist in the G code system, th e command type is decided by this parameter only. #8621 Coord rot plane (H) Set the plane (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control. Usually, set the name of the 1st axis. When this parameter is not set, the coordinate rotation function will not work. ---Setting range--- Axis name #8622 Coord rot plane (V) Set the plane (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control. Usually, set the name of the 2nd axis. When this parameter is not set, the coordinate rotation function will not work. ---Setting range--- Axis name Coord rot centr (H) Set the center coordinates (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control. ---Setting range--- -999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm) Coord rot centr (V) Set the center coordinates (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control. ---Setting range--- -999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm) Coord rot vctr (H) Set the vector components (horizontal ax is) for coordinate rotation control. When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically calculated. ---Setting range--- -999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm) Coord rot vctr (V) Set the vector components (vertical ax is) for coordinate rotation control. When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically calculated. ---Setting range--- -999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm) Coord rot angle Set the rotation angle for coordinate rotation control. When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation vector (#8625, #8626) will be "0". ---Setting range--- -360.000 to 360.000 (°) GraphicsBaseAxis_I Specify the name of base axis for the graphics. Select an alphabetical letter from A to Z. When there is no need to set all three parameters (GraphicsBaseAxis_I, Graphi csBaseAxis_J and Graphics- BaseAxis_K) (e.g. for two-axis specifications ), enter "0" to leave the parameter blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified in "GraphicsBa seAxis_I", "GraphicsBaseA xis_J" and "GraphicsBa- seAxis_K" respectively, the following relationship will be established: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- 0 or from A to Z GraphicsBaseAxis_J Specify the name of base axis for the graphics. Select an alphabetical letter from A to Z. When there is no need to set all three parameters (GraphicsBaseAxis_I, Graphi csBaseAxis_J and Graphics- BaseAxis_K) (e.g. for two-axis specifications ), enter "0" to leave the parameter blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified in "GraphicsBa seAxis_I", "GraphicsBaseA xis_J" and "GraphicsBa- seAxis_K" respectively, the following relationship will be established: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- 0 or from A to Z #8633 GraphicsBaseAxis_K Specify the name of base axis for the graphics. Select an alphabetical letter from A to Z. When there is no need to set all three parameters ("GraphicsBaseAxis_I", "GraphicsBaseAxis_J" and "GraphicsBaseAxis_K") (e.g. for tw o-axis specifications), enter "0 " to leave the parameter blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified in "GraphicsBaseAxis_I", "GraphicsBase Axis_J" and "GraphicsBa- seAxis_K" respectively, the following relationship will be established: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- 0 or from A to Z #8701 Tool length Set the length to th e touch tool tip. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8702 Tool Dia Set the diameter of the sphe re at the touch tool tip. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8703 OFFSET X This sets the deviation amount (X direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8704 OFFSET Y Set the deviation amount (Y direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8705 RETURN Set the one-time return distance for contacting again. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #8706 FEED Set the feedrate when contacting again. ---Setting range--- 1 to 60000 (mm/min) #8707 Skip past amout (H) Set the difference (horizontal axis direction) be tween the skip read value and actual skip position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8708 Skip past amout (V) Set the difference (vertical axis direction) betw een the skip read value and actual skip position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) EXT work sign rvs Reverse the sign of external workpiece coordinate. Select when using the external workpiece coor dinate system with Z shift. 0: External workpiece offset without sign reversal 1: External workpiece offset with sign reversal EXT work ofs invld Set whether to enable external workpiece offset subt raction when setting the workpiece coordinate offset. 0: Not subtract the external workpiec e offset. (Conventio nal specification) 1: Subtract the external workpiece offset. TLM L meas axis Set the tool length measurement axis. Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name. ---Setting range--- Axis name (Note) If the axis name is illegal or not se t, the 3rd axis name will be set as default. TLM D meas axis Set the tool diameter measurement axis. Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name. ---Setting range--- Axis name (Note) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 1st axis name will be set as default. Skip coord. Switch (For M system only) Select the coordinate system for reading skip coor dinate value. Select whether to read the skip coor dinate in the workpiece coordinate sys tem or in the feature coordinate system during inclined surface machining command. Select whether to read the skip coordi nate in the workpiece coor dinate system or in the workpiece installation coordinate system during workpiece installation error compensation. 0: Workpiece coordinate system 1: Feature coordinate sys tem/Workpiece installa tion coordinate system Thrdrecut lead ax Specify the name of lead axis t hat performs thread recutting. If any nonexistent axis name is specified, the 1st axis of the part system is used as a lead axis for thread recutting. If the parameter "#8714 Thrdrecut lead ax" is unspecified, Z axis is set as the parameter value at power ON. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Thread recut SP# Specify the No. or name of spindle that performs thread recutting. If 0 or any nonexistent spindle No. or name is spec ified, the 1st spindle is used for thread recutting. ---Setting range--- Spindle No. method: 0 to 8 Spindle name method: 0 to 9 (Default: 0) EXT/Wrksft Share (for L system only) Set this parameter to "1" if you wish to disabl e the external workpiece coordinate system offset. This parameter is enabled when "#11056 Workshift invalid (worksft invalid)" is "0". 0: Use the external work coordinate offset (EXT) to implement compensation 1: Implement compensation without using th e external work coordinate offset (EXT) #8717 WE measure wk zero Specify the workpiece zero position that is us ed for measuring the workpiece installation error. 0: Workpiece center 1: Apex in X-, Y- direction 2: Apex in X+, Y- direction 3: Apex in X+, Y+ direction 4: Apex in X-, Y+ direction #8718 WE meas. wk coord Specify the workpiece coordinate system in which you input the workpiec e coordinates for workpiece instal- lation error measurement. Set the number part of the coordinate system modal. (54, 54.1, 55, 56, 57, 58 or 59) ---Setting range--- 0, 54 to 59 #8719 WE meas. ext wk No If workpiece installation error m easurement is performed in the extended workpiece coordinate system, specify the address P value of G54.1. If "#8718 WE meas. wk coord" is not 54.1, there is no need for setting this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 #8720 WE mea. wk X-width Specify the X direction width of the rectangular workpiece for which workpi ece installation error measurement is performed. If the sensor's accessible range is small due to jig etc., specify the width of the portio n that is stuck out of the jig. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #8721 WE mea. wk Y-width Specify the Y direction width of the rectangular workpiece for which workpi ece installation error measurement is performed. If the sensor's accessible range is small due to jig etc., specify the width of the portio n that is stuck out of the jig. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #8722 WE mea. wk Z-width Specify the Z direction widt h of the rectangular workpiece for which workpiece installation error measurement is performed. If the sensor's accessible range is small due to jig etc., specify the width of the portio n that is stuck out of the jig. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #8723 WK inst. err comp# Specify the workpiece installation error No. for writ e during the workpiece installation error measurement. Set "1" for G54.4 P1. ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 Sensor T L comp No Specify the tool length comp ensation No. of the touch probe to be us ed for measurement of rotation center error and workpiece installation error. Set the touch probe offset in t he said number before measurement. If the specified offset is significant ly large, the probe may be damaged. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 Tolerance ctrl ON Select whether to enable the tolerance control. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) Tolerance control is av ailable only under SSS control. To enable this function, set "#8090 SSS ON" to "1". Tolerance spd coef Set the compensation coefficient to adjust a path error or clamp speed in the corner while tolerance control is ON. This parameter is enabled during tolerance control. Thus set this parameter if you wish to use different clamp speed according to ON/OFF of tolerance control. When "0" is set in this parameter, the standard value (100%) is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (%) Smoothing range Spline interpolation 2: Smoothing range Normally set "0" in this parameter. If you run a program with micro segments and its reci procating paths are uneven, set the parameter to about 3 to 5 times the length of the programmed segments. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 10.000 (mm) Corner angle Tolerance control: Corner recognition angle Specify the corner recognition angle. Normally set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 180.000 (°) Syn.tap(,S)cancel 0: Retain the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return 1: Cancel the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return with G80 The same value as "#1223 aux07/bit6" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will change accordingly. Zero-point mark Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic trace and 2D check. 0: Machine coordinates zero point (same as conventional method) 1: Workpiece coordinate zero point The same value as "#1231 set03/bit4" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will change accordingly. PRG coord rot type Select the start point of the fi rst travel command after coordinat e rotation by program is commanded. 0: Calculate the end position using the current position on the local coordinate sys tem before rotating, with- out rotating the start point in accordance with the coordinates rotation. 1: Calculate the end position, assuming that the star t point rotates in accordance with the coordinates ro- tation. #19004 Tap feedrate limit Set the upper limit of the cutting feed rate in synchronous tapping. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (mm/rev) (Note) Setting "0" disables this parameter. When the commanded cutting feed rate in synchronous tapping exceeds this setting, a program error (P184) will occur. #19005 manual Fcmd2 clamp Set a clamp speed coefficient (%) for manual speed command 2. The feed rate is clamped at the command feed rate or rapid traverse rate for automatic operation, which was multiplied by this parameter's value. (Note) This setting is valid only for manual speed command 2. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (%) 0: 100% (Default value) #19006 EOR Disable Set whether to handle an EOR(%) in machining program as the end of program in automatic operation, graphic check, program transfer to NC memory, progr am editing, and buffer co rrection. Tape operation, Computer Link B, and serial input/output are not included. 0: An EOR(%) is handled as the end of machining program. 1: An EOR(%) is not handled as the end of machin ing program. The program will be read to the end of file. #19007 Prg check constant Set the speed constant to be used for the program check operation function. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 #19008 PRM coord rot type Select the start point of the initial travel command after parameter coordinate rotation. 0: Calculate the end position, assuming that the star t point rotates in accordance with the coordinates ro- tation. 1: Calculate the end positi on using the current positio n on the local coordinate system before rotating, with- out rotating the start po int in accordance with the coordinates rotation. #19009 Corner check angle Corner deceleration check angle Specify the internal angle formed by two blocks, at or below which the bl ock joint is determi ned as a corner and the latter block's start timing is controlled accordingly while the automatic error detect is ON. N002 N001 θ 䢢 ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) Corner check width Corner deceleration check width When deceleration of the currently executed block has started and a position error width between the pro- grammed end point and machine position has reduced to th is parameter or less, the control starts execution of the next block. N002 䢢 䢢 N001 䢢 Machine position ---Setting range--- 0 to 99.999 (mm) Ana-Tap-Voltage1 Analog spindle synch tap: Voltage output magnification (at cutting) Specify the spindle speed magnification to be applied during cutting in analog spindle synchronous tapping. When 0 is set, the magnification is taken as 100%. If the spindle fails to rotate as commanded due to su ch as cutting load, set this parameter to correct the speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) Ana-Tap-Voltage2 Analog spindle synch tap: Voltage output magnification (at retract) Specify the spindle speed magnification to be applie d during retract in analog spindle synchronous tapping. When 0 is set, the magnification is taken as 100%. If the spindle fails to rotate as commanded due to su ch as cutting load, set this parameter to correct the speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) G04 P factor When a decimal fraction is not enabled for address P of G04, the value of P will be multiplied by the value specified by this parameter. The value is determined as 10 n (n = -3 to 3). -3: 1/1000 -2: 1/100 -1: 1/10 0: 1 1: 10 2: 100 3: 1000 Stylus sphere dia. Specify the diameter of stylus sphere that is used for measurement of rotation center error or workpiece in- stallation error. If the set value is significantl y different from the actual diam eter, the sensor may be damaged. ---Setting range--- 0.000, 0.100 to 10.000 (mm) Stylus length Specify the length of stylus that is used for workpiece installation error measurement. If the set value is significantl y different from the actual l ength, the sensor may be damaged. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #19103 Sensor over-travel Specify the over-travel distance of the sensor that is used for measurement of rotation center error or work- piece installation error. (allowable excess of sensor, over-stroke) Set the smallest over-travel distance among all the axes. The initial approaching speed to the reference sphere is determined according to the over-travel distance. If the set over-travel distance is greater than the actual distance, t he sensor may be damaged. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #19104 G12.1 no reversal Select whether to retain the rotation direction of C axis when circular in terpolation takes place near the work- piece zero during milling interpolation or during polar coordinate interpolation. 0: Not retain (the direction requiri ng the smaller amount of rotation) 1: Retain the rotation direction #19105 G12.1 zero range Specify the range to be determined as workpiece zero when #19104 is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1.000 (mm) #19401 G33.n chamfer spd Not used. #19405 Rotary ax drawing Specify this parameter to draw a path of C axis (rotary axis) according to its rotation in the graphic trace and 2D graphic trace. When "#1013 axname" is set to "C", the axis is handled as a rotary axis. By setting this parameter to "C", a rotation path arou nd the Z axis on actual workpiece can be expressed. When the Graphic check rotary axis drawing option or Gr aphic trace rotary axis drawing option is disabled, this parameter is ignored. C: Enable this function 0: Disable this function (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #19406 Hob retract ON at alarm Select whether to enable the retract at an alarm during hobbing. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Standard value: 0) #19407 Hob retract acceleration deceleration OFF Select whether to disable the acceleration/deceleration of a retract. 0: Enable 1: Disable (Standard value: 0) #19417 Hole dec check 2 This is enabled when #1253 set25 bit2 is 1. The operation at the hole bottom and the hole drilling stop position is as below. 0: Perform no deceleration check. 1: Perform command deceleration check. 2: Perform in-position check. <Target fixed cycles> Machining center: G81, G82, G83, G73 Lathe: G83, G87, G83.2 Arc inside min ovr (for M system only) Set the minimum value of arc inside override. R1/R2 come close to zero and the tool feed stops when th e radius of tool center path(R1) is very smaller than the radius of program path (R2). When this parameter is set and R1/R2< =(parameter setting value), tool feed is F* (parameter setting value). When this parameter is "0" or "100", the arc inside override is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) Timing sync system Specify the counterpart part system for timing synchronization or for balance cut when the part system No. is omitted. Set the part system No. in a way that reflects the combination of two part systems as follows. (Example) Timing synchronization between Part systems 1 and 3 Enter 3 for the 1st part system, and enter 1 for the 3rd part system. (Note) When 0 is set, timing synchronization is carried out between Part systems 1 and 2. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 Arc inside ovr ON (for M system only) Select the enable conditions for the arc inside override. 0: Enable during tool radius compensation 1: Enable during tool radius compensation and automatic corner override (Note) When M2 format is in use, the arc inside overri de enables during tool radius compensation, regardless of the setting value of this parameter. Arc inside ovr typ (for M system only) Specify the type of arc inside override. 0: Type 1 Arc inside override during circular cutting is invalid. 1: Type 2 Arc inside override during circular cutting is valid. G185 factor This parameter specifies the factor (%) for calculating the pick feed amount that is used when address A (pick feed amount) and address E (number of chamfering cycl es) are omitted from G185 (hole edge chamfering cycle). The pick feed amount is calculated through the following formula. Tool radius (mm) * G185 factor (%) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) 0: 20% (default value) ManualB Std R1 Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed. When the setting value of #19425 is larger than that of "#19427 ManualB Std R2", #19425 setting will be used as surface speed control standard radius 2: #19427 setting will be used as surface speed control standard radius 1. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #19426 ManualB Std F1 This sets the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 1 (ManualB Std R1). When the setting value of #19426 is larger than that of "#19428 ManualB Std F2", #19426 setting will be used as surface speed control standard speed 2: #19427 sett ing will be used as surf ace speed control standard speed 1. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (°/min) #19427 ManualB Std R2 Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed. When the same value is set as "#19425 ManualB Std R1", the surface speed control standard speed 1 (Man- ualB Std F1) will be selected as the rotary axis speed if the radius is less than that value. The surface speed control standard speed 2 (ManualB Std F2) is selected if larger than the set value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #19428 ManualB Std F2 Set the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 2 (ManualB Std R2). ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (°/min) #19437 Skip fin in rough1 Specify whether to execute roughi ng along finishing shape in roughing cycle (G71, G72) when pocket ma- chining is OFF. 0: Execute roughing along finishing shape 1: Not execute roughing along finishing shape #19438 Skip fin in rough2 Specify whether to execute roughi ng along finishing shape in roughing cycle (G71, G72) when pocket ma- chining is ON. 0: Not execute roughing along finishing shape 1: Execute roughing along finishing shape #19442 Path at G71 comp. When roughing along finishing shape is enabled in roughing cycle (G71,G72), select the path to move to the cycle command point after the completion of roughing along finishing shape. 0: Move to the cycle command point without passing through the start point of roughing. 1: Move to the cycle command point via the start point of roughing. For ZX plane, the move to the start point of roughing is performed with one axis at a time in the following order: G71: in the order of Z axis and X axis G72: in the order of X axis and Z axis #19443 Retract aft rough Specify whether to retract after roughing along finish ing shape when roughing along finishing shape is en- abled in rough cutting cycle (G71, G72). 0: Not retract 1: Retract This parameter is valid when "#19442 Path at G71 comp." is set to "1". G73n (for M system only) Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) G83 n Set the return amount for G8 3 (deep hole drilling cycle). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) CDZ-VALE (for L system only) Set the chamfering amount for G 76, G78 (thread cutting cycle). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 (0.1 lead) CDZ-ANGLE (for L system only) Set the chamfering angle for G 76, G78 (thread cutting cycle). ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) G71 MINIMUM (for L system only) Set the minimum value of the last cutting amount by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72). The cutting amount of the last cutting will be the rema inder. When the remainder is smaller than this param- eter setting, the last cycle will not be executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) G71 DELTA-D (for L system only) Set the change amount of the rough cutting cycle. The rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) cutting amount repeat s x+dx, x, x-dx using the value (x) commanded with D as a reference. Set the change amount dx. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) G84/G74 n Set the retract amount m in a G84/G74/G88 pecking tapping cycle. (Note) In the case of a normal tapping cycle, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) G71 THICK Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) G71 PULL UP Set the amount of pull-up when retu rning to the cutting start point for the rough cutting cycle (G71. G72). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) G73 U Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8054 G73 W Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8055 G73 R Set how many times cutting will be performed in the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (times) #8056 G74 RETRACT Set the amount of retract in the cut-off cycle (G74, G75). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) #8057 G76 LAST-D Set the amount of final cut-in by the compound type thread cutting (G76). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) #8058 G76 TIMES Set how many times the amount of final cut-in cycle (G76 finish margin) will be divided in the compound type thread cutting (G76). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (times) #8059 G76 ANGLE Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the compound type thread cutting (G76). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (°) #8083 G83S modeM (for M system only) Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode. ---Setting range--- 1 to 99999999 #8084 G83S Clearance (for M system only) Set the clearance amount for the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle (G83). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) #8085 G83S Forward F (for M system only) Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle (G83). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (mm/min) #8086 G83S Back F (for M system only) Set the speed for returning from the hole bottom during the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle (G83). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (mm/min) l_inch Initial state (inch) Select the unit system for the progr am travel amount when the power is turned ON or reset and for position display. 0: Metric system 1: Inch system (Note) The units of the following data are converted by "#1041 I_inch". - Command unit at power ON and re set (Inch/metric command mode) But under the following conditions, the unit wi ll follow G20/G21 command modal even at reset. When reset modal is retained ("#1151 rstint"="0") When G code group 06 reset modal is retained ("#1210 RstGmd/bit5" ON) - Unit system for position di splay (counter, user parame ter, tool, work offset) - User parameter I/O unit - Parameter unit of user param eters concerning length and speed - Arc error parameter (#1084 RadErr) Decpt2 Decimal point type 2 Select the increment of position comm ands that do not have a decimal point. 0: Minimum input command unit (follows "#1015 cunit") 1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.) Dril_Z Drilling Z fixed Select a fixed cycle hole drilling axis. 0: Use an axis vertical to the selected plane as hole drilling axis. 1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling ax is regardless of the selected plane. Mpoint Ignore middle point Select how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference position return. 0: Pass the middle point designated in the program and move to the reference position. 1: Ignore the middle point design ated in the program and move stra ight to the reference position. T_Life Validate life management Select whether to use the tool life management. 0: Not use tool life management. 1: Use tool life management. T_Com2 Tool command method 2 Select how to handle the tool command in the program when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1". 0: Handle the command as group No. 1: Handle the command as tool No. (Note) In the case of the tool life management III, the program tool command will be handled as the tool No. regardless of the setting. T_sel2 Tool selection method 2 Select the tool selection method when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1". 0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group. 1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from the tools used or unused in the same group. Tcount Life management (for L system only) Select the input method when address N is omitted in inputting the data (G10 L3 command) for tool life man- agement function II. 0: Time specified input 1: Number of times specified input #1126 PB_G90 Playback G90 Select the method to command the playback travel amount in the playback editing. 0: Incremental value 1: Absolute value #1128 RstVCI Clear variables by resetting Select how to handle the common variables when resetting. 0: Common variables won't change after resetting. 1: Common variables will be cleared #100 to #199 by resetting. #1129 PwrVCl Clear variables by power-ON Select how to handle the common variables when the power is turned ON. 0: The common variables are in the same state as before turning the power OFF. 1: Common variables will be cleared #100 to #199 when the power is turned ON. #1302 AutoRP Automatic return by program restart Select the method to move to the restart position when restarting the program. 0: Move the system manually to the rest art position and then restart the program. 1: The system automatically moves to the restart position at the first acti vation after the program restarts. #8101 MACRO SINGLE Select how to control the blocks where the user macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro blocks continue. 1: Stop every block during signal block operation. #8102 COLL. ALM OFF Select the interference control to the workpiece from t he tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation. 0: An alarm will be output and operation stops when an interference is judged. 1: Changes the path to avoid interference. #8103 COLL. CHK OFF Select the interference control to the workpiece from t he tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation. 0: Performs interference check. 1: Does not perform interference check. #8105 EDIT LOCK B Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999 in the memory. 0: Editing possible 1: Prohibit the editing of above programs. When "1" is set, the file cannot be opened. #8106 G46 NO REV-ERR (for L system only) Select the control for the compensation dire ction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation). 0: An alarm will be output and operation will stop when the compensation direction is reversed (G41 -> G42' G42 -> G41). 1: An alarm won't occur when the compensation direction is reversed, and the current compensation direc- tion will be maintained. #8107 R COMPENSATION Select whether to move to the inside because of a del ay in servo response to a command during arc cutting mode. 0: Move to the inside, making the arc smaller than the command value. 1: Compensate the movement to the inside. R COMP Select Select the arc radius error compensation target. 0: Perform compensation over all axes. 1: Perform compensation axis by axis. (Note) This parameter is effective only when "#8107 R COMPENSATION" is "1". HOST LINK Select whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port. 0: Disable (Enable normal RS-232C communication.) 1: Enable (Disable normal RS-232C communication.) G71/G72 POCKET Select whether to enable the pocket machining when ther e is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) finishing program. 0: OFF 1: ON Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation. 0: All axes radius command 1: Each axis setting (follows "#1019 dia") (Note) This parameter is valid only in the milling (cylindrical/polar coordinate) interpolation mode. DECIMAL PNT-P Select whether to enable the decimal point command for G04 address P. 0: Disable 1: Enable Milling Init G16 Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset. #8113: 0, #8114: 0 ---> G17 plane #8113: 0, #8114: 1 ---> G19 plane #8113: 1, #8114: 0 ---> G16 plane #8113: 1, #8114: 1 ---> G16 plane 0: Not G16 plane 1: G16 plane (Note) This parameter is valid for t he G code system 2, 3, 4 or 5 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3", "4", "5" or "6"). Milling Init G19 Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset. #8113: 0, #8114: 0 ---> G17 plane #8113: 0, #8114: 1 ---> G19 plane #8113: 1, #8114: 0 ---> G16 plane #8113: 1, #8114: 1 ---> G16 plane 0: Not G19 plane 1: G19 plane (Note) This parameter is valid for t he G code system 2, 3, 4 or 5 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3", "4", "5" or "6"). #8115 G83/87 RAPID Select the operation upon the completion of each step in deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87). 0: Returns to R point before performing next step. 1: Returns by the amount of d (parameter sett ing) setting value before performing next step. #8116 CoordRotPara invd Select whether to enable the coordi nate rotation by the parameters. 0: Enable 1: Disable #8117 OFS Diam DESIGN Select tool radius or tool diamet er compensation amount to be specified. 0: Tool radius compensation amount 1: Tool diameter compensation amount #8119 Comp. unit switch Select the setting unit of compensation amount that has no decimal point. 0: 1mm (or 1inch) unit 1: The minimum command unit (follows "#1003 iunit") #8120 FONT SELECTION Select the font when Simplified Chinese is selected for "#1043 lang". 0: MITSUBISHI CNC GOTHIC font 1: Standard Windows font *This parameter is available for M800W only. #8121 Screen Capture Select whether to enable the screen capture function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (Screenshots are saved on USB memory or on front-side SD card) 2: Valid (Screenshots are saved on back-side SD card) (Note 1) By setting this parameter to "1" or "2", and by keeping pushing the [SHIFT] key, screen capture will be executed. (Note 2) This parameter is valid for M800S, M80, E80, and M800W/M80W equipped with non-Windows- based display. The setting value "2" (back-side SD) is valid for M800S, M80 and E80. (Note 3) If an USB memory is inserted, it takes precedence over other devices. #8122 Keep G43 MDL M-REF Select whether to keep the tool le ngth offset by high speed manual reference position return during tool length offset. 0: Will not be kept (Cancel) 1: Hold #8123 H-spd retract ON Select whether to enable hi gh-speed retract while fixed cycle for drilling is running. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8124 Mirr img at reset Select the operation type of the mirror image by paramet er setting and the mirror image by external input. 0: The current mirror image is canceled, and new mirror image will start with the machine position at reset as the mirror center. 1: The mirror center is kept to continue the mirror image. #8125 Check Scode in G84 Select how to operate when there is no S command in synchronous tapping block. 0: Use the spindle function modal value as S-command value. 1: Output a program error (P181). Disable op tone Disable operation tones when operating the keyboard/touch panel. 0: Enable the operation tones 1: Disable the operation tones R-Navi manu F coor Select the initial value of the coordinate system for a manual feed while a machining surface is selected in the R-Navi function. 0: Feature coordinate system 1: Machine coordinate system Subpro No. select Select the subprogram No. to be called preferentially in s ubprogram control. 0: Commanded program No. 1: Four-digit program No. beginning with O No. 2: Eight-digit program No. beginning with O No. (Note) The program to be called in user macro, figure rotation, macro interruption and compound type fixed cycle also follows this setting. Dwell in rev. Select the type of dwell for G04. 0: Dwell time is specified in seco nds, irrespective of the synchronous feed mode (G95) or the asynchro- nous feed mode (G94). For G04D, the dwell specified in spindle revolutions is applied. 1: Dwell time is specified in spindle revolutions while the synchronous feed mode (G95) is ON, whereas it is specified in seconds while the asynchronous feed mode (G94) is ON. High speed/accu 3 Switch to high-speed high-accuracy 3 Select whether to treat high-speed high-accuracy cont rol II command as high-speed high-accuracy control III command. 0: Treat G05P10000 as high-speed high -accuracy control II command (G05P10000). 1: Treat G05P10000 as high-speed high-accuracy control III command (G05P20000). G53.6 block stop Select whether to execute a single block stop at the co mpletion of rotation of each axis when G53.6 is given with the number of simultaneous co ntour control axes limited to 4. 0: Not execute a single block stop 1: Execute a single block stop Intrctv macro call Specify the interactive macro to call fr om the cycle of interactive cycle insertion. 0: Call standard interactive macro 1: Call interactive macro in the machining program area When a program, whose name is same as standard inte ractive macro, exists in the machining program area, the program in the machining program area is called preferentially if "1" is set to this parameter. When a program, whose name is same as standard interactive macro, does not exist in the machining pro- gram area, standard interactive macro is call ed even if "1" is set to this parameter. Email send disable E-mail sending by the email notification to operator can be disabled. 0: Enable 1: Disable G5P4 single block Single block stop is disabled during direct command mode. 0: Not disable single block stop 1: Disable single block stop #8137 T. tool shape comp Select whether to e nable the turning-tool sha pe compensation in co mpound type fixed cycl e for turning ma- chining I. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8138 Pre-compens. shape Select whether to display the pre-compensation finish shape of the turning-tool shape compensation for com- pound type fixed cycle for turning machining I in 2D graphic check. 0: Display 1: Not display #8139 TCP G0 temp.cancel Select whether to temporarily cancel the interpolation of orthogonal axes that is accompanied with the rota- tion of table, when G00 command is i ssued under tool center point control. 0: Not temporarily cancel the interpolation 1: Temporarily cancel the interpolation (Note 1) This parameter is valid for a machine equipped with a rotary axis on the table side. (Note 2) This parameter is valid when "#7908 SLCT _PRG_COORD" = 1 (when programming is done with respect to the workpi ece coordinate system). #8140 Reserve T wear com This parameter enables the tool wear compensation amounts to be reserved with the machining being per- formed. The reserved tool wear compensation values c an be written and executed using the PLC signal. With this function, the following five types of tool wear compensation amounts can be reserved:  Tool nose wear compensation amount fo r the 1st axis (normally X axis)  Tool nose wear compensation amount fo r the 2nd axis (normally Z axis)  Tool wear compensation amount for the additional axis  Tool wear compensation amount for the 2nd additional axis  Tool nose radius wear compensation amount 0: Disable the reserved memory for tool wear compensation. 1: Enable the reserved memory for tool wear compensation. #8145 Validate F1 digit Select whether to execute the F command with a 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical command. (The same value as "#1079 F1digt" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will change ac- cordingly.) 0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation) 1: 1-digit code command (with the feedrate specif ied by the parameters "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1189 sp- d_F5") #8155 Sub-pro interrupt Select the type of the user macro interrupt. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit0" will be reflecte d. When either setting changes, the other will change accordingly.) 0: The user macro interrupt of macro type 1: The user macro interrupt of sub-program type #8156 Fine thread cut E Select what is to be sp ecified with the address E. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit1" will be reflecte d. When either setting changes, the other will change accordingly.) 0: Specify the number of threads per inch for inch screw cutting. 1: Specify the precision lead for inch screw cutting. Radius comp type B (M system) / Nose R comp type B (L system) For M system Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel com- mand is operated during radius compensation. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit2" will be reflec ted. When either setting c hanges, the other will change accordingly.) 0: The processing does not handle the start-up or ca ncel command block: handle the offset vector in the direction vertical to that of the command instead. 1: The processing is executed for the intersecti on point between the command block and the next block. For L system Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel com- mands are operated during nose R or radius compensation. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit2" will be reflec ted. When either setting c hanges, the other will change accordingly.) 0: The processing does not handle the start-up or ca ncel command block: handle the offset vector in the direction vertical to that of the command instead. 1: The processing is executed for the intersecti on point between the command block and the next block. Init const sur spd Select the initial stat e after the power-ON. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit3" will be reflec ted. When either setting c hanges, the other will change accordingly.) 0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode 1: Constant surface speed control mode. Synchronous tap Select whether to use the floating tap chuck in G74 and G84 tap cycles. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit4" will be reflec ted. When either setting c hanges, the other will change accordingly.) 0: With a floating tapping chuck 1: Without a floating tapping chuck Start point alarm Select an operation when the operation start point cannot be found while moving to the next block of G117. (The same value as "#1229 set01/bit5" will be reflec ted. When either setting c hanges, the other will change accordingly.) 0: The auxiliary function is enabled after the block for the movement has finished. 1: The program error (P33) occurs. #1025 l_plane Initial plane selection Select the plane to be selected when the power is turned ON or reset. When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed (X -Y plane).e model and specifications. 1: X-Y plane (G17 command state) 2: Z-X plane (G18 command state) 3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state) #1037 cmdtyp Command type Set the G code list and compensation type for programs. 1: List1 (for M) Type I (one compensation amount for one compensation No.) 2: List1 (for M) Type II (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.) 3: List2 (for L) Type III (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.) 4: List3 (for L) Ditto 5: List4 (for special L) Ditto 6: List5 (for special L) Ditto 7: List6 (for special L) Ditto 8: List7 (for special L) Ditto 9: List8 (for M) M2 form at type Type I (one compensation amount for one compensation No.) 10: List8 (for M) M2 form at type Type II (shape and wear compensation amounts for one compensation No.) There are some items in the specific ations that can be used or cannot be used according to the value set in this parameter. The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type. (Note) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned ON. So always execute format. The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again. Setting order (1) cmdtyp changeover -> (2) Turn power ON a gain -> (3) Format -> (4 ) Turn power ON again (Note) Compensation type III can be selected for M system by setting #1046. #1073 I_Absm Initial absolute setting Select the mode (absolute or incremental) at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Incremental setting 1: Absolute setting #1074 l_Sync Initial synchronous feed Select the feedrate mode at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute) 1: Synchronous feed (feed per revolution) #1075 I_G00 Initial G00 Select the linear command mode at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state) 1: Positioning (G00 command state) #1076 Abslnc ABS/INC address (for L system only) Select the command method for the absolute and incremental commands. The absolute command/incremental command can be i ssued by using the absolute command address and incremental command address for the same axis. 0: Use G command for the absolute and incremental commands. 1: Use axis name for the absolute and incremental commands. (The axis name in "#1013 axname" will be the absolu te command, "#1014 incax" will be the incremental command.) G00Drn G00 dry run Select whether to apply dry run (feed at manual sett ing speed instead of command feedrate) to the G00 com- mand. 0: Not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate) 1: Apply to G00. (move at manual setting speed) G0lntp G00 non-interpolation Select the G00 travel path type. 0: Move linearly toward the end point. (interpolation type) 1: Move to the end point of each axis at the rapi d traverse feedrate for each axis. (non-interpolation) (Note) If this parameter is set to "1", neither of the following functions will be available: rapid traverse con- stant-gradient acceleration/decelerati on and rapid traverse constant-gra dient multi-step acceleration/decel- eration. I_G611 Initial hi-precis Select the modal state at power ON from among the following: high-accuracy control mode, high-speed high- accuracy control I mode, high-speed high-accuracy cont rol II mode or high-speed high-accuracy control III mode. 0: G08P0/G64 (cutting) mode 1: G08P1/G61.1 (high-accuracy control) mode 2: G05.1Q1 (high-speed high-accuracy control I) mode 3: G05P10000 (high-speed high-accuracy control II) mode 4: G05P20000 (high-speed high-accuracy control III) mode Hold intr amount Select whether to clear or hold the interruption amount after the "NC reset 1 (or 2)" signal is ON when the manual ABS switch is OFF. 0: Clear (Reset the coordinate deviation due to the interruption) 1: Hold T meas. in mirror Select the measurement operation fo r mirror-imaged axes during the manual tool length measurement 1 or 2. 0: Set the measurement result as the tool length. 1: Reverse the sign of measurement result and set it as the tool length. Stroke_prechkTYPE Select when the stroke limit before travel function should determine a command as entering the forbidden area set by the stored stroke limit. 0: Operation stops by the stroke check before travel function only when the end point of the command is in the forbidden area. 1: Operation stops by the stroke check before travel function when the command path passes through the forbidden area. For a command other than given below, the operation stops only when the end point is in the forbidden area. Corresponding commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G28, G30, G33 and G53 #9001 DATA IN PORT Select the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters. 1: ch1 2: ch2 #9002 DATA IN DEV. Select the device No. for inputting the data. (The de vice Nos. correspond to t he input/output device param- eters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 #9003 DATA OUT PORT Select the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters. 1: ch1 2: ch2 #9004 DATA OUT DEV. Select the device No. for outputting the data. (The de vice Nos. correspond to the input/output device param- eters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 #9005 TAPE MODE PORT Select the input port for running with the tape mode. 1: ch1 2: ch2 #9006 TAPE MODE DEV. Select the device No. to be run wit h the tape mode. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 #9007 MACRO PRINT PORT Select the output port used for th e user macro DPRINT command. 1: ch1 2: ch2 9: Memory card #9008 MACRO PRINT DEV. Select the device No. used for the DPRINT command. (T he device Nos. correspond to the input/output de- vice parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 #9009 PLC IN/OUT PORT Select the port for inputting/ outputting various data with PLC. 1: ch1 2: ch2 #9010 PLC IN/OUT DEV. Select the device No. used for the PLC input/output. (T he device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 REMOTE PRG IN PORT Select the port for inpu tting remote programs. 1: ch1 2: ch2 REMOTE PRG IN DEV. Select the device No. used to input remote programs. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 EXT UNIT PORT Select the port for communication with an external unit. 1: ch1 2: ch2 EXT UNIT DEV. Select the unit No. used for communication with an exte rnal unit (The device Nos. correspond to the input/ output device parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 HANDY TERMINAL PORT Select the port for communication with a handy terminal. 1: ch1 2: ch2 HANDY TERMINAL DEV. Select the device No. used for communication with a handy terminal. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 M2 macro converter Not used. MACRO PRINT FILE Set the file name to save the out put data to a memory card with the DRPNT command for the user macro. If this parameter is not set, the data will be output under the following name. dprt$-MMDDhhmmssff $ is the part system No. in which DPRNT is commanded, MMDDhhmmssff is the current date. (MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second, ff: millisecond) (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#9007 Macro print directory" is set to "9". ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) DEV0 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. ---Setting range--- Use three or less characters consisting of alphabet characters , numerals and symbols. #9102 DEV0 BAUD RATE Select the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 #9103 DEV0 STOP BIT Select the stop bi t length used in th e start-stop system. Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 #9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK Select whether to add a pari ty check bit to the data. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output #9105 DEV0 EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data . This parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity #9106 DEV0 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 #9107 DEV0 TERMINATR TYP Select the code to terminate data reading. 0, 3: EOR 1, 2: EOB or EOR #9108 DEV0 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set. 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method DEV0 DC CODE PRTY Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected. 0: Not add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 13H) 1: Add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 93H) DEV0 DC2/4 OUTPUT Select the DC code handling when ou tputting data to the output device. DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes DEV0 CR OUTPUT Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 0: Not add 1: Add DEV0 EIA OUTPUT Select ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EI A codes are identified automatically. 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output DEV0 FEED CHR. Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data duri ng tape output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (characters) DEV0 PARITY V Select whether to perform the parity check for the num ber of characters in a block at the input of data. At the output of data, the numb er of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 0: Not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check DEV0 TIME-OUT (sec) Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30 (s) DEV0 DR OFF Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode. 0: Enable 1: Disable DEV0 DATA ASCII Select the code of the output data. 0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.) 1: ASCII code DEV0 INPUT TYPE Select the mode for input (verification). 0: Standard input (Data from the very firs t EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. #9120 DEV0 OUT BUFFER Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port. If the output device has a transmission error (overrun e rror), decrease the buffer size with this parameter. If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size. 0: 250 bytes (default) 1: 1 byte 2: 4 bytes 3: 8 bytes 4: 16 bytes 5: 64 bytes #9121 DEV0 EIA CODE [ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " [ ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9122 DEV0 EIA CODE ] Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " ] ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9123 DEV0 EIA CODE # Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "#". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9124 DEV0 EIA CODE * Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "*". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9125 DEV0 EIA CODE = Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "=". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9126 DEV0 EIA CODE: Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code ":". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV0 EIA CODE $ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "$". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV0 EIA CODE ! Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "!". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV1 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. ---Setting range--- Use three or less characters consisting of alphabet characters , numerals and symbols. DEV1 BAUD RATE Select the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 DEV1 STOP BIT Select the stop bit length us ed in the start-stop system. Refer to "#9204 DEV1 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 DEV1 PARITY CHECK Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output DEV1 EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. Th is parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity #9206 DEV1 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9204 DEV1 PARITY CHECK". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 #9207 DEV1 TERMINATR TYP Select the code to terminate data reading. 0, 3: EOR 1, 2: EOB or EOR * When M800W display side serial port is selected 0: No terminator 1: EOR 2: EOB 3: EOB or EOR #9208 DEV1 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set. 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method #9209 DEV1 DC CODE PRTY Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected. 0: Not add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 13H) 1: Add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 93H) #9211 DEV1 DC2/4 OUTPUT Select the DC code handling when ou tputting data to the output device. DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes #9212 DEV1 CR OUTPUT Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 0: Not add 1: Add #9213 DEV1 EIA OUTPUT Select ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically. 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output #9214 DEV1 FEED CHR. Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (characters) DEV1 PARITY V Select whether to perform the parity check for the num ber of characters in a block at the input of data. At the output of data, the numb er of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 0: Not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check DEV1 TIME-OUT (sec) Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30 (s) DEV1 DR OFF Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode. 0: Enable 1: Disable DEV1 DATA ASCII Select the code of the output data. 0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.) 1: ASCII code DEV1 INPUT TYPE Select the mode for input (verification). 0: Standard input (Data from the very firs t EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. DEV1 OUT BUFFER Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port. If the output device has a transmission error (overrun error), decrease the buffer size with this parameter. If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size. 0: 250 bytes (default) 1: 1 byte 2: 4 bytes 3: 8 bytes 4: 16 bytes 5: 64 bytes DEV1 EIA CODE [ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " [ ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV1 EIA CODE ] Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " ] ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9223 DEV1 EIA CODE # Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "#". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9224 DEV1 EIA CODE * Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "*". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9225 DEV1 EIA CODE = Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "=". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9226 DEV1 EIA CODE: Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code ":". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9227 DEV1 EIA CODE $ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "$". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9228 DEV1 EIA CODE ! Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "!". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9301 DEV2 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. ---Setting range--- Use three or less characters consisting of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols. DEV2 BAUD RATE Select the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 DEV2 STOP BIT Select the stop bit length us ed in the start-stop system. Refer to "#9304 DEV2 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 DEV2 PARITY CHECK Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output DEV2 EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. Th is parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity DEV2 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9304 DEV2 PARITY CHECK". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 DEV2 TERMINATR TYP Select the code to terminate data reading. 0, 3: EOR 1, 2: EOB or EOR * When M800W display side serial port is selected 0: No terminator 1: EOR 2: EOB 3: EOB or EOR #9308 DEV2 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set. 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method #9309 DEV2 DC CODE PRTY Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected. 0: Not add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 13H) 1: Add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 93H) #9311 DEV2 DC2/4 OUTPUT Select the DC code handling when ou tputting data to the output device. DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes #9312 DEV2 CR OUTPUT Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 0: Not add 1: Add #9313 DEV2 EIA OUTPUT Select ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically. 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output #9314 DEV2 FEED CHR. Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (characters) #9315 DEV2 PARITY V Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of data. At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 0: Not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check #9316 DEV2 TIME-OUT (sec) Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30 (s) #9317 DEV2 DR OFF Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode. 0: Enable 1: Disable #9318 DEV2 DATA ASCII Select the code of the output data. 0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output par ameter is set up.) 1: ASCII code DEV2 INPUT TYPE Select the mode for input (verification). 0: Standard input (Data from the very firs t EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. DEV2 OUT BUFFER Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port. If the output device has a transmission error (overrun error), decrease the buffer size with this parameter. If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size. 0: 250 bytes (default) 1: 1 byte 2: 4 bytes 3: 8 bytes 4: 16 bytes 5: 64 bytes DEV2 EIA CODE [ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " [ ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV2 EIA CODE ] Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " ] ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV2 EIA CODE # Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "#". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV2 EIA CODE * Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "*". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV2 EIA CODE = Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "=". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV2 EIA CODE: Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code ":". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9327 DEV2 EIA CODE $ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "$". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9328 DEV2 EIA CODE ! Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "!". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9401 DEV3 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. ---Setting range--- Use three or less characters consisting of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols. #9402 DEV3 BAUD RATE Select the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 #9403 DEV3 STOP BIT Select the stop bi t length used in th e start-stop system. Refer to "#9404 DEV3 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 #9404 DEV3 PARITY CHECK Select whether to add a pari ty check bit to the data. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output #9405 DEV3 EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data . This parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity DEV3 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9404 DEV3 PARITY CHECK". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 DEV3 TERMINATR TYP Select the code to terminate data reading. 0, 3: EOR 1, 2: EOB or EOR DEV3 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set. 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method DEV3 DC CODE PRTY Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected. 0: Not add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 13H) 1: Add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 93H) DEV3 DC2/4 OUTPUT Select the DC code handling when ou tputting data to the output device. DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes DEV3 CR OUTPUT Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 0: Not add 1: Add DEV3 EIA OUTPUT Select ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EI A codes are identified automatically. 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output DEV3 FEED CHR. Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data duri ng tape output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (characters) DEV3 PARITY V Select whether to perform the parity check for the num ber of characters in a block at the input of data. At the output of data, the numb er of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 0: Not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check #9416 DEV3 TIME-OUT (sec) Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30 (s) #9417 DEV3 DR OFF Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode. 0: Enable 1: Disable #9418 DEV3 DATA ASCII Select the code of the output data. 0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output par ameter is set up.) 1: ASCII code #9419 DEV3 INPUT TYPE Select the mode for i nput (verification). 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. #9420 DEV3 OUT BUFFER Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port. If the output device has a transmission error (overrun e rror), decrease the buffer size with this parameter. If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size. 0: 250 bytes (default) 1: 1 byte 2: 4 bytes 3: 8 bytes 4: 16 bytes 5: 64 bytes #9421 DEV3 EIA CODE [ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " [ ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9422 DEV3 EIA CODE ] Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " ] ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9423 DEV3 EIA CODE # Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "#". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV3 EIA CODE * Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "*". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV3 EIA CODE = Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "=". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV3 EIA CODE: Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code ":". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV3 EIA CODE $ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "$". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV3 EIA CODE ! Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "!". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV4 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. ---Setting range--- Use three or less characters consisting of alphabet characters , numerals and symbols. DEV4 BAUD RATE Select the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 #9503 DEV4 STOP BIT Select the stop bi t length used in th e start-stop system. Refer to "#9504 DEV4 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 #9504 DEV4 PARITY CHECK Select whether to add a pari ty check bit to the data. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output #9505 DEV4 EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data . This parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity #9506 DEV4 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9504 DEV4 PARITY CHECK". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 #9507 DEV4 TERMINATR TYP Select the code to terminate data reading. 0, 3: EOR 1, 2: EOB or EOR #9508 DEV4 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set. 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method #9509 DEV4 DC CODE PRTY Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected. 0: Not add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 13H) 1: Add parity to DC code. (DC3 = 93H) DEV4 DC2/4 OUTPUT Select the DC code handling when ou tputting data to the output device. DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes DEV4 CR OUTPUT Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 0: Not add 1: Add DEV4 EIA OUTPUT Select ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EI A codes are identified automatically. 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output DEV4 FEED CHR. Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data duri ng tape output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (characters) DEV4 PARITY V Select whether to perform the parity check for the num ber of characters in a block at the input of data. At the output of data, the numb er of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 0: Not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check DEV4 TIME-OUT (sec) Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30 (s) DEV4 DR OFF Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode. 0: Enable 1: Disable DEV4 DATA ASCII Select the code of the output data. 0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.) 1: ASCII code DEV4 INPUT TYPE Select the mode for input (verification). 0: Standard input (Data from the very firs t EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. #9520 DEV4 OUT BUFFER Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port. If the output device has a transmission error (overrun e rror), decrease the buffer size with this parameter. If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size. 0: 250 bytes (default) 1: 1 byte 2: 4 bytes 3: 8 bytes 4: 16 bytes 5: 64 bytes #9521 DEV4 EIA CODE [ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " [ ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9522 DEV4 EIA CODE ] Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code " ] ". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9523 DEV4 EIA CODE # Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "#". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9524 DEV4 EIA CODE * Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "*". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9525 DEV4 EIA CODE = Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code "=". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #9526 DEV4 EIA CODE: Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicat e the existing EIA codes, for the special code ":". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV4 EIA CODE $ Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "$". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) DEV4 EIA CODE ! Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "!". When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code, not included in EIA, is specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #1063 mandog Manual dog-type Select the manual reference position return method for t he second return (after the coordinate system is es- tablished) and later. The initial reference position return after the power ON is performed with dog-type return, and the coordinate system will be established. (This setting is not required when the absolute position detection is used.) 0: High speed return 1: Dog-type #8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the co ntrol axis from the control target. 0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target. #8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select whether to enable the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205. 0: Enable 1: Disable #8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL When the simple absolute position method ("#2049 type" is "9 ") is selected, the stored stroke limits I, II (or IIB) and IB can be disabled until the first reference posit ion return is executed after the power is turned ON. 0: Enable (according to #8202) 1: Temporarily cancel (Note) "#8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL" affe cts all the stored stroke limits. #8204 OT-CHECK-N Set the coordinates of the (-) direction in the movable ran ge of the stored stroke limit II or the lower limit co- ordinates of the prohibited ra nge of stored stroke limit IIB. If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid. If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, th e prohibited range will be between two points even when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. When II is select ed, the entire range will be prohibited if #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8205 OT-CHECK-P Set the coordinates of the (+) direction in the movable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return). Set with coordinates in the ba sic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8207 G76/87 IGNR (for M system only) Select whether to enable the shift operatio n at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring). 0: Shift effective 1: No shift G76/87 (-) (for M system only) Select the shift direction at G76 and G87. 0: Shift to (+) direction 1: Shift to (-) direction G60 SHIFT (for M system only) Set the last positioning direct ion and distance for a G60 (unidirectional positioning) command. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) OT INSIDE Select whether the stored stoke limit function set by #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to the inside or outside of the specified range. 0: Inhibits outside area (Select stored stroke limit II.) 1: Inhibits inside area (Sel ect stored stroke limit IIB.) MIRR. IMAGE Select whether to enable the parameter mirror image function. 0: Disable 1: Enable Rotation axis type Select the rotation type (short-cut valid/invalid) or lin ear type (workpiece coordinat e linear type/all coordinate linear type). This parameter is enabled only when "#1017 rot" is set to "1". (Note) 0: Short-cut invalid 1: Short-cut valid 2: Workpiece coordinate linear type 3: All coordinate linear type (Note) The movement method is as follo ws by the specified rotation axis type. <Workpiece coor dinate value> 0, 1: Display range 0° to 359.999° 2, 3: Display range 0° to ±99999.999° <Machine coordinate value/relative position> 0, 1, 2: Display range 0° to 359.999° 3: Display range 0° to ±99999.999° <ABS command> 0: The incremental amount from the end point to the curre nt position is divided by 360, and the axis moves by the remainder amount according to the sign. 1: Moves with a short-cut to the end point. 2, 3: In the same manner as the normal linear axis, mo ves according to the sign by the amount obtained by subtracting the current position from the end point. <INC command> 0, 1, 2, 3: Moves in the direction of the comman ded sign by the commanded incremental amount starting at the current position. <Reference position return> 0, 1, 2: The movement to the middle point ap plies to the ABS command or the INC command. Returns with movement within 360 degrees from the middle point to reference position. 3: The movement to the middle point applies to the ABS command or the INC command. Moves and returns in the reference position direction fo r the difference from the current position to the ref- erence position. #8215 TLM std length Set the TLM standard length. TLM standard length is the distance from a tool repl acement point (reference position) to the measurement basic point (surface) which is used to measure the tool length. (The same value as "#2016 tlml+" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will change ac- cordingly.) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8216 Type in G28 return Select the performance after establishing the refer ence position in reference position return command. 0: Moves to the reference position. 1: Won't move to the reference position. #8217 Check start point Set a drawing start position in graphic check of each axis. Set a distance from actual machine position by an incremental value. When "0" is set, an actual machine position will be regarded as a start point in graphic check. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8218 Dir cmd retrct amt Set in which direction and how much the tool escapes when the operation is halted during direct command mode. (Radius value) The tool does not escape when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8219 Hob retract amount 1 Set the retract amount using the radius value when the H ob retract amount selection signal is OFF. (Radius value) Retract is carried out in the negative direction if a negative value is set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8220 Hob retract amount 2 Set the retract amount using the radius value when the Hob retract amount selection signal is ON. (Radius value) Retract is carried out in the negative direction if a negative value is set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8221 Hob retract speed Set the retract speed during hobbing. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) #8224 Posn display range Current position display range Select the display range of the current position. 0: 0 to 359.999 deg 1: -99999.999 to 99999.999 deg #8225 Wk coord at R ret. Workpiece coordinate position displayed righ t after automatic reference position return Select whether to apply a range of 0 to 360 degrees to the workpiece coordinate position displayed right after automatic reference position return if the said pos ition is out of the range of 0 to 360 degrees. 0: Display the position in a range of 0 to 360 degrees 1: Not display the position in a range of 0 to 360 degrees Wk position check Workpiece position check Select whether to check a difference of workpiece coordinate position between when NC is reset and when program operation is started, when both High-speed simple program check mode ON (X712) and High- speed simple program check: Coordinate position check ON (X713) are set to ON. 0: Disable the check 1: Enable the check Machine posn check Machine position check Select whether to check a difference of machine coordinate command position between when NC is reset and when program operation is started, when both High-speed simple program check mode ON (X712) and High-speed simple program check: Coordinate position check ON (X713) are set to ON. 0: Disable the check 1: Enable the check #1926 Global IP address IP address Set the main CPU's IP address. Set the NC IP address seen from an external source. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1927 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask Set the subnet mask for the IP address. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1928 Global Gateway Gateway Set the IP address for the gateway. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1934 Local IP address Set the HMI side CPU's IP address. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1935 Local Subnet mask Set the HMI side CPU's subnet mask. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1937 NET1 IP Address NET1 IP address Specify the IP address of the file server (NFS server). If "0.0.0.0" is set in this parameter, net work drive (NET1) cannot be used (disabled). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #1938 NET2 IP Address NET2 IP address Specify the IP address of the file server (NFS server). If "0.0.0.0" is set in this parameter, net work drive (NET2) cannot be used (disabled). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #1939 NET3 IP Address NET3 IP address Specify the IP address of the file server (NFS server). If "0.0.0.0" is set in this parameter, net work drive (NET3) cannot be used (disabled). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #1940 NET4 IP Address NET4 IP address Specify the IP address of the file server (NFS server). If "0.0.0.0" is set in this parameter, net work drive (NET4) cannot be used (disabled). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Local time compen Local time correction Files stored on file server are managed based on the system time (GMT: Greenwich Mean Time). This parameter is used to specify the correction time for converting the time obtained through custom API library from the system time basis to local time basis. When this parameter is set to 0, the NC determines the correction time based on the language selected by "#1043 lang". ---Setting range--- -12 to 12 [hour] Intra IP address IP address on non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side Specify the IP address on the non-Wi ndows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with the network rules in the connection environment. Intra Subnet mask Subnet mask on non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side Specify the IP address of subnet mask on the non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with the network rules in the connection environment. Intra Gateway Gateway on non- Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side Specify the gateway IP address on the non- Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with the network rules in the connection environment. IP addr auto set The IP address is automatically assigned from the server. 0: Manual setting 1: Automatic setting (Note) When the automatic setting is selected, "#11005 PC IP address, PC Subnet, PC Gateway" will be in- valid. Host No. Select the No. of the host to be used from host 1 to host 4. ---Setting range--- 1 to 4: Host No. Host1 host name Set the host computer name. This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the hos t computer on the network. Set the host computer's name (name registered in C:\wi ndows\hosts) or the IP address. <Setting example> For host name: mspc160 For IP address: 150.40.0.111 (Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is no t carried out correctly. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host1 user name Set the user name when logging into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less #9713 Host1 password Set the password when logging into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less #9714 Host1 directory Set the directory name of the host computer. The directory released to the client ( NC unit) with the host com puter's server is handled as the root directory by the NC unit. ---Setting range--- 31 characters (alphanumeric) or less #9715 Host1 host type Select the type of the host computer. 0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment 1: UNIX 2: PC (DOS) (Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid. - #9716 Wrd pos: name - #9717 Wrd pos: size - #9718 Wrd pos: Dir - #9719 Wrd pos: cmnt - #9720 Wrd num: cmnt #9716 Host 1 Wrd pos: name Set the file name disp lay position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is ex- ecuted. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9717 Host 1 Wrd pos: size Set the size display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9718 Host 1 Wrd pos: Dir Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is execut- ed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 1 Wrd pos: cmnt Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp com- mand "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 1 Wrd num: cmnt Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 1 no total siz Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1 when displaying the file list. If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1". 0: Display 1: Not display Host2 host name Set the host computer name. This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the hos t computer on the network. Set the host computer's name (name registered in C:\wi ndows\hosts) or the IP address. <Setting example> For host name: mspc160 For IP address: 150.40.0.111 (Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is no t carried out correctly. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host2 user name Set the user name when logging into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host2 password Set the password when loggi ng into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host2 directory Set the directory name of the host computer. The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handl ed as the root directory by the NC unit. ---Setting range--- 31 characters (alphanumeric) or less #9735 Host2 host type Select the type of the host computer. 0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment 1: UNIX 2: PC (DOS) (Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid. - #9736 Wrd pos: name - #9737 Wrd pos: size - #9738 Wrd pos: Dir - #9739 Wrd pos: cmnt - #9740 Wrd num: cmnt #9736 Host 2 Wrd pos: name Set the file name disp lay position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is ex- ecuted. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9737 Host 2 Wrd pos: size Set the size display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9738 Host 2 Wrd pos: Dir Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is execut- ed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9739 Host 2 Wrd pos: cmnt Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed when the ftp com- mand "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9740 Host 2 Wrd num: cmnt Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 2 no total siz Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1 when displaying the file list. If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1". 0: Display 1: Not display Host3 host name Set the host computer name. This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the hos t computer on the network. Set the host computer's name (name registered in C:\wi ndows\hosts) or the IP address. <Setting example> For host name: mspc160 For IP address: 150.40.0.111 (Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is no t carried out correctly. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host3 user name Set the user name when logging into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host3 password Set the password when loggi ng into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host3 directory Set the directory name of the host computer. The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handl ed as the root directory by the NC unit. ---Setting range--- 31 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host3 host type Select the type of the host computer. 0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment 1: UNIX 2: PC (DOS) (Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid. - #9756 Wrd pos: name - #9757 Wrd pos: size - #9758 Wrd pos: Dir - #9759 Wrd pos: cmnt - #9760 Wrd num: cmnt Host 3 Wrd pos: name Set the file name display position (nth word from left ) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is ex- ecuted. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9757 Host 3 Wrd pos: size Set the size display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9758 Host 3 Wrd pos: Dir Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed w hen the ftp command "dir" is execut- ed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9759 Host 3 Wrd pos: cmnt Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed when the ftp com- mand "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9760 Host 3 Wrd num: cmnt Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9761 Host 3 no total siz Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1 when displaying the file list. If there are many files in the dire ctory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1". 0: Display 1: Not display #9771 Host4 host name Set the host computer name. This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host computer's name (name registered in C:\windows\hosts) or the IP address. <Setting example> For host name: mspc160 For IP address: 150.40.0.111 (Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less #9772 Host4 user name Set the user name when logging into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host4 password Set the password when loggi ng into the host computer. ---Setting range--- 15 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host4 directory Set the directory name of the host computer. The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handl ed as the root directory by the NC unit. ---Setting range--- 31 characters (alphanumeric) or less Host4 host type Select the type of the host computer. 0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment 1: UNIX 2: PC (DOS) (Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid. - #9776 Wrd pos: name - #9777 Wrd pos: size - #9778 Wrd pos: Dir - #9779 Wrd pos: cmnt - #9780 Wrd num: cmnt Host 4 Wrd pos: name Set the file name display position (nth word from left ) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is ex- ecuted. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 4 Wrd pos: size Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value Host 4 Wrd pos: Dir Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ft p command "dir" is execut- ed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9779 Host 4 Wrd pos: cmnt Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth wo rd from left) of the list displayed when the ftp com- mand "dir" is executed. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9780 Host 4 Wrd num: cmnt Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment. (Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 0: Default value #9781 Host 4 no total siz Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1 when displaying the file list. If there are many files in the dire ctory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1". 0: Display 1: Not display #9800 MES-IF DB IP addr DB IP address Set the IP address of the connection destination database. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9801 MES-IF DB Port No DB PORT No. Set the service port No. of the connection destination database connector. ---Setting range--- 1024 to 65535 #9802 MES-IF DB timeout DB communication time-out (sec) Set the communication timeout time (in seconds) with t he connection destination database. When "0" is set, the time will be regarded as 60 seconds. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3600 #9803 MES-IF DB Type DB type Select the type of the c onnection destination database. 0: Oracle or none specified 1: Microsoft SQL Server 2: Microsoft Access ---Setting range--- 0 to 2 #9804 MES-IF DB Name Database name Set the name of the connection destination database. ---Setting range--- Up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters and '_' (underscore) #9805 MES-IF DB User User name Set the user name for connecting the database. (The omission of the user name is possibl e in MS Access. Enter "0" if omitted.) ---Setting range--- Up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters and '_' (underscore) MES-IF DB Password Password Set the password for the user name. (The omission of the user name is possible in MS Access. Enter "0" if omitted.) ---Setting range--- Up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters and '_' (underscore) MES-IF DB Table DB table name Set the table name registered by the registration functi on of each database. Register the table name to which the following suffix is added in the database. _FIN: Machining information database registration _ALM: Alarm information database registration _USR: User arbitrary information database registration ---Setting range--- Up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters and '_' (underscore) IP Filter for LAN1 Select whether to pass or reject access from an IP address in the range specified in the LAN1 network. When not using IP address filtering, enter "0". 0: Disable the filtering function 1: Pass 2: Reject StartFiltIP LAN1-1 Specify the starting IP address of the 1s t address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN1-1 Specify the ending IP address of the 1st address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN1-2 Specify the starting IP address of the 2n d address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN1-2 Specify the ending IP address of the 2nd address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN1-3 Specify the starting IP address of the 3rd address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN1-3 Specify the ending IP address of the 3rd address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN1-4 Specify the starting IP address of the 4t h address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9818 EndFilterIP LAN1-4 Specify the ending IP address of the 4th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9819 StartFiltIP LAN1-5 Specify the starting IP address of the 5th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9820 EndFilterIP LAN1-5 Specify the ending IP address of the 5th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9821 StartFiltIP LAN1-6 Specify the starting IP address of the 6th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9822 EndFilterIP LAN1-6 Specify the ending IP address of the 6th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9823 StartFiltIP LAN1-7 Specify the starting IP address of the 7th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9824 EndFilterIP LAN1-7 Specify the ending IP address of the 7th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9825 StartFiltIP LAN1-8 Specify the starting IP address of the 8th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9826 EndFilterIP LAN1-8 Specify the ending IP address of the 8th address group to be filtered in LAN1. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9830 IP Filter for LAN2 Select whether to pass or reject access from an IP address in the range specified in the LAN2 network. When not using IP address filtering, enter "0". 0: Disable the filtering function 1: Pass 2: Reject #9831 StartFiltIP LAN2-1 Specify the starting IP address of the 1st address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-1 Specify the ending IP address of the 1st address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN2-2 Specify the starting IP address of the 2n d address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-2 Specify the ending IP address of the 2nd address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN2-3 Specify the starting IP address of the 3rd address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-3 Specify the ending IP address of the 3rd address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN2-4 Specify the starting IP address of the 4t h address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-4 Specify the ending IP address of the 4th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN2-5 Specify the starting IP address of the 5t h address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-5 Specify the ending IP address of the 5th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 StartFiltIP LAN2-6 Specify the starting IP address of the 6t h address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 EndFilterIP LAN2-6 Specify the ending IP address of the 6th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9843 StartFiltIP LAN2-7 Specify the starting IP address of the 7th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9844 EndFilterIP LAN2-7 Specify the ending IP address of the 7th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9845 StartFiltIP LAN2-8 Specify the starting IP address of the 8th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #9846 EndFilterIP LAN2-8 Specify the ending IP address of the 8th address group to be filtered in LAN2. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #11005 PC IP address IP address setting Set the IP address of the display unit or the PC in which machining programs are stored (or the IP address of the IPC for M80). Set the IP address of the display unit which is powered OFF with the Auto power OFF function. When the 3D machine interference check function is enabl ed, set the IP address of the display unit to be used for the 3D machine interference check (for M800W only). (Note) When "0.0.0.0" is entered, "192.168.100.2" is automatically assigned. PC Subnet Set the subnet mask for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored. PC Gateway Set the gateway for the disp lay unit or PC in which machining programs are stored. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 BAUD RATE Select the rate at which data is transferred. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 8: 38400 STOP BIT Select the stop bit length us ed in the start-stop system. Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE". At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted for the parity check. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 PARITY EFFECTIVE Select whether to add the parity bit to the data. The parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit. ON 1character OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output 1: Add a parity bit at the input/output EVEN PARITY Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. Th is parameter is ignored when no parity is added. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE". 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 (NC connection not supported) 3: 8 HAND SHAKE Select the transmission control method. "3" (DC code method) should be set for computer link B. 0: No control 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC code method #9607 TIME-OUT SET Set the time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be detected. "0" means infinite time-out. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (1/10s) #9608 DATA CODE Set the code to be used for the data description. Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE". 0: ASCII code 1: ISO code #9609 LINK PARAM. 1 bit1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN Select whether to output the DC1 code after the NAK or SYN code is output. 0: Not output the DC1 code. 1: Output the DC1 code. bit7: Enable/disable resetting Select whether to enable the resetting in the computer link. 0: Enable 1: Disable #9610 LINK PARAM. 2 bit2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code). Select whether to add an even parity to the control co de, in accordance with the I/O device specifications. 0: Not add a parity bit to the control code 1: Add a parity bit to the control code bit3: Parity V Select whether to enable checking of parity V in one block at the input of the data. 0: Disable 1: Enable #9611 Link PARAM. 3 Not used. Set to "0". #9612 Link PARAM. 4 Not used. Set to "0". #9613 Link PARAM. 5 Not used. Set to "0". #9614 START CODE Select the code used to command the first transfer of file data. This parameter is used for a sp ecific user. Normally set "0". 0: DC1 (11H) 1: BEL (07H) CTRL. CODE OUT bit0: NAK output Select whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B. 0: Not output the NAK code 1: Output the NAK code. bit1: SYN output Select whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B. 0: Not output the SYN code. 1: Output the SYN code. bit3: DC3 output Select whether to send the DC3 code to the host when the communication ends in computer link B. 0: Not output the DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3 code. CTRL. INTERVAL Not used. Set to "0". WAIT TIME Not used. Set to "0". PACKET LENGTH Not used. Set to "0". BUFFER SIZE Not used. Set to "0". START SIZE Not used. Set to "0". DC1 OUT SIZE Not used. Set to "0". POLLING TIMER Not used. Set to "0". TRANS. WAIT TMR Not used. Set to "0". RETRY COUNTER Not used. Set to "0". e Location Parameters #8880 Subpro stor D0: dev If ",D1" to ",D4" is designated in a subprogram call, t he called program will be searched from the storage (de- vice and directory) set by this parameter. (Example) When "M98 P (program No.), D0" is comma nded, the device and directory below will be searched. [Device] "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" [Directory] "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found, a program error will occur. (Note 2) If there is no designation of D0 to D4, se arch is done according to the settings #8890 to #8894. (Note 3) The setting of G (HD) is available for M 800W/M80W equipped with the Windows-based display unit, or for M80 when a program stored in the IPC is run on the NC connecte d to the same network. G (HD) is not available for M800W/M80W equipped with the non-Windows-based display unit, or for E80. ---Setting range--- M: Memory G: HD R: Memory card D: Data server N: USB Memory #8881 Subpro stor D0: dir Select the storage destination (d irectory) for the subprogram. When D0 is designated at a subprogram ca ll, the subprogram to be called wil l be searched from the directory selected with this parameter. Refer to "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev". ---Setting range--- Directory 48 characters #8882 Subpro stor D1: dev If ",D1" to ",D4" is designated in a subprogram call, t he called program will be searched from the storage (de- vice and directory) set by this parameter. (Example) When "M98 P (program No.), D0" is comma nded, the device and directory below will be searched. [Device] "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" [Directory] "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found, a program error will occur. (Note 2) If there is no designation of D0 to D4, se arch is done according to the settings #8890 to #8894. (Note 3) The setting of G (HD) is available for M 800W/M80W equipped with the Windows-based display unit, or for M80 when a program stored in the IPC is run on the NC connecte d to the same network. G (HD) is not available for M800W/M80W equipped with the non-Windows-based display unit, or for E80. ---Setting range--- M: Memory G: HD R: Memory card D: Data server N: USB Memory #8883 Subpro stor D1: dir Select the storage destination (d irectory) for the subprogram. When D1 is designated at a subprogram ca ll, the subprogram to be called wil l be searched from the directory selected with this parameter. Refer to "#8882 Subpro stor D1: dev". ---Setting range--- Directory 48 characters Subpro stor D2: dev If ",D1" to ",D4" is designated in a subprogram call, th e called program will be searched from the storage (de- vice and directory) set by this parameter. (Example) When "M98 P (program No.), D0" is commanded, the device and directory below will be searched. [Device] "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" [Directory] "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found, a program error will occur. (Note 2) If there is no designation of D0 to D4, search is done according to the settings #8890 to #8894. (Note 3) The setting of G (HD) is available for M8 00W/M80W equipped with the Windows-based display unit, or for M80 when a program stored in the IPC is run on the NC connected to the same network. G (HD) is not available for M800W/M80W equipped wit h the non-Windows-based display unit, or for E80. ---Setting range--- M: Memory G: HD R: Memory card D: Data server N: USB Memory Subpro stor D2: dir Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram. When D2 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the directory selected with this parameter. Refer to "#8884 Subpro stor D2: dev". ---Setting range--- Directory 48 characters Subpro stor D3: dev If ",D1" to ",D4" is designated in a subprogram call, th e called program will be searched from the storage (de- vice and directory) set by this parameter. (Example) When "M98 P (program No.), D0" is commanded, the device and directory below will be searched. [Device] "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" [Directory] "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found, a program error will occur. (Note 2) If there is no designation of D0 to D4, search is done according to the settings #8890 to #8894. (Note 3) The setting of G (HD) is available for M8 00W/M80W equipped with the Windows-based display unit, or for M80 when a program stored in the IPC is run on the NC connected to the same network. G (HD) is not available for M800W/M80W equipped wit h the non-Windows-based display unit, or for E80. ---Setting range--- M: Memory G: HD R: Memory card D: Data server N: USB Memory Subpro stor D3: dir Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram. When D3 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the directory selected with this parameter. Refer to "#8886 Subpro stor D3: dev". ---Setting range--- Directory 48 characters #8888 Subpro stor D4: dev If ",D1" to ",D4" is designated in a subprogram call, t he called program will be searched from the storage (de- vice and directory) set by this parameter. (Example) When "M98 P (program No.), D0" is comma nded, the device and directory below will be searched. [Device] "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" [Directory] "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found, a program error will occur. (Note 2) If there is no designation of D0 to D4, se arch is done according to the settings #8890 to #8894. (Note 3) The setting of G (HD) is available for M 800W/M80W equipped with the Windows-based display unit, or for M80 when a program stored in the IPC is run on the NC connecte d to the same network. G (HD) is not available for M800W/M80W equipped with the non-Windows-based display unit, or for E80. ---Setting range--- M: Memory G: HD R: Memory card D: Data server N: USB Memory #8889 Subpro stor D4: dir Select the storage destination (d irectory) for the subprogram. When D4 is designated at a subprogram ca ll, the subprogram to be called wil l be searched from the directory selected with this parameter. Refer to "#8888 Subpro stor D4: dev". ---Setting range--- Directory 48 characters #8890-8894 Subpro srch odr D0 to D4 Specify the search order of D0 to D4 (devices and directories storing subprograms) when ",D0" to ",D4" are omitted from subprogram call. Search is performed in the order from 1 to 5. When "0" is set, the device is excluded from search. If the same value is set for more than one device, search is carried out in the order from the one with a smaller parameter number. If "0" is set for all the devices, the memory is searched. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5 P0 (for L system only) Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate of wo rkpiece by the basic machine co ordinate system. (radius value) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P1 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P2 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P3 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P4 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P5 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) P6 (for L system only) Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) Barrier ON (for L system only) Select whether to enable the chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: Disable (Setting from special display unit will be enabled) 1: Enable #8311 P7 (for L system only) Set the area of the left spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8312 P8 (for L system only) Set the area of the left spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8313 P9 (for L system only) Set the area of the right spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8314 P10 (for L system only) Set the area of the right spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in t he basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #8315 Barrier Type (L) (for L system only) Select the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock #8316 Barrier Type (R) (for L system only) Select the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock #8317 ELIV. AX. Name (for L system only) Set the name of the delivery axis when the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable. When using the multi-part system method and the delivery axis is an ax is in the other par t system, designate the axis including the part system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the part s ystem is not designated as A and B, the set part system will be used. ---Setting range--- A/B/.. (axis name) 1A/1B/.. 2A/2B/.. (with part system designated) 0: Cancel Stock Angle (L) (for L system only) Set the angle for the left tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set). ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) 0: 90° (default) Stock Angle (R) (for L system only) Set the angle for the right tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set). ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) 0: 90° (default) #1149 cireft Arc deceleration speed change Select whether to decelerate at the arc entrance or exit. 0: Not decelerate 1: Decelerate #1205 G0bdcc Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation 0: Post-interpolation accelerati on/deceleration is applied to G00. 1: Pre-interpolation acceleration/dec eleration is applied to G00 even in the high accuracy control mode. 2: Rapid traverse constant-gradient mult i-step acceleration/deceleration is enabled. When the multi-part system simultaneous high-accuracy control option is enabled, "1" can be set for the 2nd part system and the following. #1206 G1bF Maximum speed Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre- interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When high-accuracy control time constant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed clamp speed of each axis. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1207 G1btL Time constant Set a cutting feed time constant when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1ms. Speed G1bF Time G1btL ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 30000 (ms) Cutting feed Acc Cu tting feed acceleration Displays cutting feed acceleration. #1209 cirdcc Arc deceleration speed Set the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1568 SfiltG1 G01 soft acceler ation/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for smoo thly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed acceleration/de- celeration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for t he S-pattern filter set in "#1568 Sf iltG1" (G01 soft acceleration/decel- eration filter). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) SfiltG0 G00 soft acceleration/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for sm oothly changing the acceleration rate for the rapid traverse acceleration/ deceleration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Set the filter time constant for sm oothly changing the acceleration rate in pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration. This will be disabled when "0" or "1" is set. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for the S-shape filter set in "#1570 Sfilt2" (Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) SSSdis SSS control adjustment coefficient fixe d value selec- tion Fix the shape recognition range for SSS control. ---Setting range--- 0/1 ROT_PREFILT Rotary axis prefilter time constant Set the time constant for rotary axis prefilter. Setting this parameter can smoothen the tool angle chan ge (rotary axis' motion) under tool center point con- trol. Possible to do this setting on [High- accuracy parameter] screen, which you can reach by going to [Setup] Screen and selecting [User parameter]. When set to "0", "Rotary axis prefiltering" will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #8019 R COMP Set a compensation coefficient for reducing a control error in the reduction of a corner roundness and arc radius. The larger the set value is, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the corner goes down, the cycle time will be extended. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This function will be enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (%) Theoretical radius decrease error amount Displays the theoretical radius decrease error amount, Δ R(mm), from the automatic calculation by NC. Command path R F + Path after servo control Theoretical radius decrease amount in arc R5mm arc deceleration speed Displays a deceleration speed (mm/min) along an arc of 5 (mm) radius. R1mm arc deceleration speed Displays a deceleration speed(mm/min ) along an arc of 1 (mm) radius. DCC ANGLE Set the minimum value of an angle (external ang le) that should be assumed to be a corner. When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-accuracy mode is larger than the set value, it will be de- termined as a corner and the speed will go down to sharpen the edge. ȟ If the set value is smaller than θ, the speed goes down to optimize the corner. (Note) If "0" is set, it will be handled as "5" degrees. ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) 0: 5 degree (Equals to setting "5") Theoretical corner dull amount Displays the corner dull amount Δ c(mm) in respect to the corner's angle (external angle) θ (°). Path after servo control cs F Path after soft acceleration/ Command path deceleration 2 ca Theoretical roundness amount at corner ca(mm): Error ( Δ ) caused by the soft acceleration/deceleration 2 cs(mm): Error ( Δ ) caused by the servo system Corner deceleration speed Display corner deceleration speed c (mm/min) for th e corner of the angle (external a ngle) with θ (°). Theoretical dull amount at 90 degree Display corner dull amount when the angle is 90 degree. Corner deceleration speed at 90 degree Display corner deceleration speed when the angle is 90 degree. COMP_CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the high-accu- racy control mode. 0: Share ("#8019 R COMP" is applied.) 1: Separate * Corner: #8022 CORNER COMP * Curve: #8023 CURVE COMP (Note) Set "1" when using SSS/EasySSS control. #8022 CORNER COMP Set the compensation coeffi cient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the high- accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1". Reference to "#8020 Corner decreasing speed "for theo retical corner roundness amount, corner decreasing speed, theoretical 90 degree dull amoun t, 90 degree corner decreasing speed. ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) #8023 CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to fu rther reduce or increase the radius r eduction amount at the curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1". For theoretical radius reduction error amount, R5mm arc deceleration speed and R1mm arc deceleration speed, refer to "#8019 R COMP". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) #8025 SPLINE ON For M system only. Specify whether to enable the fine spline function. 0: Disable the fine spline function. 1: Enable the fine spline function. Spline interpolation will be valid during G61.2 modal regardless of this setting. #8026 CANCEL ANG. (for M system only) Set the angle where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled. When the angle made by blocks exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation will be canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed angle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) 0: 180 (°) #8027 Toler-1 (for M system only) Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance appli- cable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 μ m) When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #8028 Toler-2 (for M system only) Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance appli- cable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 μ m) When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #8029 FairingL (for M system only) Set the length of the block subject to fairing. (Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) MINUTE LENGS (for M system only) Set the fine-segment length where the splin e interpolation is temporarily canceled. When the length of one block exceeds this parameter se tting value, spline interpolation is canceled tempo- rarily and linear interpolation is perf ormed. Set a value a little smaller than one block length of the program. If "-1" is set, spline interpolation wi ll be performed regardless of block length. ---Setting range--- -1 to 127 (mm) 0: 1 (mm) Fairing ON (for M system only) Select whether or not to use the fa iring or smooth fairing function. 0: Use neither of them 1: Use the fairing function 2: Use the smooth fairing function AccClamp ON (for M system only) Select the method for clamping the cutting speed. 0: Clamp with parameter "#2002 clamp" or the corner deceleration function. 1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration judgment. (Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".) CordecJudge (for M system only) Select the condition to decide a corner. 0: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block. 1: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block, excluding minute blocks. (Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".) CorJudgeL (for M system only) Set the length of the block to be excluded when deciding a corner. (Enabled when "#8036 CordecJudge" is set to "1".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Path recog. range Path recognition range Specify the range to recognize the tool paths adjoini ng to the command position when the smooth fairing function is ON. If "0" is set, the range will be 1.000 (mm). ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) Comp. range limit Compensation distance tolerance Specify the upper limit of the dist ance between the command position and compensation position when the smooth fairing function is ON. If you specify a negative value, operatio n is conducted with no tolerance limit. If "0" is set, the to lerance will be 0.005 (mm). ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 100.000 (mm) High-SpeedAcc High-speed high-accuracy control-enabled part system Select whether to enable the simultaneous use of t he high-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode (including the high- speed high-accuracy control I an d II) for each part system. 0: Not enable 1: Enable "1" can be set for up to two part syst ems. If you set "1" for three or more part systems, the alarm (Y51 0032) will result. #8090 SSS ON (for M system only) Set whether to enable the SSS control with G05 P10000. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8091 StdLength (for M system only) Set the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape. To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a la rge value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a small value. If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1 .000mm) will be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #8092 ClampCoeff (for M system only) Set the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments. Coefficient = √ setting value ---Setting range--- 1 to 100 #8093 StepLeng (for M system only) Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approxima tely the same as the CAM path difference [Tolerance].) If "0" is set, the standard value (5 μ m) will be applied. If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps. ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 0.100 (mm) #8094 DccWaitAdd (for M system only) Set the time to wait for deceleration when t he speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (ms) #8096 Deceler. coeff. ON Deceleration coeffici ent for SSS control ON Select whether to enable the speed coeffi cients ("#8097 Corner decelerati on coefficient for SSS control", "#8098 Arc clamp speed coefficient for SSS control") th at are used for compensating for a path error and clamp speed under SSS control. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8097 Corner decel coeff Corner deceleration coe fficient for SSS control Specify the compensation co efficient to be used for adjusting a path error and clamp speed at a corner under SSS control. This parameter is enabled during SSS co ntrol. Thus set this paramete r if you wish to use differ- ent compensation coeffi cients according to ON/OFF of SSS control (If you wish to adjust a pa th error and clamp speed at a corner, use "#8022 CORNER COMP"). If the setting value is sma ller, the theoretical path error will decrea se, but the cycle time may be longer be- cause the corner deceleration speed will slow down. Note that this parameter is enabled when "#8096 De celeration coefficient for SSS control ON" is "1". When "0" is set in this parameter, the standard value (300%) is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (%) Arc clamp spd coef Arc clamp speed coeffi cient for SSS control Specify the compensation coefficient to be used for adjusting a path error and clamp speed on an arc under SSS control. This parameter is enabled during SSS control. Thus set this par ameter if you wish to use differ- ent compensation co efficients according to ON/O FF of SSS control (If you wis h to adjust a path error and clamp speed on an arc, use "#8023 CURVE COMP"). If the setting value is sma ller, the theoretical path error will decre ase, but the cycle time may be longer be- cause the arc clamp speed will slow down. Note that this parameter is enabled when "#8096 Deceleration coefficient for SSS control ON" is "1". When "0" is set in this parameter, the standard value (100%) is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (%) Jerk_filtG1 G01 jerk filter Specify the time constant of filter that is used for smoothing the change of jerk when pre-interpolation accel- eration/deceleration is performed in cutting feed. This filter causes no path error, as the filter is applied to the result ant speed calculated before interpolation. If you specify the jerk filter ti me constant, the time constants of each filter will be as follows: - S-shape filter time constant "#1568 SfiltG1" - "Jerk_filtG1" - Jerk filter time constant "Jerk_filtG1" ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) Jerk_filtG0 G00 jerk filter Specify the time constant of filter that is used for smoothing the change of jerk when pre-interpolation accel- eration/deceleration is performed in cutting feed. This filter causes no path error, as the filter is applied to the result ant speed calculated before interpolation. If you specify the jerk filter ti me constant, the time constants of each filter will be as follows: - S-shape filter time constant "#1569 SfiltG0" - "Jerk_filtG0" - Jerk filter time constant "Jerk_filtG0" ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) EachAxAccCntrl Enable axis-specifi c acceleration tolerance control Select how to calculate the decele ration speed for a corner between the blocks where the high-accuracy con- trol is enabled. 0: Optimal corner deceleration (calculate the deceleration speed using the acce leration tolerance common for all the axes determined by G1bF and G1btL) 1: Axis-specific acceleration tolerance control (calculate the deceleration speed using accelera tion tolerances of each axis determined by G1bFx and G1btLx) VblAccPreInt Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration ON Select whether to enable variable-acceleration pre-inte rpolation acceleration/deceleration control while high- accuracy control is ON. 0: Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration (Apply the acceleration rate that is determi ned by G1bF and G1btL and is common for all the axes) 1: Variable-acceleration pre-interp olation acceleration/deceleration (Apply the acceleration rate that is determined by G1bFx and G1btLx for each axis) (Note) Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acce leration/deceleration is a function available under SSS control. To enable this function, set "#8090 SSS ON" to "1". #12066 Tolerance ctrl ON Select whether to enable the tolerance control. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) Tolerance control is available only under SSS control. To enable this function, set "#8090 SSS ON" to "1". #12067 Tolerance spd coef Set the compensation coefficient to adjust a path error or clamp speed in the corner while tolerance control is ON. This parameter is enabled during tolerance control. Thus set this parameter if you wish to use different clamp speed according to ON/OFF of tolerance control. When "0" is set in this parameter, the standard value (100%) is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (%) #12068 Smoothing range Spline interpolation 2: Smoothing range Normally set "0" in this parameter. If you run a program with micro segm ents and its reciprocating paths are un even, set the parameter to about 3 to 5 times the length of the programmed segments. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 10.000 (mm) #12069 Corner angle Tolerance control: Corner recognition angle Specify the corner recognition angle. Normally set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 180.000 (°) #12070 Sfilt2_tol Tolerance control: So ft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Specify the time constant of the filt er that smoothes out fluctuations in acceleration under the tolerance con- trol. Basically set to 0. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) ntrol Axis Parameters rapid Rapid traverse rate Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (Note) The maximum value to be set depends on the machine specifications. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) clamp Cutting feedra te for clamp function Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this val ue, the clamp will be applied at this feedrate. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) fwd_g Feed forward gain Set a feed forward gain for pre-inte rpolation acceleration/deceleration. The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical c ontrol error will be. However, if a machine vibration oc- curs, set the smaller value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain Set a feed forward gain for G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. The larger the setting value, the shorter the positioning time during in-position checking. If a machine vibration occu rs, set the smaller value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed Set the minimum clamp speed for corner deceleration in the high-accuracy control mode. Normally set "0". (Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) Rapid (H-precision) Rapid traverse rate for high-accuracy control mode Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in the high -accuracy control mode. When 0 is set, "#2001 rapid" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) Clamp (H-precision) Cutting feed clamp speed for high-accuracy control mode Set the cutting feed maximum speed for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. When 0 is set, "#2002 clamp" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2157 G1bFx Maximum axis-specific pre-interpolation cutting feed rate When axis-specific acceleration tolerance control is ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration tolerance. When "0" is set, "#2001 rapid" is used. When variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculatin g each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1206 G1bF" is used. When both axis-specific acceleration tolerance control and variable-acceleration pre-interpolation accelera- tion/deceleration are ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculatin g each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1206 G1bF" is used. When neither axis-specific accelerati on tolerance control nor variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceler- ation/deceleration is ON: This parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min) #2158 G1btLx Axis-specific pre-interpolation cutting feed time con- stant When axis-specific acceleration tolerance control is ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration tolerance. When "0" is set, "#2004 G0tL" is used. When variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1207 G1btL" is used. When both axis-specific acceleration tolerance control and variable-acceleration pre-interpolation accelera- tion/deceleration are ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1207 G1btL" is used. When neither axis-specific accelerati on tolerance control nor variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceler- ation/deceleration is ON: This parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) #2159 compx Accuracy coefficient for each axis Specify the compensation coef ficient to be used for adjusting a path error and clamp speed at a corner for each axis during the high-accuracy control mode. If the setting value is larger, the edge accuracy will im- prove, but the cycle time may be longer because the corner speed will slow down. This parameter is disabled when the axis-spec ific acceleration tolerance control is OFF. ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) Counter type 1 Select the type of the following counters on the Monitor screen.  Normal display: Upper-left counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous di splay (four counters): Upper-left counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display (two counters): Upper counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneo us display (one counter): Counter Either relative position or tip work position is displayed by default. (Note 1) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. (Note 2) Tip work position is displa yed when 5-axis-related option is ON. (Note 3) PLC axis position is displayed when "#11091 PLC counter valid" is "1". 1: Current position 2: Workpiece coordinate position 3: Machine position 4: Program position 8: Remain command 9: Manual interrupt amount 10: Next command 11: Restart position 12: Remain distance 16: Tip workpiece coordinate position 18: Tool axis movement 19: Tip machine position 20: Relative position 21: Table coordinate position 22: Workpiece installation position 23: Inclined surface coordinate position 27: PLC axis position ---Setting range--- 1 to 27 #8902 Counter type 2 Select the type of the following counters on the Monitor screen.  Normal display: Lower-left counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay (four counters): Lower-left counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous di splay (two counters): Lower counter Programmed position is displayed by default. (Note 1) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. (Note 2) PLC axis position is displayed when "#11091 PLC counter valid" is "1". 1: Current position 2: Workpiece coordinate position 3: Machine position 4: Program position 8: Remain command 9: Manual interrupt amount 10: Next command 11: Restart position 12: Remain distance 16: Tip workpiece coordinate position 18: Tool axis movement 19: Tip machine position 20: Relative position 21: Table coordinate position 22: Workpiece installation position 23: Inclined surface coordinate position 27: PLC axis position ---Setting range--- 1 to 27 Counter type 3 Select the type of the following counters on the Monitor screen.  Normal display: Upper-right counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous di splay (four counters): Upper-right counter Remaining command is displayed by default. (Note 1) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. (Note 2) PLC axis position is displayed when "#11091 PLC counter valid" is "1". 1: Current position 2: Workpiece coordinate position 3: Machine position 4: Program position 8: Remain command 9: Manual interrupt amount 10: Next command 11: Restart position 12: Remain distance 16: Tip workpiece coordinate position 18: Tool axis movement 19: Tip machine position 20: Relative position 21: Table coordinate position 22: Workpiece installation position 23: Inclined surface coordinate position 27: PLC axis position ---Setting range--- 1 to 27 #8904 Counter type 4 Select the type of the following counters on the Monitor screen.  Normal display: Lower-right counter  2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display (four counters): Lower-right counter Next command is displayed by default. (Note 1) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. (Note 2) PLC axis position is displayed when "#11091 PLC counter valid" is "1". 1: Current position 2: Workpiece coordinate position 3: Machine position 4: Program position 8: Remain command 9: Manual interrupt amount 10: Next command 11: Restart position 12: Remain distance 16: Tip workpiece coordinate position 18: Tool axis movement 19: Tip machine position 20: Relative position 21: Table coordinate position 22: Workpiece installation position 23: Inclined surface coordinate position 27: PLC axis position ---Setting range--- 1 to 27 #8905 Counter type 5 Select the type of counter on the Monitor screen (Simple display). Either relative position or tip work position is displayed by default. (Note 1) Tip work position is displayed when 5-axis-re lated option or program form at switch option is ON. (Note 2) PLC axis position is displayed when "#11091 PLC counter valid" is "1". 1: Current position 2: Workpiece coordinate position 3: Machine position 4: Program position 8: Remain command 9: Manual interrupt amount 10: Next command 11: Restart position 12: Remain distance 16: Tip workpiece coordinate position 18: Tool axis movement 19: Tip machine position 20: Relative position 21: Table coordinate position 22: Workpiece installation position 23: Inclined surface coordinate position 27: PLC axis position ---Setting range--- 1 to 27 Counter type 6 Not used. Set to "0". Edit undo Set whether to enable the Undo function during pr ogram edit on the Monitor screen or Edit screen. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) This parameter is va lid for M800W/M800S Series. NAVI-Message ON Select whether or not to display a confirmation message upon rewrite of common variable in NAVI operation. 0: Not display a confirming message 1: Display a confirming message NAVI operate type Select the NAVI operation during automatic operation. 0: NAVI is unable to start during automatic operation. 1: NAVI is able to start during automatic operation. (A n operation involving common variable rewrite is dis- abled.) Touch panel sense Set the sensibility of the touch panel. The smaller the setting value is, the more sensitiv e the panel will be. (1: sens itive, 4: insensitive) When set to "0", the sensibility will be the same as when the standard setting of 2 is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 Auto Top search Select the operation method for restart search type 2. 0: It is necessary to set the top search position arbitrarily. 1: The restart search is executed from O No. that is designated as head. Auto backup day 1 The automatic backup is executed when the CNC power is turned ON for the first time after the designated date of the month. When "-1" is set in this parameter, the automatic ba ckup is executed every time the CNC power is turned ON (a maximum of once per day). ---Setting range--- -1: Everyday 0: Disabled 1 to 31: Designated date of a month Auto backup day 2 The automatic backup is executed when the CNC power is turned ON for the first time after the designated date of the month. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 1 to 31: Designated date of a month Auto backup day 3 The automatic backup is executed when the CNC power is turned ON for the first time after the designated date of the month. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 1 to 31: Designated date of a month #8918 Auto backup day 4 The automatic backup is ex ecuted when the CNC power is turned ON for the first time after the designated date of the month. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 1 to 31: Designated date of a month #8919 Auto backup device Select the automatic backup target device. [M800W/M80W with Windows-based display] 0: DS 1: HD 2: Memory card 3: USB Memory [M800S/M80 Series and E80] [M800W/M80W with non-Windows-based display] 0: DS 2: Memory card 3: USB Memory (Note) The setting range differs according to the model. #8920 3D tool ofs select Select the method to calculate the drawing position when drawing a solid. With 3D drawing, the drawing position (tool tip posi tion) is calculated with the method designated with this parameter, and the image is drawn. 0: For tool radius compensation, use the tool compensation amount set in tool compensation screen. For tool length, use the value in tool set window. (for tool length measurement type I) 1: Use the tool compensation amount set in tool compensation screen for both tool radius and tool length compensation. (for tool length measurement type II) 2: Use the value set in tool set window for both tool r adius and tool length compensation. (for tool length measurement type I) 3: Use the value set in tool set window for both tool r adius and tool length compensation. (for tool length measurement type II) #8921 Mass Edit select Select the editing mode for the machining programs saved in HD, memory card, DS or USB memory. When the program size is 1.0MB (When "#8910 Edit Un do" is invalid, 2.0MB) or more, mass-editing will be applied. 0: Regular editing mode 1: Mass-editing mode #8922 T-reg-dup check Set whether to enable the duplication check in registerin g tools to magazine pots, and in setting tool Nos. for spindle/standby. 0: Duplication check valid for all valid magazines 1: Duplication check invalid 2: Duplication check valid only for the selected magazine #8923 Hide Edit-IO menu Set whether to enable the edit-in/out menu. When disabled, the edit-input /output menu won't appear. However, the maintenance-in/out menu is alwa ys enabled regardless of this parameter setting. 0: Enable 1: Disable Meas. confirm msg Select whether to display a confirming message when attempting to write compensation data for tool mea- surement, or coordina te system data for workpiece measurement. However, the confirmation message will not appear in L system tool me asurement simple mode "#8957 T meas (L)-Simple". 0: Not display a confirming message 1: Display a confirming message SP on 1st part sys Select which spindle to display in the 1st part system window for the 2- , 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen shows the actual rota tion speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous display, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, co mmand speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F SP on 2nd part sys Select which spindle to display in the 2nd part syst em window for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen shows the actual rota tion speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous display, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, co mmand speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F SP on 3rd part sys Select which spindle to display in the 3rd part system windo w for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen shows the actual rota tion speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous display, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, co mmand speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F #8928 SP on 4th part sys Select which spindle to display in the 4th part system windo w for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2- , 3- or 4-part system simu ltaneous display, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen s hows the actual rotation speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous displa y, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, comm and speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F #8929 Disable=INPUT:comp Disable [=INPUT] menu for tool compensation and workpi ece coordinate offset values. Fix the setting meth- od to the incremental value input. 0: Enable 1: Disable #8930 Disable=INPUT:var Disable [=INPUT] menu for common variables. 0: Enable 1: Disable #8931 Display/Set limit Select the restriction of the connected NC's screen displa y/settings on/from the remo te control tool (NC Mon- itor2). 0: Permit the scree n display/settings 1: Permit the screen display only 2: Restrict the connection #8932 Hide measure scrn Select whether to display the tool meas urement screen and workpiece measurement screen. 0: Display 1: Not display (Note) If the "#11056 Workpi ece coordinate system shift OFF" is "0" for the L system, the screen is displayed as the workpiece coordinate syst em shift screen even when this parameter is set to "1". #8933 Disable lngth comp Set whether to disable the setting of tool shape compensation amount. 0: Enable the setting 1: Disable the setting The shape compensation amount covers the followin g data according to the tool compensation type.  Compensation type I ("1" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... Compensation amount (the sum of shape compensation and wear compensation amount)  Compensation type II ("2" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... Length dimension and radius dimension  Compensation type III ("3" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... Tool length and tool nose R Disable wear comp Select whether to disable the settin g of tool wear compensation amount. 0: Enable the setting 1: Disable the setting The wear compensation amount covers the following data according to the tool compensation type.  Compensation type I ("1" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... This parameter is disabled.  Compensation type II ("2" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... Length wear and radius wear  Compensation type III ("3" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)") ... Tool wear and tool nose wear W COORD CONFIRM Select whether to display confirmation message when se tting workpiece coordinate system offset in [Easy setting] menu. 0: Not display 1: Display Delete leading 0 In creating a file, or in transferring a file, if the file name of the new file, or the file name of the transfer desti- nation consists only of numerical figures, 0 of the file name head will be deleted from the name. 0: Designated file name (0 remains in the file name) 1: 0 will be deleted from the file name File sort volume Set the maximum number of files to sort in the memory card, USB memory and DS lists. If the setting is large, update of the list may take longer. ---Setting range--- 64 to 1000 (M800W/M80W with Windows-based display) 64 to 250 (M800S, or M800W/M80W with non-Windows-based display) 64 to 128 (M80 Series and E80) Standard: 128 Edit-Not show Prg Select whether to enable the automatic display on the Ed it screen, when selected, of the programs searched by operation/check search or the MDI programs in MDI mode. 0: Enable the automatic display 1: Disable the automatic display Undo confirm msg Display a confirming message when operating the [Undo] menu. 0: Not display a confirming message 1: Display a confirming message Set select display Select what to display in the selectable display area. 0: Common variable 1: Local variable 2: Workpiece coordi nate system offset 3: All spindles' rotation speed 4: Expanded counters 5: Tool center coordinate display 6: Tool compensation amount (Note1) Tool center coordinate display is available on ly when any of the 5-axis related options is enabled. #8941 ABS/INC for T-ofs Enable switching the method to set tool compensat ion data (absolute/incremental value) with INPUT key. 0: Fix it to the absolute value input. 1: Enable to switch between absolute and incremental value input. #8942 $1 color Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen and window title for the 1st part system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. When set to "0", the settings between #8943 (#8962) and #8945 (#8965) is disabled and the screen is shown by the default color patte rn for all the part systems. (Note) When set to "0" or "1", the color is dete rmined by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". 0: Theme color (no button image) (default) 1: Theme color 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8943 $2 color Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen and window title for the 2nd part system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determi ned by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8944 $3 color Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen an d window title for the 3rd part system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determi ned by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown $4 color Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen an d window title for the 4th part system. This enables switching the color patterns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determ ined by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown Edit-win $ switch Select whether to enable switching of program displa yed in the edit window on Monitor screen according to the displayed part system when part system switch is performed. 0: Not switch 1: Switch 2$ disp switch typ Select how to switch the part system to display when the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is en- abled. 0, 1: The No. of part system to disp lay is incremented by on e. The operation target is switched when the part system displayed in the non-active area is selected. 2: The operation target on the left side is fixe d to $1. When $1 is selected fo r the part system switch, the left side is the operation target. When $2 or after is select ed, the displayed part system on the right side is incremented by one. (Note) 3- or 4-part system simu ltaneous display is ena bled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. Initial type Select the default setting of the coordinate axis di rection designation method to be displayed on the [Surface detail] screen of R-Navi. 0,1: Point (+) on the axis 2: Latitude/Longitude 3: Latitude/Projection angle 4: Start point/End point 5: Index angle Init axis pair Select the default coordinate axis combination to be displayed on the [Surface detail] screen of R-Navi. 0,1: Z/X 2: Z/Y 3: X/Y #8956 User key type Select the definition type of the user-defined keys. There are two user-defined keys.  Type 1: It is the same as the conventional specification. A line feed between "[ ]" is not dealt as ";". It is dealt as an upper case/lower case letter depending on the CapsLock status. A symbolic character may be converted into a specific character.  Type 2: A line break inside square bracke ts "[ ]" is dealt as ";". Regardless of the CapsLock status, the defined character is input. A symbolic character is also input as defined. 0: Type 1 (conventional specification) 1: Type 2 #8957 T meas (L)-Simple Select the operation mode of the manual to ol length measurement 1 for L system. 0: Normal operation mode (Conventional specification) Select an axis to measure using the cursor position. 1: Simple operation mode Select an axis to measure using an axis addre ss key or menu. More than one axis can be selected. #8958 SP on 5th part sys Select which spindle to display in the 5th part system windo w for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2- , 3- or 4-part system simu ltaneous display, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen s hows the actual rotation speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous displa y, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, comm and speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F #8959 SP on 6th part sys Select which spindle to display in the 6th part system windo w for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2- , 3- or 4-part system simu ltaneous display, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen s hows the actual rotation speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous displa y, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, comm and speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F SP on 7th part sys Select which spindle to display in the 7th part system window for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen shows the actual rota tion speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous display, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, co mmand speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F SP on 8th part sys Select which spindle to display in the 8th part system window for the 2-, 3- or 4- part system simultaneous display. (Note 1) If you select "00" for the 2-, 3- or 4-part system simultaneous disp lay, the default display is used (1st spindle on the upper side and 2nd spindle on the lower side). (Note 2) If you set the same number as, or a greater number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or if the high- or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle is displayed. (Note 3) If you set the low-order to F, the screen shows the actual rota tion speed, command speed and load meter of the high-order spindle. Note that for the 4-counter display in 4-part system simultaneous display, even if the low-order is not F, the screen shows the actual rotation speed, co mmand speed and load meter of the high-order and low-order spindles. (Note 4) 3- or 4-part system simultaneous display is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. ---Setting range--- High-order (Select an upper side spindle.) : 0 to 8 Low-order (Select a lower side spindle.) : 0 to 8, F $5 color Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen an d window title for the 5th part system. This enables switching the color patterns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determ ined by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". ---Setting range--- 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8963 $6 color Set the color to be shown on the to p-left of screen and windo w title for the 6th par t system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determi ned by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". ---Setting range--- 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8964 $7 color Set the color to be shown on the to p-left of screen and windo w title for the 7th par t system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determi ned by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". ---Setting range--- 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8965 $8 color Set the color to be shown on the to p-left of screen and windo w title for the 8th par t system. This enables switching the color patte rns for each part system. When set to the values "1" to "8", the part syst em name is shown in the form of button image. (Note 1) Enabled when "#8942 $1 color" is set to the values "1" to "8". (Note 2) When set to "1", the color is determi ned by the setting of "#11060 Screen theme color". ---Setting range--- 1: Theme color (default) 2: Pink 3: Light blue 4: Orange 5: Green 6: Fuchsia 7: YellowGreen 8: Brown #8966 Edit: INS or OVR Select whether to insert or overwrite during edit. Inse rt or overwrite mode can al so be changed temporarily using the INS key. 0: Overwrite mode 1: Insert mode Delete key action Select the [DELETE] key operation during edit. 0: The key serves as a Delete key. (erases the character after the cursor) 1: The key serves as a Back Space key. (erases the character before the cursor) Tool shape radius Tool shape radius designation Select the tool shape designation method. 0: Diameter designation 1: Radius designation Tool offset type 1 Specify the display item for the 1st column (type) and 2nd column (compensation amount) on the right side of the tool management screen list display. The setting value and display item are specified as follows. (Setting value): (1st column) / (2nd column) ꞏ Tool compensation type I 0-11: H (Compensation No.) / Length compensation ꞏ Tool compensation type II 0, 5-11: H (Compensation No.) / Length compensation 1: H (Compensation No.) / Length compensation 2: D (Compensation No.) / Radius compensation 3: +H (Compensation No.) / Length wear 4: +D (Compensation No.) / Radius wear ꞏ Tool compensation type III 0: (Axis name (1st axis))(Compensation No.) / 1st axis tool length 1: (Axis name (1st axis))(Compensation No.) / 1st axis tool length 2: (Axis name (2nd axis))(Compensat ion No.) / 2nd axis tool length 3: (Axis name (Additional axis))(Compensat ion No.) / Additional axis tool length 4: +(Axis name (1st axis))(Com pensation No.) / 1st axis wear 5: +(Axis name (2nd axis))(Compe nsation No.) / 2nd axis wear 6: +(Axis name (Additional axis))(Com pensation No.) / Additional axis wear 7: R / Nose R 8: +R / R wear 9: P / Point 10: (Axis name (2nd additional axis))(Compensati on No.) / 2nd additional axis tool length 11: +(Axis name (2nd additional axis))(Com pensation No.) / 2nd additional axis wear ---Setting range--- 0 to 11 #8970 Tool offset type 2 Specify the display item for the 3rd column (type) and 4th column (compensation amount) on the right side of the tool management screen list display. The setting value and display item are specified as follows. (Setting value): (3rd column) / (4th column) ꞏ Tool compensation type I 0-11: Set to blan k / Set to blank ꞏ Tool compensation type II 0, 5-11: D (Compensation No.) / Radius compensation 1: H (Compensation No.) / Length compensation 2: D (Compensation No.) / Radius compensation 3: +H (Compensation No.) / Length wear 4: +D (Compensation No.) / Radius wear ꞏ Tool compensation type III 0: (Axis name (2nd axis))(Compensati on No.) / 2nd axis tool length 1: (Axis name (1st axis))(Compensati on No.) / 1st axis tool length 2: (Axis name (2nd axis))(Compensati on No.) / 2nd axis tool length 3: (Axis name (Additional axis))(Compensati on No.) / Additional axis tool length 4: +(Axis name (1st axis))(Com pensation No.) / 1st axis wear 5: +(Axis name (2nd axis))(Compensation No.) / 2nd axis wear 6: +(Axis name (Additional axis))(Com pensation No.) / Additional axis wear 7: R / Nose R 8: +R / R wear 9: P / Point 10: (Axis name (2nd additional axis))(Compensati on No.) / 2nd additional axis tool length 11: +(Axis name (2nd additional axis))(Com pensation No.) / 2nd additional axis wear ---Setting range--- 0 to 11 #8971 Alarm window ON Select whether to enable the alarm display window. 0: Disable the alarm display window 1: Enable the alarm display window #8972 T code offset disp For L system only Select whether to display tool offset data with the address T's offset No. at the head when the tool offset screen is opened after a manual value command. <Monitor screen> * Open the tool offset screen (window) <Setup screen> * Display the tool offset screen (Note) The display is unchanged if you change a tool offset No. with the tool offset screen displayed. 0: Not display tool offset data with the address T's offset No. at the head 1: Display tool offset data with t he address T's offset No. at the head #8973 Selective display Select whether to enable selective display on an 8.4- or 10.4-type display terminal. 0: Disable selective display 1: Enable selective displa y. Select what to display using the parameter "#8940 Set select display". Simple PLC switch Select whether to enable ON/OFF of PLC switch without a press of the [Setting valid] menu. 0: Enable ON/OFF of PLC switch after a press of the [Setting valid] menu. 1: Enable ON/OFF of PLC switch withou t a press of the [Setting valid] menu. No. search process Select how the [XXX No search] menu works on screens including the parameter and tool offset screens. 0: When you press [No search], enter the No. to disp lay and then press [INPUT], the data on the display is ordered to start from the designated No. 1: When you enter the No. to display and then press [No. search], the data on the display is ordered to start from the designated No. Menu animation OFF Select whether to disable animated graphics of the menus. 0: Enable the animation 1: Disable the animation Multi-$ simul edit Select whether to open the same nam ed programs of different part syst ems simultaneously for each editing area upon a press of Open on Edit screen while Multi-part system program management is enabled. 0: Disable (Not open the programs simultaneously for each editing area) 1: Enable (Open the programs simultaneously for each editing area) Touch op noise res Set the noise tolerance of touch operation. The larger setting value gives the higher noise tolerance, but the operation response becomes dull. 0: Select this when the motions are normal at one and two points in the stabl e environment of the power supply. 1 to 4: If the touch detection position is unstable, incr ease the setting value according to the cursor blur level. (Note) Do not execute touch operation for two seconds after changing this parameter. R-Navi graphic dir Specify the coordinate system direct ion of the workpiece graphics (machining surface graphics) to be dis- played on the R-Navi surface list screen or surface selection screen. (Note) The angle (degrees) is a CCW rotation when viewed from the positive en d of the height axis. ---Setting range--- 0: XYZ 0° 1: YZX 0° 2: ZXY 0° 3: XYZ 90° 4: YZX 90° 5: ZXY 90° 6: XYZ 180° 7: YZX 180° 8: ZXY 180° 9: XYZ 270° 10: YZX 270° 11: ZXY 270° NCmemory date disp Specify the display items when disp laying the updated time and date of th e file on the "Date / Comment" if NC memory is selected on the program list display. 0: Displays the program comment. (Conventional operation) 1: Displays the updated time and date. (Note) When multi-part system progra m management is valid, program comm ent display is specified, regard- less of this setting. #8982 CheckSmltns$1Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 1st part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8983 CheckSmltns$2Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 2nd part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8984 CheckSmltns$3Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 3rd part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8985 CheckSmltns$4Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 4th part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8986 CheckSmltns$5Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 5th part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8987 CheckSmltns$6Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 6th part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8988 CheckSmltns$7Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 7th part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8989 CheckSmltns$8Invld In the check method 2 of graphic check, checking for 8th part system is invalid. 0: Enable the check. (The part system is the check target) 1: Disable the check. (The part system is not the check target) #8990 Edit-up/down keys At the time of normal edit, specify the operation with up and down cursor keys in the block on the several lines. 0: Moves by line number 1: Moves by line on display (Note) For mass-editing, the operation is always as "1" setting. #8991 Interactive cycle Select whether to ena ble the interactive cycl e insertion function. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8992 Cycle switch Switch the selectable cycle type. 0: Standard/Extended cycle 1: Not used 2: Not used Cycle highlight Select whether to highlight the program cycle (from the cycle header to the footer) inserted through the inter- active cycle insertion. 0: Not highlight 1: Highlight =InputOFF:Interact Select whether to disable the [=Input] menu for interactiv e cycle insertion. Fix the setting method to the incremental value input. 0: Enable [=Input] menu 1: Disable [=Input] menu Touchop longtaptim Set the time until recognized as long press (long tap). When releasing a finger within the set time, it is recognized as tap. 0: 800 (ms) 1: 1000 2: 1500 3: 2000 Simple program ON Select whether to enable the simple programming function. 0: Disable 1: Enable Hi-speed grph chck Select whether to increase the graphic check speed. When you select 1 to 3, gr aphic check becomes faster. Note however that the workpiece shape is drawn more inward than the programmed path. The greater the setting value, the faster the graphic check will be. 0: Disable 1: Level 1 2: Level 2 3: Level 3 High-speed graphic check is enabled for the check method 1 only. Finish shape view Select whether to enable the finished shape display. 0: Disable 1: Enable Simul edit - View Select the display format for simultaneous program edit (3 or 4 Edit), which can be selected with the [Display setting] menu. 0: [2 Edit] and [3 Edit] are selectable. 1: [2 Edit] and [4 Edit] are selectable. Restrain VNCserver Select whether to restrain the VNC client from connecting to the NC, di splaying the NC screen or performing setting to the NC. Menu selection may be disabled depending on the set value. 0: Disable the VNC server function. 1: Enable the VNC server function, and allow the VNC client to display the NC screen and to perform set- ting operation. 2: Enable the VNC server function, and allow the VN C client to display the NC screen, but the available setting operation is INPUT key only. #19702 VNC password Specify the password for conne cting to the VNC server. The password is needed for VNC client of an external PC to connect to the server. ---Setting range--- Up to 8 alphanumeric letters #19703 VNC server port Specify the port number for connecting to the VNC server. The recommended value is "5901". (Note) If you use the remote de sktop function, do not set "5900". ---Setting range--- 0 to 65535 #19704 VNC color depth Specify the color depth of the screen displayed by the VNC client via VNC server connection. 0: 16-bit color depth 1: 8-bit color depth #19705 VNC transmit cycle Specify the transmission cycle for the VNC server to send sc reen data to the VNC client. 0: Standard transmission cycle 1: Increase the cycle two-fold. 2: Increase the cycle four-fold. (Note) If you increase the transmission cycle, the NC screen refresh may be delayed. #19710 Edit-Upward search Enable upward search for the text search function in the edit window and edit screen. 0: Search downward from the cursor position. 1: Enable upward and downward search from the cursor position. #19715 Cycle output dest. Select where to output a cycle created with the interactive cycle insertion. 0: Output to the main program 1: Output to a subprogram stored in NC memory 2: Output to a subprogram stored in the directory "#8880/88 81 Subpro stor D0" 3: Output to a subprogram stored in the directory "#8882/88 83 Subpro stor D1" 4: Output to a subprogram stored in the directory "#8884/88 85 Subpro stor D2" 5: Output to a subprogram stored in the directory "#8886/88 87 Subpro stor D3" 6: Output to a subprogram stored in the directory "#8888/88 89 Subpro stor D4" #19717 W coord: cursor Select where the cursor is locate d after data entry on the workpiec e coordinate system offset screen. 0: Cursor moves to the next line. If the original cursor position is in the last line, it moves to the top of the next data. 1: Cursor moves to the next line. If the original curs or position is in the last line, the position is unchanged. 2: Unchanged from the original position. n Selection Parameters an be set through the machining condition setting screen are y and parameter input/output on the screen follow the ma- Machining Condition Pa- Machining Condition Pa- Machining Condition Pa- rameters (Application 1) rameters (Application 2) rameters (Application 3) #1207 #42001 #42301 #42601 #1568 #42002 #42302 #42602 #1570 #42003 #42303 #42603 #2010 #42007 #42307 #42607 #8019 #42004 #42304 #42604 #8020 #42008 #42308 #42608 #8022 #42005 #42305 #42605 #8023 #42006 #42306 #42606 #8026 #42009 #42309 #42609 #8027 #42010 #42310 #42610 #8028 #42011 #42311 #42611 #8030 #42012 #42312 #42612 #8033 #42013 #42313 #42613 #8029 #42014 #42314 #42614 #8037 #42015 #42315 #42615 #8090 #42016 #42316 #42616 #8091 #42017 #42317 #42617 #8093 #42018 #42318 #42618 #2659 #42019 #42319 #42619 #1206 #42020 #42320 #42620 #12070 #42021 #42321 #42621 G1bF Maximum speed Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre-in terpolation acceleration/deceleration. When high-accuracy control time cons tant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed clamp speed of each axis. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1207 G1btL Time constant Set a cutting feed time constant when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1ms. Speed G1bF Time G1btL ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 30000 (ms) Cutting feed Acc Cu tting feed acceleration Displays cutting feed acceleration. #1568 SfiltG1 G01 soft acceler ation/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for smoo thly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed acceleration/de- celeration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for t he S-pattern filter set in "#1568 Sf iltG1" (G01 soft acceleration/decel- eration filter). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #1570 Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Set the filter time constant for smoo thly changing the acceleration rate in pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration. This will be disabled when "0" or "1" is set. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for the S-shape filter set in "#1570 Sfilt2" (Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #2010 fwd_g Feed forward gain Set a feed forward gain for pre-in terpolation acceleration/deceleration. The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical co ntrol error will be. However, if a machine vibration oc- curs, set the smaller value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) #2659 tolerance Tolerance Specify a tolerance (tolerable error) to be used under tolerance control. Set a tolerable error for fine segment progra m created by CAM. (U sually around 0.01(mm)) If 0.000 is set, it is operated with the tolerance of 0.01(mm). When designating the tolerance amou nt with the ", K address", this parameter is not used. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) R COMP Set a compensation coefficient for reducing a control e rror in the reduction of a corner roundness and arc radius. The larger the set value is, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the corner goes down, the cycle time will be extended. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This function will be enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (%) Theoretical radius decrease error amount Displays the theoretical radi us decrease error amount, Δ R(mm), from the automat ic calculation by NC. Command path R F + Path after servo control Theoretical radius decrease amount in arc R5mm arc deceleration speed Displays a deceleration speed (mm/min) along an arc of 5 (mm) radius. R1mm arc deceleration speed Displays a deceleration speed(mm/min) along an arc of 1 (mm) radius. #8020 DCC ANGLE Set the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner. When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-accuracy mode is larger than the set value, it will be de- termined as a corner and the speed will go down to sharpen the edge. ȟ If the set value is smaller than θ, the speed goes down to optimize the corner. (Note) If "0" is set, it will be handled as "5" degrees. ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) 0: 5 degree (Equals to setting "5") Theoretical corner dull amount Displays the corner dull amount Δ c(mm) in respect to the cor ner's angle (e xternal angle) θ (°). Path after servo control cs F Path after soft acceleration/ Command path deceleration 2 ca Theoretical roundness amount at corner ca(mm): Error ( Δ ) caused by the soft acceleration/deceleration 2 cs(mm): Error ( Δ ) caused by the servo system Corner deceleration speed Display corner deceleration spe ed c (mm/min) for the corner of the angle (external angle) with θ (°). Theoretical dull amount at 90 degree Display corner dull amount when the angle is 90 degree. Corner deceleration speed at 90 degree Display corner deceleration speed when the angle is 90 degree. #8021 COMP_CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the high-accu- racy control mode. 0: Share ("#8019 R COMP" is applied.) 1: Separate * Corner: #8022 CORNER COMP * Curve: #8023 CURVE COMP (Note) Set "1" when using SSS/EasySSS control. CORNER COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the high- accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1". Reference to "#8020 Corner decreasing speed "for theoretical corner roundness amount, corner decreasing speed, theoretical 90 degree dull amount, 90 degree corner decreasing speed. ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or in crease the radius reduction amount at the curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value (Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1". For theoretical radius reduction error amount, R5mm arc deceleration speed and R1mm arc deceleration speed, refer to "#8019 R COMP". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) SPLINE ON For M system only. Specify whether to enable the fine spline function. 0: Disable the fine spline function. 1: Enable the fine spline function. Spline interpolation will be valid during G61.2 modal regardless of this setting. CANCEL ANG. (for M system only) Set the angle where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled. When the angle made by bl ocks exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolati on will be canceled temporarily. In consideration of t he pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed angle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) 0: 180 (°) Toler-1 (for M system only) Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance appli- cable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 μ m) When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) Toler-2 (for M system only) Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance appli- cable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 μ m) When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) FairingL (for M system only) Set the length of the block subject to fairing. (Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #8030 MINUTE LENGS (for M system only) Set the fine-segment length where the splin e interpolation is temporarily canceled. When the length of one block exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation is canceled tempo- rarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a valu e a little smaller than one block length of the program. If "-1" is set, spline interpolation will be performed regardless of block length. ---Setting range--- -1 to 127 (mm) 0: 1 (mm) #8033 Fairing ON (for M system only) Select whether or not to use the fairing or smooth fairing function. 0: Use neither of them 1: Use the fairing function 2: Use the smooth fairing function #8037 CorJudgeL (for M system only) Set the length of the block to be excluded when deciding a corner. (Enabled when "#8036 CordecJudge" is set to "1".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #8090 SSS ON (for M system only) Set whether to enable the SSS control with G05 P10000. 0: Disable 1: Enable #8091 StdLength (for M system only) Set the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape. To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a la rge value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a small value. If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1 .000mm) will be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #8093 StepLeng (for M system only) Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approxima tely the same as the CAM path difference [Tolerance].) If "0" is set, the standard value (5 μ m) will be applied. If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps. ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 0.100 (mm) #12070 Sfilt2_tol Tolerance control: So ft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Specify the time constant of the filt er that smoothes out fluctuations in acceleration under the tolerance con- trol. Basically set to 0. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #42001 P1-G1btL Time constant for machining condition selection I Time constant for machining condition selection I Set the time constant for the machin ing condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1207 G1btL". ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 30000 (ms) P1-SfiltG1 G01soft acceleration/ deceleration filter for machining condition selection I G01soft acceleration/deceleration filter for machining condition selection I Set the G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter's time constant for the machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1568 SfiltG1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) P1-Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/decel eration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Set the soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2's time constant for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1570 Sfilt2". ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) P1-rcomp Accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Accuracy coefficient for mach ining condition selection I Set the accuracy coefficient for the machining condition se lection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8019 R COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (%) P1-cor_comp Corner accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Corner accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Set the corner accuracy coefficient for the machining c ondition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8022 CORNER COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) P1-cur_comp Curve accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Curve accuracy coefficient for ma chining condition selection I Set the curve accuracy coefficient for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8023 CURVE COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) P1-fwd_g Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Set the feed forward gain for the machining condition sele ction I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#2010 fwd_g". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) P1-fcorn Corner deceleration angle for machining condition se- lection I Corner deceleration angle for machining condition selection I Set the corner deceleration angle for the machining condi tion selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8020 DCC ANGLE". ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) #42009 P1-spcanag Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Set the cancel angle for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8026 CANCEL ANG". ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) #42010 P1-distth1 Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 1 for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8027 Toler-1". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #42011 P1-distth2 Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 2 for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8028 Toler-2". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #42012 P1-minute Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Set the fine segment length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8030 MINUTE LENGS". ---Setting range--- -1 to 127 (mm) #42013 P1-fairing Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Set whether to enable the fairing function for the machini ng condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8033 Fairing ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 #42014 P1-minleng Fairing L for machining condition selection I Fairing L for machining condition selection I Set the fairing length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8029 FairingL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #42015 P1-cordeclen Corner judgment length for machining condition selec- tion I Corner judgment length for machining condition selection I Set the corner judgment length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the pa- rameter "#8037 CorJudgeL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #42016 P1-sss_prcm SSS/EasySSS control ON for machining condition se- lection I SSS/EasySSS control ON for mach ining conditi on selection I Set whether to enable the SSS/EasySSS control for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param eter "#8090 SSS ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 P1-std_length Standard length for machining condition selection I Standard length for machining condition selection I Set the standard length for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8091 StdLength". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) P1-step_length Step width for machining condition selection I Step width for machining condition selection I Set the width of the step for the machining condition sele ction I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8093 StepLeng". ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 0.100 (mm) P1-tolerance Tolerance for machining condition selection I Set the tolerance for machining condition selection parameter group for machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#2659 tolerance". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) P1-G1bF Machining condition selection I: maximum speed Specify the maximum speed for the machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I function (equivalent to "#1206 G1bF"). ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) P1-Sfilt2_tol Machining condition selection I: tolerance control soft accel/decel filter 2 Specify the tolerance control soft acceleration/decelerat ion filter 2 for the machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I functi on (equivalent to "#12070 Sfilt2_tol"). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) P2-G1btL Time constant for machining condition selection I Time constant for machining condition selection I Set the time constant for the machin ing condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1207 G1btL". ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 30000 (ms) P2-SfiltG1 G01soft acceleration/ deceleration filter for machining condition selection I G01soft acceleration/deceleration filter for machining condition selection I Set the G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter's time constant for the machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1568 SfiltG1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) P2-Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/decel eration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Set the soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2's time constant for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1570 Sfilt2". ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) #42304 P2-rcomp Accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Accuracy coefficient for mach ining condition selection I Set the accuracy coefficient for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8019 R COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (%) #42305 P2-cor_comp Corner accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Corner accuracy coeffi cient for machining condition selection I Set the corner accuracy coefficient for the machining condition selection I f unction. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8022 CORNER COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) #42306 P2-cur_comp Curve accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Curve accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Set the curve accuracy coefficient for the machining condi tion selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8023 CURVE COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) #42307 P2-fwd_g Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Set the feed forward gain for the machining condition sele ction I function. This is eq uivalent to the parameter "#2010 fwd_g". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) #42308 P2-fcorn Corner deceleration angle for machining condition se- lection I Corner deceleration angle for machining condition selection I Set the corner deceleration angle for the machining conditi on selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8020 DCC ANGLE". ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) #42309 P2-spcanag Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Set the cancel angle for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8026 CANCEL ANG". ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) #42310 P2-distth1 Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 1 for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8027 Toler-1". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) P2-distth2 Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 2 for the machining condition selectio n I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8028 Toler-2". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) P2-minute Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Set the fine segment length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8030 MINUTE LENGS". ---Setting range--- -1 to 127 (mm) P2-fairing Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Set whether to enable the fairing function for the machin ing condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8033 Fairing ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 P2-minleng Fairing L for machining condition selection I Fairing L for machining condition selection I Set the fairing length for the machining condition select ion I function. This is eq uivalent to the parameter "#8029 FairingL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) P2-cordeclen Corner judgment length for machining condition selec- tion I Corner judgment length for machining condition selection I Set the corner judgment length for the machining conditio n selection I function. This is equivalent to the pa- rameter "#8037 CorJudgeL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) P2-sss_prcm SSS/EasySSS control ON for machinin g condition se- lection I SSS/EasySSS control ON for ma chining conditi on selection I Set whether to enable the SSS/EasySSS control for the machining conditi on selection I func tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8090 SSS ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 P2-std_length Standard length for machining condition selection I Standard length for machining condition selection I Set the standard length for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8091 StdLength". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) P2-step_length Step width for machining condition selection I Step width for machining condition selection I Set the width of the step for the machining condition sele ction I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8093 StepLeng". ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 0.100 (mm) #42319 P2-tolerance Tolerance for machining condition selection I Set the tolerance for machining condition selection param eter group for machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#2659 tolerance". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #42320 P2-G1bF Machining condition selection I: maximum speed Specify the maximum speed for the machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I function (equivalent to "#1206 G1bF"). ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) #42321 P2-Sfilt2_tol Machining condition selection I: tolerance control soft accel/decel filter 2 Specify the tolerance control soft acce leration/deceleration filter 2 for t he machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I functi on (equivalent to "#12070 Sfilt2_tol"). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #42601 P3-G1btL Time constant for machining condition selection I Time constant for machining condition selection I Set the time constant for the machin ing condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1207 G1btL". ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 30000 (ms) #42602 P3-SfiltG1 G01soft acceleration/deceleration filter for machining condition selection I G01soft acceleration/deceleration filter for machining condition selection I Set the G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter's time constant for the machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1568 SfiltG1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #42603 P3-Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/dece leration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 for machining condition selection I Set the soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2’s time c onstant for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#1570 Sfilt2". ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) #42604 P3-rcomp Accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Accuracy coefficient for mach ining condition selection I Set the accuracy coefficient for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8019 R COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (%) P3-cor_comp Corner accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Corner accuracy coefficient for machining condition selection I Set the corner accuracy coefficient for the machining c ondition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8022 CORNER COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) P3-cur_comp Curve accuracy coefficient for machining condition se- lection I Curve accuracy coefficient for ma chining condition selection I Set the curve accuracy coefficient for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8023 CURVE COMP". * This setting is enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) P3-fwd_g Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Feed forward gain for machining condition selection I Set the feed forward gain for the machining condition sele ction I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#2010 fwd_g". ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) P3-fcorn Corner deceleration angle for machining condition se- lection I Corner deceleration angle for machining condition selection I Set the corner deceleration angle for the machining condi tion selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8020 DCC ANGLE". ---Setting range--- 0 to 89 (°) P3-spcanag Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Cancel angle for machining condition selection I Set the cancel angle for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8026 CANCEL ANG". ---Setting range--- 0 to 180 (°) P3-distth1 Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Chord error 1 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 1 for the machining condition selectio n I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8027 Toler-1". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) P3-distth2 Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Chord error 2 for machining condition selection I Set the chord error 2 for the machining condition selectio n I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8028 Toler-2". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #42612 P3-minute Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Fine segment length for machining condition selection I Set the fine segment length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param- eter "#8030 MINUTE LENGS". ---Setting range--- -1 to 127 (mm) #42613 P3-fairing Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Fairing ON for machining condition selection I Set whether to enable the fairing function for the machini ng condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8033 Fairing ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 #42614 P3-minleng Fairing L for machining condition selection I Fairing L for machining condition selection I Set the fairing length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8029 FairingL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #42615 P3-cordeclen Corner judgment length for machining condition selec- tion I Corner judgment length for machining condition selection I Set the corner judgment length for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the pa- rameter "#8037 CorJudgeL". ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) #42616 P3-sss_prcm SSS/EasySSS control ON for machining condition se- lection I SSS/EasySSS control ON for mach ining conditi on selection I Set whether to enable the SSS/EasySSS control for the machining condition selection I function. This is equivalent to the param eter "#8090 SSS ON". ---Setting range--- 0/1 #42617 P3-std_length Standard length for machining condition selection I Standard length for machining condition selection I Set the standard length for the machining condition select ion I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8091 StdLength". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) #42618 P3-step_length Step width for machining condition selection I Step width for machining condition selection I Set the width of the step for the machining condition se lection I function. This is equivalent to the parameter "#8093 StepLeng". ---Setting range--- -1.000 to 0.100 (mm) #42619 P3-tolerance Tolerance for machining condition selection I Set the tolerance for machining condition selection param eter group for machining condition selection I func- tion. This is equivalent to the parameter "#2659 tolerance". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100.000 (mm) P3-G1bF Machining condition selection I: maximum speed Specify the maximum speed for the machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I function (equivalent to "#1206 G1bF"). ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) P3-Sfilt2_tol Machining condition selection I: tolerance control soft accel/decel filter 2 Specify the tolerance control soft acceleration/decelerat ion filter 2 for the machining condition parameters of the machining condition selection I functi on (equivalent to "#12070 Sfilt2_tol"). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #10501- Monitr main menu 1 to 30 10530 Select the menu Nos. to be displayed on Monitor screen's main menus. Set the menu No. (numbered in the initial order) which y ou wish to set first from the left of Monitor's main menus in #10501, second in the next parameter and likewise afterwards. (E.g.) When you set the parameter #10501 to 11, the menu initially displayed at the left end of Monitor main menu's 2nd page is displayed at the left end of the 1st page. (Note) If you set the No. of menu which is not displayed in the initial state (without setting the menu selection parameters), the menu won't be disp layed after this parameter setting. The menu position of each parameter and th e menu when "0" is set are as follows.  #10501: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Search)  #10502: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Reserch)  #10503: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Edit)  #10504: Fourth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Trace)  #10505: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Check)  #10506: Sixth from left in t he page 1 (when "0" is set: Offset)  #10507: Seventh from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Coord)  #10508: Eighth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: W-shift)  #10509: Ninth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10510: Tenth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Dsp sw.)  #10511: First from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Modal)  #10512: Second from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Tree)  #10513: Third from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Time)  #10514: Fourth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Com var)  #10515: Fifth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Loc var)  #10516: Sixth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: P corr)  #10517: Seventh from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: PLC SW)  #10518: Eighth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: G92 set)  #10519: Ninth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Col stp)  #10520: Tenth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: LdMeter)  #10521: First from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Sp-stby)  #10522: Second from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: TipDisp)  #10523: Third from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: All sp)  #10524: Fourth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10525: Fifth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10526: Sixth from left in t he page 3 (when "0" is set: S-sel)  #10527: Seventh from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Next Ax)  #10528: Eighth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Cnt exp)  #10529: Ninth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Cnt set)  #10530: Tenth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: MST) -- Menu No. -- -1: Not display 0: Default 1: Search 2: Reserch 3: Edit 4: Trace 5: Check 6: Offset 7: Coord 8: W-shift 10: Dsp sw. 11: Modal 12: Tree 13: Time 14: Com var 15: Loc var 16: P corr 17: PLC SW 18: G92 set 19: Col stp 20: LdMeter 21: Sp-stby 22: TipDisp 23: All sp 26: S-sel 27: Next Ax 28: Cnt exp 29: Cnt set 30: MST #10551- Setup main menu 1 to 30 10580 Select the menu Nos. to be disp layed on Setup screen's main menus. Set the menu No. (numbered in the initial order) which yo u wish to set first from the left of Setup's main menus in #10551, second in the next parameter and likewise afterwards. (E.g.) When you set the parameter #10551 to 11, the m enu initially displayed at the left end of Setup main menu's 2nd page is displayed at the left end of the 1st page. (Note) If you set the No. of menu which is not displayed in the initial state (without setting the menu selection parameters), the menu won't be disp layed after this parameter setting. The menu position of each parameter and th e menu when "0" is set are as follows.  #10551: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-ofs)  #10552: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-meas)  #10553: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-reg)  #10554: Fourth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-life)  #10555: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Coord)  #10556: Sixth from left in t he page 1 (when "0" is set: W-meas)  #10557: Seventh from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-Mng.)  #10558: Eighth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: MDI)  #10559: Ninth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Cnt set)  #10560: Tenth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: MST)  #10561: First from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: T-list)  #10562: Second from left in t he page 2 (when "0" is set: Pallet)  #10563: Third from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: User)  #10564: Fourth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10565: Fifth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Storage)  #10566: Sixth from left in t he page 2 (when "0" is set: Surf)  #10567: Seventh from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: MacCond)  #10568: Eighth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10569: Ninth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10570: Tenth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10571: First from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10572: Second from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Barrier)  #10573: Third from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10574: Fourth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10575: Fifth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10576: Sixth from left in t he page 3 (when "0" is set: E-mail)  #10577: Seventh from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10578: Eighth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10579: Ninth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10580: Tenth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display) -- Menu No. -- -1: Not display 0: Default 1: T-ofs 2: T-meas 3: T-reg 4: T-life 5: Coord 6: W-meas 7: T-Mng. 8: MDI 9: Cnt set 10: MST 11: T-list 12: Pallet 13: User 15: Storage 16: Surf 17: MacCond 22: Barrier 26: E-mail #10601- Edit main menu 1 to 30 10630 Select the menu Nos. to be displayed on Edit screen's main menus. Set the menu No. (numbered in the initial order) which you wish to set first from the left of Edit's main menus in #10601, second in the next parameter and likewise afterwards. (E.g.) When you set the parameter #10601 to 11, the m enu initially displayed at the left end of Edit main menu's 2nd page is displayed at the left end of the 1st page. (Note) If you set the No. of menu which is not displayed in the initial state (without setting the menu selection parameters), the menu won't be disp layed after this parameter setting. The menu position of each parameter and th e menu when "0" is set are as follows.  #10601: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Edit)  #10602: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Check)  #10603: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: NAVI (NAVI MILL))  #10604: Fourth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: NAVI (NAVI LATHE))  #10605: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: I/O)  #10606: Sixth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10607: Seventh from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10608: Eighth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10609: Ninth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10610: Tenth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10611: First from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10612: Second from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10613: Third from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10614: Fourth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10615: Fifth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10616: Sixth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10617: Seventh from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10618: Eighth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10619: Ninth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10620: Tenth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10621: First from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10622: Second from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10623: Third from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10624: Fourth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10625: Fifth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10626: Sixth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10627: Seventh from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10628: Eighth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10629: Ninth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)  #10630: Tenth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display) -- Menu No. -- -1: Not display 0: Default 1: Edit 2: Check 3: NAVI (NAVI MILL) 4: NAVI (NAVI LATHE) 5: I/O tolerance Tolerance Specify a tolerance (tolerable error) to be used under tolerance control. Set a tolerable error for fine segment program created by CAM. (U sually around 0.01(mm)) If 0.000 is set, it is operated with the tolerance of 0.01(mm). When designating the toleranc e amount with the ", K address", this parameter is not used. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) G1bF Maximum speed Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre-in terpolation acceleration/deceleration. When high-accuracy control time cons tant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed clamp speed of each axis. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) G1btL Time constant Set a cutting feed time constant when applyi ng pre-interpolation a cceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1ms. Speed G1bF Time G1btL ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 30000 (ms) Cutting feed Acc Cu tting feed acceleration Displays cutting feed acceleration. SfiltG1 G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed acceleration/de- celeration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for t he S-pattern filter set in "#1568 Sfil tG1" (G01 soft acceleration/decel- eration filter). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) Jerk_filtG1 G01 jerk filter Specify the time constant of filter that is used for smoothing the change of jerk when pre-interpolation accel- eration/deceleration is performed in cutting feed. This filter causes no path error, as the filter is applied to the result ant speed calculated before interpolation. If you specify the jerk filter ti me constant, the time constants of each filter will be as follows: - S-shape filter time constant "#1568 SfiltG1" - "Jerk_filtG1" - Jerk filter time constant "Jerk_filtG1" ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) #12066 Tolerance ctrl ON Select whether to enable the tolerance control. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) Tolerance control is available only under SSS control. To enable this function, set "#8090 SSS ON" to "1". #12070 Sfilt2_tol Tolerance control: So ft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Specify the time constant of the filt er that smoothes out fluctuations in acceleration under the tolerance con- trol. Basically set to 0. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) 15 Machine Parameters OFF after the settings. Turn the power OFF and ON to SYS_ON System validation setup Select the existence of PLC axes and part systems. 0: Not exist 1: Exist axisno Number of axes Set the number of control axes and PLC axes. A total of 32 axes can be set. Control axis: 0 to 16 PLC axis: 0 to 8 When set to "0", the number of co ntrol axes in the part system will be "0 ". Do not set the number of control axes of the first part system to "0". (Note) The setting range differs according to the model. iunit Input setup unit Select the input setting value for each part system and the PLC axis. Increments in parameters will follow this selection. ---Setting range--- B: 1 µm C: 0.1 μ m D: 0.01 μ m (10nm) E: 0.001 μ m (1nm) ctrl_unit Control unit Set the unit for the NC internal position data, data communicated between the NC and drive unit, and the servo movement data. Some parameter units, such as the pitch erro r and backlash, follow this specification. The standard value is "D"; however, set the optimum value according to the machine model and specifica- tions. B: 1 µm C: 0.1 μ m D: 0.01 μ m (10nm) E: 0.001 μ m (1nm) plcunit PLC unit Select the PLC interface setting and display increment. The PLC interface setting and display increment will follow this specification. Note th at the PLC axis will follow "#1003 iunit". ---Setting range--- B: 1 µm C: 0.1 μ m D: 0.01 μ m (10nm) E: 0.001 μ m (1nm) #1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit Select the machine erro r compensation setting and display increment. The parameters related to machine error compensation (backlash, pitc h error compensation, etc.) and PLC interface (external machine coordinate system compensation ) will follow this selection. ---Setting range--- B: 1 µm C: 0.1 μ m D: 0.01 μ m (10nm) E: 0.001 μ m (1nm) #1007 System type select System type select Select the NC system type. 0: Machining center system (M system) 1: Lathe system (L system) (Note 1) If the setting value is out of range, M system will be selected. #1025 l_plane Initial plane selection Select the plane to be selected when the power is turned ON or reset. When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed (X -Y plane).e model and specifications. 1: X-Y plane (G17 command state) 2: Z-X plane (G18 command state) 3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state) #1026 base_I Base axis I Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z #1027 base_J Base axis J Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z base_K Base axis K Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane. Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname". If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank. Normally, when X, Y and Z are specif ied respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be estab- lished: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Or specify any other axis name desired. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z aux_I Flat axis I Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1026 base_I". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z aux_J Flat axis J Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1027 base_J". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z aux_K Flat axis K Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1028 base_K". ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z cmdtyp Command type Set the G code list and compensation type for programs. 1: List1 (for M) Type I (one compensation amount for one compensation No.) 2: List1 (for M) Type II (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.) 3: List2 (for L) Type III (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.) 4: List3 (for L) Ditto 5: List4 (for special L) Ditto 6: List5 (for special L) Ditto 7: List6 (for special L) Ditto 8: List7 (for special L) Ditto 9: List8 (for M) M2 form at type Type I (one compensation amount for one compensation No.) 10: List8 (for M) M2 form at type Type II (shape and wear compensation amounts for one compensation No.) There are some items in the specific ations that can be used or cannot be used according to the value set in this parameter. The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type. (Note) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned ON. So always execute format. The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again. Setting order (1) cmdtyp changeover -> (2) Turn power ON again -> (3) Format -> (4) Turn power ON again (Note) Compensation type III can be selected for M system by setting #1046. #1073 I_Absm Initial absolute setting Select the mode (absolute or incremental) at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Incremental setting 1: Absolute setting #1074 l_Sync Initial synchronous feed Select the feedrate mode at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute) 1: Synchronous feed (feed per revolution) #1075 I_G00 Initial G00 Select the linear command mode at turning ON the power or reset. 0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state) 1: Positioning (G00 command state) #1076 Abslnc ABS/INC address (for L system only) Select the command method for the absolute and incremental commands. The absolute command/incremental command can be i ssued by using the absolute command address and incremental command address for the same axis. 0: Use G command for the absolute and incremental commands. 1: Use axis name for the absolute and incremental commands. (The axis name in "#1013 axname" will be the absolu te command, "#1014 incax" will be the incremental command.) #1085 G00Drn G00 dry run Select whether to apply dry run (feed at manual settin g speed instead of command feedrate) to the G00 com- mand. 0: Not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate) 1: Apply to G00. (move at manual setting speed) #1086 G0lntp G00 non-interpolation Select the G00 travel path type. 0: Move linearly toward the end point. (interpolation type) 1: Move to the end point of each axis at the rapi d traverse feedrate for eac h axis. (non-interpolation) (Note) If this parameter is set to "1 ", neither of the following functions will be available: rapid traverse con- stant-gradient acceleration/deceleration and rapid trav erse constant-gradient multi-step acceleration/decel- eration. #1109 subs_M Validate substitute M code Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M code. 0: Disable substitute M code 1: Enable subs titute M code #1110 M96_M M96 substitute M code Set an M code to replace M96 when "#1109 subs_M" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 3 to 97 (excluding 30) #1111 M97_M M97 substitute M code Specify an M code to replace M97 when "#1109 subs_M" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 3 to 97 (excluding 30) I_G611 Initial hi-precis Select the modal state at power ON from among the following: high-accuracy control mode, high-speed high- accuracy control I mode, high-speed high-accuracy cont rol II mode or high-speed high-accuracy control III mode. 0: G08P0/G64 (cutting) mode 1: G08P1/G61.1 (high-accuracy control) mode 2: G05.1Q1 (high-speed high-accuracy control I) mode 3: G05P10000 (high-speed high-accuracy control II) mode 4: G05P20000 (high-speed high-accuracy control III) mode rstint Reset initial Select whether to initialize (power ON state) the modals by resetting. 0: Not initialize modal state 1: Initialize modal state part system name Part system name Set the name of each part system. This must be set only w hen using multi-part system. This name will be displayed on the screen only when the part systems must be identified. Use 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers. ---Setting range--- 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers M2name Second miscellaneous code Set this address code when using the 2nd miscellaneous command. Set an address with A, B or C that is not used for "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax". ---Setting range--- A, B, C taprov Tap return override Set the tap return override value for the synchronous tapping. When "0" is set, it will be regarded as 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) tapovr Tap return override Set the override value when leaving the tap end point in the synchronous tapping cycle. When "0" is set, it will be regarded as 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (%) dwlskp G04 skip condition Set the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) command. PLC interface input signal Skip3 Skip2 Skip1 0: - - - 1: - - * 2: - * - 3: - * * 4: * - - 5: * - * 6: * * - 7: * * * (*: Enable, -: Disable) #1174 skip_F G31 skip speed Set the feedrate when there is no F command in the program at G31 (skip) command. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1175 skip1 G31.1 skip condition Designate the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.1. The setting method is same as "#1173 dwlskp". #1176 skip1f G31.1 skip speed Set the skip feedrate in multi-step skip G31.1. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1177 skip2 G31.2 skip condition Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.2. The setting method is same as "#1173 dwlskp". #1178 skip2f G31.2 skip speed Set the skip feedrate in multi-step skip G31.2. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1179 skip3 G31.3 skip condition Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.3. The setting method is same as "#1173 dwlskp". #1180 skip3f G31.3 skip speed Set the skip feedrate in multi-step skip G31.3. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1181 G96_ax Constant surface speed axis Select the axis to be targeted for constant surface speed control. 0: Program setting will be disabled, and the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis 1: 1st axis 2: 2nd axis 3: 3rd axis : 16: 16th axis However, when set to other than "0", the priority will be on the program setting. #1182 thr_F Thread cutting speed Set the retract speed when not using chamfering in the thread cutting cycle. 0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate 1 to 60000 mm/min: Setting feedrate ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (mm/min) #1183 clmp_M M code for clamp Set the M code for C axis clamp in hole drilling cycle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 clmp_D Dwelling time after ou tputting M code for unclamp Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for C axis unclamp in hole drilling cycle. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (s) spd_F1 F1 digit feedrate F1 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) spd_F2 F1 digit feedrate F2 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) spd_F3 F1 digit feedrate F3 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) spd_F4 F1 digit feedrate F4 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) spd_F5 F1 digit feedrate F5 Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1"). Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min). When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be increased/de- creased by operating the manual handle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) s_xcnt Validate inclined axis control (for L system only) Select whether to enable or disable inclined axis control. 0: Disable inclined axis control 1: Enable inclined axis control s_angl Inclination angle (for L system only) Set the inclination angle ( θ ). (Note) When set to "0", the angle determ ined by three-side setting will be applied. ---Setting range--- -80.000 to 80.000 (°) #1192 s_zrmv Compensation at reference position return (for L sys- tem only) Select whether to perform compensatio n for the basic axis corresponding to the inclined axis at reference position return. 0: Perform compensation 1: Not perform compensation #1193 inpos Deceleration check method 1 The setting is selected with th e parameter "#1306 InpsTyp". 0: Deceleration check method 1 Select the deceleration check method for G0. 0: Command deceleration check 1: In-position check 2: Smoothing check 1: Validate in-position check Specify the deceleration confirmation meth od for the positioning or cutting command. 0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check 1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check 2: G0, G1+G9 Smoothing check #1194 H_acdc Time constant 0 for handle feed Select the time constant for manual handle feed. 0: Use time constant for G01 1: Time constant 0 (step) #1195 Mmac Macro call for M command Select whether to enable or disable M command macro call of user macro. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1196 Smac Macro call for S command Select whether to enable or disable S command macro call of user macro. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1197 Tmac Macro call by command T Select whether to enable a call of user macro using command T. 0: Disable macro call 1: Enable macro call, irrespective of the number of command T digits 2: Enable macro call when a tool No. (excluding 0) is given to the upper digit of command T 3: Enable macro call when a tool No. (including 0) is given to the upper digit of command T. #1198 M2mac Macro call with 2nd miscellaneous code Select whether to enable or disable 2nd misc ellaneous command macro call of user macro. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1199 Sselect Select init ial spindle control Select the initial condition of spindle control after power is turned ON. 0: 1st spindle control mode (G43.1) 1: 2nd spindle control mode (G44.1) 2: All spindle simultaneo usly control mode (G47.1) (Note) While G43.1 or G44.1 command is given, the spindle No. is sele cted with "#12090 SnG43.1" or "#1534 SnG44.1". G0_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G0 Select the acceleration and deceleration ty pe when a rapid traverse command is issued. 0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type) 1: Acceleration and deceleration wit h a constant angle of inclination (Note) When rapid traverse constant-gradient multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, this parameter will be invalid. G1_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G1 Select the acceleration and deceleration type when a linear interpolation command is issued. 0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type) 1: Acceleration and deceleration wit h a constant angle of inclination mirofs Distance between faci ng turrets (for L system only) Set the distance between tools (edges) (between facing turrets). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) TmirS1 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command (for L system only) Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 1 to 32, as facing turrets for T code mirror image. ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF TmirS2 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command (for L system only) Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 33 to 64, as facing turrets for T code mirror image. ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF G0bdcc Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation 0: Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied to G00. 1: Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is app lied to G00 even in the high accuracy control mode. 2: Rapid traverse constant-gradient multi- step acceleration/deceleration is enabled. When the multi-part system simultane ous high-accuracy control option is enabled, "1" can be set for the 2nd part system and the following. G1bF Maximum speed Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre-in terpolation acceleration/deceleration. When high-accuracy control time cons tant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed clamp speed of each axis. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) #1207 G1btL Time constant Set a cutting feed time constant when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1ms. Speed G1bF Time G1btL ---Setting range--- Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 5000 (ms) With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 1 to 30000 (ms) Cutting feed Acc Cu tting feed acceleration Displays cutting feed acceleration. #1208 RCK Arc radius error compensation factor Set a coefficient for arc radius error compensation. An arc radius error compensation amount can be increased or decreased between -60.0 and +20.0%. ---Setting range--- -60.0 to +20.0 (%) #1209 cirdcc Arc deceleration speed Set the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) RstGmd Modal G code reset Select whether to initialize G code group modals and H and D codes, which corresponds to bits as follows, when the system is reset. 0: Initialize. 1: Not initialize. <Description of bits for M system> 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0000 00 ** 0 * 00 **** FEDC BA98 7654 3210 ** 0 ** 0 * 0 **** 0 *** bit 1F: (Not used) bit 1E: (Not used) bit 1D: (Not used) bit 1C: (Not used) bit 1B: (Not used) bit 1A: (Not used) bit 19: Spindle clamp rota tion speed initialization bit 18: H, D codes initialization bit 17: (Not used) bit 16: Group23 bit 15: (Not used) bit 14: (Not used) bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization bit 12: Group 19 G command mirror modal initialization bit 11: Group 18 Polar coordinate command modal initialization bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization bit F: Group 16 Retains inclined surface machining modal bit E: Group 15 Normal line control modal initialization bit D: (Not used) bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordi nate system modal initialization bit A: (Not used) bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal initialization bit 8: (Not used) bit 7: Group 8 Length compensation modal initialization bit 6: Group 7 Radius compensation modal initialization bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization bit 3: (Not used) bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and the D code indicates the tool radius compensation number. When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group 8 G modal are retained. When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G modal are retained. <Description of bits for L system> 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0000 00 * 0 000 0 * 0 ** FEDC BA98 7654 3210 * * 0 ** 0 * 00 *** **** bit 1F: (Not used) bit 1E: (Not used) bit 1D: (Not used) bit 1C: (Not used) bit 1B: (Not used) bit 1A: (Not used) bit 19: Spindle clamp rotation speed initialization bit 18: (Not used) bit 17: (Not used) bit 16: (Not used) bit 15: (Not used) bit 14: (Not used) bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization bit 12: (Not used) bit 11: Group 18 Balance cut initialization bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization bit F: Group 16 Retains inclined surface machining modal bit E: Group 15 Facing turret mirror image initialization bit D: (Not used) bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordi nate system modal initialization bit A: (Not used) bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle retu rn command moda l initialization bit 8: (Not used) bit 7: (Not used) bit 6: Group 7 Nose R compensation modal initialization bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization bit 3: Group 4 Barrier check modal initialization bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization proaxy Side 1 of inclination angle (for L system only) Specify the length of the side of the triangle formed by the tilt angle in line with the rectangular coordinate system of the inclined axis. ---Setting range--- -9999.999 to 9999.999 macaxy Side 2 of inclination angle (for L system only) Specify the length of the side of the tr iangle formed by the tilt angle in line with the actual axis of the inclined axis. ---Setting range--- -9999.999 to 9999.999 macaxx Side 3 of inclination angle (for L system only) Specify the length of the side of the triangle formed by th e tilt angle in line with the actual axis of the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis. ---Setting range--- -9999.999 to 9999.999 extdcc External deceleration speed Set the upper limit value of the feedrate wh en the external deceleration signals are enabled. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999999 (mm/min) polyax Rotational tool axis number Specify the number of the rotational tool axis (servo axis) used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set "0" when not using polygon machining (spindle-servo axis), or when using spindle-spindle polygon ma- chining. A value exceeding the base specification parameter "#1002 axisno" cannot be specified. This parameter is valid when the G code system is 1, 6 or 7 ("1", "2", "7" or "8" is set in the parameter "#1037 cmdtyp"). ---Setting range--- 0 to controlled axis number G0Ipfg G1 -> G0 deceleration check Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G0. 0: Not perform 1: Perform G1Ipfg G1 -> G1 deceleration check Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G1. 0: Not perform 1: Perform ckref2 Second reference position return check Select whether the check is carried out at the specified position in manual second reference position return mode upon completion of spindle orientation or at second reference position return interlock signal. 0: Upon completion of spindle orientation 1: At second reference position return interlock signal F1_FM Upper limit of F 1-digit feedrate Set the maximum value up to which the F 1-digit feedrate can be changed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) F1_K F 1-digit feedrate change constant Set the constant that determines the speed change ra te per manual handle graduation in F 1-digit feedrate change mode. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #1510 DOOR_H Shorten door interlock II axis stop time Select whether to shorten the time during wh ich the axis is stopped when the door is opened. 0: Use the conventional axis stop time. 1: Shorten the axis stop time. (Note) When the door interlock II signal is input vi a a ladder, the conventional axis stop time will be used. #1511 DOORPm Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each part system Set the fixed device number for door interl ock II signal input fo r each part system. A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified. (Except X100.) Device number "000" is invalid. Set device number "100" when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input. Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor" (Door interlock II for each part system) ---Setting range--- 000 to 2FF (hexadecimal) #1512 DOORPs Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each part system Set the fixed device number for door interl ock II signal input fo r each part system. (Set the same value as that of "#1155 DOOR_m".) Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor" (Door interlock II for each part system) ---Setting range--- 000 to 2FF (hexadecimal) #1513 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection Set the M code for the synchronous tapping selection. Select the synchronous tapping mode using the miscell aneous function code of the value set in this param- eter. The M function command can be issued immediately before the tap command or in the same block. This function is valid only when "1" is set in "#1272 ext08/bit1" (M-function synchronous tap cycle). (Note) Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #1514 expLinax Exponential function interpolation linear axis Set the axis name for the linear axis us ed in exponential function interpolation. ---Setting range--- A to Z #1515 expRotax Exponential function interpolation rotary axis Set the axis name for the rotary axis used in exponential function interpolation. ---Setting range--- A to Z #1516 mill_ax Milling axis name Set the name of the rotary axis used in milling interpolation. Only one rotary axis can be set. When there is no E command in issuing the G12.1 command, this parameter will be followed. ---Setting range--- A to Z #1517 mill_C Milling interpolation hypothetical axis name Select the hypothetical axis comm and name for milling interpolation. When there is no D command in issuing the milling interpolation command, this parameter will be followed. 0: Y axis command 1: Command rotary axis name. polm Spindle-spindle polygon Workpiece spindle No. Set the name or No. of the spindle which controls the workpiece used in spindle-spindle polygon machining. (Note 1) The 1st spindle will be selected when "0" is set. (Note 2) There are 2 spindle designation methods: spindle No. method and spindle name method. When names (any of 1 to 9) are set by the parameter "#3077 Sname" (Spindle command name) for all spindles, spindle name method is applied. Otherwise, spindle No. method is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 pols Spindle-spindle polygon Tool spindle No. Set the name or No. of the spindle which controls the rotary tool used in spindle-spindle polygon machining. (Note 1) The 2nd spindle will be selected when "0" is set. (Note 2) There are 2 spindle designation methods: spindle No. method and spindle name method. When names (any of 1 to 9) are set by the parameter "#3077 Sname" (Spindle command name) for all spindles, spindle name method is applied. Otherwise, spindle No. method is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 Tchg34 Additional axis tool compensation operation (for L sys- tem only) Select axis to carry out the additi onal axis' tool compensation function. 0: 3rd axis. 1: 4th axis. C_min Minimum turning angle Set the minimum turning angle of the normal line contro l axis at the block joint during normal line control. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 360.000 (°) (Input setting increment applies) C_axis Normal line control axis Set the number of the axis for normal line control. Set a rotary axis No. 0: Normal line control disabled 1 to 16: Axis No. (number of control axes) C_feed Normal line control axis turning speed Set the turning speed of the normal line control ax is at the block joint during normal line control. Set a value that does not exceed the normal line control axis' clamp speed ("#2002 clamp"). This is enabled during the normal line control type I. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100000 (°/min) C_type Normal line control type Select the normal line control type. 0: Normal line control type I 1: Normal line control type II millPax Pole coordina te linear axis name Set the linear axis name used fo r pole coordinate interpolation. ---Setting range--- Axis names such as X, Y or Z #1534 SnG44.1 Spindle No. for G44.1 command Specify which spindle to be selected when G44.1 is commanded. <Spindle No. type> Specify by the spindle No. 1 to 8. The 2nd spindle is selected if you specify a nonexistent spindle No. <Spindle name type> Specify by the spindle name 1 to 9. The 2nd spindle is selected if you specify a nonexistent spindle name. (Note) When names (any of 1 to 9) are for all spi ndles by the parameter "#3077 Sname" (Spindle command name), "Spindle name type" is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 #1535 C_leng Minimum turning movement amount Set the minimum turning movement amount of the norma l line control axis at the block joint during normal line control. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applies) #1537 crsax[1] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during th e mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1538 crsax[2] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during th e mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1539 crsax[3] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during th e mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1540 crsax[4] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during th e mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) crsax[5] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during the mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) crsax[6] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during the mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) crsax[7] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during the mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) crsax[8] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis Set the axis to be interchanged during the mixed control (cross axis control). Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or t he name of the axis to be shifted to that part system. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) IvOMin Involute interpolation override lower limit value Set the lower limit of the override for involute interpolation override. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) IvAMax Involute interpolation allowable acceleration speed Set the maximum acceleration (time constant) for the acceleration clamping during involute interpolation. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (ms) IvFMin Involute interpolation minimum feedrate Set the minimum feedrate for the accelera tion clamping during involute interpolation. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min) 3Dcdc Switch workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordi- nate conversion The workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordinate conversion is switched to the workpiece coordinate system or G68 program coordinate system. 0: Workpiece coordinate system 1: G68 program coordinate system (Note) The special display unit's absolute coordinates also follow this parameter setting. #1562 3Dremc Switch remaining command display during 3D coordi- nate conversion The remaining command display during 3D coordinate c onversion is switched to the workpiece coordinate system or G68 program coordinate system. 0: Workpiece coordinate system 1: G68 program coordinate system #1563 3Dcdrc Switch coordinate reading during 3D coordinate con- version The coordinate system of the work piece/skip coordinate read value in the 3D coordinate conversion modal is switched. 0: G68 program coordinate system 1: Workpiece (local) coordinate system #1564 3Dspd Hole drilling speed during 3D coordinate conversion Set the rapid traverse rate for the hole drilling cycle during 3D coordinate conversion. 0: The cutting feed clamp speed is used. Other than 0: The set speed is used. Note that if the rapid traverse rate is exceeded, the speed will be clamped at the rapid traverse rate. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000mm/min #1565 helgear Helical machining base axis Set the base axis for helix angle calculation in helic al machining. When no setting, Z axis will be used. ---Setting range--- Axis name such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C #1566 3DSelctDrillaxMode Switch drill axis's mode from rapid traverse during 3D coordinate conversion Switch the rapid traverse mode in non-drilling blocks among a drilling cycle to the cutting feed mode during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion. 0: Rapid traverse mode. The speed follows the setting of "#2001 rapid". 1: Cutting feed mode. The speed follows the setting of "#1564 3Dspd". #1568 SfiltG1 G01 soft acceler ation/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for smoo thly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed acceleration/de- celeration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for t he S-pattern filter set in "#1568 Sf iltG1" (G01 soft acceleration/decel- eration filter). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #1569 SfiltG0 G00 soft acceler ation/deceleration filter Set the filter time constant for sm oothly changing the acceleration rate for the rapid traverse acceleration/ deceleration in pre-interpolat ion acceleration/deceleration. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) #1570 Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Set the filter time constant for smoo thly changing the acceleration rate in pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration. This will be disabled when "0" or "1" is set. - Notch frequency Hz Displays the notch frequency (Hz) for the S-shape filter set in "#1570 Sfilt2" (Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) SSSdis SSS control adjustment coefficient fixe d value selec- tion Fix the shape recognition range for SSS control. ---Setting range--- 0/1 Cirorp Arc command overlap This eliminates speed fluctuations at the join t of the arc and straight line and arc and arc. Set as a bit unit. 0: Do not overlap the arc command blocks 1: Overlap the arc command blocks bit0: Arc command during high-speed high-accuracy control II bit1: Arc command during high-speed machining mode II bit2: Arc command during high-accuracy control (G61.1) bit3: Arc command during cutting mode (G64) The line command block and arc command block won't be overlapped during G61.2 mo dal regardless of this setting. (Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control. ---Setting range--- 0 to F (HEX) Ret1 Return type 1 Select the axis to be move d later after tool return. This is referred to with the movement path (transit point #1 -> interrupt point). Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit. bit0: Transit point #1 1st axis bit1: Transit point #1 2nd axis bit2: Transit point #1 3rd axis bit3: Transit point #1 4th axis bit4: Transit point #1 5th axis bit5: Transit point #1 6th axis bit6: Transit point #1 7th axis bit7: Transit point #1 8th axis ---Setting range--- 00000000 to 11111111 (Binary) #1574 Ret2 Return type 2 Select the axis to be moved later after tool return. This is referred to with the movement path (return start point -> transit point #2). Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit. bit0: Transit point #2 1st axis bit1: Transit point #2 2nd axis bit2: Transit point #2 3rd axis bit3: Transit point #2 4th axis bit4: Transit point #2 5th axis bit5: Transit point #2 6th axis bit6: Transit point #2 7th axis bit7: Transit point #2 8th axis ---Setting range--- 00000000 to 11111111 (Binary) #1595 hobm Hobbing rotary tool axis No. Specify the spindle No. or spindle name of rotary t ool in "MITSUBISHI CNC Spec ial Format(G81.4)" of hob- bing command. (Note) There are 2 spindle designation methods: sp indle No. method and spindle name method. When names (any of 1 to 9) are set by the parameter " #3077 Sname" (Spindle command name) for all spindles, spindle name method is applied. Otherwise, spindle No. method is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 #1596 hobs Hobbing workpiece axis No. Specify the NC axis No. of workpiece axis (in a part system) in "MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format (G81.4)" of hobbing command. This parameter is valid when "#1292 ext28/bit4 (Ho bbing workpiece axis selection switch)" is "0". ---Setting range--- 1 to the number of NC axes (in a part system) #1597 rpcNoMove No axis travel with compensation amount change for rotary axis workpiece position Set wether to enable the axis travel for the compensation change when the compensation amount of rotary axis workpiece position is changed. 0: Enable 1: Disable * Regardless of the parameter setting, t he axis travel is not enabled at reset. #1599 3DEndPointErr End point error in 3D coordinate conversion Specify the tolerable range for an error of the end point of travel command which is deviated from the tool path direction during the G68.1 ,E1 command. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) #12001 ManualB RectanA xH Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersect- ing part system axis name (horizontal) Set the part system axis name ("#1013 ax name") for the two axes that intersec t with the rotary axis direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant spe ed will be applied without using constant surface speed control. ---Setting range--- Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C ManualB RectanA xV Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersect- ing part system axis name (vertical) Set the part system axis name ("#1013 axname") for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant spe ed will be applied without using constant surface speed control. ---Setting range--- Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C ManualB RotCent erH Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center machine posi tion (horizontal) Set the machine coordinate posit ion (horizontal axis) at the center of the rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) ManualB RotCent erV Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center machine posi tion (vertical) Set the machine coordinate position (vertical axis) at the center of the rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) Mfig Number of M Set the number of M codes that can be specified within the same block. ---Setting range--- 1 to 4 Mbin M binary Data type 0: BCD Data type 1: Unsigned binary Data type -1: Singed binary <For unsigned binary> The absolute value "1" is output for "-1". <For singed binary> "-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF". ---Setting range--- Data type (-1,0,1) Sfig Number of S Set the number of spindles. (Note 1) The setting range differs according to the model. (Note 2) "Sfig" is set in the range of 1 to 8. However, the number of outputs by "S fig" cannot be controlled. Thus, only one S command is output regardless of the Sfig setting value. ---Setting range--- 1 to 8 #12008 Sbin S binary Data type 0: BCD Data type 1: Unsigned binary Data type -1: Singed binary <For unsigned binary> The absolute value "1" is output for "-1". <For singed binary> "-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF". (Note 1) Sbin can be set with "-1", "0" and "1 ", but the S command c annot be BCD output. If BCD (0) is selected for Sbin, it will be handled as a singed binary (-1). ---Setting range--- Data type (-1,0,1) #12009 Tfig Number of T Set the number of T codes that can be specified within the same block. ---Setting range--- 1 to 4 #12010 Tbin T binary Data type 0: BCD Data type 1: Unsigned binary Data type -1: Singed binary <For unsigned binary> The absolute value "1" is output for "-1". <For singed binary> "-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF". ---Setting range--- Data type (-1,0,1) #12011 Bfig Number of B Set the number of B codes that ca n be specified within the same block. ---Setting range--- 1 to 4 #12012 Bbin B binary Data type 0: BCD Data type 1: Unsigned binary Data type -1: Singed binary <For unsigned binary> The absolute value "1" is output for "-1". <For singed binary> "-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF". ---Setting range--- Data type (-1,0,1) G33.n rot G33.n rotary axis name Select the axis to use as C axis with its axis name. ---Setting range--- A to Z G33.n ovr G33.n override Not used. skipF_spec bit0: Skip speed spec: Cutting feed override ON Select whether to enable cutting feed override for a skip command. 0: Disable cutting feed override 1: Enable cutting feed override bit1: Skip speed spec: Dry run ON Select whether to enable dry run for a skip command. 0: Disable dry run 1: Enable dry run bit2: Skip speed spec: Feed rate selection Select the feed rate for a skip command. 0: A feed rate given to address F of the G31 block. If the G31 block has no address F, the value specified by "#1174 skip_F" is applied. In either case the F modal status is unchanged. 1: A feed rate programmed as an F modal value. F modal status is updated by the address F given to the G31 block. Mblkstp1 Pre-read prohibited M code 1 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mblkstp2 Pre-read prohibited M code 2 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mblkstp3 Pre-read prohibited M code 3 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mblkstp4 Pre-read prohibited M code 4 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mblkstp5 Pre-read prohibited M code 5 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mblkstp6 Pre-read prohibited M code 6 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12029 Mblkstp7 Pre-read prohibited M code 7 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12030 Mblkstp8 Pre-read prohibited M code 8 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12031 Mblkstp9 Pre-read prohibited M code 9 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12032 Mblkstp10 Pre-read prohibited M code 10 Set M codes to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12033 MblkstpMin1 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 1 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12034 MblkstpMax1 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 1 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12035 MblkstpMin2 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 2 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12036 MblkstpMax2 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 2 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12037 MblkstpMin3 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 3 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12038 MblkstpMax3 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 3 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMin4 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 4 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMax4 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 4 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMin5 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 5 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMax5 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 5 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMin6 Minimum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 6 Set the minimum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 MblkstpMax6 Maximum value of the pre-read prohibited M code range setting 6 Set the maximum value of the M code to which pre-read will not be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 SBS_no Sub part system I identification No. Specify the ID number (address B val ue) to be used when ac tivating this part system as a sub part system during G122 command. Set to "0" when this part system is not used as a sub part system. ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 SBS_pro Sub part system I standard program No. Specify the No. of program to be called when activating this part syst em as a sub part system during G122 command. This parameter setting is used when a progra m designation (address A val ue/<file name>) is omit- ted. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #12051 Jerk_filtG1 G01 jerk filter Specify the time const ant of filter that is used for smoothing th e change of jerk when pre-interpolation accel- eration/deceleration is performed in cutting feed. This filter causes no path error, as the filter is ap plied to the resultant speed calculated before interpolation. If you specify the jerk filter time constant, the time constants of each filter will be as follows: - S-shape filter time constant "#1568 SfiltG1" - "Jerk_filtG1" - Jerk filter time constant "Jerk_filtG1" ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) #12052 Jerk_filtG0 G00 jerk filter Specify the time const ant of filter that is used for smoothing th e change of jerk when pre-interpolation accel- eration/deceleration is performed in cutting feed. This filter causes no path error, as the filter is ap plied to the resultant speed calculated before interpolation. If you specify the jerk filter time constant, the time constants of each filter will be as follows: - S-shape filter time constant "#1569 SfiltG0" - "Jerk_filtG0" - Jerk filter time constant "Jerk_filtG0" ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) #12053 EachAxAccCntrl Enable axis-specific acceleration tolerance control Select how to calculate the deceleration speed for a co rner between the blocks where the high-accuracy con- trol is enabled. 0: Optimal corner deceleration (calculate the deceleration speed using the acce leration tolerance common for all the axes determined by G1bF and G1btL) 1: Axis-specific acceleration tolerance control (calculate the deceleration speed using acceleration tolerances of each axis determined by G1bFx and G1btLx) #12054 Tol-Ofsnum Number of tool offset sets for allocation Specify the number of offset sets to be allocated when the arbitrary alloca tion method is selected for offset sets. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 #12055 Tol-lifenum Number of life management tools for allocation Specify the number of life management tools to be allocated when the arbitrary allocation method is selected for life management tools. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 #12056 I_G0ol Enable G00 initial rapid traverse block overlap Select the state (enabled or di sabled) of the rapid traverse bl ock overlap function after reset. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #12057 OT_prechkON Enabling stroke check before travel for stored stroke limit Select the entry inhibition area for stroke check before travel. 0: Perform stroke check before trav el for the area specified by G22. 1: Perform stroke check before travel for the area set by the stored stroke limit function, with or without G22. OT_prechkTYPE Stroke check before travel for skip and automatic tool length measurement Select whether to enable or disable the stroke check bef ore travel for skip (G31 or G31.n) and automatic tool length measurement (G37). 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) This parameter is enabled when #12057=1 a nd the option "Stroke check before travel" is ON. SBS_name Sub part system name Specify each sub part system name. This name is displayed when the pa rt system acts as a sub part system. ---Setting range--- 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers VblAccPreInt Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration ON Select whether to enable variable-acceleration pre-inte rpolation acceleration/deceleration control while high- accuracy control is ON. 0: Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration (Apply the acceleration rate that is determi ned by G1bF and G1btL and is common for all the axes) 1: Variable-acceleration pre-interp olation acceleration/deceleration (Apply the acceleration rate that is determined by G1bFx and G1btLx for each axis) (Note) Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acce leration/deceleration is a function available under SSS control. To enable this function, set "#8090 SSS ON" to "1". Sfilt2_tol Tolerance control: Soft acceleration/decel eration filter 2 Specify the time constant of the filt er that smoothes out fluctuations in acceleration under the tolerance con- trol. Basically set to 0. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) adr_abs[1]-[8] Command address for arbitrary axis exchange Specify the axis address to be given in an ar bitrary axis exchange command for the part system. (Note 1) This parameter is disabled when t he arbitrary axis exchange function is unused. (Note 2) Do not give an identical name to two or more of the parameters adr_abs[1] to adr_abs[8]. (Note 3) Do not leave any unspecified parame ter in the middle between adr_abs[1] and [8]. (Note 4) Set the addresses of adr_abs[ ] in the same order as of the axis names (#1013 axname). Note that you can set a nonexistent axis name in the middle. (Note 5) If there are 9 or more control axes per part system, specify the axis address that is programmed based on the basic axis configuration. ---Setting range--- Axis address such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B and C adr_inc[1]-[8] Incremental command address for arbitrary axis ex- change Specify the incremental command address for each of the axes to be used in an arbitrary axis exchange com- mand. (Note 1) This parameter is disabled when t he arbitrary axis exchange function is unused. (Note 2) There is no need to set this parameter when command type (absolute or incremental) is not distin- guished by the axis address (when "#1076 Abslnc" = "0"). (Note 3) Do not give an identical name to two or more of the parameters adr_inc[1] to adr_inc[8]. If there is any overlap, priority is given in the a scending order (adr_inc[1] to adr_inc[8]). ---Setting range--- Axis address such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B and C #12088 Drn_F Dry run speed Specify a dry run speed for each part system. When 0 is set, the manual feed rate selected by Ma nual feedrate method selection (JVS) signal is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #12089 M2adr 2nd miscellaneous function address type Select the address type of the 2nd miscellaneous function. 0: One-letter command for the 2nd miscellaneous function 1: Two-letter command for the 2nd miscellaneous function #12090 SnG43.1 Spindle designation for G43.1 Specify which spindle to be selected when G43.1 is commanded. <Spindle No. type> Specify by the spindle No. 1 to 8. The 1st spindle is selected if you specify a nonexistent spindle No. <Spindle name type> Specify by the spindle name 1 to 9. The 1st spindle is selected if you specify a nonexistent spindle name. (Note) When names (any of 1 to 9) are for all spi ndles by the parameter "#3077 Sname" (Spindle command name), "Spindle name type" is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 #12103 2nd add T-ofs ON 2nd additional axis tool offset ON (for L system only) Select whether to enable tool of fset on the 2nd additional axis. 0: Disable 1: Enable #12104 2nd add T-ofs set 2nd additional axis tool offset setting (for L system on- ly) Select on which axis to perform the 2nd additional axis tool offset. Specify the axis address set in "#1013 axname". ---Setting range--- X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C #12105 C_minTyp Operation selection of minimum turning angle or less Specify the operation when the turning angle is set the minimum turning angle (#1521 C_min) or less and the turning operation is not inserted, in the seams of the ar c blocks during normal line control. 0: Interpolate before reaching arc end point. 1: Do not interpolate. #12110 Ret3 Return type Specify the axis to be moved later after tool return. This is referred to with the movement pat h (transit point #2 to transit point #1). One bit represents one axis. Up to eight axes can be specified. ---Setting range--- 00000000 to 11111111 (Binary) Var protect Top1 Common variable setting protection - Top variable No. (1st group) Specify the head of the common variables wh ich are protected from setting operation. (Note 1) If #12111 or #12112 is 0 or is greater than the bottom No. (#12112), this setting is disabled. (Note 2) For the common va riables shared by part system s, the protection takes e ffect in a pa rt system set by this parameter. (Note 3) It is possible to set an unspecified variable, but the protection covers the specified variables only. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 100 to 199, 400 to 999 Var protect Btm1 Common variable setting protection - Bottom variable No. (1st group) Specify the end of the common variables wh ich are protected fr om setting operation. (Note 1) If #12111 or #12112 is 0 or is smaller than the top No. (#12111), this setting is disabled. (Note 2) For the common va riables shared by part system s, the protection takes e ffect in a pa rt system set by this parameter. (Note 3) It is possible to set an unspecified variable, but the protection covers the specified variables only. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 100 to 199, 400 to 999 Var protect Top2 Common variable setting protection - Top variable No. (2nd group) Specify the head of the common variables wh ich are protected from setting operation. (Note 1) If #12113 or #12114 is 0 or is greater than the bottom No. (#12114), this setting is disabled. (Note 2) For the common va riables shared by part system s, the protection takes e ffect in a pa rt system set by this parameter. (Note 3) It is possible to set an unspecified variable, but the protection covers the specified variables only. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 100 to 199, 400 to 999 Var protect Btm2 Common variable setting protection - Bottom variable No. (2nd group) Specify the end of the common variables wh ich are protected fr om setting operation. (Note 1) If #12113 or #12114 is 0 or is smaller than the top No. (#12113), this setting is disabled. (Note 2) For the common va riables shared by part system s, the protection takes e ffect in a pa rt system set by this parameter. (Note 3) It is possible to set an unspecified variable, but the protection covers the specified variables only. ---Setting range--- 0: Disabled 100 to 199, 400 to 999 #12117 T-ofs hide axis Hiding tool compensation data of specific axis Specify whether to show or hide the tool compensation data for each axis. 0: Show 1: Hide Specify the setting individually for each axis assigned to the hexadecimal bits. bit0: axis in the 1st column bit1: axis in the 2nd column bit2: axis in the 3rd column bit3: axis in the 4th column (Note 1) The setting of bit3 is enabled for L system when "#12103 2nd add T-ofs ON" is "1". (Note 2) This parameter is invalid for the tool compensation type I or II. ---Setting range--- 0 to F (hexadecimal) #12121 REM Mcr No Macro No. for rotation center error measurement Specify the name of macro program for the rotation center error measurement. The macro program name is input at initializatio n of rotation center error measurement macro. If 0 is set, the macro program for the measurement is not input to the part system. The macro program is used for execution of the measurement. ---Setting range--- 0, 9000 to 9099, 9300 to 9999, 100010000 to 100018999, 100030000 to 199999998 #12122 REM PrimAx Rot Dir Primary axis rotation direction for rotation center error measurement Rotation direction of primary axis for rotation center error measurement. Select the direction, allowing for t he rotary axis stroke limit, etc. 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction #12131 FrqClmpSys_VCC Upper limit of frequency (per part system) This parameter specifies the upper limit of the frequency. If this parameter is set to "0", the upper limit will be 40 (Hz). ---Setting range--- 0, or from 30 to 300 (Hz) srvunit Output unit (servo) Specify the unit for data communi cated with the servo drive unit. The data communicated between the NC and servo drive unit, and the servo movement data unit follow this specification. The standard value is "D"; however, set the optimum value according to the machine model and specifica- tions. B: 1 µm C: 0.1 μ m D: 0.01 μ m (10nm) E: 0.001 μ m (1nm) axname Axis name Set each axis' name with an alphabetic character. Use the characters X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B or C. (Note 1) Do not set the same name twice in one part system. The same name which is used in another part system can be set. (Note 2) The PLC name does not need to be set. (Numbers 1 to 6 are shown as the axis names.) ---Setting range--- X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C incax Incremental command axis name Set the axis name when commanding an incremental value for the axis travel amount. (Note 1) Set an alphabet that is diff erent from that of "#1013 axname". (Note 2) There is no need to set this parameter when command type (absolute or incremental) is not distin- guished by the axis address (when "#1076 Abslnc" = "0"). ---Setting range--- X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, H cunit Program command unit Set the minimum increment of program travel command. <Travel amount for travel command 1> 0: Follow "#1003 iunit" 1: 0.0001 mm (0.1 μ m) 10: 0.001 mm (1 μ m) 100: 0.01 mm (10 μ m) 1000: 0.1 mm (100 μ m) 10000: 1.0 mm If there is a decimal point in trav el command, the decimal point posit ion will be handled as 1 (mm) regardless of this setting. rot Rotational axis Select whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear axis. When rotary axis is set, the axis will be controlled with the rotary axis's coordinate system. Set the rotary axis type with "#8213 Rotation axis type". 0: Linear axis 1: Rotary axis ccw Motor CCW Select the direction of the motor rotation to the command direction. 0: Clockwise (looking from motor sh aft) with the forward rotation command 1: Counterclockwise (looking from motor sh aft) with the forward rotation command #1019 dia Diameter specification axis Select the command method of program travel amount. When the travel amount is commanded with the diameter dimensions, the travel distance will be 5mm when the command is 10mm of travel distance. The travel amount per pulse will also be halved during manual pulse feed. If diameter is selected, to ol length, the wear compensation amount, and the workpiece coordinate offset will be displayed in diameter value. Other parameters conc erning length will always be displayed in radius value. 0: Command with travel amount 1: Command with diameter dimension #1020 sp_ax Spindle interpolation Select "1" when using the spindle for contour control of NC axis (C-axis). Select "2" to implement the spindle-mode rotary axis control. 0: Servo axis is used for contour control. 1: Spindle is used for contour control. 2: Spindle-mode rotary axis control. #1021 mcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo) Using a 4-digit number, set the drive unit interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting a servo drive unit. Axis No. Not used (Set to "0") Drive unit interface channel No. #1022 axname2 2nd axis name Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.) Always use an alphabetic character (A to Z) for the first character. ---Setting range--- A to Z and 1 to 9 (Two digits) (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1023 crsadr Command address during mixed control (cross axis control) Set the axis name for issuing a command to this axis during mixed control (cross axis control). ---Setting range--- A to Z (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1024 crsinc Incremental command address during mixed control (cross axis control) Set the axis name for issuing an incremental command to this axis during mixed control (cross axis control). ---Setting range--- A to Z (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1061 intabs Manual ABS updating Select whether to update the absolute posi tion data during automatic handle interrupt. This parameter is enabled only when "#1145 l_abs" is set to "1". 0: Do not update (coordinate system shif ted the amount of the interruption) 1: Update (same coordinates as when interrupt did not occur will be applied) T_cmp Tool compensation function Select whether the tool length co mpensation and wear compensation are enabled during T command exe- cution. 0: Tool length compensation enable Wear compensation enable 1: Tool length compensation enable Wear compensation disable 2: Tool length compensation disable Wear compensation enable 3: Tool length compensation disable Wear compensation disable mandog Manual dog-type Select the manual reference position return method for the second return (after th e coordinate system is es- tablished) and later. The initial reference position return after the power ON is performed with dog-type return, and the coordinate system will be established. (This setting is not required when the absolute position detection is used.) 0: High speed return 1: Dog-type svof Error correction Select whether to correct the error when the servo is OFF. 0: Not correct the error The command value will not change during servo OFF, and the movement amount during servo OFF will be handled as droop. When the servo is turned ON t he next time, the axis will move to the command position where it used to be when the servo was turned OFF. 1: Correct the error The command value and the current position will follow the feedback position. When the servo is turned ON the next time, the axis will not move. During servo READY OFF, the operation will be always the sa me as of "Correct the error". (The current po- sition will follow the position of the axis.) slavno Slave axis number Set the axis number of the slave axis in synchronous control. The axis number is an NC number excluding the spindle and PLC axis. Two or more slave axis cannot be set for one master axis. This parameter cannot be set for a slave axis. When using the mult i-part system, the relati on of the master axis and slave axis cannot exte nd over part sys- tems. You cannot set the No. of the axis targeted fo r the multiple axis synchronization control. You cannot set this parameter for the axis target ed for the multiple axis synchronization control. 0: No slave axis 1 to 32: 1st to 32nd axis no_dsp Axis with no counter display Select whether to display the axis counter or not. This setting is enabled on the counter displa y screen (relative position counter, etc.). 0: Display 1: Not display axoff Axis removal Select whether to enable or disable axis removal control. 0: Disable 1: Enable chop_ax Chopping axis Select the chopping axis. 0: Non-chopping axis 1: Chopping axis #1493 ref_syn Synchronization at zero point initialization 0: Master axis and slave axis determine their zero points individually. 1: The zero points of both master and slave axes are de termined by initializing the master axis' zero point. The slave axis moves in perfect syn chronization with the master axis. Set this to "1" for speed/current command synchronization control. #1494 dsp_ax_change Axis order of counter display Set this in order to change the axis order of counter display. If this is set, the axes will be displayed in ascending order. However, axis whose setting is "0" will be displayed after axes whose settings are between "1" and "16" are displayed. (Note 1) When the same value is set for more than one axis, axis that is displayed on the left side on the parameter screen will be first displayed. (Note 2) When both of the mixed control (cross axis c ontrol) and interchange coordinate position display ("1280 ext16/bit2" OFF) ar e valid, and when there are two or more valid part systems, this parameter will be ignored. (Note 3) When the arbitrary axis exch ange control (option) is ON, and when there are two or more valid part systems, this paramet er will be ignored. ---Setting range--- 0: The axis is displayed after the axes whose settings are between "1" and "16" are displayed. 1 to 16: Axes are displayed in ascending order. If the number other than "1" to "16" is set, it is dealt as "0" setting. #1495 grf_ax_direction Axis travel direction in 2D graphic Select the axis travel direction in the 2D graphic drawing (trace, check). If set to 1, the positive/neg ative directions are reversed. ---Setting range--- 0/1 #1497 sync_sub Sub axis number Specify the sub axis for the simple synch ronous control using its NC axis number. This parameter can be set for the master axis and th e slave axis of the synchronous control, because the axes act as main axis of the simple synchronous control. Before setting this parameter, set the synchronous cont rol parameter (#1068 slavno) first, and then turn OFF and ON the power. The sub axis number must be gr eater than that of the main ax is of the same part system. Neither a spindle C-axis nor a PLC indexing axis can be designated as main or sub axis. ---Setting range--- 0: No sub axis 1 to 32: 1st axis to 32nd axis #1601 axnameEx Axis name extension letter Specify the second letter of command axis name when the axis name extension parameter is valid (#1266 ext02/bit0 = 1). The command axis name is not extended if this parameter is unspecified, and the only one letter set in "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax" respectively is the absolu te command axis name or incremental command axis name. Axis configuration should not be as the non-name extension axis (1-lette r axis) after the name extension axis (2-letter axis) in the part system. (Configure the 2-letter axis after the 1-letter axis) ---Setting range--- A to Z (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) #1603 PLCdev_no Axis device assignment No. Specify the PLC I/F device assignment No. for the axis. ---Setting range--- 0: No designation for assignment 1 to 32: Axis device assignment No. mgrnum Machine group No. Specify the machine group No. to which each axis belongs. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32 #1038 plcsel Ladder selection Not used. Set to "0". #1039 spinno Number of spindles Select the number of spindles. 0: No spindle 1 to 8: One to eight spindles (Note) The setting range differs according to the model. #1040 M_inch Constant input (inch) Select the unit system for setting and display regardi ng machine parameter and PLC interface's position, length and speed. 0: Metric system 1: Inch system #1041 l_inch Initial state (inch) Select the unit system for the program travel amount wh en the power is turned ON or reset and for position display. 0: Metric system 1: Inch system (Note) The units of the following da ta are converted by "#1041 I_inch". - Command unit at power ON and reset (Inch/metric command mode) But under the following conditions, the unit wi ll follow G20/G21 command modal even at reset. When reset modal is retained ("#1151 rstint"="0") When G code group 06 reset modal is retained ("#1210 RstGmd/bit5" ON) - Unit system for position di splay (counter, user parame ter, tool, work offset) - User parameter I/O unit - Parameter unit of user parameters concerning length and speed - Arc error parameter (#1084 RadErr) #1042 pcinch PLC axis command (inch) Select the unit system for the commands to the PLC axis. 0: Metric system 1: Inch system lang Select language displayed Select the display language. 0: English 1: Japanese 11: German 12: French 13: Italian 14: Spanish 15: Traditional Chinese 16: Korean 17: Portuguese 18: Dutch 19: Swedish 20: Hungarian 21: Polish 22: Simplified Chinese 23: Russian 24: Turkish 25: Czech 31: Indonesian 32: Vietnamese (Note) NC displays in English, when it doesn't equip language option. auxno MR-J2-CT Connections Set the number of MR-J2-CTs connected. (Note) The number of MR-J2-CTs possi ble to connect and setting range are different according to the model. Check the specifications of each series. nskno Megatorgue motor connections Specify the number of NSK megatorque motors connect ed. When a value other than 0 is specified, 2nd mis- cellaneous function data is ou tput as signed binary data. ---Setting range--- 0 to 16 T-ofs disp type Tool compensation display type switch (for M system only) Set this parameter to 1 when you use the L system's tool compensation type (e.g. when using a turning tool) in the M system. 0: Use the compensation type specified by "#1037 cmdtyp" 1: Use the tool compensation type III, irrespective of "#1037 cmdtyp" (Note that the type is not switched to III on the tool measurement screen.) G_Chg_En_Sno Select program format switch-enabled part system Select the part system for which you enable the program format switch. 0: Part system 1 (default) 1: Part system 1 2: Part system 2 If G188 is given to any other part system, a program error (P29) occurs. If PFCHR is turned ON in any other part system, it is ignored. MemTol Tool compensation memory common for part systems 0: Tool compensation memo ry separate for part systems 1: Tool compensation memory common for part systems #1052 MemVal No. of common variables shared in part system desig- nation 0: Common variables common for part syst ems (number fixed) #100 -: Per part system #500 -: Common for part systems 1: Common variables common for part system s (number designation) #100 -: Designate with V1comN #500 -: Designate with V0comN (Note 1) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned ON. So always execute format. The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again. Setting order (1) MemVal changeover -> (2) Turn power ON again -> (3) Format -> (4) Turn power ON again (Note 2) When this parameter is set to "1", #900000 to #907399 are not available even if the number of com- mon variables is 8000. #1077 radius Incremental command for diameter specification axis Select whether the incremental command of the diameter specification axis ("#1019 dia" is set to "1") uses the diameter value or radius value. 0: Diameter value 1: Radius value #1078 Decpt2 Decimal point type 2 Select the increment of position commands that do not have a decimal point. 0: Minimum input command unit (follows "#1015 cunit") 1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.) #1079 F1digt Validate F1 digit Select the F command method. 0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation) 1: 1-digit code command (feedrate set with "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1189 spd_F5") #1080 Dril_Z Drilling Z fixed Select a fixed cycle hole drilling axis. 0: Use an axis vertical to the se lected plane as hole drilling axis. 1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis regardless of the selected plane. #1081 Gmac_P Give priority to G code parameter Select the G code priority relations hip during the macro call with G command. 0: Priority is on G code used in the system 1: Priority is on registered G code for call #1082 Geomet Geometric Select the type of geometric to use. 0: Not use 1: Use only geometric I 2: Use geometric I and IB With geometric, specific address code s are used for exclusive meanings. Th us, if A or C is used for the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous command code, the A used for the axis name may function as the geometric's angle designation. Pay special attention to axis names, etc., when using this function. #1084 RadErr Arc error Set the tolerable error range when the end point deviates from the center coordinat e in the circular command. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1.000 (mm) G96_G0 Constant surface speed control by rapid traverse feed command Select how to handle the surface speed for the G00 co mmand when using the constant surface speed control function. 0: Calculate the surface speed constantly even during G00 movement 1: Calculate the surface speed at the block end point in the G00 command G30SL Disable G30 soft limit Select how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd reference position return). 0: Enable 1: Disable Mpoint Ignore middle point Select how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference position return. 0: Pass the middle point designated in the program and move to the reference position. 1: Ignore the middle point design ated in the program and move stra ight to the reference position. Tchg _A Replace tools for additional axis Select the movement of the additional axis at the tool change position return command. 0: The additional axis will not move 1: After the standard axis returns, the additional axis will also return to the tool change position Wmvfin Synchronization between part systems method Select the timing of synchronization between part systems when using the multi-part system. When the travel command is found in the synchronization command (!, M) block: 0: Synchronize before executing travel command 1: Synchronize after executing travel command Tl_SBK Select life count for single block (for L system only) Select whether to count the data units to be used for single block operation when using the tool life manage- ment II function (L system). 0: Not count 1: Count T0tfof TF output (for L system only) Select how to handle TF for T00 command. 0: TF will be output 1: TF wont be output T_Ltyp Tool life management type Select the tool life management type. 1: Life management l The cutting hours or number of cutti ngs of the tool that is commanded in the program is accumulated to monitor the usage state. 2: Life management ll The same as tool life management I, but with the spare tool selection function. A spare tool is selected from a group of tool commands commanded in the program. Tool compensations (tool length and radius com pensations) are carried out for the selected tool. 3: Life management lll (for M system only) The cutting hours or number of cutti ngs of the tool that is commanded in the program is accumulated to monitor the usage state. The group No. is not used to manage the tool life. (Note) When "3" is set for the L system, t he tool life management l is selected. #1097 Tldigt Tool offset No. digits selection Select the number of digits fo r an offset No. in command T. 0: Lower two digits of command T serve as an offset No.; the remaining upper digits as a tool No. 1: Lower one digit of command T serves as an offset No.; the remaining upper digits as a tool No. 2: Lower two digits of command T serve as an offset No., the remaining upper digits as a tool No. 3: Lower three digits of command T serve as an offs et No.; the remaining upper digits as a tool No. #1098 Tlno. Tool length offset number Select the number of digits of the tool length compensation No. in the T command. 0: Lower 3 digits in T code serve as a tool length and we ar offset Nos.; the remaining upper digits as a tool No. 1: Lower 3 digits in T code serve as a tool wear offset No.; the remaining upper digits as a tool No. and tool length offset No. #1099 Treset Cancel tool compensation amount Select how to handle the tool compensa tion vector when re setting the system. 0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting 1: Hold the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting When the values are cleared, the compensation will not be applied. So the axis will be shifted by the com- pensation amount in the next compensation operation. When the values are kept, the compensation will be appli ed, so the axis will shift the differential amount of the compensation amount in the next compensation operation. #1100 Tmove Tool compensation Select when to perform tool leng th compensation and wear compensation. 0: Compensate when T command is executed. 1: Superimpose and compensate with the travel command in the block where the T command is located. If there is no travel command in the same block, co mpensation will be executed after the travel command is superimposed in the next travel command block. 2: Compensate the wear amount when the T command is executed. Superimpose and compensate the tool length compensation amount with the travel co mmand in the same block. If there is no travel com- mand in the same block, compensation will be execut ed after the travel command is superimposed in the next travel command block. #1101 Tabsmv Tool compensation method Select the type of travel command when "#1100 Tmove" is set to "1" or "2". 0: Compensate regardless of the travel command type (absolute or incremental) 1: Compensate only at the travel command in the absolute command #1103 T_Life Validate life management Select whether to use the tool life management. 0: Not use tool life management. 1: Use tool life management. #1104 T_Com2 Tool command method 2 Select how to handle the tool command in the program when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1". 0: Handle the command as group No. 1: Handle the command as tool No. (Note) In the case of the tool life management III, the program tool command will be handled as the tool No. regardless of the setting. #1105 T_sel2 Tool selection method 2 Select the tool selection method when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1". 0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group. 1: Select the tool with the longes t remaining life from the tools used or unused in the same group. Tcount Life management (for L system only) Select the input method when address N is omitted in inputting the data (G10 L3 command) for tool life man- agement function II. 0: Time specified input 1: Number of times specified input Tllfsc Split life management display screen (for L system on- ly) Set the number of groups to be displayed on the tool life management II (L system) screen. 0: Displayed group count 1, maximu m number of registered tools: 16 1: Displayed group count 2, maximu m number of registered tools: 8 2: Displayed group count 4, maximu m number of registered tools: 4 TlrectM Life management re-count M code (for L system only) Set the M code for tool life management II (L system) re-count. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 S_TRG Validate status trigger method Select the enable conditions for the user macro interrupt signal (UIT). 0: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) turns ON 1: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON INT_2 Validate interrupt method type 2 Select the performance after user macro interrupt signal (UIT) input. 0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for block being executed to end 1: Execute interrupt program after completing block being executed mcrint Macro argument initialization Select whether to clear statements other than specified arguments by macro call. Also select whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting. 0: Clear the non-specified arguments by macro call. 1: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call 2: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call, and clear local variables by power-ON and resetting thwait Waiting for retract Set the number of waits for retract when chamfering is OFF in thread cutting. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 (Approx. 4 ms) Standard setting value: 4 G30SLM Invalidate soft limit (manual operation) Enable this function when disabling the soft limit check function at the second to fourth reference position return. 0: Enable soft limit function 1: Disable soft limit function H_sens Not used. mirr_A Select how to set up the length of tools on cutter tables (opposed tables) (for L system only) Select one of the following two methods: - Set the current length of tools on each facing turret. - Set a value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on the base turret. 0: Current length of the tools on each facing turret 1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on the base turret #1119 Tmiron Select the mirror image of each facing turret with T com- mand (for L system only) Select whether to enable the mirror image of each facing turret with the T command. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1120 TofVal Change macro variable Select whether to change the macro variable (tool of fset) numbers for shape compensation and wear com- pensation. 0: Not change (Conventional specification) 1: Change the shape and wear compensation variable numbers each for X, Z, and R #1121 edlk_c Edit lock C Select the edit lock for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in memory. 0: Editing possible 1: Editing prohibited. The file cannot be opened. (Note) If "#1122" is set to "1" or "2", "1" will be set in "#1121" when the power is turned ON. #1122 pglk_c Program display lock C Select whether to prohibit the program display and search for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in memory. 0: Program display and search is possible 1: Program display is impossible. Search is possible. 2: Program display and search is impossible The program details will not be displayed, but the progra m No. and sequence No. will display in the prohibited state. (Note) If "#1122" is set to "1" or "2", "1" will be set in "#1121" when the power is turned ON. #1123 origin Origin set prohibit Select whether to use the origin set function. 0: Use 1: Not use #1124 ofsfix Fix tool compensation No. Select how to handle the compensation No. when the i nput key is pressed on the tool compensation screen. 0: Increment the compensation No. by 1 (Same as general parameters) 1: # compensation No. does not change When setting in sequence, "0" is handier. When ch anging and setting repeatedly while adjusting one com- pensation value, "1" is handier. #1125 real_f Actual feedrate display Select the feedrate display on the monitor screen. 0: Command speed 1: Actual travel feedrate #1126 PB_G90 Playback G90 Select the method to command the playback travel amount in the playback editing. 0: Incremental value 1: Absolute value #1127 DPRINT DPRINT alignment Select the alignment for printi ng out with the DPRINT function. 0: No alignment, output s pr inted with left justification 1: Align the minimum digit and output RstVCI Clear variables by resetting Select how to handle the common variables when resetting. 0: Common variables won't change after resetting. 1: Common variables will be cleared #100 to #199 by resetting. PwrVCl Clear variables by power-ON Select how to handle the common variables when the power is turned ON. 0: The common variables are in the same state as before turning the power OFF. 1: Common variables will be cleared #100 to #199 when the power is turned ON. set_t Display selected tool number Select the tool command value display on the monitor screen. 0: Display T-modal value of program command 1: Display Tool No. sent from PLC brightness Brightness control Select the brightness of display unit. 1: High brightness (in bright state) 0: Medium brightness -1: Low brightness (in dim state) ofsmem Not used. Set to "0". LCDneg Not used. Set to "0". unt_nm Unit name Set the unit name. Use 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers. If "0" is set, the unit name won't be displayed. ---Setting range--- 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers optype Not used. Set to "0". Cntsel Not used. Set to "0". Pnosel Not used. Set to "0". edtype Not used. Set to "0". Mn100 M code number Set the first number of M code that corresp onds to the setup Nos. from 100 to 199. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mn200 M code number Set the first number of M code that corresp onds to the setup Nos. from 200 to 299. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Mn300 M code number Set the first number of M code that corresp onds to the setup Nos. from 300 to 399. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #1143 Mn400 M code number Set the first number of M code that corres ponds to the setup Nos. from 400 to 499. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 #1144 mdlkof MDI setup lock Select whether to enable MDI setting in non-MDI mode. 0: Disable MDI setting 1: Enable MDI setting #1145 I_abs Manual ABS parameter Select how to handle the absolute positio n data during automatic handle interrupt. 0: Absolute position data will be renewed if manual ABS switch is ON. If it is OFF, data won't be renewed. 1: Follow the "intabs" state when "#1061 intabs" is enabled #1146 Sclamp Spindle rotation speed clamp function Select how to handle the spindle rotation spe ed clamp function with the G92/G50S command. 0: G92/G50S command is handled as a clamp command only in the G96 state ( during constant surface speed control). G92S will be handled as normal S command in G97 state (constant surface speed OFF). 1: The S command in the same block as G92/G5 0 is constantly handled as a clamp command #1147 smin_V Minimum spindle rotation speed clamp type Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp value. 0: Rotation speed setting 1: Output voltage coefficient setting Set "#3023 smini" according to this type setting. #1149 cireft Arc deceleration speed change Select whether to decelerate at the arc entrance or exit. 0: Not decelerate 1: Decelerate #1153 FixbDc Hole bottom deceleration check Select whether to perform a deceleration check or in-position check at the ho le bottom in a hole drilling cycle. This parameter is enabled only for a hole drilling cycle in which no dwell command can be issued at the hole bottom. 0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position check 1: Perform deceleration check 2: Perform in-position check #1154 pdoor Not used. Set to "0". #1155 DOOR_m Not used. Set to "100". #1156 DOOR_s Not used. Set to "100". #1157 F0atrn Not used. Set to "0". #1158 F0atno Not used. Set to "0". No rio RIO connection detection invalid Select whether to enable or di sable RIO connection detection. 0: Enable 1: Disable If your I/O consists of only cards such as CC-LINK, setting this param eter to "1" will avoid the RIO commu- nication cutoff alarm. ATS Automatic tuning function Select whether to enable or disabl e the automatic tuning function. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note 1) Enable this paramete r when using MS Configurator. (Note 2) Disable this parameter during normal operation. (Note 3) Search & start function is disabled for safety when this parameter is set to "1". fixpro Fixed cycle editing Select a type of program dealt on the edit/program lis t/data in/out screen, general program, fixed cycle, or machine tool builder macro program. 0: General programs can be edited, etc. 1: Fixed cycles can be edited, etc. Password No.: The machine tool builder macro programs can be edited, etc. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 e2rom Not used. Set to "0". test Simulation test Select the test mode for the control unit. In the test mode, test is performe d with a hypothetical reference position return complete even though the real reference position return hasn't been completed. This is limited to test operation of the control unit itself, and must not be used when the machine is connected. 0: Normal operation mode 1: Test mode aux01 Not used. Set to "0". #1218 aux02 bit3: Parameter input/output format Select the parameter input/output format. 0: Type I Displayed on one line per parameter. (Example) N1001T1P1 N1001T2P1 N1001T3P0 1: Type II Data with the same parameter number is displayed on the same line. (Example) N1001 T1 P1 T2 P1 T3 P0 bit4: External workpiec e coordinate offset tool number selection Select the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring the coor- dinate offset of an external workpiece. 0: Follow the setting of "#1130 set_t". 1: Use the tool number indicated by user PLC. bit5: Parameter I/O II spindle specification address Select the spindle specification address of parameter I/O type II. 0: C 1: T This parameter is also applied to the spindle specification address for input and verification. (Note) This parameter is valid only for parameter I/ O type II (when "#1218 aux02/bit3" is set to "1"). aux03 bit1: Stop high-speed PC monitoring function Set "1" to disable the function that triggers the emergency stop when t he PC high-speed processing time is extended. Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure. bit5: Dog-type in termediate point Select whether to move to the intermediate point during automatic dog-type reference position return. 0: Not move. 1: Move. bit7: Time constant setting changeover for soft acceleration/deceleration 0: Accelerating time is G0tL(G1tL). When the G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceler ation and the soft acceleration/deceleration are used together, the inclination of so ft acceleration/deceleration will be steeper by setting a time to the soft acceleration/deceleration 2nd step time constant (# 2005 G0t1). Consequently, the acceleration for G28/ G30 will be larger t han that for G00. (1) Total accelerati ng time is "G0tL". (2) The time for cu rve part is "G0t1". (3) The time for linear part is obtained by "G0tL-(2 x G0t1)". Speed t G0tL - G0t1 G0tL Acceleration t G0t1 G0t1 1: Accelerating time is obtai ned by G0tL+G0t 1 (G1tL+G1t1). When the G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceler ation and the soft acceleration/deceleration are used together, you can attain the G2 8/G30 acceleration that is equal to G00, by setting the same value to G00 soft acceleration/deceleration filter (#1569 SfiltG 0) as well as to the soft acceleration/deceleration 2nd step time constant (#2005 G0t1). (1) Total accelerati ng time is obtained by "G0tL+G0t1". (2) The time for cu rve part is "G0t1". (3) The time for linear part is obtained by "G0tL-G0t1". Speed t G0tL G0tL + G0t1 Acceleration t G0t1 G0t1 #1220 aux04 (for L system only) bit0: Tool life check timing selection Select the criterion to judge the end of tool life when the cumulative number of cuttings is incremented in tool life management II. 0: Determine the tool life end when the incremented cumulative number of cuttings has exceeded the esti- mated number of cuttings. (Default) (cumulative number of cuttings > estimated number of cuttings) 1: Determine the tool life end when the incremented cumulative number of cuttings has reached the esti- mated number of cuttings. (cumulative number of cuttings >= estimated number of cuttings) #1221 aux05 bit0: Workpiece coordinate/absolute coordinate display switch Select whether to display the workpiece coordinate or to display the absolute coordinate in the coordinate value screen, command value screen or modal information screen. 0: Workpiece coordinate 1: Absolute coordinate #1222 aux06 bit3: Enable setu p parameter lock Select whether to enable the setup parameter lock. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit4: Minimum cut-in amount selection Select the minimum cut-in amount command value fo r the compound thread cutting cycle (G76 command). 0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be "0". 1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be set in the last command value (it is retained even after the NC power has been turned off). bit5: Fixed cycle for compound la the command format check selection Select the operation when the 1st block of the fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted while the conven- tional format is selected ("#1265 ext01/bit0" is set to "0"). 0: Program error (P33) will occur. 1: Parameter setting value will be used. bit7: Reference position return deceleration check method Select the deceleration check method to be us ed during automatic reference position return. 0: In-position check 1: Commanded deceleration check aux07 bit1: Deceleration check method 2 Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9. 0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9 1: In-position check in G1+G9 The deceleration check is not perfo rmed for the commands except G1+G9. When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration che ck specification type" is set to "1 " (Deceleration check specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid. bit2: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check Select whether to enable the synchronous tap I-point -> R-point in-position check. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3 Synchro- nous tap in-position check improvement". bit3: Synchronous tap in-position check improvement Select whether to enable the synchrono us tap in-position check improvement. 0: Disable 1: Enable Related parameters: #1223/bit2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check #1223/bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check #1223/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2 bit4: Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check Select whether to enable the synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3 Synchro- nous tap in-position check improvement". bit5: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2 Select whether to enable the synchr onous tap R-point in-position check. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3 Synchro- nous tap in-position check improvement". bit6: Cancel synchronous tap (, S) return 0: Retain the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return 1: Cancel the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return with G80 bit7: Synchronous tap method Specify a synchronous tap method. 0: Synchronous tap with multi-step acceleration deceleration 1: Conventional type synchronous tap #1224 aux08 bit0: Sampling data output Select whether to enable the sampling data output. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1225 aux09 bit7: Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp Select whether to enable the spindle rotation speed cl amp by the G92 S or Q command for the spindle com- mand rotation speed (R7000) set with the user ladder. 0: Enable 1: Disable #1226 aux10 bit0: Tool compensation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement Select the tool compensation data to be used for external workpiece coordi nate offset measurement. 0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data 1: Tool length data bit1: Optional block skip type Select whether to enable the optional block skip in the middle of a block. 0: Enable only at the beginning of a block. 1: Enable in the middle of a block, as well as at the beginning of the block. Note that a slash "/" in an equation between [ ] is handled as division operator. (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#1274 ext10/bit4" is "0". bit2: Single block stop timing Select the timing at which the "Sin gle block" signal is activated. 0: When the signal goes ON while automatic operatio n is starting, the block will stop after finished. 1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block, the block will stop. bit3: C-axis reference position return type Select the C-axis reference position return type. 0: Basic position return is performed by the G28 reference position return command or by activating the manual reference position return. The basic point dog is used. 1: When the first C-axis command is issued after the C-axis mode is entered in automatic mode, reference position return is performed before the execution of t he block. The reference position return is also per- formed by the G28 reference position return comma nd or by activating the manual reference position return. The Z phase of the encoder is used. bit4: S command during constant surface speed Select whether to output a strobe signal when the S co mmand is issued in cons tant surface speed mode. 0: Not output any strobe signal in constant surface speed mode. 1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed mode. bit5: Arbitrary allo cation of dog signal Select whether to enable the arbitrary allocation para meter for "Reference position return near-point detec- tion" signal and "Stroke end" signal. 0: Disable (Fixed device is used.) 1: Enable (Device is specified by the parameter.) bit7: Shorten JOG stop time Specify whether to shor ten the JOG stop time. 0: Do not shorten the JOG stop time. (Same as before) 1: Shorten the JOG stop time. aux11 bit0: Select PLC signal or spindle feedrate attained Set up this option when disabling the cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained. 0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal 1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained bit1: Select H or D code Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on the tool life management screen when issuing the H99 or D99 command. 0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up on the management setup screen. 1: Validates the data that is set up on the manage ment setup screen when issuing the H99 or D99 com- mand. bit2: Measures against tool setter chattering Select a condition where a relieving operat ion completes after measurement with tools. 0: Sensor signals have stoppe d for 500 (ms) or longer. 1: 100 ( μ m) or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped. bit4: Word command check Select whether to output an error when no numeric va lue follows a program address during execution of a machining program. 0: Not check 1: Check bit5: Spindle rotation speed clamp Specify whether to clamp the rotation speed in constant surface speed mode when the spindle rotation clamp command is issued. 0: Clamps the rotation regardless of the constant surface speed mode. 1: Clamps the rotation only in constant surface speed mode. bit7: Switch the range of tool life data to be input Set up the range of tool life data to be input or compared. 0: Inputs or compares a ll of the data output. 1: Inputs or compares part of the data output (1) Tool life management I data to be input or compared Tool number (D), lifetime (E), life count (F), and auxiliary data (B). (2) Tool life management II data to be input or compared Group number (G), method (M), life (E/F), to ol number (D), and compensation number (H) #1228 aux12 bit0: When not using, set to "0". bit1: Switch "offset and parameter" screen Select to switch the "offset and par ameter" screen to the parameter screen. 0: Display the "offset and parameter" screen. 1: Display the "parameter" screen. bit2: Switch data protection in data transmission mode Select the range of data protec tion in data transmission mode. 0: Enable the protection for both send and receive data. 1: Enable the protection for receive data only. bit3: Nose R specification Select whether to specify the nose R compensation by shape or wear number. 0: Specifies the nose R compensation by shape number. 1: Specifies the nose R compensation by wear number. bit4: Select operation error or stop code Select operation error or stop code to provide for both block st art and cutting start interlocks. 0: Operation error 1: Stop code bit5: Select constant surface speed coordinates Select the constant su rface speed coordinate. 0: Workpiece coordinate 1: Absolute value coordinate bit6: Switch relative values displayed Select whether to preset the relative coordinates with workpiece coordinate preset (G92.1) or counter preset (G92). 0: Preset the relative coordinates. 1: Not preset the relative coordinates. bit7: Protection with manual value command Select whether to protect a manual value command. 0: Not protect. (Conventional specification) 1: Protect. set01 bit0: Subprogram interrupt Select the type of the user macro interrupt. 0: Macro type user macro interrupt 1: Sub-program type user macro interrupt bit1: Accurate thread cutting E Select what the address E spec ifies in inch screw cutting. 0: Number of threads per inch 1: Precision lead bit2: Radius compensation type B (for M system only) Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel com- mand is operated during radius compensation. 0: The processing does not handle the start-up or ca ncel command block: handle the offset vector in the direction vertical to that of the command instead. 1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next block. bit2: Nose R compensation type B (for L system only) Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel com- mands are operated during nose R or radius compensation. 0: The processing does not handle the start-up or ca ncel command block: handle the offset vector in the direction vertical to that of the command instead. 1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next block. bit3: Initial constant surface speed Select the initial st ate after the power-ON. 0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode 1: Constant surface speed control mode bit4: Synchronous tap Select the operation w hen ",R" is omitted in G74/G84 tapping cycle. 0: Asynchronous tap 1: Synchronous tap bit5: Start point alarm Select the operation when the operation start point can not be found while executing the next block of G115, G116 or G117. 0: (G115/G116)Starts after the block has been moved. (G117)Enables an auxiliary function after the block has been moved. 1: (G115)Waits until reaching start poi nt at the movement after next bloc k when the operation start point is not found. (G116/G117)Outputs an program error (P33) when the operation start point is not found. bit6: Grid display selection Select the grid display type on the servo monitor screen during the dog type reference position return. 0: Distance between dog OFF and basic po int (including a grid mask amount) 1: A value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and basic point bit7: Command switch during fixed cycle with label O Select the condition to handle the address E or P giv en during fixed cycle mode as a command of fixed cycle. 0: When a G-code from group 0, 1, 4, 8 or 11 is not given 1: When a G-code from group 0, 1, 4, 8, 11 or 12 is not given * This parameter is enabled when "#11009 M2 label O" (Program number label for M2-format) is "1" (Label O). #1230 set02 bit2: Proximity switch spindle orientat ion: Z phase re-detection request type Select when to request Z phase re-detection for proximity switch type spindle orientation. 0: After confirming the spindle has reached the Z phase detection speed. 1: Right after Servo ON of the spindle. bit4: Tolerance control mode selection Select the tolerance control mode. When you give higher priority to the tolerable acceleration rate in the speed control, set "0". When giving priority to the tolerance, set "1". 0: Give priority to the speed for the tolerable acceleration rate 1: Give priority to the speed for the tolerance bit7: Macro interface input/ output for each part system Select the specification of t he macro interface input/output. 0: Shared by all part systems. 1: Used independently by the part systems. set03 bit0: Graphic check compatibility parameter Select whether to return the data to the pre-starting data after having checked a machining program that re- writes the common variables, wo rkpiece offsets and tool offsets. 0: Return the data. 1: Not return the data. bit1: Switch graphic coordinates Select whether to use machine coordinate value or t ool position coordinate value (position being machined, obtained by subtracting the tool co mpensation amount from machine coordinate values) for drawing with trace display. 0: Machine coordinates zero point (same as conventional method) 1: Tool position coordinate value bit2: Switch graphic check trace Select the coordinates to draw at program check: both machine coordinate value (tool center path) and tool position coordinate value (pr ogram path) simultaneously, or only the coordinates selected with "#1231 set03/ bit1" (Switch graphic trace coordinates). 0: Both machine coordinates and tool pos ition coordinates (conventional method) 1: Only coordinates designated with switch graphic coordinates bit4: Switch zero point mark display position Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic display. 0: Machine coordinates zero point (same as conventional method) 1: Workpiece coordinate zero point bit5: Switch graphic check counter display Select the type of counter displayed on the Graphic Che ck screen with the combination of "#1231 set03/bit1". If the drawing coordinate system is other than "all workpiece coordinates", the counter displayed is workpiece coordinate position counter or tool position (wor kpiece coordinate) regard less of this setting. 0: (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "0") Machine position counter (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "1") Tool position (machine coordinate) counter 1: (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "0") Workpiece coordinate counter (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "1") Tool position (workpiece coordinate) counter bit6: Initialization of drawing in graphic check Select whether to initialize the workpiece drawing au tomatically when you change any data in the 3D check workpiece setup screen. 0: Initialize the workpiece drawing (conventional specifications) 1: Not initialize the workpiece drawing Note that if you change the workpiece shape or dimensions, the workpiece drawing is automatically reset, irrespective of this parameter. bit7: Disable switching of graphic check method Select whether to enable or disable switching of the 3D check method. 0: Enable 1: Disable If you choose Disable, the last se lected check method remains selected. #1232 set04 bit0: Exclude acceleration/deceleration in load monitor Select whether or not to exclude acceleration/dec eleration when detecting the load in load monitoring. 0: Acceleration/Deceleration is included 1: Acceleration/Deceleration is excluded (Note) When "Exclude acceleration/deceleration in lo ad monitor" ("#1232 set04/bit0") is enabled, "Spindle function 8" ("#13228 SP228/bit2") needs to be set to "1" (load display, high-cycle motor output effective val- ue). bit5: Actual lo ad selection Load fluctuation due to speed change is excluded from the actual load. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Note) When "Actual load selection" ("#1232 set04/bi t5") is enabled, "Spindle function 8" ("#13228 SP228/ bit2") needs to be set to "1 " (load display, high-cycle mo tor output effective value). bit7: Spindle unit disturbance torque display selection Select display contents on "estimat ed disturbance torque" and "MAX distur bance torque" of the drive unit (spindle unit). 0: Estimated disturbance torque 1: Cutting torque #1233 set05 When not using, set to "0". #1234 set06 bit3: Interlock when tap retract enabled Select whether to enable aut omatic/manual interlock for the part system with "Tap retract enable" signal ON. 0: Interlock all the axes 1: Disable the interlock #1235 set07 bit0: Helical interpolation/Helical involute interpolation speed 2 0: Designated with the resultant velocity of all programmed axes 1: Designated with the velocity compo nent in the plane of the circle/involute bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start When the fixed type compensation value is selected, the method can be changed to the compensation value sequential update type afte r the first four cycles. 0: Disable the method changeover 1: Enable the method changeover bit4: Selection condition of synchronous tapping gear step Select the parameters th at determine the gear step for synchronous tapping. 0: #3005 through #3008 (smax1 to 4) when "#1223 aux 07/bit7" is "0". Or #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4) when "#1223 aux07/bit7" is "1". 1: Always #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4) bit5: Tool wear data clear on tool length measurement (For L system only) Select whether to clear tool wear data to zero when th e tool length is set using [Measure] menu on the [T- ofs] screen. 0: Not clear tool wear data to zero 1: Clear tool wear data to zero (Note) This parameter is invalid for the tool compensation type I or II. set08 bit0: Manual rotary axis feedrate unit Select the unit of manual rotary axis feedrate. 0: Fixed to [°/min] 1: Same speed as before (When inch command, the speed is the command speed divided by 25.4.) bit1: Spindle speed detection Select the pulse input source of actual spindle rota tion speed (R6506/R6507) when the spindle encoder se- rial connection is selected ("#3025 enc-on" is set to "2"). 0: Serial input 1: Encoder input connector bit2: Current limit droop cancel invalid Select whether to cancel the position droop when the current limit changeover signal is canceled. 0: Cancel the droop. 1: Not cancel the droop. bit3: Rotary axis command speed scale Select to multiply the rotary axis command speed by 10 times. 0: Invalid 1: During initial inching, the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10. In other words, if "F100" is comm anded, the speed will be the same as when 1000°/min is commanded. The rotary axis speed display unit will be 10°/min. set09 Not used. Set to "0". #1238 set10 bit0: Switch G36 function Select the function, the autom atic tool length measurement or arc thre ad cutting (CCW), to be applied to G36 when the G code system 6 or 7 is selected. 0: Automatic tool length measurement 1: Arc thread cutting (CCW) bit3: Ignoring input from RIO Select whether to ignore the input from RIO. 0: Output the input from RIO to the device X. 1: Ignore the input from RIO, a nd not output it to X device. (X000 to X0FF, X100 to X1FF and X200 to X2BF) * Normally set this parameter to "0". * The devices X2C0 to X2FF are used for the handle pulse input and board reset from the operation panel I/ O unit card (HN391/HN392), thus are excluded from the target. bit6: Switch absolute position detection alarm Select the output destination of the absolute position detection alarm. 0: NC alarm 4 (AL4) 1: NC alarm 5 (AL5) (Note) The absolute position detection al arm is listed in the alarm history re gardless of this parameter setting. bit7: Switch operation alarm Select whether to enable the NC alarm 5 (AL5) signal output. 0: Disable NC alarm 5 (AL5) All operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 4 (AL4). 1: Enable NC alarm 5 (AL5) The following operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 5 (AL5), not to NC alarm 4 (AL4).  External interlock axis exists (M01 0004)  Cutting override zero (M01 0102)  External feedrate zero (M01 0103)  Block start interlock (M01 0109)  Cutting block start interlock (M01 0110)  Interference check disabled (M01 0200)  Cutting interlock for spindle-spindle polygon (G51.2) (M01 1033) The above alarms are not recorded in the alarm histor y regardless of the setting value of this parameter. set11 bit0: Coil switching method Select the coil switching method. 0: Via PLC. (Y189F) 1: NC internal processing. (Y189F is invalid.) bit1: Handle I/F selection Select the handle connection destination. 0: Use the handle connected to the encoder communication connector. 1: Use the remote I/O unit as a priority. (Note) When the operation panel I/O unit is mounted, the handle connect ed to the unit will be used regardless of this parameter setting. bit3: Polygon machining mode at reset Select whether to cancel the polygon machining mode when reset is applied. 0: Not cancel. 1: Cancel. bit4: Invalidate G51.1 phase command Select whether to enable the phase control with the spindle-spindle polygon function. 0: Always enable. (When R is not commanded, it will be handled as R0.) 1: Enable only at the R command. bit5: Door interlock spindle speed clamp valid Select whether to enable the spindle cl amp speed changeover by the PLC signal. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit6: External deceleration axis compliance valid Designate the method for setting the external deceleration speed. 0: Set speed common for all axes ("#1216 extdcc" (external deceleration speed)) 1: Set speed for each axis ("#2086 ex dcax" (external deceleration speed)) set12 bit0: Handle input pulse Select the handle input pulse. 0: MITSUBISHI CNC standard handle pulse (25 pulse/rev) 1: Handle 400 pulse (100 pulse/rev) bit2:Zero point shift amount magnification If "1" is set, the following magnification will be applie d on the #2027 G28sft reference point shift amount, #2057 zero point proximity + and #2058 zero point proximity - settings. For 0.1 μ m: 10-fold For 0.01 μ m: 100-fold bit4: Optical communication automatic channel detection invalid Select whether to enable the optical communication automatic channel detection. 0: Enable 1: Disable #1241 set13 bit0: Prevention of program error due to incorrect G code combination When a G code from some modal groups is commanded in the same block as an unmodal G code, a program error due to incorrect G code combination occurs. Th is parameter is used to avoid this program error. 0: The program error (P45) will occur. 1: The program error is avoided, however, a G code from an uncombinable modal group is ignored. bit1: Interference check at starting up radius compensation (for M system only) Interference check at starting up nose R compensation (for L system only) 0: In a start-up block, an interf erence check is not carried out. 1: An error occurs even at a start- up block if an interference occurs. The error occurs even when the interference avoidanc e is set to ON (#8102="1"). However, an interfer- ence check is not carried out when it is set to OFF (#8103="1"). bit4: Plane axis check invalid in fixed cycle for turning machining Select whether to raise a program error when a fixed cycle for turning machining is commanded in either of the following conditions: * The commanded axis does not coincide with the selected plane * One or both of the selected plane axes have no movement 0: Raise a program error 1: Not raise a program error bit5: Macro argument L/P valid Select whether to enable L and P to be used as ar gument of G(MSTB) macro command or ASCII code macro command. 0: L and P commands cannot be used. 1: L and P commands can be used as argument. bit7: Spindle rotation speed during synchronous tap return Specify how to operate in a sync tap command block if t he tap return spindle rotation speed (,S) is lower than the tap spindle rotation speed (S). 0: Operate at the tap return spindle rotation speed (,S) 1: Operate at the tap spindle rotation speed (S) #1242 set14 bit0: Ignoring timing sync in multi-syste m simultaneous thread cut cycle I (G76.1) Select whether to execute timing syn chronization during mu lti-part system simulta neous thread cut cycle I (G76.1). 0: Execute timing synchronization at the start and end of thread cutting. 1: Ignore the timing synchronization given during the cycle. bit1: G92.1 single command error check ON Select whether to enable the error check w hen G92.1 (G50.3) is given alone in a block. 0: Disable the error check 1: Enable the error check bit2: Select whether to output an operation error upon detection of spindle speed fluctuation (G162). 0: Output an operation error 1: Not output an operation error bit6: G113 command type when multiple spindle synchronization set valid Specify the G113 command type of when multiple spindle synchronization set is valid. 0: Cancels all the spindle synchronization by issuing G113H0 or G113D0. 1: Cancels all the spindle synchronization by issuing G113. #1243 set15 Not used. Set to "0". set16 bit0: No superimposition of timing synchronization block onto subsequent block 0: Superimpose a block, where timing synchronizati on command is given as a single command, onto the subsequent block, and treat the blocks as one block 1: Treat a block, where timing synchronization comm and is given as a single command, as one block. bit1: Enable automatic re-calculation after timing synchronization 0: Look-ahead a block next to the timing synchronization command block 1: Automatically re-calculate a block next to the ti ming synchronization comma nd block after the synchro- nization has been completed. bit2: Balance cut in all the blocks Select in which block(s) to exec ute synchronization between part systems when a balance cut command is given. 0: Execute synchronization in cutting feed command block(s) 1: Execute synchronization in all the blocks bit3: Enable tool offset at start/st op of arbitrary axis superimposition Select whether or not to apply tool of fset to a travel at workpiece coordi nate system switch or a travel toward the superimposition start/end position when the arbitrary axis superi mposition control star t/stop command is issued. 0: Not apply 1: Apply bit4: Speed clamp method under superimposition control 0: Apply a fixed superimposition clamp speed to the superimposition-related axes. This clamp speed takes effect irrespective of the feed status (feed direct ion and mode) of the superimposition-related axes. When this method is chosen, the clamp spee d is unchanged during block execution. 1: Apply the optimal clamp speed according to the real -time monitored feed status of the superimposition- related axes (feed direction and mode). When this method is chosen, the clamp speed is changed even during block execution. This method helps reduce the cycle time. bit5: Read of position info with superi mposing travel distance taken into account Select whether to take into account the superimposing travel distance (travel dist ance of the reference axis) when reading position info (machine coordinates/skip coor dinates) using a variable under control axis super- imposition or arbitrary axis superimposition control. 0: Not take the distance into account 1: Take the distan ce into account bit6: Axis address check ON Select whether to output a program error (P32) when any address other than those specified by "#1013 ax- name" and "#1014 incax" is given as an axis address. If the arbitrary axis exchange function is ON, select whether to output a program error (P32) when any ad- dress other than those specified by "#12071-12078 adr_abs[1]-[8]" and "# 12079-12086 adr_inc[1]-[8]" is giv- en as an axis address. 0: Not output a program error (P 32). (Ignore the axis address.) 1: Output a program error (P32) #1245 set17 bit2: Speed to select multi-step accele ration/deceleration synch tap gear step Specify the rotation speeds that determine the gear st ep for multi-step acceleration/deceleration synchro- nous tapping ("#1223 aux07/bit7" = 0). 0: #3005 to #3008 (smax1 to 4) 1: #43046 to #43049 (smax_tap1 to 4) (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#1235 set07/bit4" = 0. bit7: Synchronous tap spindle rotation direction type Select whether the spindle's rotation direction is dete rmined by the synchronous tappi ng axis' travel direction. 0: The spindle's rotation direction is determined by the synchronous tapping axis' travel direction. When the travel direction is nega tive, the spindle rotates forward. When the travel direction is positive, the spindle rotates in reverse. 1: The spindle always rotates forward regardless of the synchronous tapping axis' travel direction. (Note) When a reverse tap is commanded, the spindle rotates in an opposite direction to that mentioned above. set18 bit0: Thread cut override ON Select whether to enable spindle override during thread cutting. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit1: Thread cut ov erride feed hold Select whether to perform feed hold when sp indle override is changed during thread cutting. 0: Not perform feed hold 1: Perform feed hold bit2: Switch coordinate systems for radius compensation Select the coordinate system for radius compensation. 0: Type 1 (convent ional specification) Perform radius compensation with reference to a position on the workpiece coordinate system. 1: Type 2 Perform radius compensation with reference to a position on the progr am coordinate system. bit3: Change repetition fina l return position at M2L Select the final return position after repetition, wh en in G99 modal and in M2 format with the label L. 0: Initial point 1: R point bit4: T-lifeover signal output Select the timing at which the "Tool life over" signal is output when using the M system tool life management I/III. 0: Turn the signal ON when a selected tool has reached the lifetime. 1: Turn the signal ON when any of tools (in the case of the tool life management III, all the registered tools) in a selected group has reached the lifetime. bit5: Tool status update type Select whether to update tool status automatically when esti mated tool life data/c umulative usage data is changed on the screen in the M system tool life management I/II/III. 0: Do not update 1: Update. (Note) When "1" is selected, tool status will be updated as follows.  When usage data is "0", tool status will be "0".  When usage data is smaller than life time data, tool status will be "1".  When usage data is the same as or larger than lifetime data, tool status will be "2". bit6: Switch F 1-digit feedrate change method Set whether to enable feedrate change with handle until power OFF, or change the parameters #1185 to #1189 with change of speed. 0: Enabled until power OFF 1: Change "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1189 spd_F5" bit7: PLC axis random device assignment Select whether to enable PLC axis random device assign ment for "Reference position return near-point de- tection" signal and "Stroke end" signal. 0: Disable (Fixed device is used.) 1: Enable (Device is spec ified by the parameter.) #1247 set19 bit0: Movement by tool length compensation command (for M system only) Select whether or not to move the axis by the compensation amount when tool length compensation/cancel is independently commanded. 0: Move 1: Not move bit1: Thread cutting operation when manual speed command enabled Select the thread cutting operation in manual speed command. 0: The axis travels at the handle feed rate, jog feed rate, or manual rapid traverse rate 1: The axis travels following the program command bit2: Inclined surface machining mode hold Select whether to hold or cancel the inclined surf ace machining mode at an emergency stop or power OFF. 0: Cancel the inclined surface machining mode. 1: Hold the inclined surface machining mode. #1248 set20 Not used. Set to "0". #1249 set21 bit2: Encryption key setting Select whether to enable the encryption key for System lock to be entered. 0: Disable the encryption key entry 1: Enable the encryption key entry bit5: Warning on 24Hr continuous ON display Select whether to show or hide the alarm (V53 0001). 0: Not display 1: Display #1250 set22 bit0: Enable cycle operation after turning OFF manual arbitrary reverse run mode Select whether to enable automatic cycle operation after turning OFF the manual arbitrary reverse run mode. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit3: Switch acceleration for rapid traverse Select how to determine the acceleration for rapid traverse (G0) in high-accuracy control. This parameter is enabled during tool center point cont rol, workpiece installation error compensation or in- clined surface machining command. 0: The acceleration is determined by "#1206 G1bF" (Maximum speed) and "#12 07 G1btL" (Time constant) and is common to all axes. 1: The acceleration is determined by "#2001 rapid" (Rapid traverse rate) and "#2004 G0tL" (G0 time con- stant (linear)) and is i ndividual for each axis. bit7: Movement at command of workpi ece position offset for rotary axis Select whether to move the machine by the workpiece pos ition offset when the workpiece position offset for rotary axis is started or cancelled. 0: Move 1: Not move set23 bit0: Load inertia ratio display Select whether to show the load inertia ratio of servo and spindle units on the drive monitor screen. 0: Display 1: Not display (Show zero) bit1: Spindle temperature display Select whether or not to display the spindle unit temperature on the drive monitor screen. 0: Display according to "#13225 SP225/bit2" 1: Not display (Show zero) bit2: Warning of "WCS offset not reflected" This parameter specifies whether to enable the warning that informs that any of the following items being selected has not been reflected in the workpiece position counter or in the program position counter:  Workpiece coordinate system offset  Extended workpiece c oordinate system offset  External workpiece co ordinate system offset  Workpiece coordinate system shift 0: Disable 1: Enable bit4: Speed indication when selection of axis for feedrate command is valid Select which speed is to be displayed on the screen wh en the axis (axes) for feedrate command is (are) being selected with G130. 0: Display the resultant speed of the axis (axes) designated with G130 1: Display the resultant speed of all the axes bit5: Warning "Continuous write of parameter" invalid Select whether to indicate the warning when write of parameter is being continuously executed through a "write window" of the PLC window function. 0: Indicate the warning 1: Not indicate the warning bit6: Retention of directory path invalid Select whether to enable/disable the function of retaining the previous directory path. 0: Enable 1: Disable (Note) The function supports the following screens: Oper ation search, Collation and stop, T-list search and Check search. set24 bit3: Number of file in put/output points for PL C constant (extension) Specify the number of file I/O points for the PLC consta nt (extension) at the time of parameter input/output (ALL.PRM). 0: All the points of file input/output (ALL.PRM) for the PLC constant (extension) 1: The number of points specif ied by #1326 (PLC Const Ext. Num) for the PLC constant (extension) #1253 set25 bit0: Number of machine tool builder macro definition files Select the number of definition file s for machine tool builder macro. 0: One (O199999999) 1: Ten (O199999990 to O199999999) bit2: Acceleration/Deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle Change the acceleration/deceleration mode of hole drilling cycle. 0: The operation follows the parameter setting. The setting of #1153 is enabled. 1: A constant inclination acceleration/deceleration and an acceleration/deceleration after interpolation are applied to the hole drilling cycle. The setting of #19417 is enabled. bit4: Clearing data at fixed cycle mode switch Select whether to zero clear the argument data at the time of fixed cycle mode switch. 0: Do not zero clear the argument data 1: Zero clear the argument data bit5: G53 motion type Change the motion type for G53 command. 0: Cutting feed or rapid traverse is determined by the active modal status. 1: Fixed to rapid traverse. bit6: Switch G68/G69 function Select whether to use G68/G69 as tool post mirror im age function or balance cut function when the selected G code system is 6 or 7. 0: Facing turret mirror image 1: Balance cut #1254 set26 bit0: Reducing processing time of zero -travel-distance block (for L system only) Select whether to reduce the processi ng time of a zero-travel-distance block. 0: Disable the reduction of non-travel block processing time. 1: Enable the reduction of non-travel block processing time. bit1: Program format switch Enable the program format switch function. 0: Disable the function 1: Enable the function bit3: Select timi ng for updating axis parameter Select the timing for when to update axis parameter. 0: Update after All axes smoothing zero turns ON for al l the part systems. 1: Update after All axes smoothing zero turns ON for each part system. bit4: Reference of ze ro point shift distance for spindle C axis Select the reference method for zero point shift distanc e when C axis returns to zero under spindle C axis control. 0: Use "#2027 G28sft" as the zero point shift distance. 1: Use "#3113 cax_sft" as the zero point shift distance. set27 bit0: High-accuracy calculation during constant surface speed control Enable the high-accuracy spindle speed calcul ation under constant surface speed control. 0: Calculate the speed with the tole rance of plus or minus 10r/min (sam e as conventional specifications). 1: Calculate the speed with the to lerance of plus or minus 1r/min. bit1: MTB macro M99 command single block stop For M99 command during MTB macro, select wh ether to execute single block stop or not. 0: Not execute single block stop in the M99 command 1: Execute single block stop in M99 command (Note 1) During Suppression of single block stop (#3003/ bit0 = 1) of system variable, single block stop is not applied in the M99 command even if this parameter is valid. (Note 2) While single block is suppressed by the A1 command of macro definition program (O199999999), single block stop is applied if this parameter is valid. bit3: Holding diameter/radius designation after NC reset Select whether to hold the diameter/radius designation of each axis selected in G10.9 after NC reset. 0: Diameter/radius designation is initialized by NC reset. 1: Diameter/radius designat ion is held after NC reset. bit4:Tool retraction from hole bottom in boring cycle 0: Move at the rapid traverse rate (G0 interpolation feed). 1: Move with linear interpolation (at the feedrate commanded with F). bit5: Tool length offset for multiple axis synchronization control Select whether to enable the tool length offset dedi cated to the multiple axis synchronization control. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit6: Acc/Dec pattern applied until rotation sync when sync SP start signal is OFF Select the acceleration/deceleration pattern to be appl ied until the synchronized spindle attains rotation syn- chronization, when spindle synchronization command is given with the spindle start signal of the synchro- nized spindle OFF (servo OFF). 0: Linear acceleration/deceleration 1: Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration #1256 set28 bit0: Switch to C axis mode at cancel of EMG stop/door open under spindle C axis Select whether to switch the contro l to C axis mode when you execute and cancel emergency stop, or turn ON and OFF the door open signal und er spindle C axis control mode. (This takes effect when spindle/C axis switch method is PLC signal type.) 0: Not switch to C axis mode. Control is switched to C axis mode when C axis' Servo OFF signal is turned OFF and ON after cancel of emergency stop or door open. 1: Switch to C axis mode when emerge ncy stop or door open is cancelled. bit1: Position loop gain in C axis zero return/orientation/s ynch tap zero return Select the position loop gain to be applied when the in terpolation mode is selected for the spindle C axis, spindle orientation or synchronous tap zero return that is executed when the spindle stops (when "#3106 zrn_typ/bitE"="0"). 0: SP003 PGS 1: SP002 PGN bit2: Change current FB (load) output unit Select the units in which the current FB (load) is output to a register. When output in units of 0.01%, the ou tput range is from 0 to 327.67%. 0: Default (Output in units of 1%). 1: Output in units of 0.01%. bit3: Tool shape compensation in 3D coordinate conversion mode (For L system only) Select whether to apply tool shape compensation be fore or after executing 3D coordinate conversion. 0: Apply tool shape compensation before 3D coordinate conversion 1: Apply tool shape compensation after 3D coordinate conversion #1257 set29 Not used. Set to "0". #1258 set30 bit0: Skip I/F switch Select A or B contact for the skip interface. 0: A contact (Skip operation star ts at rising edge of a signal) 1: B contact (Skip operation starts at falling edge of a signal) (Note) This parameter is not applied to PLC skip. bit3: System lock warning selection Set this parameter to "1" if you choose to have the system alarm message (Z64) cleared by NC reset. 0: Not clear the message by NC reset 1: Clear the message by NC reset bit4: Thread recut command Specify through which interface to give a thread recut command. 0: Through HMI screen 1: Through PLC I/F bit5: Addition of comm and Q to thread recut Select whether to add the command Q's data to the spi ndle angle to be compensated during thread recut of a stored thread section. 0: Not add the command Q's data 1: Add the command Q's data bit6: Spindle compensation angle in thread recut mode Select whether to calculate the spindle compensation angle when a thread cut command is given during the thread recut mode. 0: Calculate the angle for the initial thread cut command in automatic operation. (The initially calculated an- gle is used for the 2nd and subsequent thread cut commands.) 1: Calculate the angle every time a thread cut command is given. set31 bit0: Enable normal life tool's data count (for M system only) Select whether to enable or disabl e too use data counting when the tool status is 2 (normal life tool). 0: Not count the use data of normal life tool. 1: Count the use data of normal life tool. bit2: Disabling decimal point for PLC window Select the input/output specificatio ns of fraction data for PLC window. 0: Enable decimal point Fraction data is output as the fixed fraction information. (The numbers of digits in the integer and fraction part s are the same as of the on-screen specifications.) 1: Disable decimal point (cut off all digits after decimal point) Only the integer part is input/output. bit7: Macro processing method Select the macro processing method. 0: High speed 1: Compatible with conventional models (*) Remarks Select whether to refresh the display data at regula r intervals of a certain num ber of macro blocks when processing successive macro blocks. Selecting "0" enables high-speed macro processing, be cause it creates no data for refreshing display. Selecting "1" enables most of the blocks under proces sing to be viewed , because it creates display re- fresh data at regular intervals even for successive macro blocks. When "1" is selected, the operation is the same as of M700 Series control. #1260 set32 bit0: Switching to actual cutting mode during automatic operation 0: Unable to switch to actual cutting mode or no-load operation mode duri ng automatic operation. Block stop is executed before a speed ch ange-disabled command (thread cut or tap). 1: Able to switch to actual cutting mode or no-load operation mode during automatic operation. Block stop is not executed before a speed ch ange-disabled command (thread cut or tap). bit1: Speed selection for other part systems during actual cutting mode 0: Other part systems operate at the programmed speed in the same manner as the part system where a speed change-disabled command (thread cut or tap) is given. 1: Other part systems operate at the program check speed. bit2: Prohibit reverse run of fixed cycle Select whether to prohibit re verse run of a fixed cycle during manual arbitrary reverse run. 0: Permit reverse run 1: Prohibit reverse run (Note) Even when the parameter is "1", reverse run is enabled during fixed cycle operation. bit3: Prohibit MSTB reverse run Select whether to prohibit reverse run of MSTB during the manual arbitrary reverse run. 0: Enable MSTB reverse run 1: Disable MSTB reverse run (Note) Even when the parameter is "0", MSTB reverse run is disabled while the MSTB reverse run prohibit signal (MRPSG) is ON. bit4:Thread cut start shift angle operation Select the operation to be performed at the start of thread cutting when a thread cut start shift angle com- mand is issued. 0: Start thread cut from the thread cut start sh ift angle after phase Z has been detected once. 1: Start thread cut from the thread cut start shift angle, independently of phase Z detection. bit7: Storage of spindle C axis coordinate system Select whether to automatically insert zero return to sp indle/C axis control at the initial servo ON or at every servo ON. This parameter is enabled when spin dle/C axis deceleration stop type (#3106 zrn_typ/bit8=1) and zero point return automatic insertion (#1226 aux10/bit3=1) are selected. 0: Execute automatic zero return before C axis rotati on for the first C axis command given after every servo ON. 1: Execute automatic zero return bef ore C axis rotation for the first C axis command given after the initial servo ON. For the 2nd and subsequent servo ON, the coordinate sy stem is retained after servo OFF, and zero re- turn is not automatically inserted. set33 bit1: Operation panel I/O emergency stop function OFF Select whether to disable the em ergency stop function when an operatio n panel I/O unit is disconnected. (This setting is enabled for separated-type NC only) 0: Enable the emergency stop function 1: Disable the emergency stop function (*) While the operation panel I/O unit is connected to the NC unit, the emergency stop function is enabled irrespective of this parameter. bit2: Synchronized turning ON/OFF of NC and display Select whether to synchronize the turning ON/OF F of the M800W Series NC controller and display. 0: NC and display turn ON/OFF independently. 1: NC and display turn ON/OFF in synchronization with each other. (*) If no operation panel I/O unit is connected, the NC and display turn ON/OFF independently, irrespective of this parameter. bit3: PLC high-speed process start timing selection Select the type of PLC high-speed process start timing. 0: Type 1 (default) 1: Type 2 bit4: High-speed ladder execution cycle Specify the high-speed ladder execut ion cycle. (Standard value: 0) 0: Default (equivalent to Mitsubishi M700V Series) 1: Twice the default (Note 1) When you set "1" for M800/M 80 Series with S/W C2 or the previous version, the cycle execution is equivalent to Mitsubishi M700V Series. (Note 2) When the parameter "#1261 set33/bit4" is set to its default value, the high-speed ladder execution cycle differs according to the mode l and the number of part systems. bit5: Operation switch at OT and soft limit in synchronous operation method This parameter switches the axis operation at stoke end and soft limit for slave axis in the synchronous op- eration method. When independent operation method or correction mode is set, the operation will be the same as #1261=0 (disable). 0: When "Stroke end" signal is turned ON for only slave ax is by stroke end or soft limit, the slave axis stops but master axis does not stop. 1: When one of master axis or slave axis is in the stroke end or soft limit, both master and slave axes stop. set34 bit2: Disable warning for coordinate system selection without 3D manual feed spec. Select whether to display a warning when hypothetic al coordinate system has been selected although 3D manual feed is not included in the specifications. 0: Display 1: Not display bit3: Condition of turning OFF Tool life end signal (for L system only) Select when to turn OFF the tool life end sig nal in the tool life management 1 for L system. 0: When M function finish signal (FIN) is turned ON 1: When a tool that has not reached the end of life is selected #1263 set35 bit1: Show/Hide history clear menus Show/Hide operation menus for data clear of collection setting screen, history clear of alarm history screen, history start, and history stop. 0: Show history clearing operation menus 1: Hide history clearing operation menus bit2: Hide the alarm category of PLC message Select whether to hide the alarm category of PLC message (alarm or operator message). 0: Display the alarm category 1: Hide the alarm category bit3: Overvoltage alarm switch Select the alarm for overvoltage. 0: Display the warning upon occurrence of overvoltage alarm. 1: Execute emergency stop upon occurrence of overvoltage alarm. #1264 set36 bit2: Disabling manual numerical value command during automatic operation Specify whether manual numerical commands s hould be disabled during automatic operation. 0: Enable manual numerical co mmand during automatic operation 1: Disable manual numerical co mmand during automatic operation #1265 ext01 bit0: Command format 1 Select the command format for the fixed cycle for compound lathe. 0: Conventional format 1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format (1 block command method) bit1: Command format 2 Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle. 0: Conventional format 1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format bit2: Command format 3 Select the command format fo r the fixed cycle for drilling. 0: Conventional format 1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format bit3: F-command unit 2 (for L system only) Specify the unit to be used if a synchronous feed or thread cutting lead command contains no decimal point. 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) or Type 2 Type 1 or Type 2 is selected by the parameter "#1271 ext07/bit2". 1: Type 3 F command 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev E command Sync feed (corner chamfer/corner R fe edrate) 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev Thread cut (fine thread cut lead) 0.0001 mm/rev, 0.000001 inch/rev (Note) Type 3 is independent of the input unit. #1266 ext02 bit0: Axis name extension valid 0: "Axis name extension" invalid 1: "Axis name extension" valid #1267 ext03 bit0: Not used. ext04 bit2: Enable synchronous tapping per minute Select whether to enable feed per minute wi th the F command of synchronous tapping cycle. 0: Disable (Command in pitch regardless of "G group 5" modal) 1: Enable (Follow "G group 5" modal) bit4: Enable address K to specify the repetition count in G76/G87 Select whether to enable address K to be used for sp ecifying the repetition c ount in G76/G87 command. 0: Disable 1: Enable When "1" is set in this parameter with "#1271 ext07/bi t1" (Specifying repetition c ount with address K) set to "1", the address K given to G76/G87 is treated as the num ber of repetitions. ext05 bit0: Inverse tangent (ATAN) command format Select the command format of ATAN operation. 0: Format 1 Either the ratio of two sides or the whole expression is enclosed in square brackets "[ ]". ATAN[#k] or ATAN[#j/#k] 1: Format 2 Two sides are enclosed in "[ ]" respectively and also divided by a slash "/". ATAN[#j]/[#k] bit1: Range of inverse tangent (ATAN) calculation result Select the range of calculation result for inverse ta ngent (ATAN) to be applied when Format 2 is selected for inverse tangent (ATAN) command (when #1269/bit0 = 1). 0: -180 to 180° 1: 0 to 360° #1270 ext06 bit2: Select finished shape program search method Select how to search a finished shape program to be called by G70, G71, G72 or G73 command. 0: Search from the top of the curr ently executed program or from the to p of the program specified with the address A. 1: <G71, G72, G73> Search from a block following G71, G72 or G73. <G70> Search from the same start sequence No., if it exists, as that of t he finished shape program where G71, G72 or G73 has been executed. In the other cases, search from the top of the currently executed progra m or from the top of the program specified with the address A. bit4: Switch chamfering operation Select the operation to be performed when the cycle start point is exceeded as a result of chamfering in a thread cutting cycle. 0: Output a program error (P192). 1: Stop chamfering upon arrival at the cycle start point, and then move to the end point of the thread cutting block at a rapid traverse rate. bit5: Coordinate rotation angle wi thout command (for L system only) Select the operation when there is no rotation angle command R for the coordinate rotation. 0: Use the previously commanded value (modal value) . If the command is the first issued command, the rotation angle will be 0°. 1: Use the set value in "#8081 Gcode Rotat". bit6: Switch continuous thread cutting Z phase wait operation Select when to start the 2nd block thread cutting when there is a command with no movement (MST com- mand, etc.) between the thread cutting blocks. 0: Wait for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal before starting the movement. 1: Start movement without waiting for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal. bit7: Handle C axis coordinate during cylindrical interpolation Specify whether to keep the rotary ax is coordinate as before the cylindrical interpolation start command is issued during the cylindrical interpolation. 0: Not keep 1: Keep ext07 bit0: Mirror image operation Select the type of mirror image operation. 0: Type 1  The program mirror image, external mirror image, and parameter mirror image are exclusive to each other.  An incremental command moves the image to the pos ition indicated by the travel amount with the sign inverted. 1: Type 2  Mirror image operation is enabled when the program mirror image (G51.1) command is issued or when the external signal or parameter is ON.  An incremental command moves the image to the position determined by applying the mirror image to the absolute program coordinates. bit1: Address specifying fixed cycle repetition count (for M system only) Select the address that specifie s the fixed cycle repetition count. 0: Address L only (Default) 1: Addresses K and L If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously, the data at address K will be used for operation. bit2: F-command unit (M system) Specify the unit to be used if a thread cutting lead command contains no decimal point. * This setting is independent of the input unit. 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) F1: 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev 1: Type 2 F1: 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev (L system) Specify the unit to be used if a synchronous feed or thread cutting lead command contains no decimal point. 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) [Input unit B] F1: 0.000 1 mm/rev, 0.000001 inch/rev [Input unit C] F1: 0.00001 mm/rev, 0.0000001 inch/rev 1: Type 2 F1: 0.0001 mm/rev, 0.000001 inch/rev * Type 2 is independent of the input unit. bit3: G-code group for unidirectional positioning (for M system only) Select the G-code group for unidirectional positioning. 0: Unmodal G code (group 00) 1: Modal G code (group 01) Related parameter: "#8209 G60 Shift" (Set the last po sitioning direction and distance for each axis ap- plicable when the unidirectional positioning command is issued.) bit4: Operation by independent G40 command Select whether the radius co mpensation vector is canceled by the independent G40 command. 0: Type 1 (conventional specification) (Default) The radius compensation vector will be canceled by the independent G40 command. 1: Type 2 The radius compensation vector won't be canceled by the independent G40 command: it will be can- celed by the next travel command for the radius compensation plane. bit5: Cut start position (for L system only) Select the position from where cutting begins in a fixed cycle for compound lathe. 0: Conventional spec ification (Default) The cut start position will be determ ined by the final shaping program. 1: Extended specifications Determined from the cycle start point. bit6: Nose R compensation (for L system only) Select whether to apply nose R compensat ion for shapes in a rough cutting cycle. 0: Conventional spec ification (Default) The shape after nose R compensation in the fina l shaping program will be used as rough cutting shape. (when the nose R compensation for the final shaping program). 1: Extended specifications The shape without nose R compensation in the final shaping program will be used as rough cutting shape. bit7: Cut amount (for L system only) Select the operation to be performed when the progra m-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. 0: Conventional spec ification (Default) A program error will occur when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. 1: Extended specifications Rough cutting will be performed by one cut when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. ext08 bit0: Switch pocket machining operation Select the pocket machining specification. 0: Conventional specification Pocket machining will be selected with the H designation. The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the Z direction. 1: Extended specifications Pocket machining will start only when both X and Z axes are specified in the first travel block after the finished shape start block. The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the X direction. bit1: M function synchronous tap cycle Specify whether to e nable the M function synchronous tapping cycle. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit2: Spiral/conical interpolation command format 2 Select the command format for spiral and conical interpolation. 0: Type 1 (convent ional specification) 1: Type 2 (with the number of spiral rotati on L designation and the increment designation) bit3: Switch macro call function Select whether to shift the argument to the subprogra m if nests are overlapped when per block call (G66.1) is commanded. 0: Shift 1: Not shift (Conventional specification) bit4: Tap cycle selection Select the tapping cycle. 0: Pecking tapping cycle 1: Deep hole tapping cycle bit5: Deep hole tap cycle override selection Select whether to enable override on the pulling operation during synchronized tapping with the deep hole tapping cycle. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit6: Switch corner chamfering/ corner R command format Select the command format of the corner chamfering/corner R. 0: Command format I (conventional format) Issue a command with comma (,C and ,R). 1: Command format II In addition to command format I, addresses without comma can be used to command. I/K or C can be used for corner chamfering, while R can be used for corner R. bit7: Return position after macro interrupt in fixed cycle selection Select the destination to return to after a macro interrupt in the fixed cycle. 0: Return to the block in the fixed cycle. 1: Return to the block next to the fixed cycle. #1273 ext09 bit0: Switch ASIN calc ulation results range Select the notation system fo r operation result of ASIN. 0: Do not switch minus figures to positive figures. (-90° to 90°) 1: Switch minus figures to positive figures. (270° to 90°) bit1: Switch system variable unit Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (cycle star t operation time). 0: 1 ms unit 1: 1 hour unit bit2: Switch G71, G72, G7 3 cutting direction judgment Select the cutting di rection when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71), fa ce rough cutting cycle (G72) or closed loop cutting cycle (G73) is commanded. 0: Conventional specification Determined according to the finished shape program. 1: Extended specifications Determined according to the finishing allowance and cutting allowance commanded in the program. bit3: Facing turret mirror image coordinate value type Select how to show the workpiece coordinate values of the axis for which the facing turret mirror image is valid. 0: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the same direction as those in the workpiece ma- chine coordinate system. 1: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the opposite direction to those in the workpiece machine coordinate system. bit4: Facing turret mirror image valid axis selection Select the axis for which the facing turret mirror image is valid. 0: Fixed to 1st axis. 1: Determined according to the plane selected w hen the facing turret mi rror image is commanded. #1274 ext10 bit2: M98 sequence No. address selection Select which address to use for calling a sequence No . in a sub program under sub program control (M98/ M198). 0: Address H is used for specifying the sequence No. 1: Address Q is used for specifying the sequence No. bit4: Optional block skip operation changeover Select the optional block skip operation. 0: Enable or disable optional block skipping in the middle of a block according to the setting of "#1226 aux10/bit1". 1: Enable optional block skipping at the top and in the middle of a block. Note that a slash "/" on the right-hand side of equati on or that in an equation between [ ] is handled as division operator. bit5: Use of G54Pn for selecting ex tended workpiece coordinate system Select whether to use G54Pn as a command for selecting an exten ded workpiece coordinate system. 0: Not use G54Pn as a command for sele cting an extended workpiece coordinate system 1: Use G54Pn as a command for selecting an extended workpiece coordinate system When 1 is set in this parameter, G54Pn is treated in the same manner as G54.1Pn. bit7: Word range check Select whether to check that the oper ation expression of the word data in the program is enclosed in brackets [ ] when the machine program is executed. This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999 and the machine tool builder macro program. 0: Not check 1: Check ext11 Not used. Set to "0". ext12 Not used. Set to "0". ext13 bit0: Tool life management II count type 2 (default: 0) Select how and when cumulative number of mountings or cuttings will be incremented in tool life manage- ment II. The condition to output "tool group life over (TGLO)" signal will be changed accordingly. 0: Type 1 (default) Counts up when the spindle tool is used for cutting. TGLO signal will be output when the last tool in se- lected group is judged as expired. 1: Type 2 Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a pr ogram at the time of resetting. TGLO signal will be output when any of tool groups has reached its lifetime limit. bit1: Tool life management II life prediction Select whether to enable tool life predic tion function in tool life management II. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit2: Tool life management II life end signal timing Select the timing at which tool life predicti on signal is output in tool life management II. 0: Output only when the ["life value" - "used value"] matches the remaining life. ("life value" - "used value" = "remaining life") 1: Output when the ["life value" - "used value"] is less than the remaining life. ("life value" - "used value" <= "remaining life") bit3: Tool life management II life end signal tool Select the tool for whic h the tool life prediction signal is output in tool life management II. 0: Output the signal tool by tool. 1: Output the signal at the last tool in the group. bit4: Tool life management II count changeover (For M system only) Select the tool life count method and its timing. 0: Conforms to "ext13/bit0" setting. 1: When "ext13/bit0" is set to "0": Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a program at the time of resetting. Follow the setting of "Method (Mthd)" on Tool life screen. The output condition of "tool group life over" signal conforms to "ext13/bit0". #1278 ext14 bit0: Program restar t method selection Select the program restart type. 0: Restart type A 1: Restart type B bit1: Change miscellaneous command completion method Select the complete signal and completion condition. 0: Normal method Complete at the falling edge of M function finish 1 signal (FIN1) or rising edge of M function finish 2 (FIN2). 1: High-speed method Complete when High-speed M finish signal (MFIN1 to 4, SFIN1 to 6, TFIN1 to 4 or BFIN1 to 4) reaches the same logical level as the strobe signal. bit2: Change areas for stored stroke limit I Enable/Disable change of the areas for stored stroke limit I. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit3: Select M30 re winding operation Select the operation when the miscellaneous function completed signal (FIN) is returned to M30. 0: Not carry out automatic rewinding 1: Carry out automatic rewinding bit4: Select M02 re winding operation Select the operation when the miscellaneous function completed signal (FIN) is returned to M02. 0: Not carry out automatic rewinding 1: Carry out automatic rewinding bit5: M code output during high-speed simple program check Select whether to enable M code output during high-speed simple program check. The M codes to be output are those specified by "#1451 M[M031-000](SMLK)" to "#1466 M[M511-480](SM- LK)". 0: Disable 1: Enable bit7: Operation for circular radius error at perfect circle command Select the operation to be performed when a perfect circ le command is given and there is a difference be- tween the start point and end point radii, but no differ ence between the start point and end point angles. 0: Linear interpolation from the start to the end point 1: Spiral interpolation from the start to the end point ext15 bit0: Part system synchronization method Select the part system synchronization method. 0: If one part system is not in th e automatic operation, the synchroniza tion command will be ignored and the next block will be executed. 1: Operate according to the "waiting ignore" signal. If the "waiting ignore" signal is set to "1", the synchronization command will be ignored. When set to "0", synchronization will be applied. bit1: Interrupt amount during machine lock Select when to cancel the interruption amount during machine lock. 0: Canceled when resetting 1: Canceled during manual reference po sition return (not when resetting) bit2: Selection of cutting start interlock target block Select whether to enable the cutting star t interlock for successive cutting blocks. 0: Enable 1: Disable bit4: Dry run OFF during thread cutting Select whether to enable or disable dry run during thread cutting. 0: Enable dry run 1: Disable dry run bit5: Cancel G92 shift distance Select whether to clear the G92 (c oordinate system setting) shift di stance when the manua l reference posi- tion is reached. 0: Not clear 1: Clear bit6: Enable single block stop at middle point Set whether to enable/disable single block st op at the middle point of G28/G29/G30. 0: Disable single block stop 1: Enable single block stop bit7: Retain G52 at manual reference po sition return Select whether to retain the local coordinate system setting (G52) at the time of manual reference position arrival. This parameter is enabled when #1279 ext15/bit5 is 1. 0: Not retain (Cancel) 1: Retain #1280 ext16 bit0: I/F per axis during mixed control (cross axis control) Select how to handle the following PLC interface for ax es interchanged with the mixed control (cross axis control). - Mirror image - Manual/automatic interlock - Manual/automatic machine lock 0: Follows axis configuration before the mixed control (cross axis control). 1: Follows axis configuration after th e mixed control (cross axis control). (Example) The device No. of automatic interlock (+) for X1 will be as follows when t he mixed control (cross axis control) is executed with the 1st axis (X1) in the 1st part system and 1st ax is (X2) in the 2nd part system. When "0" is set: YA60 (interface for 1st axis in 1st part system) When "1" is set: YA68 (interface for 1st axis in 2nd part system) (Note) If the number of axes in the part system changes with the mixed control (cross axis control), the inter- face of the target axis may change when this parameter is set to "1". bit1: Mixed control (cross axis control) cancel with reset Select whether to cancel the mixed control (cross axis control) when reset is applied. 0: Cancel. 1: Not cancel. bit2: Interchange coordinate position display Select whether to display interchanged (or moved) coor dinate positions in the mixed control (cross axis con- trol). This setting will be followed not only when the axes are interchanged but also when the axes are moved. 0: Display interchanged (or moved) coordinate positions. 1: Display coordinate positions without being interchanged (nor moved). (Example) When 1st part system's C axis is moved to 2nd part syst em with a 1st part system (X , Z, C, Y) and 2nd part system (X, Z) configuration: 1st part system: X, Z and Y coor dinate positions are displayed. 2nd part system: X, Z and C coor dinate positions are displayed. bit3: Reset operation for synchron ization/superimposition control Select whether to cancel synchronization/superimposition control when reset is applied. 0: Cancel. 1: Not cancel. bit4: Mixed control (cross axis control) command method Select how to command mixed control (cross axis control). 0: Use PLC interface signal for mixed control 1: Use G command for mixed control bit5: Command method of control axis synchronization between part systems Select how to command the control ax is synchronization between part systems. 0: Use PLC I/F. 1: Use G command. bit6: Interchange machine position display Select whether to display interchanged (or moved) ma chine positions in the mixed control (cross axis con- trol). This setting will be followed not only when the axes are interchanged but also when the axes are moved. (Note 1) This parameter is enabled when "#1280 ext16/ bit2 (Interchange coordinate position display)" is "0". 0: Display interchanged (or moved) machine positions. 1: Display machine positions withou t being interchanged (nor moved). bit7: Control axis superimposition command method Select how to command cont rol axis superimposition. 0: Use PLC interface signal for control axis superimposition 1: Use G command for control axis superimposition ext17 bit0: Switch manual high-speed reference position return in synchronous control Select the movement of synchronized axes in manual high-speed reference position return. 0: Master and slave axes start the return synchronizing . Even when one axis stops at its reference position, the other axis continues moving until it reaches its reference position. 1: Master and slave axes start the return synchroni zing, and when the master axis stops at the reference position, the slave axis also stops. Thus, the re lative position of the master and slave is kept. bit1: Selection of additional tool offset axis (for L system only) Select axis to carry out the additi onal axis' tool compensation function. 0: Follow the setting of "#1520 Tchg34". 1: The axis specified by "#1027 base_J " is used as the 3rd compensation axis. bit3: Synchronous control operation setting Select whether or not the positioning of slave axis automat ically aligns with that of master axis when the axis subject to synchronous control is changed from servo OFF to servo ON. 0: The positioning does not automatically align. 1: The positioning automatically aligns. bit5: High-speed synchronous tapping valid Select whether to enable the high-speed synchronous tapping. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit6: Compensation method for ex ternal machine coordinate system/ball screw thermal expansion during synchronization Select the method of how to compensate the slave axis when compensating ex ternal machine coordinate system or ball screw thermal expansion during synchro nization control. The setting of this parameter will be validated when you select synchronous operation meth od by the synchronization control operation method signal. 0: Master axis and slave axis are independently compensated. 1: Master axis' compensation amount is applied to slave axis. bit7: Switch automatic high-speed reference position return in synchronous control Select the movement of synchronized axes in automatic high-speed reference position return. 0: Master and slave axes start the return synchroni zing, and when the master axis stops at the reference position, the slave also stops. Thus, the relati ve position of the master and slave is kept. 1: Master and slave axes start the return synchronizing . Even when one axis stops at its reference position, the other axis continues moving until it reaches its reference position. #1282 ext18 bit1: Condition of the reference position reached signal in synchronous control This parameter switches only conditions of a master axis's reference position return reached signal in syn- chronous operation. A slave axis's signal is output when the slave axis reaches the reference position coor- dinate. 0: A master axis's reference position reached signal is output only when both of the master and slave axes reach the reference position coordinat e by a reference position return. 1: A master axis's reference position reached signal is output when the master axis reaches the reference position coordinate. bit3: Index table clamp type Set the clamp type of the index table. 0: Type A Clamped when an unclamp command turns OFF. 1: Type B Clamped when a clamp command turns ON. bit5: Automatic correction of synch ronization offset at power ON The slave axis position is automatic ally corrected so that the synchroni zation offset before having turned the power OFF the last time can be restored at power ON. (Note) This parameter is enabled when the paramete r "#1281 ext17/bit3" (Synch ronous control operation setting) is set to "1". 0: Disable 1: Enable bit6: Reset type at emergency stop cancel Select the type of reset to be applied when emergency stop is cancelled. 0: Reset 1 1: Reset 2 bit7: Functional operation inhibition during write of servo parameters Select whether to inhibit functional o peration during write of servo parameters. 0: Inhibit functional operation with an alarm displayed 1: Give priority to functional operati on with write of servo parameters suspended (Note) This parameter can inhibit a start of the following four functions.  Spindle/C axis changeover  Speed observation mode signal ON  High-speed synchronous tapping  Start of PLC indexing axis #1283 ext19 Not used. Set to "0". ext20 bit0: Spindle speed clamp check Select whether to check the spindle speed cl amp under the constant surface speed control. 0: Check the spindle speed clamp. 1: Not check the spindle speed clamp. (Note) This parameter is enabled when the parameter "#1146 Sclamp" is set to "1". bit1: Spindle control selected in response to Z83 (NC started during SP rotation) Select whether to force-stop the sp indle when the alarm (Z83 0001) occurs. 0: Not force-stop the spindle 1: Force-stop the spindle bit3: M code output during multi-system simultaneous simulation (Check type II) Select whether to enable a miscellaneous function c ode output during execution of multi-part system simul- taneous simulation (Check type II). 0: Not output a miscellaneous function 1: Output a miscellaneous function (Note) When the output is enabled , the miscellaneous codes specified in #1406 S_mode(SMLK), #1407 T_- mode(SMLK), #1408 M2_mode(SMLK) and #1451 M[M 031-000](SMLK) to #1466 M[M511-480](SMLK) can be output. M code output specification is det ermined by #1405 M_mode(SMLK). bit4: Maximum life ti me/life count for tool life ma nagement I (for L system only) Select the maximum life time and life co unt for tool life management I of L system. 0: Life time 0 to 99:59 (h:min) Life count 0 to 65000 (times) 1: Life time 0 to 5000:00 (h:min) Life count 0 to 99999999 (times) bit6: Automatic operation handle interruption during inclined surface machining Select whether to enable the automatic operation handle interruption function during inclined surface machin- ing. 0: Disable 1: Enable ext21 bit0: Multi-part system program management Select whether to use multi- part system program management. 0: Not use 1: Use (Note) When this parameter's value is changed, the power must be turned OFF and ON, and the system for- matted. Two or more part systems from [1] to [4] need to be set to "1" in "#1001 SYS_ON ". Otherwise this parameter will be disabled even though set to "1". bit1: Program search type switch Select how to search a program to operate. 0: Operation search is perfo rmed in the selected part system. 1: Operation search is perf ormed for all part systems. (The program No. will be common to all part systems.) bit2: Multi-part system program generation and operation Select whether to perform the following processes for all the part systems or for each part system separately in multi-part system program mana gement: newly create, delete or rename the machining programs in NC memory (including MDI program and machine tool build er macro program) or transfer, compare, merge the programs between NC memo ry and other device. 0: Perform these processes for the programs in all the part systems. If no subprogram contents are found by the subprogram call during automatic operation, the program will be searched for and executed from $1. 1: Perform these processes for the pr ograms in the selected part system. #1286 ext22 bit5: Selection of multi-part system program input/output method Select whether to perform the transfer from NC memory to other device fo r all the part systems or for each part system separately in mult i-part system program management. 0: Output the desi gnated programs for a ll the part systems. (The programs ou tput from NC memory contain the system delimiter $ marks.) 1: Output the programs of only the selected part system. #1287 ext23 bit1: Inclined surface coordinate display 0: Display the position which includes tool length offset. 1: Display the position on the progr am which excludes tool length offset. bit2: Inclined surface coordinate display (for M system only) 0: Display the position which includes tool radius compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool radius compensation. bit4: Relative co ordinate display (M system) 0: Display the position which includes tool length offset. 1: Display the position on the progr am which excludes tool length offset. (L system) 0: Display the position which includes tool shape compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool shape compensation. bit5: Relative co ordinate display (M system) 0: Display the position which includes tool radius compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool radius compensation. (L system) 0: Display the position which includes nose R compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes nose R compensation. bit6: Absolute coordinate display Select how coordinate values are displayed when absolute coordinate display is selected ("#1221 aux05/ bit0"="1"). (L system) 0: Display the position which includes tool shape compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool shape compensation. bit7: Absolute coordinate display Select how coordinate values are displayed when absolute coordinate display is selected ("#1221 aux05/ bit0"="1"). (L system) 0: Display the position which includes nose R compensation. 1: Display the position on the program which excludes nose R compensation. ext24 bit0: MDI program clear Select whether to clear the MDI programs when MDI oper ation ends, the power is turned ON again, reset is input, or emergency stop is canceled. 0: Not clear 1: Clear (save only % programs). bit2: Restore previous program before external search by NC reset Select whether to restore the previous program before external search when operation is finished, power is turned OFF and ON, NC reset is input or Emergency stop is cancelled. 0: Not restore the previous pr ogram before external search 1: Restore the previous pr ogram before external search bit3: Restore previous program before external search by Program restore signal Select whether to restore the previous program before external search when Program restore signal is input. 0: Not restore the previous pr ogram before external search 1: Restore the previous pr ogram before external search bit7: Behavior of position counter at change in workpiece coordinate system offset When a change is made to the workpiece coordinate system offset, extended workpiece coordinate system offset, external workpiece coordina te system offset or workpiece coordinate system shift being se lected, the position counter will be updated in accor dance with the setting of this parameter. The specified behavior applies to the following counters:  Workpiece coordinate position  Program position  Tip workpiece position (*1)  Table coordinate position (*1)  Workpiece set position (*1)  Inclined surface coordinate position (*1) (*1) These counters are displayed when an optional function associated with 5- axis control is active. 0: The counter is updated when any of the following actions takes place after the change.  Cycle start  Reset  Emergency stop 1: The counter is updated immediately upon the change. ext25 bit0: Tool radius compensation switch corner judgment method (nose R compen.) Select the criterion to execute the outer rounding at the small corner in tool radius compensation. (L system) 0: The corner angle is 0°; linear-li near; G02-G03/G03- G02; the radius is the sa me. (Conventional method) 1: The corner angle is 1° or sma ller; linear-linear; G02-G03/ G03-G02; the radius is almost the same. (Meth- od for rounding minute corner angle) (M system) 0: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02. (Conventional method) 1: The corner angle is 1° or sma ller; linear-linear; G02-G03/ G03-G02; the radius is almost the same. (Meth- od for rounding minute corner angle) ext26 Not used. Set to "0". ext27 bit2: Variable command: Reset operation for tool function T code (#4120/#4320) Select how reset operation affects the a ddress T's modal information (#4120/#4320). 0: Clear the information 1: Retain the information #1292 ext28 bit1: Address F given in sync tap cycle Select the specification of address F given in synchronous tapping cycle. 0: The value given to address F in synchronous tappin g cycle is treated as the feed rate. Feed command follows the setting of "#1268 ext04/bit2 Enable synch ronous tapping per minute". F modal status is un- changed. 1: Follow the G code group 5 modal status, irrespective of the setting of "#1268 ext04/bit2 Enable synchro- nous tapping per minute". The F modal value given in the program is treated as the feed rate. bit5: Selection of sub program call operation in fixed cycle mode Select the operation to be carried out when sub program call (M98/M198) and either an axis address or ad dress R (for hole drilling cycle) are given in one block during fixed cycl e for drilling or turning machining. 0: Not execute fixed cycle operation in the s ub program call block. Sub program call is executed after travelling to the po sition specified by the axis address in modal status of G code group 01. Neither the axis address nor address R affects the subsequent fixed cycle operation. 1: Execute fixed cycle operation in the sub program call block before executing the sub program call. The axis address or address R is treated as the fixed cycle argument. #1293 ext29 bit0: Synchronous feed in milling Select whether to enable synchronous feed in milling inte rpolation, cylindrical interpolation or polar coordi- nate interpolation mode. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit1: Enabling N0 command Select how to handle a command of sequence number zero (N0). 0: N0 causes an error. 1: N0 is ignored (causes no error). #1294 ext30 Not used. Set to "0". #1295 ext31 bit6: Analog spindle synchronous tapping ON Select whether to enable analog spindle synchronous tapping. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit7: Synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle: control switching method This parameter specifies the contro l method for the synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle function. 0: Not use the feedback from the encoder 1: The rotation speed command is compensated in accordance with the difference between the command position and the actual position of the analog I/F spindle. #1296 ext32 Not used. Set to "0". #1297 ext33 Not used. Set to "0". #1298 ext34 Not used. Set to "0". #1299 ext35 Not used. Set to "0". ext36 bit0: Multiple spindle control II Select multiple spindle control I or II. 0: Multiple spindle co ntrol I (L system only) 1: Multiple spindle contro l II (select from ladder) bit1: Spindle control for each part system Select whether to set spindle cont rol command (S code/G96/G92) to be common in the part systems or to be separated by each part system when multiple sp indle control II is enabled (#1300 ext36/bit0 = 1). 0: Common in the part systems 1: Separated by each part system bit2: Part system-based spindle clamp speed management Select how to manage the spindle clamp speed data. 0: Manage the data of all part systems collectively 1: Manage the data of each part system individually bit3: Spindle command rotation speed input timing selection When multiple-spindle control II is enabled (#1300 ext36/ bit0 = 1), switch the timing to update the spindle command rotation speed input when performing the sp indle selection(SWS) or spindle command selec- tion(SLSP) with M command given in the same block as S command. 0: S command updates the spindle command rotation s peed input for the spindle which is before the selec- tion by the spindle selection(SWS) or spindle command selection(SLSP). 1: S command updates the spindle command rotation speed input for the spindle which is after the selection by the spindle selection(SWS) or spindle command selection(SLSP). bit7: Spindle synchronization command method Select the spindle synchronization command method. 0: Spindle synchroniza tion with PLC I/F 1: Spindle synchronization with machining program nrfchk Near reference position check method Select the high-speed check method of the origin neighboring signal. 0: Do not check positions near the origin at high speeds. (Conventional specifications) 1: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using command machine positions. 2: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using encoder feedback positions. AutoRP Automatic return by program restart Select the method to move to the restart position when restarting the program. 0: Move the system manually to the rest art position and then restart the program. 1: The system automatically moves to the restart positio n at the first activation after the program restarts. V1comN No. of #100 address part system common variables Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #100. This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 V0comN No. of #500 address part system common variables Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #500. This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 #1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check. 0: Deceleration check specification type 1 G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/bit1". 1: Deceleration check specification type 2 G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos". #1309 GType Switch command format Select which is used to command the reverse tap. 0: G84.1/G88.1 1: D command with the value changed to negative #1310 WtMmin Minimum value for synchronization M code Set the minimum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0, 100 to 99999999 #1311 WtMmax Maximum value for synchronization M code Set the maximum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0, 100 to 99999999 #1312 T_base Tool life management standard number Set the standard No. for the tool life management. When the value specified by the T code command exceeds the set value in this parameter, the set value will be subtracted from the command value, which will be us ed as tool group No. for tool life management. When the value specified by the T code command is equal to or less than the set value, the T code will be handled as a normal T code and not subjected to tool life management. When "0" is set in this par ameter, the T code command will always specify a grou p No. (Valid for M-system tool life management II.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 #1313 TapDw1 Synchronous tap hole bottom wait time Set the hole bottom wait ti me for synchronous tapping. When P address is specified, the greater value will be used as the hole bottom wait time. When an in-position check is performed at the hole bottom, the wait time will be provided after the completion of the in-position check. (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (ms) #1314 TapInp Synchronous tap in-position check width (tap axis) Set the hole bottom in-position check width for synchronous tapping. (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check). ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 #1316 CrossCom Reference of common variables common for part sys- tems Select whether to use the common variables from #100100 to #800199. 0: Not use 1: Use This parameter is valid only when the number of variable sets is set to 600 or more. When this parameter is set to "1", variables from #100100 to #100110 will not be available as the system variables for PLC data read function, and the setting of "#1052 MemVal" will be invalid. MacVcom Machine tool builder macro variables for each part sys- tem In a multi-part system configur ation, select whether to use the machi ne tool builder macro variables (#450 to #499, #80000 to #80049 and #80500 to #80649) in common to all part systems or individually for each part system. 0: #450 to #499, #80000 to #80049 and #80500 to #80649 are used in common. 1: #450 to #499 are used in common to part systems. #80000 to #80049 and #80500 to #80649 are indi- vidual for each part system. 2: #450 to #499 are individual for each part system. #80000 to #80049 and #80500 to #80649 are common to part systems. 3: #450 to #499, #80000 to #80049 and #80500 to #80649 are used individually for each part system. Grp24_mdrst_off G group 24 modal retention reset OFF Select whether or not to retain the G group 24 modal state (G188/G189) after modal retention reset. 0: Not initialize the G group 24 modal state even when you turn OFF the program format change request signal (PFCHR) and press Cycle Start. 1: Determine the G group 24 modal state according to the program format change request signal (PFCHR) when Cycle Start is pressed. chop_R Chopping compensation value fixing method Set the head No. of the R register used as the compensatio n amount save area during fixed compensation amount method. When the first number is an odd number, the operation message "Setting error" appears. When the value overlaps with the chopping control da ta area, the operation message "Setting error" appears. ---Setting range--- 8300 to 9782 (Only the even number) (Within backup area) PLC Const Ext. Num PLC constant extension number Set the number of PLC constant extension points. ---Setting range--- 0 to 750 3D ATC type Tool change method specification Select the tool change method for determining the tool to draw solids. With 3D drawing, the tool will be changed by the method designated with this parameter, and then the image will be drawn. 0: With one standby tool 1: With two standby tools 2: With no standby tool TLM type Reference position for tool measurement Select the reference posit ion for tool measurement. 0: The machine position at the time when TLM is turned ON 1: The machine zero point Emgcnt Emergency stop contactor shut-off time Set the time taken for the drive section's main power to be shut-off when the confirmation of all the axes' stop failed after the emergency stop state. The contactor shut-off signal is output as soon as all the axes are confirmed stopped if the confirmation is done prior to the set time. When there is no safety observation option or "0" is set, the shut-off time will be 30 (s). ---Setting range--- 0 to 60 (s) #1330 MC_dp1 Contactor weld detection device 1 When safety observation is executed, set the remote I/ O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the contactor weld detection. If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as contactor weld detection device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) #1331 MC_dp2 Contactor weld detection device 2 When safety observation is executed, set the remote I/ O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the contactor weld detection. If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as contactor weld detection device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) #1332 F-bus init delay Fieldbus communication error invalid time Specify a period of time during which the control does not detect a Field bus communication error of the Field- bus expansion card mounted in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80), after st artup of the NC is com- pleted. Set this in 0.1-second increments. (Note 1) This parameter is enabled for all the comm unication expansion cards except CC-Link expansion card. (Note 2) PROFIBUS-DP communication expansion card refe rs to this parameter, whichever slot (EXT3 or EXT4 (or EXT1 or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80)) the card is mounted in. It does not refer to the param- eter #1490. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (0.1s) #1333 LMC restrain Lost motion compensation restraint in handle mode Select whether to restrain the lost motion compensation in handle mode. 0: Not restrain 1: Restrain #1334 DI/DO refresh cycl DI/DO refresh cycle Select the start cycle of PLC main processing program. When wait time until the next start cycle from 1 scan end is long, the wait time can be shortened by adjusting the start cycle. -1: Low-speed mode (2 fold) 0: Standard mode 1: High-speed mode 1 (1/2 fold) 2: High-speed mode 2 (1/4 fold) (Note 1) When the high-speed mode is selected, the fine segment processing performance may degrade due to the increased processi ng load of the system. (Note 2) When the high-speed mode 2 is selected, the scan time should be 1/4 or less of the base interruption cycle as a standard. If the standard is exceeded, the update of all the DI/DOs in refresh cycle may not be able to be performed. (Note 3) If the number of RIO statio ns connected is large, the update of all the RIO in refresh cycle may not be able to be performed. Make the setting accord ing to the number of stations per RIO channel. #1335 man_smg Manual feed acceler ation/deceleration selection Select the acceleration/deceleration mode in jog feed, incremental feed and manual reference position return (when rapid traverse signal OFF). 0: Acceleration/Deceleration for rapid traverse 1: Acceleration/Deceleration for cutting feed #400_Valtype #400 address variable type Select whether the #400-level variables are used as ma chine tool builder macro variables or as common vari- ables. 0: #400 to #449 are not available; #450 to #499 are used as machine tool builder macro variables. 1: #400 to #499 are used as common variables (Note) 700 sets or more of common variables are required for using #400 to #499 as common variables. If this parameter is set to "1" while the number of common variables is set to less than 700, this parameter setting will be regarded as "0". rev data save trg Trigger switching to save arbitrary reverse run data Select the condition to star t/stop saving reverse run data. 0: Starts when the reverse run control mode signal is turned ON, and stops when turned OFF. 1: Start when the reverse run control mode signal is ON and macro interrupt is valid (M96/ION). Stop when the reverse run control mode signal is OFF or macro interruption is fi nished (M97/IOF). (compatible with M500M) MC_dp3 Contactor weld detection device 3 When safety observation is executed, set the remote I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the contactor weld detection. If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as contactor weld detection device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) MC_dp4 Contactor weld detection device 4 When safety observation is executed, set the remote I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the contactor weld detection. If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as contactor weld detection device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) AlmDly Alarm display delay time Set a period of time by which alarm display is delayed. Set a time between when an operation alarm occurs and when the alarm display and signal turn ON. When set to "0", the alarm display and signal will turn ON immediately after the alarm occurrence. When set to "-1", the alarm display and signa l will not turn ON after the alarm occurrence. Target alarms: M01 External interlock axis exists 0004 M01 Internal interlock axis exists 0005 M01 Sensor signal illegal ON 0019 M01 No operation mode 0101 This parameter is disabled if "#1343 DlyReg" is set. ---Setting range--- -1 to 30000 (ms) DlyReg R register for delayed alarm display setting Set the head No. of the R register to be us ed for delayed display of an operation alarm. If any R register outside the user area is specified, delayed alarm display is disabled. If this parameter is set, the se tting of #1342 AlmDly is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 29899 #1349 DOOR_1 Door 1 switch input device Set a remote I/O device to input the door sensor signal to detect Door 1's status in safety observation. When "0" is set, the door is always detected to be open. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as Door 1 switch input device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) #1350 DOOR_2 Door 2 switch input device Set a remote I/O device to input the door sensor signal to detect Door 2's status in safety observation. When "0" is set, the door is always detected to be open. Thus, "X0" cannot be used as Door 2 switch input device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) #1353 MC_ct1 Contactor shutoff output 1 device Set a device of an output remo te I/O device to co ntrol contactor in safety observation. When set to "0", contactor shutoff output is disabled. Thus, "Y0" cannot be used as contactor shutoff output device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) #1357 mchkt1 Contactor operation check allowed time 1 Set a period of time until emergency stop is issued when a contactor does not operate even though contactor shutoff output 1 is output. If the vertical axis drop prevention function is used, set a value bi gger than the vertical axis drop prevention time (SV048 EMGrt). When "0" is set, the contactor operation check will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) #1361 aux_acc Auxiliary axis acceleration/deceleration type Select the acceleration/deceler ation type of auxiliary axis in PLC axis indexing. 0: Acceleration/deceleration with constant time 1: Acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination #1365 manualFtype Manual speed command type Select the manual speed command type. 0: Manual speed command The axis travels at the handle/jog feed rate. Reverse run is performed for each part system independently of the other ones. 1: Manual speed command 2 In a multi-part system configuration, the axis travels at the handle/jog feed rate mult iplied by the ratio of each part system's prog ram command speeds. When the block start point is reached in reverse run in any of the part systems, the axes in the other part systems stop simultaneously. #1366 skipExTyp Multi-system simultaneous skip command Select the operation when G31 is commanded in more than one part system. (Note) When set to "1", the skip coordinate position will always be "0" whether G31 is commanded in a single part system or in one part syst em of a multi-part system. Set to "0" when using G31 command for measurement etc. 0: Carry out G31 comm and in one part system, while the G31 is kept in an inte rlocked state in the other systems. 1: Carry out G31 comma nd simultaneously in more than one part system. Note that the skip coordinate is not read and so the skip coordinate value will be 0. G1AccOVRMax Max. override value for cutting feed constant inclination acc./dec. Set the maximum override value to be applied to the cutt ing feed that is in constant inclination acceleration/ deceleration. When the setting of this parameter is between 0 and 99, the override value is handled as 100% even though the specified cutting feed override is over 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (%) S_Sig1 Safety observation signal device 1 Set the remote I/O device to input the observation s peed change signal 1 during executing the safety obser- vation function. When set to "0", there is no observation speed change signal input. Therefore "X0" cannot be used as safety observation signal device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) S_Sig2 Safety observation signal device 2 Set the remote I/O device to input the observation s peed change signal 2 during executing the safety obser- vation function. When set to "0", there is no observation speed change signal input. Therefore "X0" cannot be used as safety observation signal device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) PwrIntegIntvl Power cons umption accumulation interval Specify the intervals of accumulating po wer consumption to cr eate the history. The accumulated power consumption history can be obtained according to this parameter along with "#1392 StartTimeIPC" (Power consumption accumulation start time). When 0 is set, power consumption is not accumulated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (hr) DrvBasePwr Fixed drive system power consumption Specify the fixed power consumption of the drive system. This value is used for calculating the power consumption. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 (W) mstpssc Multi-ste p speed monitor enabled Enable the multi-step speed monitor. 0: Disable the multi-step speed monitor 1: Enable the multi-step speed monitor * When enabling the multi-step speed monitor, setting values for SV238, SV239, SP238 and SP239 will be ignored. S_Sig3 Safety observation signal device 3 Set the remote I/O device to input the observation s peed change signal 3 during executing the safety obser- vation function. When set to "0", there is no observation speed change signal input. Therefore "X0" cannot be used as safety observation signal device. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) G1SmthChk Smoothing check method in cutting block Select whether to apply smoothing check method to a cutting block for deceleration check, when deceleration check method is selected individually for G0 and G1 (when "#1306 InpsTyp" = 1). 0: Follow the setting of Aux07/bit1 1: Apply smoothing check method #1390 BackUSBUseNum Number of backside USB ports occupied Specify the number of the display's rear USB ports occupied by a machine tool builder. Using this setting the control determines the drive to be used for the front SD and USB memory. (Note) This parameter is enabled for a Windows-based display of M800W/M80W. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 #1391 User level protect Enable Data protection by user's level Enable the function of Data protection by user's level. 0: Use a machine user password to switch the protection of each operation (s ame as the conventional models) 1: Switch the protection according to the protective levels (0 to 7) sp ecified for each operation through the protection setting screen (Note) You are authorized to change this parameter from 1 to 0 only if your operation level is the same or higher than that of "Available level" on the protection setting screen. #1392 StartTimeIPC Power consumption accumulation start time Specify when to start accumulating powe r consumption to cr eate the history. The accumulated power consumption history can be obtained according to this parameter along with "#1371 PwrIntegIntvl" (Power consumption accumulation interval). ---Setting range--- 0 to 23 (o'clock) #1393 Efficiency (PwrCal) Efficiency for power consumption computation Specify the efficiency for calculating power consumption. This value is used for calculating the drive syst em power consumption. When 0 is set, the efficiency is treated as 70 (%). If the drive system power c onsumption computed by the NC is different from that measured by a measuring device, this parameter is used to adjust the drive system power consumption of the NC. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #1395 H1_pno 1st handle selection Specify the connection desti nation of the 1st handle. bit0 to bit3: Handle connection channel 1 to 3 ("3" is only valid for operation panel) bit4 to bit7: Handle connection destination 0: CNC unit 1 to 3: Remote I/O unit 5: Expansion unit D to F: Operation panel I/O unit bit8 to bitF: Remote I/O unit station 1 to 40 (HEX) (Example) 0001: Handle 1 connected to the CNC unit 2421: Handle 1 of 36th station for remote I/O unit connected to RIO2 00D3: Handle 3 of operation panel I/O unit connected to RIO1 (Note 1) When the specified destination is not implemented, handle move ment is not performed. (Note 2) When all the "H1_pno" to "H3_pno"are set to "0000", handles are automatically allocated. Other than above, "0000" setting is the same connection as "0001" setting. ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xFFFF #1396 H2_pno 2nd handle selection Specify the connection desti nation of the 2nd handle. Refer to "#1395 H1_pno" (1st handle selection) for further details. #1397 H3_pno 3rd handle selection Specify the connection destina tion of the 3rd handle. Refer to "#1395 H1_pno" (1st handle selection) for further details. (Note) In case of using C80, refer to "#11746 H4_pno" to "#11751 H9_pno" for the 4th to 9th handle selection. sp_filt Spindle's actual rotation speed filter Specify the average filter scale factor for the spindle's actual rotation speed data. If the scale factor increases, fluct uations in speed display are mitigated. 0: Standard setting 1: 0.5-fold 2: 1-fold 3: 2-fold 4: 4-fold 5: 8-fold M_mode M command operation selection Select the M command operation. (Note) Register M codes in the special o peration registration M codes (#1411 to #1418). 0: Not wait for the completion of registered M codes, but wait for the completion of the other M codes 1: Wait for the completion of registered M codes, but not wait for the completion of the other M code S_mode S command completion method selection Select the S command completion method. 0: Wait for the complete signal from PLC 1: Not wait for the complete signal from PLC T_mode T command completion method selection Select the T command completion method. 0: Wait for the complete signal from PLC 1: Not wait for the complete signal from PLC M2_mode 2nd miscellaneous command completion method se- lection Select the 2nd miscellaneous command completion method. 0: Wait for the complete signal from PLC 1: Not wait for the complete signal from PLC M_mode(SMLK) M code output (during high-speed simple program check) M code output (during high-speed simple program check) Select the M code output method to be applied during high-speed simple program check. 0: Output the M codes registered in #1449 to #1464 M[M511-000](SML K), but not output unregistered M codes. M512 or subsequent M codes are not output. 1: Output the M codes unregistered in #1449 to #14 64 M[M511-000](SMLK), but not output those regis- tered. M512 and subsequent M codes are all output. S_mode(SMLK) S code output (during high-speed simple program check) S code output (during high-speed simple program check) Select the S code output method to be applied during high-speed simple program check. 0: Not output S code 1: Output S code T_mode(SMLK) T code output (during high-speed simple program check) T code output (during high-speed simple program check) Select the T code output method to be applied during high-speed simple program check. 0: Not output T code 1: Output T code #1408 M2_mode(SMLK) 2nd miscellaneous code output (during high-speed simple program check) 2nd miscellaneous code output (during high-speed simple program check) Select the 2nd M code output method to be applied during high-speed simple program check. 0: Not output 2nd M code 1: Output 2nd M code #1411 M_wait[M031-000] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the registered M code o peration varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1412 M_wait[M063-032] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (32 to 63) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the registered M code o peration varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1413 M_wait[M095-064] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (64 to 95) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the registered M code o peration varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1414 M_wait[M127-096] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (96 to 127) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the registered M code o peration varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1415 M_wait[M159-128] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (128 to 159) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the registered M code o peration varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M_wait[M191-160] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (160 to 191) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the regist ered M code operation varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M_wait[M223-192] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (192 to 223) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the regist ered M code operation varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M_wait[M255-224] Special op eration registration M code Register an M code (224 to 255) that needs special operation. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411. (Note) Note that the regist ered M code operation varies according to M_mode (#1401). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M_wait[M287-256] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M319-288] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M351-320] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M383-352] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M415-384] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M447-416] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M479-448] Special op eration registration M code Not used. M_wait[M511-480] Special op eration registration M code Not used. RT2AftG1 RT2: Enable switching of acce/dece time constant after G1 interpolation Select whether to enable switching of acceleration/d eceleration time constant after G1 interpolation. 0: Disable switching of acceleration/deceler ation time constant after G1 interpolation. 1: Enable switching of acceleration/deceleration time constant after G1 interpolation. #1428 RT2rst RT2: Enable changing acce/dece time constant back when NC is reset Select whether to change acceleration/deceleration time constant back to parameter value when NC is reset. 0: Disable changing acceleration/deceleration time constant back when NC is reset. 1: Enable changing acceleration/deceleration time constant back when NC is reset. #1431 Ax_Chg Selection of mixed control (cross axis control) or arbi- trary axis exchange control Choose which of the following controls to enable; Mixed cont rol (Cross axis control) I, II or arbitrary axis ex- change control. Set this parameter to "1" to enable the arbitrary axis exchange control function wit h S/W Version E1 or later for M80typeA (M system) and M80W (M system). 0: Mixed control (Cross axis control) I or II 1: Arbitrary axis exchange control #1432 Ax_Chg_Spec bit0: Selection of alarm when axis exchange is disabled Select whether to issue an alarm or wait until th e axis becomes exchangeable when axis exchange is dis- abled. 0: Wait until the axis becomes exchangeable when the axis declared in an axis exchange command is in- capable of being exchanged. * The parameter #1433 (G140TimeOut) determines th e operation to be carried out during the waiting time. 1: Output the alarm (M01 1101) when the axis declared in an axis exchange command is incapable of be- ing exchanged. bit1: Compensation cancel after arbitrary axis exchange Select whether to enable canceling of compensation after an arbitrary axis exchange. 0: Not cancel compensation after arbitrary axis exchange 1: Cancel compensation after arbitrary axis exchange #1433 G140TimeOut G140 timeout period Specify a period of time to wait before outputting the alarm (M01 1101) when an axis declared in the axis exchange command is unexchangeable. If the specified time elapses with the axis remaining unexchangeable, the alarm (M01 1101) is output. How- ever this alarm is cancelled and axis exchange is carried out once the axis becomes capable of being ex- changed. 0 to 254: Period of time to wait before timeout (sec) 255: Wait until the axis becomes exc hangeable without executing timeout check (Note) This parameter is enabled when the alarm is not caused by an axis' unexchangeable state (when #1432 Ax_Chg_Spec(bit0) = 0). ---Setting range--- 0 to 254 (s) 255: No timeout #1434 G140Type2 G140 command type 2 Select which axis address(es) can be commanded und er G140 (Arbitrary axis exchange) control. 0: The axis (or axes) specified in the G140 block can be commanded. 1: Not only the axis (or axes) specified in the G140 block but those unspecified in the block can also be commanded. #1435 crsman Manual interruption during cross machining Select whether to enable manual interruption for an axis being under cross machining control. 0: Disable 1: Enable mstsyn Enable override for dwell and miscellaneous function time Select whether to enable override for the dwell time and miscellaneous function time. 0: Disable (Override takes no effect.) 1: Enable (Overri de takes effect.) SBS2_Spec Selection of alarm when sub part system II start is dis- abled bit0: Selection of alarm when sub part system II start is disabled Select the type of operation to be carried out when th e sub part system specified by G144 is incapable of being activated. 0: Wait until the system become s capable of being activated 1: Output an alarm bit1: Sub part system control II: Reset type selection Select how to reset the sub part system control II. 0: Reset sub part system at the same time as main part system reset. 1: Not reset sub part system at th e time of main part system reset. Ofs-SysAssign Enable part system allocation of tool offset sets Select the allocation method of tool offset sets. 0: Automatic equal allocation 1: Arbitrary allocation The setting of "1" is enabled for a system configured with two or more part systems. When "1" is selected for a system c onfigured with a single part system, all the offset sets of the system are allocated to the 1st part system. Tlife-SysAssign Part system allocation of life management tools Select the allocation method of the life management tools. 0: Automatic equal allocation 1: Arbitrary allocation The setting of "1" is enabl ed for a system configured with two or more part systems. When "1" is selected for a system configured with a si ngle part system, all the life management tools of the system are allocated to the 1st part system. multi_sp_syn Multiple spindle synchronization valid Select whether to enable multiple spindle synchronization. 0: Disable multiple spindle synchronization. 1: Enable multiple spindle synchronization. Tcode_Method_Chg T command method selection Select the tool command method. 0: Tool life management II format 1: Tool function G0ol Enable G00 rapid traverse block overlap Select whether to enable the G00 rapi d traverse block overlap function. 0: Disable 1: Enable G28ol Enable G28 rapid traverse block overlap Select whether to enable the G28 rapi d traverse block overlap function. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1444 otsys Stop all part systems at OT Select whether to stop all the part s ystems or only the part syst em where H/W stro ke end, soft limit or inter- ference check alarm has occurred. (Note) If H/W stroke end, soft limit or interference check alarm has occurred on an axis related to superim- position, synchronization, arbitrary axis superimposition, or synchronization during axis traveling, the part system to which the superimposition (synchronous) an d reference axes belong is treated as the one where the alarm has occurred. 0: Stop each part system 1: Stop all the part systems #1445 Tol-Custom-nondisp Non-display of additional info on tool management screen Select whether to display or hide additional information on the tool management screen. 0: Display 1: Not display #1446 Tlno.hold Tool length offset No. retention Select the operation to be performed when command T has no tool length offset No. 0: Tool length offset No. is deemed as 0. 1: Last commanded tool length offset No.is applied. (Tool length offset No. is unchanged.) #1447 G96_tmp_cancel Temporary cancel of constant surface speed control 0: Disable a spindle rotation command given in another part system 1: Enable a spindle rotation command given in another part system #1448 Sclamp_err_cancel Cancel of the error for absence of spindle speed clamp 0: Disable cancel of the error 1: Enable cancel of the error #1449 m_clamp_on Manual feed rate clamp ON 0: Rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) serves as the maximum speed in jog, handle, incremental or manual reference position return (high-speed) mode. Howeve r you can use a PLC device to switch the maxi- mum speed to the manual feed clamp speed (#2614 m_clamp). 1: Manual feed clamp speed (#2614 m_clamp) serves as the maximum speed in jog, handle, incremental, or manual reference position return (high-speed) mode. 5axis_Spec bit0: Axis name setting method of rotary axis configuration parameter Select the axis name setting method for rotary axis configuration parameter (#7900, #7901, #7902, #7922, #7932, #7942, #7952). 0: Set by axis name 1: Set by 2nd axis name bit1: Using G174 tool axis rotation angle as compensation amount 0: Specify the compensation amount using the address R and R register. 1: Use the tool axis rotation angl e of G174 as the compensation amount. bit2: Application of rotary axis configuration parameters Select the method of applying the ro tary axis configuration parameters. 0: Automatic se lection method 1: PLC signal method (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#1450 5axis_Spe c/bit0 (Axis name setting method of rotary axis configuration para meter)" is "1". bit3: Select specifications of rotation direction parameter Select the specifications of rotation dire ction parameter (#7923, #7933, #7943, #7953). 0: The parameter specificati ons vary for each function. 1: The parameter specifications are common to the functions. "#7923 DIR_T1", "#7933 DIR_T2", "#7943 DIR_W1", "#7953 DIR_W2" 0: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in right-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. 1: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in left-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. bit5: Rotation center e rror compensation: restraint of machine movement Select whether to enable restraint of machine moveme nt when the rotation center error compensation is used in combination with any of the following mult i-part system functions:  Arbitrary axis exchange control  Mixed control I or II  Control axis synchronization between part systems I or II  Control axis superimposition  Arbitrary axis superimposition 0: Enable restraint of machine movement  Retain the multi-part system fu nction at reset or emergency stop  Perform error check when multi-pa rt system function is commanded 1: Disable restraint of machine movement  Not retain the mu lti-part system function at reset or emergency stop  Not perform error check when multi-part system function is commanded (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#1450 5axis_S pec/bit0" (Axis name setting method of rotary axis configuration parameter) is "1". M[M031-000](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1452 M[M063-032](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1453 M[M095-064](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1454 M[M127-096](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1455 M[M159-128](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1456 M[M191-160](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M[M223-192](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M[M255-224](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M[M287-256](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M[M319-288](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. M[M351-320](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1462 M[M383-352](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1463 M[M415-384](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1464 M[M447-416](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1465 M[M479-448](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1466 M[M511-480](SMLK) Special operation registration M code (High-speed sim- ple program check) Register an M code to be output during high-speed simple program check. Each bit of the set value corresponds to the M code number. (Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1451. Note that operation of the registered M c ode varies according to #1405 M_mode(SMLK). ---Setting range--- 0 to FFFFFFFF Set this in hexadecimal format. #1467 Manual MSTB macro MSTB macro call via manual numerical value command Select whether to enable a miscellaneous command macro call through the manual numerical value com- mand. 0: Disable 1: Enable When Disable is selected, the comma nded MSTB code and strobe are output. ctrl period Control period Set the standard value "0". P-BUS dev assign PROFIBUS device allocation method Select how to allocate the PLC devices that are us ed for PROFIBUS-DP(DPV0): fi xed allocation (512 points) or arbitrary allocation (8192 points). 0: Fixed 1: Arbitrary mgralmstp Enable machine groupwise alarm stop Select whether to enable the machine groupwise alarm stop function. 0: Disable 1: Enable mgralmrestart Allowing automatic operation to start after machine groupwise alarm stop Select whether to allow automatic operation to be activated after machine groupwise alarm stop. 0: Not allow automatic operation to start after machine groupwise alarm stop 1: Allow automatic operation to start after machine groupwise alarm stop mgralmcont Allowing operation to continue after machine group- wise alarm stop When any alarm causes an axis that is in the midst of program execution to stop, this parameter allows you to select the behavior of axes that belong to ma chine groups other than that of the said axis. 0: Feed hold 1: The operation is allowed to continue. SBS2_sys num Number of sub systems to use in sub part system con- trol II Specify the number of sub part systems to use in sub part system control II. The specified number of part systems counted from t he end of the system's effective part systems are treated as sub part systems. ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 MES-IF_on MES-IF ON Set whether to enable the MES interface function. 0: Disable 1: Enable F-bus Card 1 OFF Fieldbus communication extension card 1 OFF Select whether to enable or disable the Fieldbus co mmunication expansion card mounted in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80). 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable (Note) This parameter is enabled for all the commun ication expansion cards, except CC-Link expansion card. F-bus Card 2 OFF Fieldbus communication extension card 2 OFF Select whether to enable or disable the Fieldbus co mmunication expansion card mounted in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80). 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable (Note) This parameter is enabled for all the commun ication expansion cards, except CC-Link expansion card. tp_invalid Disable touch panel operation Select whether to disable input via touch panel. 0: Enable touch panel operation 1: Disable touch panel operation #1481 Enable S-Safety Enable smart safety observation Select whether to enable smart safety observation. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1483 SBS1_sys num Number of sub systems to use in sub part system con- trol I Specify the number of sub part system s to be used for Sub part system c ontrol I in M80/M8 0W. The specified number of part systems counted from the end of the system's effective part systems are treated as sub part systems. (Note) For M800, this setting is i gnored. (All the effective part systems can be used as main or sub part sys- tem.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 #1487 ITF3_Spec Interference check III specification bit0: Speed clamp specifications at en tering the interference warning area In interference check III, select whether to perform speed clamp and torque limit in only the part systems re- lating to the interference warning or in all the part systems at entering the interference warning area. 0: Perform in only the part systems re lating to the interference warning 1: Perform in all the part systems and axes #1488 ITF3 valid Interference check III valid Interference check III is validated. When interference check III is invalid, in terference check between part systems is valid. 0: Interference check III invalid 1: Interference check III valid #1489 SLMP_on SLMP_on Select whether to enable or disable the SLMP server function. 0: Disable 1: Enable #1490 F-bus init delay 2 Field bus communication error invalid time 2 Specify a period of time during which the control does not detect a Field bus communication error of the Field- bus expansion card mounted in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80), after st artup of the NC is com- pleted. Set this in 0.1-second increments. (Note1) This parameter is enabled for all the comm unication expansion cards except PROFIBUS-DP com- munication expansion card and CC-Link expansion card. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (0.1s) #1702 cfg02 In-position check for Punch Tap Select whether to perform the in-position c heck for each block of the Punch Tap cycle. bit0-5: 0: Not perform in-position check 1: Perform in-position check #1711 cfg11 bit1: Disabling movement in prohibited area of stored stroke limit IB/IIB Specify whether axis movement is disabled or not when t he tool is in the prohibited area of stored stroke limit IB/IIB. 0: Not disable movement. 1: Disable movement, except for movements towards the nearest permitted area. cfg25 bit0: Confirmation abou t formatting at edit of SRAM open parameter Select whether to display a confirmation message at t he setting of SRAM open parameter data, notifying that the NC memory needs to be formatted. 0: Not display the confirmation message 1: Display the confirmation message bit1: Displaying of FIN in status field Specify whether to display FIN that in dicates Waiting for miscellaneous function. 0: Disable FIN display 1: Enable FIN display cfgPR01 bit1: Selection of coordinate system for shift amount of G76/G87 Select in which coordinate system th e tool-tip shift amount is interpreted for G7 6 fine boring cy cle or G87 back boring cycle. The shift amount is specified with address Q or I/J/K. (Note) When "Machine coordinate system" is selected, do not perform figure rotation. 0: Currently active coordinate system 1: Machine coordinate system bit4: Behavior for G92 (G50) and G53 in the same block Select the behavior for G92 (G50) and G53 commands in the same block specifying an axis address other than "0". 0: Output a program error (P35) 1: Process the commands by treating the axis address as "0" cfgPR10 bit0: Machining condition selection screen - Disable setting of condition names Select whether to allow setting of names for the machining conditions. 0: Enable the setting 1: Disable the setting bit2: Enable HD mode on IPC This parameter specifies whether the NC can run a prog ram stored in the IPC which is connected to the same network. 0: A program stored in the IPC cannot be run. 1: A program stored in the IPC can be run. (Note 1) This parameter is valid for M80. (Note 2) The parameter "#11005 PC IP address" needs to be set to enable program operations. bit4: Hide motor temperature Select whether to show/hide the item of the servo un it "Motor temp. (degC)" on the drive monitor screen. 0: Show 1: Hide bit5: Whether to count a comment block in searching Select whether to count a comment block as one bloc k when searching is performed within a program, in- cluding Operation search and Cursor position search. 0: Count a comment block as one block 1: Not count a comment block cfgPR11 bit1: Cogging torque compensation ON Select whether to enable cogging torque compensation. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #1925 EtherNet Start of service Start or stop the Ethernet communication function. 0: Stop 1: Start #1926 Global IP address IP address Set the main CPU's IP address. Set the NC IP address seen from an external source. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1927 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask Set the subnet mask for the IP address. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1928 Global Gateway Gateway Set the IP address for the gateway. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1929 Not used. Set to "0". #1930 Not used. Set to "0". #1931 Host number Host No. Set the host's port No. ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 #1934 Local IP address Set the HMI side CPU's IP address. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1935 Local Subnet mask Set the HMI side CPU's subnet mask. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1953 Intra IP address IP address on non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side Specify the IP address on the non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1954 Intra Subnet mask Subnet mask on non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side Specify the IP address of subnet mask on the non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. #1955 Intra Gateway Gateway on non- Windows-based disp lay unit (LAN1) side Specify the gateway IP addr ess on the non-Windows-based display unit (LAN1) side. ---Setting range--- Set these parameters in accordance with th e network rules in the connection environment. Ext Unit1 IP Addr Field networ k communication expansion unit: IP ad- dress 1 Specify the IP address of the field network communication expansion unit installed in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ext Unit1 Sub mask Field networ k communication expansion unit: subnet mask 1 Specify the subnet mask of the fi eld network communication expansion un it installed in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ext Unit1 Gateway Field network communication expansion unit: gateway 1 Specify the gateway of the field network communicatio n expansion unit installed in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ext Unit2 IP Addr Field networ k communication expansion unit: IP ad- dress 2 Specify the IP address of the field network communication expansion unit installed in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ext Unit2 Sub mask Field networ k communication expansion unit: subnet mask 2 Specify the subnet mask of the fi eld network communication expansion un it installed in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ext Unit2 Gateway Field network communication expansion unit: gateway 2 Specify the gateway of the field network communicatio n expansion unit installed in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80). ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 APC type APC screen display type selection Set the type of screen displayed with the pallet program registration screen. 0: Standard pallet registration screen 1: Pallet 4-page registration screen Valid pallet num Number of pallets setting Set the number of pallets validated on the pallet program registration screen. ---Setting range--- 2 to 12 (Interpreted as 2 when 0 is set.) APLC valid APLC valid Temporarily disable APLC. Normally set "1". 0: Disable 1: Enable #11004 PLCauto-run enable PLC automatic startup valid Select starting condition of the built-in PLC. 0: Start PLC after NC screen startup 1: Start PLC at NC startup (Note) When standard NC screen is not used, set "1". #11005 PC IP address IP address setting Set the IP address of the display unit or the PC in which machining programs are stored (or the IP address of the IPC for M80). Set the IP address of the display unit which is powered OFF with the Auto power OFF function. When the 3D machine interference check function is enabl ed, set the IP address of the display unit to be used for the 3D machine interference check (for M800W only). (Note) When "0.0.0.0" is entered, "192.168.100.2" is automatically assigned. PC Subnet Set the subnet mask for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored. PC Gateway Set the gateway for the disp lay unit or PC in which machining programs are stored. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 #11006 PC Port number Port No. setting Set the port No. for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored. (Note 1) When "0" is input, "55555" is automatically set. (Note 2) When changing the parameter, set the same va lue in "PD_Control_Port" in the PC side environment setting file. ---Setting range--- 0 to 65535 #11007 PC Timeout Communication timeout time setting Set the NC side communication timeout time. Set the timeout time for the display unit to be shut down upon automat ic power OFF request. (Note 1) When "0" is input, "120" is automatically set. (Note 2) When the value greater than "300" is set, a setting error occurs. (Note 3) When changing the parameter, set the same va lue in "PD_Time_out" in the PC side environment setting file. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (s) #11009 M2 label O M2 label O Select the program number label when using the M2 format. 0: Label L 1: Label O #11010 Software keyboard Software keyboard Select whether or not to use a so ftware keyboard on a touchscreen. 0: Not use (Note 1) 1: Use (no automatic display) 2: Use (The keyboard appears automatically on a specific screen or upon Y/N confirmation) 3: Use (The keyboard appears automatically upon Y/N confirmation) (Note 1) If no NC keyboard is connected, the screen shows the software keyboard button. Handy TERM. PW. Handy terminal password Set the password used for the handy terminal customized downloading. Blank (when "0" is set) and "0000" are regarded as no password. Not the password of a new customizing file but the passw ord of the customizing file downloaded to the last handy terminal is set. Set blank or "0000" when initially downloading. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 9999 16 axes for 1ch Connecting 16 axes for 1ch Select the maximum number of axes (s um of the NC axis, spindle, and PLC axis) connected to the drive unit interface (channel 1). 0: Up to 8 axes can be connected to channel 1. 1: Up to 16 axes can be connected to channel 1. Th is parameter is disabled when the extension unit is connected. It is possible to connect on ly up to eight axes or less per channel. 3D_MChk Invalidate 3D machine interference check Select whether to enable the 3D ma chine interference check function. 0: Enable 1: Disable Chk_len1 1st-step interference check distance Set the 1st-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode. The standard value is "30.000". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) Chk_len2 2nd-step interference check distance Set the 2nd-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode. The standard setting value is "5.000". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) Expand_Rate Shape expansion rate Set the model shape expansion rate to be used for 3D machine interference check. This parameter is used for expanding a model shape to be used for 3D machine interference check. The interference check is per- formed using a shape expanded by the amount of [Check length (mm) x Shape expansion rate (%)]. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (%) T-ofs set at run Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled Select whether to enable the tool compensation amou nt setting and life value se tting during automatic oper- ation and operation pause. 0: Disable 1: Enable M password hold Machine user password is held When set to "1", the "Machine user" (operation level 6) password will be held even if the NC is restarted. 0: Do not hold 1: Machine user password is held #11019 2-system display 2-part system simultaneous display Select whether to enable simultaneous display of multiple part systems on the monitor screen. 0: Display one part system on the monitor screen. 1, 2: Display two part systems si multaneously on t he monitor screen. 3: Display three part systems simultaneously on the monitor screen. Note t hat this is enabl ed for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. 4: Display four part systems simultaneo usly on the monitor screen. Note th at this is enabled for a 15- or 19-type display unit only. (Note 1) If the number of part system s to display is smaller than that of the simultaneous display, a single part system display is selected. (Note 2) If you select "3" or "4" for any display unit ot her than 15- or 19-type, a single part system display is selected. #11021 PLC mesg disp type Format of PLC alarm and operator message Select the format of PLC alarms and operator messa ges to be displayed on the bottom right of the screen. 0: Display up to the first 40 characters. 1: If text is longer than 40 characters, divide it into two and display separately. (Supplementary information is displayed together) #11022 SRAM Output Type Not used. Set to "0". #11023 G33.n Drn Not used. Set to "0". #11024 G33.n fhd Not used. Set to "0". #11028 Tolerance Arc Cent Tolerable correction value of arc center error Set the tolerable correction value for the calculated co ordinate value error of R- specified circular center. When a difference between "a line between the start a nd end points" and "commanded radius x 2" is the tol- erance or smaller, the error is corr ected so that the middle of a line be tween the start and end points will be the arc center. When [Setting value < 0]: 0 (Not correct arc center error) When [Setting value = 0]: 0.002 mm When [Setting value > 0]: Setting value ---Setting range--- <Metric system> -1 to 0.100 (mm) <Inch system> -0.0393 to 0.0039 (inch) #11029 Arc to G1 no Cent Change command from arc to linear when no arc center designation When arc center or radius designation is omitted fr om arc command, change the arc command into linear without causing program error. 0: Program error 1: Change into linear command #11030 Man tap sync cancl Synchronization cancel in manual synchronous tap- ping Select whether handle feed of the tapping axis in manual synchronous tappingsynchronizes with the spindle or not. 0: Synchronize with the spindle 1: Not synchronize with the spindle Cursor pos search Cursor position search Select the cursor position searching method. 0: Disable 1: Pressing the INPUT key in [Monitr] - [Edit] menu star ts the operation search fo r the block with the cursor. 2: Turning ON/OFF the "Edit/Search" signal in [Monitr ] - [Edit] menu starts the operation search for the block with the cursor. 3: Turning ON/OFF the "Edit/Search" signal in [Monitr ] - [Edit] menu starts the operation search for the block with the cursor. Pressing the reset key shows the top of the program on the [Edit/Search] window. Menu sel para lkof Validate menu selection parameter setting Select whether to enable the sett ing of the "menu selection parame ters" (#10501 to #10530, #10551 to #10580, and #10601 to #10630), with which the order of main menus on Monitor, Setup and Edit screens can be rearranged. And also select who is allowed to do this setting. 0: Disable 1: Enable (machine tool builder password is required) 2: Enable (users are allowed to set) skipB_no_sens Unconnected sensor selection when skip is set to con- tact B Select the contact of the sensor wh ich you wish to set as unconnected, w hen the skip signal is set to contact B. Set "1" for the contact to be unconnected. bit0: Skip input 1 bit1: Skip input 2 bit2: Skip input 3 bit3: Skip input 4 bit4: Skip input 5 bit5: Skip input 6 bit6: Skip input 7 bit7: Skip input 8 (Note 1) This parameter is enabled when "#1258 set30/bit0" is set to "1". (Note 2) This parameter is independent of PLC skip. ---Setting range--- 00000000 to 11111111 (Binary) G12AddrCheckType Command address type to check in circular cutting Select the type of command addre ss to check in circular cutting. 0: Regard command addresses other than D, F, I as illegal. 1: Regard the command address H as illegal. And commands other than D,F,I and M,S,T,B are disabled. Sys. change limit Part system switching restriction This restricts switching th e part systems displayed on screen. 0: Not restrict 1: Disable the part system switching by pressing [$<->$] key on touch panel. 2: Disable the part system switching by display switch signals(Y730 to Y733). meas dir judge Non-sensitive band for manual measurement direction judgment (for M system only) Set the non-sensitive band to be used for judging the manual measurement direction. If the feedback position fluctuates widely at the axis stop, set the fluctuation width or larger value in this set the parameter. When set to "0", the band will be 1 (µm). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (µm) 0: 1 (µm) #11037 R-Navi Index Type R-Navi machining surface indexing type Select the machining surface indexi ng type in the R-Navi function. 0: Indexing type 1 (Only rotary axes move to perform indexing) 1: Indexing type 2 (Indexing is perform ed with the tool center point fixed to the position seen from the work- piece) #11038 T disp typ T display (tool command value) type (For L system only) Select the T display (tool command value) type on th e monitor screen between displaying tool No. only or displaying tool No. and co mpensation No. (L system only) 0: Display tool No. only 1: Display the tool command value (the combined va lue consisting of the tool No. and compensation No.) last commanded by the program. Even in a manual value command, the program's tool command value is displayed. #11039 Cusr pos srch type Cursor position search type Set the availability of the cursor position search dur ing single block stop when "#11031 Cursor pos search" is any of "1" to "3". 0: Disable cursor position search during single block stop. 1: Enable cursor position search during single block stop. Sub-program is displayed when selecting menus [Mon itr]-[Edit] while single block stop is carried out during sub-program with this parameter set to 1. #11051 Direct Socket ON Direct Socket communication I/F ON Select ON/OFF of the Direct Socket communication I/F. 0: OFF (Default) 1: ON (Note) When the Direct Socket communication I/F is ON , applications that uses "#1926 Global IP address" such as MS Configurator and GX Developer cannot be used. #11052 LOG Sort Order Log data sorting order Select in which order to sort the operat ion log files (all logs) to be output. 0: Sort the data in chronologically ascending order separately for each log type. 1: Sort the data in chronologically ascending order for all the log types. If the times and dates logged are identical, the log files are output in the order of key, touchscreen, alarm, PLC signal, tool offset change, workpiece offset change and AC power. #11054 Sp-stby disp type Sp indle-standby display type Specify which magazine to display when Sp-stby is selected on the Spindle standby or Tool registration screen. 0: Fixed to the magazine #1 1: The magazine selected by the menu (Magazine 1 to Magazine 5). #11055 Disp. sysno Number of part systems to display Specify how many part systems to display on a screen. 0: The same number as that of the enabled part systems 1 or greater: The number specified by this parameter serves as that of th e part systems to display. (Note) The setting range differs according to the NC model. For t he number of part systems displaying in the operating state, follow this parameter setting. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 #11056 Workshift invalid Workpiece coordi nate system shift OFF (For L system only) Set this parameter to 1 if you wish to disable the workpiece coordinate system shift function. 0: Enable the workpiece coordinate shift function 1: Disable the workpiece coordinate shift function plc_opemsg0 Operator messages display device Set the No. of F device to specify the displayed operator message. Device specified with this parameter is treated as No.1, and displays up to 4 operator messages correspond- ing to F device that is ON. This parameter is valid when #6455/bit3 is 0. (Note 1) Use from F1024 when "0" is set. (Note 2) Set the device No. to be a multiple of 32. When other value is input, a setting error occurs. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2016 Remote comm enable Remote connect enabled Select whether to enable the remote communication. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Screen theme color Select screen theme colors Select the screen theme colors. This selection affects the co lors of the entire screen. 0: Standard colors (gray tone) 1: Blue tone Num of EcoMonitors The Number of EcoMonitorLight connected to CNC Specify how many EcoMonitorLight units (an energy me ter made by Mitsubishi Electric for measuring the consumption and regeneration) are connected to the CNC. ---Setting range--- 0: None 1 to 16: Number of connected modules Default 0 HomeScreen display HomeScreen display Select whether to display the home screen. 0: Not display 1: Display (display at power ON) 2: Display (not display at power ON) Lsys_change_Gtype L system G code system after program format switch (for M system only) When switching the program format from M system to L system with program format switch command (G188) or when switching G code guidance from M system to L system by the menu [Edit]-[Guide M/L], the G code systems after switching follow the setting of this parameter. 0: L system G code system 2 1: L system G code system 3 2: L system G code system 4 3: L system G code system 5 4: L system G code system 6 5: L system G code system 7 rot_angle_dsp Counter display during coordinate rotation Select the type of counter display (workpiece coordina te position, relative position and absolute position) while #8116 is 0 (coordinate rotation by parameter is enabled). 0: Display the position relative to the orthogonal coordinate system. 1: Display the position relative to the coordinate s ystem rotated through the coordinate rotation by param- eter. (with EXT [external workpiece coordinate offset] added during automatic operation) 2: Display the position relative to the coordinate s ystem rotated through the coordinate rotation by param- eter. (with EXT [external workpiece coor dinate offset] constantly added) #11087 Meas basic point Tool length measurement I reference point (for L sys- tem only) Select how to specify the measurem ent reference point coordinates for manual tool length measurement I (L system). 0: Use the machine zero point as the reference point 1: Use the coordinates of "#2015 tlml-" as the reference point (the same operation as when #1282 bit2 = 0 for M7) 2: Use the workpiece coordinate syst em offset (modal) as the referenc e point (the same operation as when #1282 bit2 = 1 for M7) #11091 PLC counter valid Enable PLC axis counter Select whether to have the monitor screen show a PLC axis position counter. 0: Monitor screen does not show a PLC axis position counter. 1: Depending on the selected counter type, monitor screen is able to show. #11094 GX Restriction Inhibiting GX Developer/GX Works2 connection Select whether to block the connec tion from GX Developer/GX Works2. 0: Allow the connection 1: Block the connection #11100 3D_MChk_ToolAlm Alarm when tool interference check is disabled Select whether the 3D machine interference check ou tputs an alarm or not when the tool is not mounted. 0: Not output an alarm when the tool che ck is disabled or the tool is not mounted. 1: Output an alarm when the tool check is disabled or the tool is not mounted. #11101- Monitr menu(MTB)1-30 Monito r main menu (MTB) 1 to 30 11130 Designate the destination menu Nos. to move monitor screen's main menus. -1: Menu not displayed 0: No change 1 to 30: Destination menu No. #11151- Setup menu (MTB) 1-30 Setu p main menu (MTB) 1 to 30 11180 Designate the destination menu Nos. to move setup screen's main menus. -1: Menu not displayed 0: No change 1 to 30: Destination menu No. #11201- Edit menu(MTB) 1-30 Edit main menu (MTB) 1 to 30 11230 Designate the destination menu Nos. to move edit screen's main menus. -1: Menu not displayed 0: No change 1 to 30: Destination menu No. #11251- Diagn menu(MTB)1-30 Diagn main menu (MTB) 1 to 30 11280 Designate the destination menu Nos. to move diagn screen's main menus. -1 : Not display the menu 0: No change 1 to 30: Destination menu No. #11301- Mainte menu(MTB)1- 30 Mainte main menu (MTB) 1 to 30 11330 Designate the destination menu Nos. to move mainte screen's main menus. -1 : Not display the menu 0: No change 1 to 30: Destination menu No. manasel_00-manasel_15 Multi-analog input data type ch0 to ch15 Select the type of data to be input to the multi-analog input unit. 0: Analog voltage 1: Analog current 2: Temperature (resistance thermome ter bulb, normal, Pt100, 3-wire) 3: Temperature (resistance thermome ter bulb, normal, Pt100, 4-wire) 4: Temperature (resistance thermome ter bulb, normal, Pt1000, 3-wire) 5: Temperature (resistance thermome ter bulb, normal, Pt1000, 4-wire) 6: Temperature (resistance thermometer bulb, high-accuracy, Pt100, 3-wire) 7: Temperature (resistance thermometer bulb, high-accuracy, Pt100, 4-wire) 8: Temperature (resistance thermometer bulb, high-accuracy, Pt1000, 3-wire) 9: Temperature (resistance thermometer bulb, high-accuracy, Pt1000, 4-wire) 10: Temperature (t hermocouple (K)) 11: Temperature (t hermocouple (J)) EMG F_disp Filt Actual feedrate detection cycle for displaying F during emergency stop Adjust the axis travel detection cycle for displa ying actual feedrate (F) during emergency stop. Increasing the magnification leads to smaller fluctuations in t he actual feedrate readout (F). 0: Standard setting (1-fold) 1: 0.25-fold 2: 0.5-fold 3: 1-fold 4: 2-fold 5: 4-fold 6: 8-fold (Note) This parameter is enabled when "#112 5 real_f (Actual feedrate display)" is "1" . AmpFeedRate_VCC Vibration amplitude-to-feed ratio This parameter specifies the ratio of vibration amplitude to feed per spindle revolution. (Vibration cutting control is conducted with the amplitude of feed per spindle revolution multiplied by the am- plitude-feed ratio.) If this parameter is set to "0", the ratio will be 2.00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9.99 AmpFeedRateMax_VCC Maximum value of amplitude-to-feed ratio This parameter specifies the maximum value of the vibrat ion amplitude-to-feed ratio. If this parameter is set to "0", the maximum value will be 9.99. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9.99 VibType_VCC Vibration waveform type This parameter specifies the type of the vibration waveform. 0: Triangular wave 1: Sine wave 2: Rectangular wave #11678 VibPerRevMax_VCC Maximum number of vibrations per spindle revolution This parameter specifies t he maximum number of vibrations per spindle revolution. If this parameter is set to "0", the maximum number will be 31.50. The frequency range selected for the VCC mode is switched as follows according to this parameter: When in the range of 0.10 to 6.50: 5.63 to 281.25 (Hz) When "0" or in the range of 6.51 to 31.50: 28.13 to 281.25 (Hz) ---Setting range--- 0, 0.10 to 31.50 (oscillations) #11700 EM Cmn No Starting common variable No. for storage of error mea- surement result Specify the starting number of common variables that store the measurement result. Eight common variables starting from the specified number are used. Specify the No. of common variable that is common to part systems. * Select the number so that eight common variables be ginning with the selected number are all common to part systems. ---Setting range--- 0, 100 to 142, 400 to 992, 100100 to 800192, 900000 to 907392 #11701 WEM Mcr No Macro No. for workpiece installation error measurement Specify the name of macro program for the workpiece installation error measurement. The macro program name is output at initialization of workpiece in stallation error measurement macro. The macro program is used for execution of the measurement. ---Setting range--- 0, 9000 to 9099, 9300 to 9999, 100010000 to 100018999, 100030000 to 199999998 #11702 Ref Sphere Dia Reference sphere diameter Specify the diameter of refere nce sphere that is used for ro tation center error measurement. If the set value is significantly different from the actual diameter, the sensor may be damaged. ---Setting range--- 0.000, 1.000 to 100.000 (mm) #11708 F-bus 1 Err Switch Fieldb us communication error switch 1 Select whether to activate emergency stop or display a warning if an error occurs on the Fieldbus expansion card mounted in the slot EXT3 (or EXT1 for M80/M800S/E80). (Note) The parameter does not apply to a CC-Link expansion card. 0: Emergency stop 1: Warning display #11709 F-bus 2 Err Switch Fieldb us communication error switch 2 Select whether to activate emergency stop or display a warning if an error occurs on the Fieldbus expansion card mounted in the slot EXT4 (or EXT2 for M80/M800S/E80). (Note) The parameter does not apply to a CC-Link expansion card. 0: Emergency stop 1: Warning display #11716 CutEdgeAngleType Turning tool shape compensation: setting method of cutting-edge angle Select the method of specifying the cu tting-edge angle that is used for turning-tool shape compensation in Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I. 0: Tool shape method 1: Tool compensation method astap_sysno Analog spindle synch tap: Part system selection Select the part system to which the analog spindle sync hronous tapping cycle is applied. When 0 is set, the pa rt system 1 is considered to be selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 astap_timeadj Analog spindle synch tap: Timing adjustment This parameter enables you to adjust the motion start timing of the tap axis and the spindle in analog spindle synchronous tapping. (1) When the setting = 0 Not adjust the timing. (2) When the setting > 0 Delay the start of tap axis comma nd by the specified length of time. This is effective when the analog spindle lags behind the tap axis. (3) When the setting < 0 Delay the start of analog spindle command by the specified length of time. This is effective when the analog spindle runs ahead of the tap axis. ---Setting range--- -50 to 50 (ms) astap_Fbadj Synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle: compen- sation factor When the synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindl e is active, the compensation amount for the spindle rotation speed is calculated using the feedback. The compensation amount can be adjusted by the factor specified in this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (%) astap_filt Synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle: filter time constant When the synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle is ac tive, the first-order lag filter is applied to compen- sate the spindle rotation speed. The time constant of the filter is specified by this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (ms) astap_Fbtime Synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle: feedback time lag When the synchronous tapping with analog I/F spindle function is active, there may be a time lag between the command issued to the spindle and the feedback se nt from the encoder. The time lag can be corrected by entering the length of time in this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (ms) PLC Security Mode Enhanced PLC security mode Select the type of the enhanced PLC security mode. 0: No mode (invalid) 1: Write-protection mode 2: Read/Write-p rotection mode E/U Project No. End-user project number Select the number of the project which can be used as "E/U project" by end users. When "0" is set, the end-user mode is disabled. When any number from 1 to 6 is se lected, the end-user mode is enabled. While the parameter "#11761 PLC Security Mode" is "0", the end-user mode is invalid irrespective of this pa- rameter. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting (End-user mode is invalid) #11763 E/U Y Dev No. Initial number of Y device for end user Specify the initial number of the Y devic es that are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#11764 E/U Y Dev Size" cannot exceed 0600 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0000 to 05FF (HEX) #11764 E/U Y Dev Size Quantity of Y devices for end user Specify the quantity of the Y devices that are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#11763 E/ U Y Dev No." cannot exceed 0600 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0600 (HEX) #11765 E/U M Dev No. Initial number of M device for end user Specify the initial number of the M devices that are common to projects , and are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#11766 E/U M Dev Size" cannot exceed 61440. ---Setting range--- 0 to 61439 #11766 E/U M Dev Size Quantity of M devices for end user Specify the quantity of the M devices that are common to projects, and are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#1176 5 E/U M Dev No." cannot exceed 61440. ---Setting range--- 0 to 61440 #11767 E/U D Dev No. Initial number of D device for end user Specify the initial number of the D devices that are common to projects, and are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#11768 E/U D Dev Size" cannot exceed 8192. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8191 #11768 E/U D Dev Size Quantity of D devices for end user Specify the quantity of the D devices that are comm on to projects, and are free to use for end users. The sum of this setting and "#11767 E/U D Dev No." cannot exceed 8192. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8192 #11769 Remote I/O Clear Init ialization of remote I/O Select whether to clear the values of RIO output devices at PLC STOP. 0: Retain the outputs of RIO 1: Clear the outputs of RIO #11771 PTapInp In-position range for Punch Tap (tap axis) Specify the in-position range to be applied to the in-position check at the bottom of Punch Tap hole. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 (mm) #11772 ptapd End point of deburring Specify the end point of the deburring process for the pat tern PT1.5 or PT2.0, using the distance from the bottom of the hole. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 32.767 (mm) ptapag Rotation angle of Punch Tap Specify the angle of the rotation of the Pu nch Tap tool to be applied in tapping. An angle of 180 degrees is used commonly for a double-helix Punch Tap tool. When "0" is set, the angle will be interpreted as 180 degrees. ---Setting range--- 0 to 360 (deg) astap_cmpmax Factor for max speed after adjustment in sync tap w/ an- alog I/F spindle This parameter determines the upper limit of output adjustment in synchronou s tapping with analog I/F spin- dle. Specify a limit on the adjustment of output rotation speed in terms of the percentage of commanded spindle speed. If a value between 0 and 99 is specified, th e system behaves as if "120" was specified. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (%) Disp area1 sysno Monitr-Area1 part system to display Specify the part system to display on the [Monit r] screen after power on. This parameter is valid only when "#11019 2-system display" is enabled (other than "0"). (*) When "0" is specifi ed, the unassigned pa rt system with the smallest part system number is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 Disp area2 sysno Monitr-Area2 part system to display Specify the part system to display on the [Monit r] screen after power on. This parameter is valid only when "#11019 2-system display" is enabled (other than "0"). (*) When "0" is specifi ed, the unassigned pa rt system with the smallest part system number is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 Disp area3 sysno Monitr-Area3 part system to display Specify the part system to display on the [Monit r] screen after power on. This parameter is valid only when "#11019 2-system display" is enabled (other than "0"). (*) When "0" is specifi ed, the unassigned pa rt system with the smallest part system number is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 Disp area4 sysno Monitr-Area4 part system to display Specify the part system to display on the [Monit r] screen after power on. This parameter is valid only when "#11019 2-system display" is enabled (other than "0"). (*) When "0" is specifi ed, the unassigned pa rt system with the smallest part system number is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 #2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (Note) The maximum value to be set depends on the machine specifications. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2002 clamp Cutting feedrate for clamp function Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this va lue, the clamp will be applied at this feedrate. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes Set acceleration and deceleration control modes. Set value is in hexadecimal. HEX 4 3 2 1 b i t FEDCBA9876543210 OT2 OT1 C3 C2 C1 L R3 R2 R1 LR Stroke end stop types Cutting feed Rapid traverse acceleration acceleration /deceleration type /deceleration type HEX-1 Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type 0(bit3,2,1,0 = 0000): Step 1(bit3,2,1,0 = 0001): Linear acceleration/deceleration 2(bit3,2,1,0 = 0010): Primary delay 8(bit3,2,1,0 = 1000): Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration F(bit3,2,1,0 = 1111): Soft acceleration/deceleration (Note) Primary delay is applied because R1 setting has priority over R3 setting when R1 and R3 are both set to "1". HEX-2 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration type 0 (bit7,6,5,4 = 0000): Step 1 (bit7,6,5,4 = 0001): Linear acceleration/deceleration 2 (bit7,6,5,4 = 001 0): Primary delay 8 (bit7,6,5,4 = 1000): Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration F (bit7,6,5,4 = 1111): Soft acceleration/deceleration HEX-3 Stroke end stop types 0 (bit9,8 = 00): Linear deceler ation (Decelerates at G0t1) 1 (bit9,8 = 01): Linear deceler ation (Decelerates at 2×G0t1) 2 (bit9,8 = 10): Position loop step stop 3 (bit9,8 = 11): Position loop step stop Speed G0t1 2 x G0t1 (OT1=1,OT2=0) G0t1 (OT1=OT2=0) Stroke end signal (Note) OT1(bit8) is valid under the following cond itions (valid for dog type zero point return): - Stop type: Linear deceleration - Acceleration/deceleration mode: Exponent ial Acceleration and Linear deceleration HEX-4 Not used. Set to "0". #2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear) Set a linear control time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration. This time constant is enabled when LR (rapid traverse fe ed with linear acceleration /deceleration) or F (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst" (Acceleration and deceleration modes). Speed Time G0tL G0tL ---Setting range--- 1 to 4000 (ms) G0t1 G0 time constant(prima ry delay) / Second-step time constant for soft acceleration/deceleration Set a primary-delay time constant for rapi d traverse acceleration and deceleration. This time constant is enabled when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential acceler- ation and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst" (Acceleration and deceleration modes). When the soft acceleration/deceleration is sele cted, the second-step time constant will be used. <Rapid traverse feed with primary delay> Speed Time G0t1 G0t1 <Rapid traverse feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration> Speed Time G0t1 2 x G0t1 <Soft acceleration/deceleration>  When "#1219 aux03/bit7" is set to "0" Speed G0t1 G0t1 Time G0t1 G0t1 G0tL G0tL (Note) The time constant setting for the soft acceleration/decel eration can be changed by the setting of "#1219 aux03/bit7" ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) G0t2 Not used. Set to "0". #2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear) Set a linear control time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration. The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration/deceleration) or F (soft ac- celeration/deceleration) is selected in "#2 003 smgst" (Acceleration or deceleration modes). Speed Time G1tL G1tL ---Setting range--- 1 to 4000 (ms) #2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)/Second-step time con- stant for soft acceleration/deceleration Set the primary delay time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration. The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed with ex- ponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst" (Acceleration/deceleration modes). When the soft acceleration/deceleration is select ed, the second-step time constant will be used. <Cutting feed with primary delay> Speed Time G1t1 G1t1 <Cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration> Speed Time G1t1 2 x G1t1 <Soft acceleration/deceleration> Speed Time G1t1 G1t1 G1t1 G1t1 G1tL G1tL ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) G1t2 Not used. Set to "0". fwd_g Feed forward gain Set a feed forward gain for pre-inte rpolation acceleration/deceleration. The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical c ontrol error will be. However, if a machine vibration oc- curs, set the smaller value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) G0back G0 backlash Set up the backlash compensation amount when the dire ction is reversed with the movement command in rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode (except for handle feed mode) . ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 G1back G1 backlash Set up the backlash compensation amount when the dire ction is reversed with the movement command in cutting mode. G1 backlash is enabled in handle feed mode. ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 OT - Soft limit I - Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero poin t of the basic machine coordi nate. Set the coordinate in the negative direction for the movable area of stored stroke limit 1. The coordinate in the positive direction is set in "#2014 OT+". To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and "#8205 OT+". When the same value (other than "0") is set in this parameter and "#2014 OT+", this function will be disabled. Basic machine coordinate OT+ (Z) M OT- (X) OT+ (X) OT- (Z) Movable area ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2014 OT + Soft limit I + Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Set the coordinate in the positive direction for the movable ar ea of stored stroke limit 1. The co ordinate in the negative direction is set in "#2013 OT-". To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and "#8205 OT+". When the same value (other than "0") is set in this par ameter and "#2013 OT-", this function will be disabled. Basic machine coordinate OT+ (Z) M OT- (X) OT+ (X) OT- (Z) Movable area ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2015 tlml- Negative direction sensor of tool setter Set a sensor position in the negative direction when using the tool setter. When the TLM is used, set up the distance of a tool replacement point (reference point) for measuring the tool length from the zero point to the measurement reference point (surface). (Note) In the case of the basic axis and inclined axis of the inclined axis specif ications, set the position on the orthogonal coordinate. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2016 tlml+ Positive direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length Set the sensor position in the positive direction when using the tool setter. When the TLM is used, set the distan ce from a tool change point (reference position) to the measurement basic point (surface) in order to measure the tool length. (Note) In the case of the basic axis and inclined axis of the inclined axis specif ications, set the position on the orthogonal coordinate. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2017 tap_g Axis servo gain Set the position loop gain for special operations (synch ronized tapping, interpolat ion with spindle C axis, etc.). Set the value in 0.25 increments. The standard setting value is "10". ---Setting range--- 0.25 to 200.00 (rad/s) #2018 no_srv Operation with no servo control Select when performing test operation wi thout connecting the drive unit and motor. 0: Normal operation 1: Test operation When "1" is set, the operation will be possible even if drive units and motor are no t connected, because the drive system ala rm will be ignored. This parameter is used for test operation during start up: Do not use during normal operation. If "1" is set during normal operation, errors will not be detected even if they occur. #2019 revnum Return steps Set the steps required for reference position return for each axis. 0: Not execute reference position return. 1 to max. number of NC axes: Steps required for reference position return o_chkp Spindle orientation completion check during second reference position return Set the distance from the second reference position to the position for checking th at the spindle orientation has completed during second reference position return. When the set value is "0", the above check will be omitted. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) out_f Maximum speed outside soft limit range (For L system only) Set the maximum speed outside the soft limit range. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) G30SLX Validate soft limit (automatic and manual) Select whether to disable a soft limit check during the second to the four th reference position return in both automatic and manual operation modes. 0: Enable 1: Disable ozfmin Set up ATC speed lower limit Set the minimum speed outside the soft limit range during the second to the fourth reference position return. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) synerr Allowable error Set the maximum synchronization error, allowable at t he synchronization error che ck, for the master axis. When "0" is set, the error check will not be carried out. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) During simple C-axis synchronous control: 0 to 99999.999(°) OT_1B- Soft limit IB- Set the coordinate of the lower lim it of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited. Set a value from zero point in th e basic machine coordinate system. If the same value (non-zero) with the same sign as that of "#2062 OT_IB+" is set, the stored stroke limit IB function will be disabled. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) OT_1B+ Soft limit IB+ Set the coordinate of the upper li mit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited. Set a value from zero point in th e basic machine coordinate system. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) OT_1B type Soft limit IB type Select the type that applies the settings of "#2062 OT_IB+" and "#2061 OT_IB-" in stored stroke limit I. 0: Soft limit IB 1: Disable 2: Soft limit IC 3: Soft limit is checked for the inclined axis control axis with the pr ogram coordinate system. (Note) This is valid only for inclin ed axis' basic axis and inclined axis. #2068 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain Set a feed forward gain for G00 pre-in terpolation acceleration/deceleration. The larger the setting value, the shorter t he positioning time during in-position checking. If a machine vibration occurs, set the smaller value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) #2069 Rcoeff Axis arc radius error correction coefficient Set the percentage to increase or decrease the ar c radius error correction amount for each axis. ---Setting range--- -100.0 to +100.0 (%) #2070 div_RT Rotational axis division count Set the number of divisions of one tu rn of the rotary axis under control. (Example) When "36" is set, one turn is supposed to be 36.000. (Note 1) When "0" is set, the normal rotary axis (360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed. (Note 2) If this parameter is cha nged when the absolute position detection specification is used, absolute po- sition data will be lost. Initialization must be performed again. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 #2071 s_axis Inclined axis selection (for L system only) Select whether the axis is to be under the inclined-axi s control or to be the basic axis corresponding to the inclined axis. 0: Not to be under the inclined-axis control 1: Inclined axis 2: Basic axis corresponding to inclined axis (Note) Each of "1" and "2" values must be set for only one axis. If either value is set for two or more axes, inclined-axis control does not work. #2072 rslimt Restart limit Set the most minus (-) side position where restart search is possible. If the machine is positioned on the more minus (-) side than the set value in T-command re start mode, restart search in type 3 will be disabled. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2073 zrn_dog Origin dog Random assignment device Under the standard specifications, the "Reference position return near-point detection" signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the device in this parameter to assi gn this signal to a position other than the fixed device. (Note1) This parameter is enabled in the following conditions. NC axis: When "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1". PLC axis: When "#1246 set18/bit7" is set to "1". (Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set the existing device number. If the existing device number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed for an axis to which the "Near-point dog ignored" signal or the "PLC axis near-point dog ignored" signal is input. (Note 3) The "Reference position return near-point detection" signal is required to be directly input to the op- eration panel I/O unit or the remote I/O unit. The device assigned to an expansion unit such as CC-Link, Profibus, etc, cannot be us ed. Signals which set in a sequence program cannot be used. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Random assignment device Under the standard specifications, the "S troke end (+)" signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the device in this parameter to assign this signal to a position other than the fixed device. (Note1) This parameter is enabled in the following conditions. NC axis: When "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1". PLC axis: When "#1246 set18/bit7" is set to "1". (Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set th e existing device number. If the existing device number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal or the "PLC axis OT ignored" signal is input. (Note 3) The "Stroke end" signal is required to be direct ly input to the operation panel I/O unit or the remote I/O unit. The device assigned to an expansion unit such as CC-Link, Profibus, etc, cannot be used. Signals which set in a sequence program cannot be used. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) H/W_OT- H/W OT- Random assignment device Under the standard specifications, the "Stroke end (-)" si gnal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the device in this parameter to assign this signal to a position other than the fixed device. (Note1) This parameter is enabled in the following conditions. NC axis: When "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1". PLC axis: When "#1246 set18/bit7" is set to "1". (Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set th e existing device number. If the existing device number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal or the "PLC axis OT ignored" signal is input. (Note 3) The "Stroke end" signal is required to be direct ly input to the operation panel I/O unit or the remote I/O unit. The device assigned to an expansion unit such as CC-Link, Profibus, etc, cannot be used. Signals which set in a sequence program cannot be used. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 02FF (HEX) index_x Index table indexing axis Select whether the axis is a normal axis or an index table indexing axis. 0: Normal axis 1: Index table indexing axis (Note) This parameter is valid only for the NC axis . The parameter is invalid if set for the PLC axis. G0inps G0 in-position width Set the in-position width for G0. Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied. When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid. Only SV024 will be available. When "#1205 G0dbcc" is "1", SV024 is used as the G0 in-position width. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 (mm) G1inps G1 in-position width Set the in-position width for G1. Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied. When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid. Only SV024 will be available. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 (mm) chcomp Chopping compensation coefficient Set the coefficient to be applied to the compensation amount for the insufficient amount caused by servo de- lay during chopping. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10 (standard value: 8) #2080 chwid Bottom dead center position width Set the tolerance between the commanded stroke and actual stroke. Compensation will be applied during chopping so that t he result of [command width - maximum stroke of top or bottom dead point/ 2] will be within this tolerance. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10.000 (mm) #2081 chclsp Maximum chopping speed Set the clamp speed in chopping operation. When "0" is set, the clamp speed will be determined by "#2002 clamp". ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (mm/min) #2082 a_rstax Restart position return order Set the No. for each axis in orde r from the 1st automatically returning axis to the restart position. When "0" is set, the axis will not return. Note that when "0" is set for all axes, al l of the axes will return simultaneously. (Note) On the absolute position system, when performing the restart sear ch just after power ON, and when the axis that is the order 0 is moved by the follow-up, an operation error(M01 0128) may occur. ---Setting range--- 0 to 16 #2084 G60_ax Unidirectional positioning operation selection Select how to operate the unidirectional positioning when the positioning command (G00) is issued. 0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to the command and modal. 1: Carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of the command and modal. Set "1" for the axis to carry out the unidirectional pos itioning at every positioning command, regardless of whether the unidirectional positioning command and modal are issued. <Related parameters> "#8209 G60 SHIFT" and "#2076 index_x" #2086 exdcax External deceleration speed Set the maximum feed rate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is ON. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2087 syncnt Synchronization/superimposition control setting for each axis Set the polarity of synchronized axis with respect to reference axis to the bit corresponding to each axis. 0: Relative to reference axis, polarity is positive 1: Relative to reference axis, polarity is negative ---Setting range--- 0 to FF (hexadecimal) #2088 bsax_sy Reference axis for synchronous control Set the reference axis for synchronous control with t he 2nd axis name (axname2). A numerical character cannot be set as the 1st character. ---Setting range--- 1st character: A to Z 2nd character: A to Z, 1 to 9 bsax_pl Superimposition control reference axis Set the reference axis of superimposition control using the 2nd axis name (axname2). Always use an alphabetic character (A to Z) for the first character. (Note) This parameter is enabled only when "#1280 ext16/bit7" (Control axis superimposition command method) is set to "0". ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) plrapid Rapid traverse rate for superimposition control Set the rapid traverse rate for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2001 rapid" (Rapid traverse rate).) ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) plclamp Cutting feed clamp speed for superimposition control Set the cutting feed clamp spe ed for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2002 clamp" (Cutting feed clamp speed).) ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) plG0tL G0 time constant for superimposition control (linear) Set the G0 time constant (lin ear) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) plG0t1 G0 time cons tant for superimposit ion control (primary delay) Set the G0 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2005 G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) plG1tL G1 time constant for superimposition control (linear) Set the G1 time constant (lin ear) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) plG1t1 G1 time cons tant for superimposit ion control (primary delay) Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to "#2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)".) ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed Set the minimum clamp speed for corner deceleration in the high-accuracy control mode. Normally set "0". (Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2097 tlml2- Sub side tool setter - direction sensor Set the sensor position (on sub side) in the (-) direct ion when using the tool setter on the sub spindle side. (Note) In the case of the basic axis and inclined axis of the inclined axis specif ications, set the position on the orthogonal coordinate. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2098 tlml2+ Sub side tool setter + direction sensor Set the sensor position (on sub side) in (+) directio n when using the tool setter on the sub spindle side. (Note) In the case of the basic axis and inclined axis of the inclined axis specif ications, set the position on the orthogonal coordinate. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2100 rpcax Rotary axis workpiece position compensation valid Set the state of the compensation of the rotary axis workpiece position. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #2102 skip_tL Skip time constant linear Set a linear control time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration, or for an occasion where a skip command issues acceleration/deceleration time constant enabled (R1). The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration/deceleration) or F (soft ac- celeration/deceleration) is selected in "#2 003 smgst" (Acceleration or deceleration modes). When set to "0", the time constant set by "#2007 G1tL" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2103 skip_t1 Skip time constant primary delay / Second-step time constant for soft acceleration/deceleration Set a primary-delay time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration, or for an occasion where a skip command issues acceleration/deceleration time constant enabled (R1). The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed with ex- ponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst" (Acceleration/deceleration modes). When the soft acceleration/deceleration is se lected, the second-step time constant will be used. When set to "0", the time constant set by "#2008 G1t1" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) #2106 Index unit Indexing unit Set the indexing unit to which the rotary axis can be positioned. ---Setting range--- 0 to 360 (°) #2109 Rapid (H-precision) Rapid traverse rate for high-accuracy control mode Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in the high-accu racy control mode. When 0 is set, "#2001 rapid" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2110 Clamp (H-precision) Cutting feed clamp speed for high-accuracy control mode Set the cutting feed maximum speed for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. When 0 is set, "#2002 clamp" is used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) Blf valid Quadrant protrusion compensation valid Set whether to enable the quadrant protrusion compensation. 0: Disable 1: Enable If either of "#2112 Blf motor inertia", "#2115 Blf motor stl trq" or "#2113 Blf visc friction" is set to "0", quadrant protrusion compensation will not work even if this parameter is set to "1". Blf motor inertia Motor inertia Set the motor inertia for quadrant protrusion compensation. Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor. ---Setting range--- 1 to 32000 (10 -6 kgm 2 ) Blf visc friction Viscous friction Set the viscous friction for quadrant protrusion compensation. After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually adjust the value. If this parameter setting is small, a recess will form on the inner side of the circle, and if large, a protrusion will form on the outer side of the circle. When the valu e is appropriate, a spike- shaped quadrant protrusion will form based on normal step-shaped backlash. ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 (1/16 Nm/(rad/s)) Blf fwdg Compensation FF gain Set the feed forward gain for quadrant protrusion compensation. After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually adjust the value. If this parameter setting is small, a large quadrant protrusion will form, and if large, a recess will form on the inner side of the circle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (%) Blf motor stl trq Motor stall torque Set the motor rated current for quadrant protrusion compensation. Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor. ---Setting range--- 1 to 16000 (1/256 Nm) SscDrSel Speed monitor Door selection Select which door group of the speed monitoring the spindle belongs to. 0000: Door 1 group. 0001: Door 1 group. 0002: Door 2 group. 0003: Door 1 and 2 group. The speed monitoring will not be executed when "#2313 SV113 SSF8/bitF" is OFF re gardless of this param- eter. The selected door group must be set when setting the synchronous control. The spindle/C axis control enables the door selection in "#3071 SscDrSelSp" for the corresponding spindle. vbacklash valid Variable backlash valid/continuous or Variable back- lash II valid Select whether the variable backlash is to be dis abled/enabled/continuous, or variable backlash II enabled. 0: Disabled 1: Enable 2: Continuous 3: Enable variable backlash II ("#2011 G0back" and "#2012 G1back" will not work unless "0: Disable" is selected.) #2122 G0vback+ Variable G0 backlash + Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse. (+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2123 G0vback= Variable G0 backlash = Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse. (+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2124 G0vback- Variable G0 backlash - Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse. (+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2125 G1vback+ Variable G1 backlash + Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed. (+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2126 G1vback= Variable G1 backlash = Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed. (+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2127 G1vback- Variable G1 backlash - Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed. (+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table) ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit) #2128 G1vback feed1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount change- over speed 1 Set the speed range during cutting feed. (The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.) Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. ---Setting range--- 0 to 480000 (mm/min) #2129 G1vback feed2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount change- over speed 2 Set the speed range during cutting feed. (The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.) Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. ---Setting range--- 0 to 480000 (mm/min) G1vback dist1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount change- over distance 1 Set the range of the dist ance during cutting feed. (The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.) Note that the distance range is ident ified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999.999999 (mm) G1vback dist2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount change- over distance 2 Set the range of the dist ance during cutting feed. (The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.) Note that the distance range is ident ified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999.999999 (mm) vback pos1 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point position 1 Set the range of the center of the end point position. (The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.) The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. (Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as the po- sition - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point. (Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and 2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied:If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensatio n amount changeover speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than t he compensation amount change over speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large. ---Setting range--- -999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm) vback pos2 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point position 2 Set the range of the center of the end point position. (The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.) The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values. (Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as the po- sition - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point. (Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and 2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied:If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensatio n amount changeover speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than t he compensation amount change over speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large. ---Setting range--- -999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm) vback arc K Variable backlash arc compensation coefficient Set the arc compensation coefficient. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) #2135 vback feed refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (speed) Select the speed range to be used as the reference position. 0: Low speed 1: Medium speed 2: High speed #2136 vback pos refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (end point position) Select the end point range to be used as the reference position. 0: Position + range 1: Position center range 2: Position - range #2137 vback dir refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (entry di- rection) Select the entry direction to be used as the reference position. 0: Entry direction + 1: Entry direction - #2138 vback pos center Continuous variable backlash position center point Set the position center point. (This is used only when continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vback- lash valid".) Set a value between "#2132 vback pos1" and "#2133 vbackpos2" for the position center point. (Note) When the size relation of the compensati on amount changeover speed and distance 1 and 2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied: If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensatio n amount changeover speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than th e compensation amount chang eover speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large. ---Setting range--- -999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm) #2139 omrff_off OMR-FF invalid Select whether to enable or temporarily disabl e the OMR-FF control when OMR-FF is valid. 0: Enable 1: Temporarily disable When "1" is selected while OMR-FF is valid, OMR-FF c an be temporarily disabled and conventional feed for- ward control can be applied instead. #2140 Ssc Svof Filter Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF Set the error detection time for when an error of command speed monitoring or feedback speed monitoring is detected during servo OFF. An alarm will occur if the time, for which the speed has been exceeding the safe speed or safe rotation speed, exceeds the error detection time set in this parameter. If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) chtL Chopping first-step time constant for soft acceleration/ deceleration Set the first-step time constant for the chopping axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied. Note that, however, there may be cases where actual ti me constant is shorter than the set time constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated according to the feedrate so that the acceleration rate during acceleration/deceleration (clamp speed/ chopping time constant) will be constant. When "0" is set, "#2007 G1tL" will be valid. Speed[mm/min] chclsp cht1 Time[ms] chtL ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) cht1 Chopping second-step time constant for soft accelera- tion/deceleration Set the second-step time constant for the chopping ax is when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied. Note that, however, there may be cases where actual ti me constant is shorter than the set time constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated so that the ratio between first-step and second-step time constant will be constant. When "0" is set, "#2008 G1t1" will be valid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) polar Control axis relative polarity Set "0" for the reference axis, and set the polarity of the superimposed axis relative to the reference axis. 0: Relative to reference axis, polarity is positive 1: Relative to reference axis, polarity is negative Z2(Superimposed axis) polar=1 ＋ X2 X1 ＋ Z1(Reference axis) polar=0 #2144 baseps Base machine coordinate zero point relative distance Set each axis's position of the base machine coordina te zero point when an arbitrary point M on the machine is regarded as a base point. Unify the directions of all part systems' machine zero po int positions with the dire ction of the machine coor- dinate system of the 1st part system. If the 1st part system doesn't have a parallel axis, determi ne the direction arbitrarily. Example: System1(X1, Z1), System2(X2, Z2) System2 X2 base machine coordinate zero point baseps System1 base machine coordinate zero point X1 baseps M Z1 baseps Z2 baseps ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2146 Blf_L1 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing- type backlash compensation 1 Set the distance for specifying the compensation c hange rate in position-dependent increasing-type back- lash compensation. Blf_E1 Blf_E2 Blf_L2 Blf_L1 When "#2148 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-d ependent increasing-type backlas h compensation function will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) Blf_L2 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing- type backlash compensation 2 Set the distance for specifying the compensation ch ange rate in position-dependent increasing-type back- lash compensation. Blf_E1 Blf_E2 Blf_L2 Blf_L1 When "#2148 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation function will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) Blf_E1 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing- type backlash compensation 1 Set the compensation amount for specifying the comp ensation change rate in position-dependent increas- ing-type backlash compensation. Blf_E1 Blf_E2 Blf_L2 Blf_L1 When "#2148 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation function will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) Blf_E2 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing- type backlash compensation 2 Set the compensation amount for specifying the comp ensation change rate in position-dependent increas- ing-type backlash compensation. Blf_E1 Blf_E2 Blf_L2 Blf_L1 When "#2148 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation function will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2150 Rot_len Farthest distance from rotary axis center Set the farthest distance of the rotating part from the ro tation center for executing the 3D machine interfer- ence check. When "0" is set, this distance will conform to the rotary axis' specification speed. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #2151 rated_spd Rated speed Set the maximum speed which can be driven with the motor's maximum torque. (Note 1) This parameter's setting value must be smalle r than "#2001 rapid Rapid traverse". If bigger, constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied. (Note 2) If rapid traverse constant-g radient multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion is valid, and also if this pa- rameter is set to "0", constant inclinat ion acceleration/deceleration will be applied. Torque Speed rapid rated_spd G0t_rated rated_spd Speed Time rapid ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2152 acc_rate Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceler- ation rate Set the rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate in rapid traverse. (Note) If this parameter is set to "0" or "100", cons tant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied. Acceleration a max acc_rate = a a min max x100 a min Speed rated_spd rapid ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #2153 G0t_rated G0 time constant up to rated speed (multi-step acceler- ation/deceleration) Set the acceleration rate up to the rated speed of ra pid traverse constant-gradient multi-step acceleration/ deceleration. (Note) If this parameter is set to "0", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2155 hob_fwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing machining Set the feed forward gain when controlling as workpiec e axis of tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing). ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) G1bFx Maximum axis-specific pre-interpolation cutting feed rate When axis-specific acceleration tolerance control is ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration tolerance. When "0" is set, "#2001 rapid" is used. When variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1206 G1bF" is used. When both axis-specific acceleration tolerance contro l and variable-acceleration pre-interpolation accelera- tion/deceleration are ON: Specify the maximum speed to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1206 G1bF" is used. When neither axis-specific acceleration tolerance cont rol nor variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceler- ation/deceleration is ON: This parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min) G1btLx Axis-specific pre-interpolation cutting feed time con- stant When axis-specific acceleration tolerance control is ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration tolerance. When "0" is set, "#2004 G0tL" is used. When variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1207 G1btL" is used. When both axis-specific acceleration tolerance contro l and variable-acceleration pre-interpolation accelera- tion/deceleration are ON: Specify the time constant (a time to be taken until reaching the maximum speed) to be used for calculating each axis' acceleration. When "0" is set, "#1207 G1btL" is used. When neither axis-specific acceleration tolerance cont rol nor variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceler- ation/deceleration is ON: This parameter is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) compx Accuracy coefficient for each axis Specify the compensation coefficient to be used for ad justing a path error and clamp speed at a corner for each axis during the high-accuracy cont rol mode. If the setting value is larger, the edge accuracy will im- prove, but the cycle time may be longer because the corner speed will slow down. This parameter is disabled when the axis-specific acceleration tolerance control is OFF. ---Setting range--- -1000 to 99 (%) exdcax1 External deceleration speed 1 Set the upper limit value of feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is enabled and ex- ternal deceleration speed 1 is selected. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) exdcax2 External deceleration speed 2 Set the upper limit value of feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is enabled and ex- ternal deceleration speed 2 is selected. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2163 exdcax3 External deceleration speed 3 Set the upper limit value of feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is enabled and ex- ternal deceleration speed 3 is selected. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2164 exdcax4 External deceleration speed 4 Set the upper limit value of feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is enabled and ex- ternal deceleration speed 4 is selected. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2165 exdcax5 External deceleration speed 5 Set the upper limit value of feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is enabled and ex- ternal deceleration speed 5 is selected. This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2169 Man meas rtrn dir Return direction in manual measurement Select the direction of return operation in manual measurement. 0: Opposite to the contact direction 1: Fixed to the + direction Attempting return in the - direction will cause the operation alarm "0033 Rtn dir err in manual measure". 2: Fixed to the - direction Attempting return in the + direction will cause the o peration alarm "0033 Rtn dir err in manual measure". #2170 Lmc1QR Lost motion compensation gain 1 for high-speed retract Set the lost motion compensation gain in drilling cycle at high-speed retract (CW: - to + direction, CCW: + to - direction). Set "-1" when drilling cycle at high-speed retract is not performed. When set to 0, the performance will follow the setti ng of "#2171 Lmc2QR (Lost motion compensation gain 2 for high-speed retract)". ---Setting range--- -1, 0 to 200(%) #2171 Lmc2QR Lost motion compensation gain 2 for high-speed retract Set the lost motion compensation gain in drilling cycle at high-speed retract (CW: - to + direction, CCW: + to - direction). Set "-1" when drilling cycle at high-speed retract is not performed. When set to 0, the performance will follow the setti ng of "#2170 Lmc1QR (Lost motion compensation gain 1 for high-speed retract)". ---Setting range--- -1, 0 to 200(%) #2172 LmcdQR Lost motion compensation timing for high-speed re- tract Set the timing of the lost motion compensation in drilling cycle at high-speed retract. When set to 0, the performance will follow the setting of "#2239 SV039 LMCD (Lost motion compensation timing)". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (ms) LmckQR Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant for high- speed retract Set the machine system's spring cons tant when using lost motion compensa tion type 3 in drilling cycle with high-speed retract. When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2285 SV085 LMCk (Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant)". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01%/ μ m) LmccQR Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient for high-speed retract Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using lost motion compensation type 3 in drilling cycle at high-speed retract. When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2286 SV086 LMCc (Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient)". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(0.01%/ μ m) Special Ax Radius Special diametral axis radius Set the radius of the special diametral axis. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Special Ax Clamp Special diametral axis clamp speed Set a clamp speed for the special diametral axis control. Set the limit speed of the dr ive system in this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (°/min) (Note) For "#2001 rapid" and "#2002 cl amp", set speeds on a machining line. When the value in "#2176 Special Ax Clamp" is smalle r than that in "#2001 rapid", "Special Ax Clamp" value will be applied to the clamp speed. ManualFeedBtL Time constant for manual feed rate B Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for manual feed rate B. (Note) When set to "0", this parameter will not be used: conventional acceleration/deceleration will be per- formed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) S_DIN Speed observation input door No. Set the door signal input in the drive unit. Use this parameter only when the axis with a door signal belongs to several door groups. The correspondence between the door signals and bits are as follows. bit0: Door1 signal bit1: Door2 signal If the axis does not receive any door signal, set to "0". If 0 is set to the axis to which a door signal is input, the setting of #2118 is applied. Do not turn ON more than one bit. Only the door signals set in #2118 can be set. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0002 (HEX) #2181 sscfeed1 Observation speed 1 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 SV018:PIT × SV002:PC2 SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) #2182 sscfeed2 Observation speed 2 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 SV018:PIT × SV002:PC2 SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) #2183 sscfeed3 Observation speed 3 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 × SV002:PC2 SV018:PIT SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) #2184 sscfeed4 Observation speed 4 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 × SV002:PC2 SV018:PIT SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) sscfeed5 Observation speed 5 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger t han 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 SV018:PIT × SV002:PC2 SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) sscfeed6 Observation speed 6 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger t han 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 × SV002:PC2 SV018:PIT SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) chgPLCax PLC axis switchover axis No. Specify the I/F No. of the PL C axis to use when switching between NC axis and PLC axis. Set the I/F No. of a vacant PLC axis. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 S_SigIn Safety observation signal input This parameter specifies which observation speed change signal is input in the drive unit. The observation speed change signal corresponds to the following bits of the parameter. bit0: Observation speed change signal 1 is connected. bit1: Observation speed change signal 2 is connected. bit2: Observation speed change signal 3 is connected. If the axis receives no observation speed change signal, set to "0000". (Note) When a same setting value is set to more than one axis, or when more than one bit is set to turn ON for one axis, the alarm (Y20 0027) will occur. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0004 (HEX) StlTrq (PwrCal) Stall torque for power computation Specify the stall torque of the servo motor. This value is used for calculating the servo motor's power consumption. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 1000.000 (N•m) #2190 OT_Rreg Designate R register for stored stroke limit I Set the head R register No. to be used for setting/checking stored stroke limit I. Eight consecutive R registers from the R register No . set here will be the area for stored stroke limit I. Changing the areas for stored stroke limit I will be disabled if an R register that is not in the user area is set. In addition, make sure to set an even number for the head R register No. Changing the areas for stored stroke limit I will be disabled if an odd number is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 29892 #2191 sscfeed7 Observation speed 7 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 SV018:PIT × SV002:PC2 SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) #2192 sscfeed8 Observation speed 8 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note 1) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (mm/min, °/min) (Note 2) Observation speeds (#2181 to #2186 and #2191 to #2192) need to satisfy the following condition. If not satisfied, the alarm (Y20 0007) will result. sscfeed1 㹼 8 SV018:PIT × SV002:PC2 SV001:PC1 ≤ 32767 ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (mm/min or °/min) #2195 hob_tL Hobbing workpiece axis time constant Set the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration ti me constant of the hobbing workpiece axis when is- suing a hobbing command while the hobbing spindle is rota ting. Hobbing workpiece axis time constant is the constant inclination acceleration/dec eleration time constant with respect to #2002 Cutting feed rate for clamp function. If the setting value of hobbing workpiece axis time c onstant is out of setting range, set the maximum value in the setting range. ---Setting range--- 1 to 4000 (ms) Rotation speed #2002 clamp Hob axis’ command speed Hob axis Wk axis’ command speed Wk axis t hob _tL hob _tL G0tMin Minimum time constant for rapid traverse constant-gra- dient acc./dec. Acceleration/Deceleration is carried out so that the acceleration/deceleration time will not become longer than this parameter's setting when the acceleration/deceler ation type of rapid traver se command is constant inclination. Set a value smaller than "#2004 G0tL". This parameter is enabled when "#1200 G0 _acc" is constant inclination type. This parameter is enabled only during fixed cycle if "#1253 set25/bit2" (Acceleration/Deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle) is enabled even if "#1200 G0_acc" is constant inclination type. This parameter is disabled if "0" or a value larger than "#2004 G0tL" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) G1tMin Minimum time constant for cutting feed constant incli- nation acc./dec. Acceleration/Deceleration is carried out so that the acceleration/deceleration time will not become longer than this parameter's setting when the acceleration/dec eleration type of linear in terpolation command is con- stant inclination. Set a value smaller than "#2007 G1tL". This parameter is enabled when "#1201 G1 _acc" is constant inclination type. This parameter is enabled only during fixed cycle if "#1253 set25/bit2" (Acceleration/Deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle) is enabled even if "#1201 G1_acc" is constant inclination type. This parameter is disabled if "0" or a value larger than "#2007 G1tL" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) VBL2 VG1 Variable backlash comp II Changeover speed 1 Set the changeover speed at speed normalization. Set a value smaller than that in "#2562 VBL2 VG0". Normally, the "#2561 VBL2 VG1" value corresponds to th e cutting feedrate, the "#2562 VBL2 VG0" value to the rapid traverse rate. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) VBL2 VG0 Variable backlash comp II Changeover speed 2 Set the changeover speed at speed normalization. Set a value greater than that in "#2561 VBL2 VG1". Normally, the "#2561 VBL2 VG1" value corresponds to th e cutting feedrate, the "#2562 VBL2 VG0" value to the rapid traverse rate. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) VBL2 P1 Variable backlash comp II Stroke position 1 Set the most plus (+) side stroke position among the three. Set the parameters VBL2 P1 to P3 to be "VBL2 P1 > VBL 2 P2 > VBL2 P3". Normally, divide the axis's stroke by four, and set a dividi ng position (except for the both ends) to be a stroke position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) VBL2 P2 Variable backlash comp II Stroke position 2 Set the middle stroke position among the three. Set the parameters VBL2 P1 to P3 to be "VBL2 P1 > VBL 2 P2 > VBL2 P3". Normally, divide the axis's stroke by four, and set a dividi ng position (except for the both ends) to be a stroke position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2565 VBL2 P3 Variable backlash comp II Stroke position 3 Set the most minus (-) side st roke position among the three. Set the parameters VBL2 P1 to P3 to be "VBL2 P1 > VBL2 P2 > VBL2 P3". Normally, divide the axis's stroke by four, and set a di viding position (except for the both ends) to be a stroke position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2566 VBL2 BL11 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 1 and stroke pos 1 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 1 and stroke position 1. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2567 VBL2 BL12 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 1 and stroke pos 2 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 1 and stroke position 2. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2568 VBL2 BL13 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 1 and stroke pos 3 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 1 and stroke position 3. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2569 VBL2 BL01 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 2 and stroke pos 1 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 2 and stroke position 1. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2570 VBL2 BL02 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 2 and stroke pos 2 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 2 and stroke position 2. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2571 VBL2 BL03 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 2 and stroke pos 3 Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 2 and stroke position 3. Calculate the current compens ation data according to the current speed and position. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) #2572 VBL2 FloatTC Variable backlash comp II Time constant in calculating float amt Set the time constant in calculating the float am ount. Set a value greater than the calculation cycle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (ms) #2573 VBL2 LMMul Variable backlash comp II Multiplier in calculating lost motion amt Set the multiplier in calculating the lost motion am ount. When "1000" is set, the multiplier is "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (1/1000) VBL2 VBound Variable backlash comp II Speed boundary value Set the boundary value of the speed in calculating the compensation amount. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) VBL2 CompMag Variable backlash comp II Compensation magnification Set the compensation magnification in calculating the compensation amount. When "0" is set, the magnifi- cation is 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) VBL2 CompMul Variable backlash comp II Multiplier in calculating com- pensation amount Set the multiplier in calculating the compensation amount. When "1000" is set, the multiplier is "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (1/1000) VBL2 BLE Variable backlash comp II Gradually increase amount Set the value to subtract from t he compensation amount (CMP) at reversing the axis travel direction. ---Setting range--- -99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit) VBL2 BLL Variable backlash comp II Gradually increase travel dis- tance Set the travel distance to return to the compensation amount (CMP) from the reverse point of the axis travel direction. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) BLAT_feed Feed rate for automatic backlash adjustment Set the feed rate in adjust ing the backlash amount. It is possible to set this parameter also by carryin g out a measurement condition adjustment on the backlash adjustment screen. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000(mm/min) index_Gcmd Indexing axis G command check The commanded G code of the index table indexing axis is checked. 0: Check is not performed. 1: Cutting feed G command is prohibited. BLAT_pos Measurement position for automatic backlash adjust- ment Set the measurement position in measurement condi tion adjustment and backlash adjustment on the ma- chine coordinate system. (Note 1) Set the position so that a co llision will not occur during adjustment. (Note 2) Set this parameter for all the axes. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) BLAT_syn Synchronization setting for automatic backlash adjust- ment 0: Separate backlash adjustment fo r master axis and slave axis each. 1: Backlash adjustment is applied only to the master axis. The master ax is's backlash amount is applied to the slave axis. (Note 1) Set this paramet er for the master axis. (Note 2) In the case of synchronous contro l of speed/current command, set to "1". #2584 VBL2 Vlimit Variable backlash compensation 2: Speed to reset com- pensation scale to 100% Specify the speed at which compensation scale is reset to 100%. When "0" is set, this parameter is disabled. If a set speed is greater than "#2574 VBL2 VBound", the speed is clamped at "#2574 VBL2 VBound". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2585 Cyccmp Enable cyclic error compensation Specify whether to enable the cyclic error compensation. 0: Disable 1: Enable #2586 Cycstnum Cyclic error compensation: initial number of compensa- tion Specify the initial number of the compensation amounts. The compensation amounts to be applied will start from this number, and the number of compensation amounts to be applied is specified by "#2587 Cycdv" (Cyclic error compensation: number of divisions). ---Setting range--- 4101 to 5999 #2587 Cycdv Cyclic error compensation: number of divisions Specify the number of divisions per c ycle of the cyclic error compensation. ---Setting range--- 1 to 128 #2588 Cycct Cyclic error compensation: cycle constant Specify the number of compensation cycles per revolution of the rotary axis. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #2598 G0tL_2 G0 time constant 2 (linear) Set a linear control time constant for rapid traverse a cceleration/deceleration to be applied when the G0 time constant switchover r equest signal is ON. This time constant is enabled when LR (rapid traverse fe ed with linear acceleration /deceleration) or F (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst" (Acceleration and deceleration modes). If #2598 is 0, the time cons tant set in "#2004 G0tL (G0 time constant)" will be used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000(ms) #2599 G0t1_2 G0 time constant 2 (primary delay)/2nd-step time con- stant for soft acceleration/deceleration Set a primary-delay time constant for rapid traverse a cceleration/deceleration to be applied when the G0 time constant switchover r equest signal is ON. This time constant is enabled when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential acceler- ation and linear deceleration) is selected in " #2003 smgst" (Acceleration and deceleration modes). When the soft acceleration/deceleration is select ed, the second-step time constant will be used. If #2599 is set to 0, the time const ant set in "#2005 G0t1 (G0 time cons tant (primary delay)/2nd-step time constant for soft acceleration/deceleration)" will be used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) #2614 JH_smgSel Jog/handle acceleration/deceleration selection Switch jog/handle time constants. Set per axis. 0: Not use 1: (Not used) 2: Enable for handle feed JHtL Jog/handle time constant (linear) Set a linear control time constant for jo g/handle feed acceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1 [ms]. Speed Time JHtL JHtL ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) thr_clamp Thread cut clamp speed Specify the maximum cutting feed rate to be applied to thread cutting for each axis. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 thr_t Thread cut time constant Specify the primary delay time constant to be used in acceleration/deceleration of a thread cut axis. * This parameter is enabled when either C1 (Primary delay cutting feed) or LC (Linear acceleration/deceler- ation cutting feed) is selected for the acceleration/deceleration mode (#2003 smgst). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 plrapid2 Rapid traverse rate for superimposition control 2 Specify the rapid traverse rate to be applied under 2- axis superimposition control w hen the axis traverses in the same direction as the other axis that is travelling at a cutting feed rate. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) pl3G0tL G0 time constant (linea r) for 3-axis serial superimposi- tion control Specify the G0 time constant (linear) to be app lied under 3-axis serial superimposition control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) pl3G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay) for 3-axis serial super- imposition control Specify the G0 time constant (primary delay) to be applied under 3-axis serial superimposition control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) pl3G1tL G1 time constant (linea r) for 3-axis serial superimposi- tion control Specify the G1 time constant (linear) to be app lied under 3-axis serial superimposition control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) pl3G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay) for 3-axis serial super- imposition control Specify the G1 time constant (primary delay) to be applied under 3-axis serial superimposition control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) #2626 pl3rapid Rapid traverse rate fo r 3-axis serial superimposition control Specify the rapid traverse rate to be applied when all the three superimposed axes are rapid-traversing in a single direction under 3-axis serial superimposition control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2627 pl3rapid2 Rapid traverse rate fo r 3-axis serial superimposition control 2 Specify the rapid traverse rate to be applied under 3-ax is serial superimposition control when two of the three superimposed axes are rapid-traversing while the remainin g one axis is fed at a cutting feed rate in a single direction. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2628 pl3rapid3 Rapid traverse rate fo r 3-axis serial superimposition control 3 Specify the rapid traverse rate to be applied under 3-axis serial superimposition control when one of the three superimposed axes is rapid-traversing while the remainin g two axes are fed at a cutt ing feed rate in a single direction. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2629 pl3clamp Cutting feed clamp sp eed for 3-axis serial superimposi- tion control Specify the cutting feed clamp speed to be applied under 3-axis serial superimposition control when all the three superimposed axes are fed at a cutting feed rate in a single direction. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2630 pl3clamp2 Cutting feed clamp sp eed for 3-axis serial superimposi- tion control 2 Specify the cutting feed clamp speed to be applied under 3-axis serial superimposition control when one of the three superimposed axes is rapid- traversing while the other two are fed at a cutting feed rate in a single direction. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) #2631 G0olinps Rapid traverse block overlap G00 in-position width Specify the in-position width for the rapid traverse block overlap at the joint of consecutively given G00 blocks. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 1000.000 (mm) #2632 G1olinps Rapid traverse block overlap G01 in-position width Specify the in-position width for the rapid traverse bloc k overlap at the joint of two blocks where G01 is in- cluded. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 1000.000 (mm) #2633 G28olinps Rapid traverse block overlap G28 in-position width Specify the in-position width for the rapid traverse block overlap at the joint of two blocks where G28/G30 is included. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 1000.000 (mm) SrvFunc01 bit0: Change output units of servo axis cutting torue Change the output units of the servo axis cutting torque. 0: Output unit 1% 1: Output unit 0.01% bit1: Select stop method at collision detection Set the operation when a collision is detected. 0: Emergency stop. 1: Servo alarm occurs to an axis that the collision was detected. The axes in the part system that the collision was detected will be in an auto matic interlocked state. Related parameters: SV035/bitE-C, SV035/bitB, SV060, CrshStpSel tskip_T Non-sensitive band for torque skip Specify a period of time in which to rque skip condition is disabled. This is effective when an improper skip is generated due to current flown during acceleration (when G160 is commanded). ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(ms) m_clamp Manual feed clamp speed Specify the maximum speed to be applied to each axis when manual speed clamp is enabled. When 0 is set, the rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) jogfeed Jog feed rate Specify a feed rate to be applied to each axis during jog mode. When 0 is set, the manual feed rate selected by Manual feedrate method selection (JVS) signal is applied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) LdMeter thresholdY Loadmeter: Caution (Yellow) threshold Specify the servo load current (%) at which th e loadmeter displays a caution sign (yellow). If servo load current exceeds the specified value, the loadmet er displays a caution (yellow). If you wish to avoid showing the caution (yellow), se t this parameter to be the same as "#2644 LdMeter thresholdR". When "0" is set, the value becomes 100% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) LdMeter thresholdR Loadme ter: Warning (Red) threshold Specify the servo load current (%) at which the loadmeter displays a warning sign (red). If servo load current exceeds the specified value, the loadmeter displays a warning (red). If you wish to avoid showing the warning (red), set th is parameter to be the same as "#2645 LdMeter load max". When "0" is set, the value becomes 150% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) LdMeter load max Loadmeter: Maximum servo load current Specify the maximum servo load current (%) for loadmeter display. When "0" is set, the value becomes 200% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) #2646 distt Load observation disturbance torque filter time con- stant Set the responsiveness in detecting the disturbance torque. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (ms) (Default value: 0) #2651 RT2G0 RT2: Minimum value of G0 acce/dece time constant Select whether to enable switching of G0 acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0: Disable switching of G0 acceleration/deceleration time constant. 1: Enable switching of G0 acceleration/deceleration time constant. #2652 RT2G1 RT2: Enable switching of G1 acce/dece time constant Select whether to enable switching of G1 acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0: Disable switching of G1 acceleration/deceleration time constant. 1: Enable switching of G1 acceleration/deceleration time constant. #2653 RT2G0tL RT2: Minimum value of G0 acce/dece time constant Set the minimum value of time constant when changi ng time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G0 command. Set the time constant which is adjusted when workpiece is not attached. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2654 RT2G1tLA RT2: Minimum value of acce/dece time constant after G1 interpolation Set the minimum value when changing time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G1 command after interpolation. Set the time constant which is adjusted when workpiece is not attached. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2655 RT2G1tLB RT2: Minimum value of acce/dece time constant before G1 interpolation Set the minimum value when changing time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G1 command before interpolation. Set the time constant which is adjusted when workpiece is not attached. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2656 RT2 G0rng RT2: Changing amount of G0 acce/dece time constant Set the changing amount of time constant when changi ng time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G0 command based on the estimated inertia ratio. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #2657 RT2G1rngA RT2: Changing amount of acce/dece time constant after G1 interpolation Set the changing amount of time constant when changi ng time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G1 command after interpolation ba sed on the estimated inertia ratio. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) RT2G1rngB RT2: Changing amount of acce/dece time constant before G1 interpolation Set the changing amount of time constant when chang ing time constant during acceleration and deceleration of G1 command before interpolation bas ed on the estimated inertia ratio. Note that when 0 is set, the value will be 10 (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) tolerance Tolerance Specify a tolerance (tolerable error) to be used under tolerance control. Set a tolerable error for fine segment program created by CAM. (U sually around 0.01(mm)) If 0.000 is set, it is operated with the tolerance of 0.01(mm). When designating the toleranc e amount with the ", K address", this parameter is not used. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 100.000 (mm) omrff_inps OMR-FF in-position width Specify the in-position width at which the standard model gain is sw itched under OMR-FF control. When set to "0", command deceleration check is performed. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 (mm) ITF3_ILMT Interference check III torque limit at entering interfer- ence warning area In interference check III, select whether to limit the torque at entering the interference warning area. 0: No torque limit (Use "#2213 SV013 (Current limit value)") 1: Limit the torque (Use "#2214 SV014 (Current limit value in special control)") (Note) This setting is invalid if spindle/C ax is is the target axis. (Torque cannot be limited.) ITF3_Clamp Interference check III clamp speed at entering interfer- ence warning area In interference check III, if clamping the speed, the clamp speed is set at entering the interference warning area. (Note) When "0" is set, the speed will not be clamped. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) primno Multiple axis synchronization control: Master axis No. This parameter is used for the mu ltiple axis synchronization control. Specify the master axis No. th at corresponds to the axis.  Enter the sequential NC axis No., with the 1st axis of the 1st part system set as "1".  You cannot set the No. of the axis targeted for the multiple axis synchronization control in "#1068 slav- no".  You cannot set "#1068 slavno" for the axis targeted for the multiple axis synchronization control.  The master axis for multiple axis synchroniza tion control cannot be set in "#2674 primno".  For a multi-part system configuration, you ca nnot set the axes across different part systems. ---Setting range--- 0: No master axis 1 to 32: 1st axis to 32nd axis tcmp_top Multiple axis synchronization control: starting tool off- set No. This parameter is used for the mu ltiple axis synchronization control. Specify the starting tool offset No. for the axis. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 #2680 TCMPG1 Cogging torque compensation gain 1 (fundamental wave component) Specify the amplitude of compensation signal (fundam ental wave component) in t he unit of 0.01% of stall current. When "0" is set, the compensation is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (0.01%) #2681 TCMPT1 Cogging torque compensation timing 1 (fundamental wave component) Set the timing of compensation signal (fundamental wave component). The signal timing is adjusted with one cycle of fundamental wave component taken as 100%. When "50" is set, the compensation signal is inverted. Setting it to "100" results in the same signal timing as when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #2682 TCMPG2 Cogging torque compensation gain 2 (second-order component) Specify the amplitude of compensatio n signal (second-order component) in the unit of 0.01% of stall current. When "0" is set, the compensation is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (0.01%) #2683 TCMPT2 Cogging torque compensation timing 2 (second-order component) Set the timing of compensation signal (second-order co mponent). The signal timing is adjusted with one cy- cle of fundamental wave component * 2 taken as 100%. When "50" is set, the compensation signal is inverted. Setting it to "100" results in the same signal timing as when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #2684 TCMPG3 Cogging torque compensation gain 3 (third-order com- ponent) Specify the amplitude of compensation signal (third-ord er component) in the unit of 0.01% of stall current. When "0" is set, the compensation is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (0.01%) #2685 TCMPT3 Cogging torque compensation timing 3 (third-order component) Set the timing of compensation signal (third-order co mponent). The signal timing is adjusted with one cycle of fundamental wave component * 3 taken as 100%. When "50" is set, the compensation signal is inverted. Setting it to "100" results in the same signal timing as when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #2686 TCMPG4 Cogging torque compensation gain 4 (fourth-order component) Specify the amplitude of compensation signal (fourth-ord er component) in the unit of 0.01% of stall current. When "0" is set, the compensation is disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (0.01%) TCMPT4 Cogging torque compensation timing 4 (fourth-order component) Specify the timing of compensation signal (fourth-ord er component). The signal timing is adjusted with one cycle of fundamental wave component * 4 taken as 100%. When "50" is set, the compensation signal is inverted. Setting it to "100" results in the same signal timing as when "0" is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) TCMPP Fundamental wave cycle of cogging torque Set the fundamental wave frequency to be used for coggi ng torque compensation, using the electrical angle: 360[deg] * 1/N. Setting it to "0" leads to the same fundamental wave frequency magnification as when "2" is set. For a linear motor, set "0". For a rotary motor, set the fundamental wave frequency magnification per electrical angle according to the motor to use. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32 VibCutting_VCC Vibration cutting control ON This parameter specifies whether to enable the vibration cutting control. 0: Disable 1: Enable (*) For a rotary axis or PLC axis, the vibration cutti ng control is disabled irrespective of this parameter. VibClamp_VCC Cutting feedrate clamp in vibration cutting mode This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate to be applied to each axis during the vibration cutting mode. If this parameter is set to "0" or a value greater t han "#2002 clamp", the value of "#2002 clamp" will be ap- plied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min) VibPGMsp_VCC VCC reference model gain This parameter specifies the reference model gain (the position response during OMR-FF) to be applied to each axis during the vibration cutting mode. If this parameter is set to "0", the value of SV197 (PGMsp) or SV106 (PGM) will be applied in this order. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (rad/s) valVDC Variable full-closed torsion compensation ON Select whether to enable or disable the variable full-closed torsion compensation. 0: Disable 1: Enable VDCtex_sc Variable full-closed torsion compensation: time con- stant magnification Specify the magnification of time constant for vari able full-closed torsion compensation (VDCtex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (%) VDCpex_sc Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion (+) magnification Specify the magnification of variable full-closed torsion compensation value (+) (VDCpex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (%) #14304 VDCnex_sc Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion (-) magnification Specify the magnification of variab le full-closed torsion compensatio n value (-) (VDCnex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (%) #14305 VDCtex_sft Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion time constant shift Specify the shift amount for vari able full-closed torsion compensati on time constant (VDCtex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -9999 to 9999(ms) #14306 VDCpex_sft Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion value (+) shift Specify the shift amount for va riable full-closed torsion compensation value (+) (VDCpex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (0.01 μ m) #14307 VDCnex_sft Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion value (-) shift Specify the shift amount for variable full-closed tors ion compensation valu e (-) (VDCnex1 to 8). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (0.01 μ m) #14311+5(n-1) VDCan Variable full-closed torsion compensation acceleration n Specify the acceleration at which variable full-cl osed torsion compensation is applied. (n=1 to 8) Set the acceleration at reversal of machine travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 ( μ m/s 2 ) #14312+5(n-1) VDCtexn Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion time constant n Specify the time constant for variable full-closed torsion compensation. (n=1 to 8) This sets the timing of applying the va riable full-closed torsion compensation. When 0 is set, the compensation is applied at the timing when the speed reaches the acceleration set in Vari- able full-closed torsion compensation acceleration n. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #14313+5(n-1) VDCpexn Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion value n (+) Specify the compensation value of variable full-closed torsion compensation in the positive (+) direction. (n=1 to 8) Set the length of torsion (+) at reversal of machine travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01 μ m) VDCnexn Variable full-closed torsion compensation: compensa- tion value n (-) Specify the compensation val ue of variable full-closed torsion compensation in the negative (-) direction. (n=1 to 8) Set the length of torsion (-) at reve rsal of machine travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01 μ m) valBL2 Backlash compensation II valid Select whether to enable the backlash compensation II function. 0: Disable 1: Enabled BL2_a1 Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 1 Specify the acceleration rate at which the backlash compensation II function should be applied. Set the acceleration rate at reversal of machine's travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 ( μ m/s 2 ) BL2_c1 Backlash compensation II compensation amount 1 Specify the compensation amount to be used for backlash compensation II. ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) BL2_a2 Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 2 Specify the acceleration rate at which the backlash compensation II function should be applied. Set the acceleration rate at reversal of machine's travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 ( μ m/s 2 ) BL2_c2 Backlash compensation II compensation amount 2 Specify the compensation amount to be used for backlash compensation II. ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) BL2_a3 Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 3 Specify the acceleration rate at which the backlash compensation II function should be applied. Set the acceleration rate at reversal of machine's travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 ( μ m/s 2 ) BL2_c3 Backlash compensation II compensation amount 3 Specify the compensation amount to be used for backlash compensation II. ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) BL2_a4 Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 4 Specify the acceleration rate at which the backlash compensation II function should be applied. Set the acceleration rate at reversal of machine's travel direction. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 ( μ m/s 2 ) #14368 BL2_c4 Backlash compensation II compensation amount 4 Specify the compensation amount to be used for backlash compensation II. ---Setting range--- -9999999 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit) G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate Set a rapid traverse rate for the dog type reference position return command. This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection. ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000000 (mm/min) G28crp G28 approach speed Set up the speed of approach to the reference point in the reference point return command. This speed is attained after the system stops with deceleration by dog detection. In the distance-coded reference posit ion detection, the set value will be applied from the start of reference position establishment. (Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10°/min) only when using the Z-phase type encoder (#1226 aux10/ bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis reference position return type. The same unit is used for both the micrometric and sub-micrometric specifications. ---Setting range--- 1 to 60000 (mm/min) G28sft Reference position shift distance Set the distance from the electrical zero-poi nt detection position to the reference position. This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection. (Note 1) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnificat ion (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold and E: 1000-fold) corre- sponding to the input setting unit ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value. (Note 2) The sign of setting value is will be following: the direction of "#2030 dir (-)" Refe rence position di- rection (-) is plus, and the opposite direction is minus. (Note 3) When set value is set to minus, the axis moves to electrical zero-point detection position at first and then moves in opposite direction. ---Setting range--- -99.999 to +99.999 (mm) grmask Grid mask amount Set the distance where the grid poin t will be ignored when near-point dog OFF signals are close to that grid point during reference position return. Axis speed Position (Encoder F/B) Grid Electrical zero point Near-point dog Grid mask setup distance The grid mask is valid for one grid. This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99.999 (mm) #2029 grspc Grid interval Set the distance between grids. Generally, set up the value equal to the ball screw pitch. Ho wever, if the encoder grid interval is not equal to the screw pitch when measured with a linear sc ale, set up the encoder grid interval. To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space. This is not used for the distance- coded reference position detection. (Note) Set the grid interval "#2029 grspc" according to the reference encoder for grid interval "#2041 grsp- cref". (1) Semi-closed loop control If "#2041 grspcref" is set to "0" (grid interval by the motor-side), set "#2029 grspc" to the same value as the ball screw pitch. If "#2041 grspcref" is set to "1" (grid interval by the machine-side), set "#2029 grspc" to the moving amount calculation value per a motor rotation ("#2201 SV001 PC1" / "#2202 SV002 PC2" x "#2218 SV018 PIT"). (2) Full-closed loop control If "#2041 grspcref" is set to "1" (grid interval by the machine-side), set "#2029 grspc" to the same value as the Z phase pitch. If "#2041 grspcref" is set to "0" (grid interval by t he motor-side), set "#2029 grspc" to the moving amount calculation value per Z phase pitch ("#2202 SV002 PC2" / "#2201 SV001 PC1" x the Z phase pitch of the machine-side). (*) If "#2029 grspc" is set to "0", the ball screw pitch "#2218 SV018 PIT" is used instead of the grid interval. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 999.999 (mm) #2030 dir (-) Reference position direction (-) Select which side of the near-point do g the reference position is established. For a rotary axis, select a direction that heads to the zero point from the intermedi ate point during automatic zero point return. 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction Directions in which reference position is es tablished as viewed from the near-point dog - direction + direction Grid Reference position Near-point dog - direction + direction Reference position Grid Near-point dog #2031 noref Axis without reference position Select whether the reference position is provided for the axis. 0: Reference position is provided. (Normal controlled axis) 1: No reference position is provided. When "1" is set, reference position return is not required before auto matic operation starts. nochk Whether reference position return is completed not checked Select whether to check the reference position return completion. 0: Check the reference po sition return completion. 1: Not check the reference position return completion. When "1" is set, the absolute and incremental commands can be executed even if dog type (or Z phase pulse system) reference position return is not completed. Note that this setting is available for a rotary axis only. zp_no Z phase pulse system reference position return spindle encoder No. Not used. Set to "0". rfpofs Distance-coded reference position detection offset Set the offset value from the position fo r the initial reference position setting to the machine's actual zero point in reference position return in the di stance-coded reference position detection. Input the value of the machine value co unter that is displayed immediately after the reference position is es- tablished. When the power is turned ON and this parameter is set to "0", the manual referenc e position return is regard- ed as initial reference position setting. If this parameter is set to "0", automatic operation won't be available. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) srchmax Distance-coded reference position detection scan dis- tance Set the maximum distance for scanning the reference mar ks when the reference position is not established in the distance-coded reference position detection. For the scan distance, set the distance that fully covers the number of re ference marks as you wish to detect. (Example) When adding about 10% of additional coverage: Scan distance = Base reference mark interval [mm] * 2 * 1.1 ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #2036 slv_adjust Reference position adjustment value Set the distance from the first grid point after leaving t he near point dog on the slave axis to the position where the reference position is actually established in dog-t ype reference position return in synchronous control. (Reference position shift amount is not included.) The adjustment value will be automatically set in the sl ave axis's parameter accord ing to the reference posi- tion adjustment complete signal from PLC. Fine adjustment is also available from the parameter screen. In the distance-coded reference position detection, t he reference position adjustment value will be invalid. Master axis start position (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) G28sft (6) Master axis Near-point dog Slave axis (6) Reference position Slave axis start position (7) adjustment completion signal ON Reference position adjustment G28sft Grid amount Basic machine coordinate system zero point (Note 1) This parameter is enabled when the synchroniza tion at zero point initialization ("#1493 ref_syn" = "1" of the master axis) is applied. (Note 2) This parameter can be set when one of the following settings is applied. - Relative position detection ("#2049 type" = "0") - Dog-type absolute position detection ("#2049 type" = "3") - Simple absolute position ("#2049 type" = "9") (Note 3) Set "0" when using the speed/current command synchronization control. (Note 4) A setting unit of th is parameter is [mm]. It is not influenced by the content of the following parameters setting. - "#1003 iunit" - "#1004 ctrl_unit" - "#1005 plcunit" - "#1040 M_inch" - "#1041 I_inch" - "#1240 set12/bit2" (Zero point shift amount magnification) (Note 5) The number of the significant digits after decimal point follows "#1004 ctrl_unit". (Note 6) A change of this parameter requires referenc e position return. When the automatic operation starts without reference position return, an alarm will occur. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999999 (mm) G53ofs Reference position #1 Set the position of the first reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Basic machine coordinate Reference position #1 (#2037 G53ofs) Reference position #2 (#2038 #2_rfp) Reference position #3 (#2039 #3_rfp) Reference position #4 (#2040 #4_rfp) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2_rfp Reference position #2 Set the position of the second reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Basic machine coordinate Reference position #1 (#2037 G53ofs) Reference position #2 (#2038 #2_rfp) Reference position #3 (#2039 #3_rfp) Reference position #4 (#2040 #4_rfp) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #3_rfp Reference position #3 Set the position of the third reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Basic machine coordinate Reference position #1 (#2037 G53ofs) Reference position #2 (#2038 #2_rfp) Reference position #3 (#2039 #3_rfp) Reference position #4 (#2040 #4_rfp) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2040 #4_rfp Reference position #4 Set the position of the fourth reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Basic machine coordinate Reference position #1 (#2037 G53ofs) Reference position #2 (#2038 #2_rfp) Reference position #3 (#2039 #3_rfp) Reference position #4 (#2040 #4_rfp) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #2041 grspcref Reference encoder for grid interval Select the reference encoder (motor-s ide or machine-side) based on which the grid interval "#2029 grspc" is set. 0: Motor-side 1: Machine-side (Note) When an MPI scale made by Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Machine Tool Co., Ltd.is used, set the zero point return parameters so that Z phase of the MPI scale becomes the grid point (electric basic position), and then perform zero point initialization setting. type Absolute po sition detection method Select the absolute position zero point alignment method. 0: Not absolute position detection 1: Stopper method (push against mechanical stopper) 2: Marked point alignment method I (The grid point is the reference position.) 3: Dog-type (align with dog and near point detection switch) 4: Marked point alignment method II (The position with which the mark was aligned is the reference posi- tion.) 9: Simple absolute position (Not absolute position dete ction, but the position when the power is turned off is registered.) absdir Basic point of Z direction Select the direction of the grid point immediately before the machi ne basic position (basic point of encoder) in the marked point alignment. 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction check Check Set the tolerable range of travel distance (dev iation distance) while the power is turned OFF. If the distance between the position when the power is turned OFF and when the power is turned ON again is larger than the set value, the in formation is notified to the PLC. (si gnal name: Absolute position warning) Set "0" to omit the check. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) clpush Current limit (%) Set the current limit value during the stopper operation in the dogless- type absolute position detection. The setting value is the ratio of the curre nt limit value to the rated current value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) pushf Push speed Set the feedrate for the automatic init ial setting during stopper method. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999 (mm/min) aproch Approach Set the approach distance of the stopper when deciding the absolute position basic point with the stopper method. After using stopper once, the tool returns with this distance, and then use stopper again. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) nrefp Near zero point + Set the positive direction width where t he near reference position signal is output. When set to "0", the value is the same as #2218 SV018(PIT). (Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E: 1000-fold) corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applied) #2058 nrefn Near zero point - Set the negative direction width where the near reference position signal is output. When set to "0", the value is the same as #2218 SV018(PIT). (Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100 -fold, E: 1000-fold) corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applied) #2059 zerbas Select zero point parameter and basic point Select which is to be the zero point coordinate position during absolute position initial setting. 0: Position where the axis was stopped. 1: Grid point just before stopper. SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio Set the gear ratio in the motor side when there is the gear between the servo motor's shaft and machine (ball screw, etc.). For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio. Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, th e electronic gears may overflow and an initial parameter error (servo ala rm 37) may occur. For linear servo system Set to "1". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 SV002 PC2 Machine side gear ratio Set the gear ratio in the machine side when there is the gear between the servo motor's shaft and machine (ball screw, etc.). For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio. Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, th e electronic gears may overflow and an initial parameter error (servo ala rm 37) may occur. For linear servo system Set to "1". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1 Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33". The higher the setting value is, the more accurately t he command can be followed, and the shorter the set- tling time in positioning gets, however, note that a bigger shock will be applied to the machine during accel- eration/deceleration. When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC). When using the OMR-FF control, set the servo rigidity against quadrant projection or cutting load, etc. For the tracking ability to the command, set by SV106(PGM). ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (rad/s) SV004 PGN2 Position loop gain 2 When performing the SHG control, set the value of "SV003 x 8/3" to "SV004". When not using the SHG control, set to "0". When using the OMR-FF control, set to "0". Related parameters: SV003, SV057 ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (rad/s) SV005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1 Set the speed loop gain. The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be, however, vi bration tends to occur. If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%. The value should be determined to the 70 to 80 % of the value at whic h the vibration stops. The value differs depending on servo motors. Aim at the standard value determined by the servo motor type and load inertia ratio to adjust. ---Setting range--- 1 to 30000 #2206 SV006 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2 Set the speed loop gain at the motor limitation s peed VLMT (maximum rotation speed x 1.15) with "VCS(SV029: Speed at the change of speed loop gain)". Use this to suppress noise at high speed rotation duri ng rapid traverse, etc. Then, the speed loop gain de- creases at faster speed than the setting va lue of VCS. When not using, set to "0". Gain VGN1 VGN2 0 VCS VLMT Speed (Overspeed detection speed) ---Setting range--- -1000 to 30000 #2207 SV007 VIL Speed loop delay compensation Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-close d loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. The speed loop delay compensation method can be selected with SV027/bit1,0. Normally, use "Changeover type 2". Changeover type 2 co ntrols the occurrence of overshooting by lowering the speed loop lead compensation after the position droop gets 0. When setting this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset (SV032). ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #2208 SV008 VIA Speed loop lead compensation Set the gain of the speed loop integral control. Standard setting: 1364 Standard setting in the SHG control: 1900 Adjust the value by increasing/decr easing this by about 100 at a time. Raise this value to improve contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position droop does not stabilize (when the vibration of 10 to 20Hz occurs). ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 #2209 SV009 IQA Current loop q axis lead compensation Set the fixed value of each motor. Set the standard value for each motor de scribed in the standard parameter list. ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 #2210 SV010 IDA Current loop d axis lead compensation Set the fixed value of each motor. Set the standard value for each motor de scribed in the standard parameter list. ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 #2211 SV011 IQG Current loop q axis gain Set the fixed value of each motor. Set the standard value for each motor de scribed in the standard parameter list. ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 #2212 SV012 IDG Current loop d axis gain Set the fixed value of each motor. Set the standard value for each motor de scribed in the standard parameter list. ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 SV013 ILMT Current limit value Set the current (torque) limit value in a normal operation. This is a limit value in forward run and reverse ru n (for linear motors: forward and reverse direction). When the standard setting value is "800", the maximu m torque is determined by the specification of the mo- tor. Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall current. ---Setting range--- 0 - 999 (Stall current %) SV014 ILMTsp Current limit value in special control Set the current (torque) limit value in a special operation (absolute position initial setting, stopper control and etc.). This is a limit value in forward and reverse directions. Set to "800" when not using. Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall current. ---Setting range--- 0 - 999 (Stall current %) However, when SV084/bitB=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (Stall current 0.01%). SV015 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain When a relative error in syn chronous control is too large, set this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The standard setting is "0". The standard setting in the SHG control is "100". To adjust a relative e rror in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 at a time. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (%) SV016 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1 Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, back- lash, etc.) at quadrant change is too large. This se ts the compensation torque at quadrant change (when an axis feed direction is reversed) by the proportion (%) to the stall torque. Whether to enable the lost motion compensation and the method can be set with other parameters. Type 2: When SV027/bit9, 8=10 (Compatible with obsolete type) Set the type 2 method compensation torque. The standard setting is double the friction torque. Related parameters: SV027/bit9,8, SV0 33/bitF, SV039, SV040, SV041, SV082/bit2 Type 3: When SV082/bit1=1 Set the compensation torque equivalent of dynamic friction amount of the type 3 method compensation amount. The standard setting is dou ble the dynamic friction torque. Related parameters: SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV085, SV086 To vary compensation amount according to the direction. When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of SV016 (LMC1) in both +/-directions. If you wish to change the compensation amount depend ing on the command direction, set this and SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: - direction. However, t he directions may be opposite depending on other set- tings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the dire ction of the command. ---Setting range--- -1 to 200 (Stall current %) Note that when SV082/bit2 is "1 ", the setting range is between -1 and 20000 (Stall current 0.01%). #2217 SV017 SPEC1 Servo specification 1 Select the servo specifications. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. mdir dfbx seqh vfb sdir abs mp drvup spm bit F-C : spm Motor series selection 0: Not used 1: 200V HG motor (Standard) 2: Not used 3: 400V HG-H, HQ-H motor (Standard) 6: 200V LM-F linear motor 7: 200V direct-drive motor 8: 400V LM-F linear motor 9: 400V direct-drive motor bit B : Not used. Set to "0". bit A : drvup Combined drive unit: 0: Normal setting (Combined drive unit: normal) 1: Combined drive unit: one upgrade bit 9 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 8 : mp MPI scale pole number setting 0: 360 poles 1: 720 poles bit 7 : abs Position control These parameters are set automatically by the NC system. 0: Incremental 1: Absolute position control bit 6-5 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 4 : sdir Sub side encoder feedback Set the machine side encoder's installation polarity. 0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity bit 3 : vfb Speed feedback filter 0: Stop 1: Start (4500Hz) bit 2 : seqh Ready on sequence 0: Normal 1: High-speed bit 1 : dfbx Dual feedback control Control the position FB signal in full closed control by the combination of a motor side encoder and machine side encoder. 0: Stop 1: Start Related parameters: SV051, SV052 bit 0 : mdir Machine side encoder feedback (for Linear/direct-drive motor) Set the encoder installation polarity in t he linear servo and direct-drive motor control. 0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity SV018 PIT Ball screw pitch/Magnetic pole pitch For servo motor: Set the ball screw pitch. For the rotary axis, set to "360". For direct-drive motor Set to "360". For linear motor Set the ball screw pitch. (For LM-F series, set to "48") ---Setting range--- For general motor: 1 to 32767 (mm/rev) - For linear motor 1 to 32767 (mm) SV019 RNG1 Sub side encoder resolution For semi-closed loop control Set the same value as SV020. For full-closed loop control Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. For direct-drive motor Set the same value as SV020. For 1000 pulse unit resolution encoder, set the number of pulses in SV019 in increments of 1000 pulse (kp). The value must be input in increments of 10K pul ses (the 1st digit of the setting value is "0"). In this case, make sure to set "0" to SV117. For high-accuracy binary resolution encoder, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SV117 (high-order) and SV019 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit. SV117 = number of pulses / 65536 (when =0, set "-1" to SV117) SV019 = the remainder of number of "pulses / 65536" ---Setting range--- When SV117 = 0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp) When SV117 ≠ 0, the setting range is from 0 to 65535 (p) SV020 RNG2 Main side encoder resolution Normally, set to "0". For linear motor Set the number of pulses of the enc oder per magnetic pole pitch with SV118. For direct-drive motor Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor side encoder. For 1000 pulse unit resolution encoder, set the number of pulses to SV020 in increments of 1000 pulse(kp). The value must be input in increments of 10K pul ses (the 1st digit of the setting value is "0"). In this case, make sure to set SV1 18 to "0". For high-accuracy binary resolution encoder, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SV118 (high-order) and SV020 (low-order) in pulse(p) unit. SV118 = number of pulses / 65536 (when =0, set "-1" to SV118) SV019 = the remainder of "number of pulses / 65536" ---Setting range--- When SV118 = 0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp) When SV118 ≠ 0, the setting range is from 0 to 65535 (p) SV021 OLT Overload detection time constant Normally, set to "60". (For Mi tsubishi Electric adjustment.) Related parameters: SV022 ---Setting range--- 1 to 999 (s) #2222 SV022 OLL Overload detection level Set the "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) current detection level as percentage to the stall current. Normally set this parameter to "150". (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment.) Related parameters: SV021 ---Setting range--- 110 to 500 (Stall current %) #2223 SV023 OD1 Excessive error detection width during servo ON Set the excessive error detection width in servo ON. When set to "0", the excessive error alarm detection will be ignored, so do not set to "0". <Standard setting value> OD1=OD2= (Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]) / (60×PGN1) / 2 [mm] Related parameters: SV026 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm) However, when SV084/bitC=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 ( μ m). #2224 SV024 INP In-positi on detection width Set the in-position detection width. Set the positioning accuracy required for the machine. The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy will be. Howe ver the cycle time (settling time) becomes longer. The standard setting value is "50". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 ( μ m) #2225 SV025 MTYP Motor/Encoder type Set the position encoder type, speed encoder type and motor type. The setting value is a four-digit hex (HEX). HEX- 4 3 2 1 mtyp ent pen bit F-C: pen(HEX-4) Position encoder Semi-closed loop control by general motor pen=2 Full-closed loop control by general motor - Ball screw end encoder (OSA405ET2AS, OSA676ET2AS) pen=6 - For serial signal output rotary scale (including MDS-EX-HR) pen=6 - For rectangular wave signal output linear scale pen=8 - For serial signal output linear scale (including MDS-EX-HR and MPI scale) pen=A - For speed command synchronization control Primary axis pen=A Secondary axis pen=D For linear motor pen=A For direct-drive motor pen=2 bit B-8: ent(HEX-3) Speed encoder For general motor: ent=2 For linear motor: ent=A For direct-drive motor: ent=2 bit 7-0: mtyp(HEX-2,1) Motor type Set the motor type. Set this with SV017/bitF-C. For SV017/bitF-C = 1 (200V standard motor series) HG75 : 41h HG123 : 64h HG105 : 42h HG142 : 65h HG54 : 43h HG46 : BAh HG104 : 44h HG56 : BBh HG154 : 45h 4Fh(Note 1) HG96 : BCh HG224 : 46h HG204 : 47h HG354 : 48h HG223 : 66h HG303 : 68h HG453 : 49h HG603 : 69h HG702 : 6Ah HG703 : 4Ah HG903 : 4Bh HG1103 : 4Ch HG302 : 67h (Note 1) When MDS-E-V3 is connected For SV017/bitF-C = 3 (400V standard motor series) HG-H75 : 41h HQ-H903 : 58h HG-H105 : 42h HQ-H1103 : 59h HG-H54 : 43h HG-H104 : 44h HG-H154 : 45h HG-H224 : 46h HG-H204 : 47h HG-H354 : 48h HG-H453 : 49h HG-H703 : 4Ah HG-H903 : 4Bh HG-H1502 : 4Dh For linear motor and direct-drive motor, follow the settings stated in respective materials. SV026 OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF Set the excessive error detection width during servo OFF. When set to "0", the excessive error alarm det ection will be ignored, so do not set to "0". <Standard setting value> OD1=OD2= (Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]) / (60×PGN1) / 2 [mm] Related parameters: SV023 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm) However, when SV084/bitC=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 ( μ m). #2227 SV027 SSF1 Servo function 1 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. bit F : Not used. Set to "0". bit E : zrn2 Set to "1". (Fixed) bit D : Not used. Set to "0". bit C : Not used. Set to "0". bit B-A : ovs Overshooting compensation Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. bitB,A= 00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: Type 3 Set the compensation amount in SV031(OVS1) and SV042(OVS2). Related parameters: SV0 31, SV042, SV034/bitF-C bit 9-8 : lmc Lost mo tion compensation type Set this parameter when the protrusion at quadrant change is too large. Type 2 has an obsolete type compatible control. bit9,8= 00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Type 2 11: Setting prohibited Set the compensation amount in SV016(LMC1) and SV041(LMC2). (Note) When "SV082/bit1=1", the lost motion compensation type 3 will be selected regardless of this setting. bit 7 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 6 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 5-4 : vfct Jitter compensation pulse number Suppress vibration by machine backlash when axis stops. bit5,4= 00: Disable 01: 1 pulse 10: 2 pulse 11: 3 pulses bit 3 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 2 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 1-0 : vcnt Speed loop delay compensation changeover type selection Normally, use "Changeover type 2". bit1,0= 00: Disable 01: Changeover type 1 10: Changeover type 2 11: Setting prohibited Related parameters: SV007 SV028 MSFT Magnetic pole shift amount (for linear/direct-drive mo- tor) Set this parameter to adjust the motor magnetic pole position and encoder's installation phase when using linear motors or di rect-drive motors. During the DC excitation of the initial setup (SV034/bit4=1), set the same value displayed in "AFLT gain" on the NC monitor screen. Related parameters: SV034 /bit4, SV061, SV062, SV063 For general motor: Not used. Set to "0". ---Setting range--- -18000 to 18000 (electrical angle 0.01°) SV029 VCS Speed at the change of speed loop gain Noise at high speed rotation including rapid traverse can be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain at high speeds. Set the speed at which the speed loop ga in changes. Use this with SV006 (VGN2). When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (r/min) SV030 IVC Voltage non-sensitive band compensation When 100% is set, the voltage reduction amount equiva lent to the logical non-energization in the PWM con- trol will be compensated. When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed. Adjust in increments of 10% fr om the default value of 100%. If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (%) SV031 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1 This compensates the motor torque when overshooting o ccurs during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation (SV027/bitB,A) is selected. Type 3 SV027/bitB,A=11 Set the compensation amount based on the motor sta ll current. Observing positioning droop waveform, increase in increments of 1% and find t he value where overshooting does not occur. To vary compensation amount depending on the direction. When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", change the SV031 (OVS1) value in both of the +/- directions to compensate. To vary the compensation amount depending on th e command direction, set this and SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, t he directions may be opposite depending on other set- tings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the dire ction of the command. Related parameters: SV0 27/bitB,A, SV034/bitF-C, SV042, SV082/bit2 ---Setting range--- -1 to 100 (Stall current %) Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Stall current 0.01%) when SV082/bit2 is "1". #2232 SV032 TOF Torque offset Set the unbalance torque on vertical axis and inclined axis. When the vertical axis pull up function is enabled, the pull up compensation direction is determined by this parameter's sign. When set to "0", and the pull up func tion is enabled (SV033/bitE=1), the alarm "S02 2233 Initial parameter error" occurs. This can be used for speed loop delay com pensation and collision detection function. To use load inertia estimation function (drive monitor display), set this parameter, friction torque (SV045) and load inertia display enabling flag(SV035/bitF). Related parameters: SV007, SV033/bitE, SV059 ---Setting range--- -100 to 100 (Stall current %) SV033 SSF2 Servo function 2 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. nfd1 fhz3 nfd2 rps zup lmc2a bit F : lmc2a Lost motion compensation 2 timing 0: Normal 1: Change bit E : zup Vertical axis pull up function 0: Stop 1: Enable Related parameters: SV032, SV095 bit D : rps Safely limited speed setting increment Change the setting units of the specifi ed speed signal output speed (SV073). 0: mm/min 1: 100mm/min Related parameters: SV073 bit C-8 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 7-5 : nfd2 Depth of Notch filter 2 Set the depth of Notch filter 2 (SV046). bit7,6,5= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 4 : fhz3 Notch filter 3 0: Stop 1: Start (1125Hz) bit 3-1 : nfd1 Depth of Notch filter 1 Set the depth of Notch filter 1 (SV038). bit3,2,1= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". #2234 SV034 SSF3 Servo function 3 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. has2 mohn dcd linN ovsn bit F-C: ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band of the model positi on droop overshooting amount in increments of 2 μ m. In the feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band of the model position droop and ignore the overshoot- ing of the model. 0 : 0 μ m, 1: 2 μ m, 2: 4 μ m,---, E : 28 μ m, F: 30 μ m bit B-8 : linN The number of parallel connections when using linear motors (for linear) Set to"2" to perform 1 amplifier 2 motor control by linear servo. bit 7-5 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 4 : dcd (linea r/direct-drive motor) 0: Normal setting 1: DC excitation mode Related parameters: SV061, SV062, SV063 bit 3 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 2 : mohn Thermistor temperature detection (linear/di rect-drive motor) 0: Normal setting 1: Disable bit 1 : has HAS control This stabilizes the spee d overshooting by torque saturation phenomenon. 0: Normal setting 1: Enable Related parameters: SV084/bitF bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". SV035 SSF4 Servo function 4 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. clof stod ckab cltq clstp cl2n clG1 clt bit F: clt Inertia ratio display 0: Setting for normal use 1: Display the total inertia ratio estimated at accelera tion/deceleration at the iner tia ratio on the servo monitor screen To display it on the screen, set an imbalance to rque and friction torque to both SV032 and SV045 and repeat acceleration/deceleration operations for several times. bit E-C: clG1 G1 Collision detection level Set the collision detection level in the collision detection method 1 during cutting feed (G1) in multiples of that of rapid traverse (G0). When set to "0", detection of collision detection me thod 1 during cutting feed will be ignored. G1 Collision detection level = G0 collision detection level (SV060) × clG1 bit B: cl2n Collision detection method 2 0: Enable 1: Disable bit A: clstp Collision detectio n method 1 disabled during stop 0: Collision detection method 1 enabled during stop 1: Collision detection method 1 disabled during stop bit 9-8: cltq Retract torque in collision detection Set the retract torque in collision detection using the ratio of motor's maximum torque. bit9,8= 00: 100% 01: 90% 10: 80% (Standard) 11: 70% bit 7: ckab No signal detection 2 Set this to use rectangular wave output linear scale. This enables the detection of No signal 2 (alarm 21). 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 6: stod Alarm 4D-2 detection disabled during deceleration and stop 0: Normal 1: Alarm 4D-2 detect ion disabled during deceleration and stop bit 5-4: Not used. Set to "0". bit 3: clof Collision detection estimated disturbance torque offset 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 2-0: Not used. Set to "0". #2236 SV036 PTYP Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type MDS-E/EH Series: Power supply type When connecting a power supply unit, se t a code for each power supply unit. ptyp rtyp amp bit F-C : amp Set the power backup function to be used. No function used : 0 Deceleration and stop function at power failure : 8 Retraction function at power failure : C bit B-8 : rtyp Not used. Set to "0". bit 7-0 : ptyp External emergency stop setting When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled" Power supply unit is not connected : 00 MDS-E-CV-37 / MDS-EH-CV-37 : 04 MDS-E-CV-75 / MDS-EH-CV-75 : 08 MDS-E-CV-110 / MDS-EH-CV-110 : 11 MDS-E-CV-185 / MDS-EH-CV-185 : 19 MDS-E-CV-300 / MDS-EH-CV-300 : 30 MDS-E-CV-370 / MDS-EH-CV-370 : 37 MDS-E-CV-450 / MDS-EH-CV-450 : 45 MDS-E-CV-550 / MDS-EH-CV-550 : 55 MDS-EH-CV-750 : 75 When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled" (Note) Set the power supply rotary switch to "4". Power supply unit is not connected : 00 MDS-E-CV-37 / MDS-EH-CV-37 : 44 MDS-E-CV-75 / MDS-EH-CV-75 : 48 MDS-E-CV-110 / MDS-EH-CV-110 : 51 MDS-E-CV-185 / MDS-EH-CV-185 : 59 MDS-E-CV-300 / MDS-EH-CV-300 : 70 MDS-E-CV-370 / MDS-EH-CV-370 : 77 MDS-E-CV-450 / MDS-EH-CV-450 : 85 MDS-E-CV-550 / MDS-EH-CV-550 : 95 MDS-EH-CV-750 : B5 MDS-EM/EMH Series Not used. Set to "0000". External emergency stop power supply type is set by spindle parameter (SP032). MDS-EJ/EJH Series: Regenerative resistor type Set the regenerative resistor type. 00 0 0 emgx rtyp amp bit F-8 : amp(bit F-C) / rtyp(bit B-8) Resistor built-in drive unit : 10 Setting prohibited : 11 MR-RB032 : 12 MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK : 13 MR-RB32 or GZG200W120OHMK 3 un its connected in parallel : 14 MR-RB30 or GZG200W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 15 MR-RB50 or GZG300W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 16 MR-RB31 or GZG200W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 17 MR-RB51 or GZG300W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 18 Setting prohibited : 19-1F Setting prohibited : 20-23 FCUA-RB22 : 24 FCUA-RB37 : 25 FCUA-RB55 : 26 FCUA-RB75/2 : 27 Setting prohibited : 28 R-UNIT2 : 29 Setting prohibited : 2A-2C FCUA-RB75/2 2 units connected in parallel : 2D FCUA-RB55 2 units connected in parallel : 2E Setting prohibited : 2F MR-RB1H-4 : 33 MR-RB3M-4 : 34 MR-RB3G-4 : 35 MR-RB5G-4 : 36 bit 7-4 : emgx External emergency stop function Set the external emergency stop function. 0: Disable 4: Enable bit 3-0 : Not used. Set to "0". SV037 JL Load inertia scale Set the motor axis conversion total load inertia includ ing motor itself in proport ion to the motor inertia. SV037(JL)=(Jm+Jl)/Jm×100 Jm: Motor inertia Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia For linear motor, set the gross mass of the moving sections in kg unit. <<Drive monitor load inertia ratio display>> Set SV035/bitF=1 and imbalance torque and friction tor que to both SV032 and SV 045, and then repeat ac- celeration/deceleration for several times. ---Setting range--- For general motor: 0 to 5000 (%) For linear motor 0 to 5000 (kg) #2238 SV038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Normally, do not set 80 or less.) Set to "0" when not using. Related parameters: SV033/bit3-1, SV115 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) #2239 SV039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing Set this when the timing of lost motion compensation type 2 does not match. Adjust increments of 10 at a time. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (ms) #2240 SV040 LMCT Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control. When "0" is set, 2 μ m is the actual value to be set. Adjust increments of 1 μ m. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 ( μ m) #2241 SV041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2 Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to vary the lost motion compensation amount depending on the command directions. Normally, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -1 to 200 (Stall current %) Note that when SV082/bit2 is "1", the setting range is between -1 and 20000 (Stall current 0.01%). #2242 SV042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2 Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to va ry the overshooting compensation amount depending on the command directions. Normally, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -1 to 100 (Stall current %) Note that when SV082/bit2 is "1", the setting range is between -1 and 10000 (Stall current 0.01%). #2243 SV043 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency Set the disturbance observer filter band. Normally, set to "100". Setting values of 49 or less is equal to "0" setting. To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2). When disturbance observer related par ameters are changed, lost motion compensation needs to be read- justed. Set to "0" when not using. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (rad/s) #2244 SV044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100 to 300". To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV043 (OBS1). When disturbance observer related par ameters are changed, lost motion compensation needs to be read- justed. Set to "0" when not using. ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (%) #2245 SV045 TRUB Friction torque Set the frictional torque when using the collision detection function. To use load inertia estimation function (drive monitor di splay), set this parameter, imbalance torque (SV032) and load inertia display enabling flag (SV035/bitF). ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (Stall current %) SV046 FHz2 Notch filter frequency 2 Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Normally, do not set 80 or less.) Set to "0" when not using. Related parameters: SV033/bit7-5, SV115 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) SV047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain Set the inductive voltage compensation ga in. Standard setting value is "100". If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) SV048 EMGrt Vertical axi s drop prevention time Input the time required to prevent the vertical axis from dropping by delaying READY OFF until the brake works at an emergency stop. Increase in increments of 100ms at a time, find and set the value where the axis does not drop. When using a motor with a break of HG(-H) Series and HQ-H Series, set to "200ms" as a standard. When the pull up function is enabled (SV033/bitE=1) , the pull up is established during the drop prevention time. (Note) When not using the spindle dr ive unit, use the servo ax is that controls vertical axis drop prevention control to control the power supply (connect with CN4). Related parameters: SV0 33/bitE, SV055, SV056 ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) When set to "0", and the pull up function is enabled (SV033/bitE=1), the alarm "S02 2233 Initial param- eter error" occurs. SV049 PGN1sp Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control Set the position loop gain during spindle synchronization control (synchronous tapping and synchronization control with spindle C-axis). Set the same value as that of the position loop gain for spindle synchronous tapping control. When performing the SHG control, set this parameter with SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp). When changing the value, change the va lue of "#2017 tap_g Axis servo gain". ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (rad/s) SV050 PGN2sp Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control When using SHG control during spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping and synchronization con- trol with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp). Make sure to set the value 8/3 times that of SV049. When not using the SHG control, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (rad/s) SV051 DFBT Dual feedback control time constant Set the control time cons tant in dual feed back. When "0" is set, it operates at 1ms. The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to th e semi-closed control, so the limit of the position loop gain will be raised. For linear servo/direct-drive motor system Not used. Set to "0". Related parameters: SV017/bit1, SV052 ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #2252 SV052 DFBN Dual feedback control non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control. Normally, set to "0". For linear servo/direct -drive motor system Not used. Set to "0". Related parameters: SV017/bit1, SV052 ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 ( μ m) #2253 SV053 OD3 Excessive error detection width in special control Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON in a special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper control and etc.). When "0" is set, excessive error detection will not be performed when servo ON during a special control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm) However, when SV084/bitC=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 ( μ m). #2254 SV054 ORE Overrun detection width in closed loop control Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control. When the gap between the motor side encoder and the linear scale (machine side encoder) exceeds the val- ue set by this parameter, it will be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43" will be detected. When "-1" is set, if the differential velocity betw een the motor side encoder and the machine side encoder exceeds the 30% of the maximum motor speed, it will be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43" will be detected. When "0" is set, overrun will be detected with a 2mm width. For linear servo/direct -drive motor system Not used. Set to "0". ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 (mm) However, when SV084/bitD=1, the setting range is from -1 to 32767 ( μ m). #2255 SV055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop Set the time required between an emergency stop and forced READY OFF. Set the maximum value "+ 100ms" of the SV056 setting va lue of the servo drive unit electrified by the same power supply unit. When executing the vertical axis drop prevention, the gate off will be delayed for the length of time set at SV048 even when SV055's is smaller than that of SV048. Related parameters: SV048, SV056 ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) #2256 SV056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop Set the time constant used for the de celeration control at emergency stop. Set the time required to stop from rapid traverse rate (rapid). The standard setting value is EMGt ≤ G0tL×0.9. However, note that the standard setting value differs from the above-mentioned value when the setting value of "#2003:smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes bi t 3-0:Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type" is 8 or F. Refer to Instruction Ma nual of the drive unit (section "5.5.1 Deceleration Control") for details. Related parameters: SV048, SV055 ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) #2257 SV057 SHGC SHG control gain When performing the SHG control, set to SV003(PGN1)×6. When not using the SHG control, set to "0". When using the OMR-FF control, set to "0". Related parameters: SV003, SV004 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1200 (rad/s) SV058 SHGCsp SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control When using SHG control during spindle synchronizati on control (synchronous tapping and synchronous con- trol with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (PGN2sp). Make sure to set the val ue 6 times that of SV049. When not using the SHG control, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1200 (rad/s) SV059 TCNV Collision detection torque estimated gain Set the torque estimated gain when using the collision detection function. The standard setting value is the same as the load iner tia ratio (SV037 setting value) including motor inertia. Set to "0" when not using the collision detection function. Related parameters: SV032, SV035 /bitF-8, SV037, SV045, SV060 <<Drive monitor load inertia ratio display>> Set SV035/bitF=1 and imbalance torque and friction tor que to both SV032 and SV 045, and then repeat ac- celeration/deceleration for several times. ---Setting range--- For general motor: 0 to 5000 (%) For linear motor: 0 to 5000 (kg) SV060 TLMT Collision detection level When using the collision detection function, set t he collision detection level at the G0 feeding. When "0" is set, none of the collision detection function will work. Related parameters: SV032, SV035 /bitF-8, SV037, SV045, SV059 ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Stall current %) SV061 DA1NO D/A output ch1 data No. / Initial DC excitation level Input the data number you wish to output to the D/A output channel 1. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" to the axis that the data will not be output. When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): Use this when the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit 4=1) to adjust the initia l magnetic pole position (when measuring the magnetic pole shift amoun t) for linear motor and direct-drive motor. Set the initial excitation level in DC excitation control. Set 10% as standard. Related parameters: SV062, SV063 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 100 (Stall current %) SV062 DA2NO D/A output ch2 data No. / Final DC excitation level Input the data number you wish to output to the D/A output channel 2. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" to the axis that the data will not be output. When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): Use this when the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit 4=1) to adjust the initia l magnetic pole position (when measuring the magnetic pole shift amoun t) for linear motor and direct-drive motor. Set the final excitation leve l in DC excitation control. Set 10% as standard. When the magnetic pole shift amount measurement value is unsteady, adjust t he value in increments of 5%. Related parameters: SV061, SV063 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 100 (Stall current %) #2263 SV063 DA1MPY D/A output ch1 output scale / Initial DC excitation time Set output scale of the D/A output channel 1 in increment of 1/100. When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set. When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): Use this when the DC excitation is running (SV034/bi t4=1) to adjust the initial magnetic pole position (when measuring the magnetic pole shift amount) for linear motor and direct-drive motor. Set the initial excitation time in DC excitation control. Set 1000ms as standard. When the magnetic pole shift amount measurement val ue is unsteady, adjust the value in increments of 500ms. Related parameters: SV061, SV062 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold) When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 10000 (ms) #2264 SV064 DA2MPY D/A output ch2 output scale Set output scale of the D/A output channel 2 in increment of 1/100. When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold) #2265 SV065 TLC Machine end compensation gain The shape of the machine end is compensated by compensating the spring effect from the machine end to the motor end. Set the machine end compensation gain. Measure the error amount by roundness measurement and esti- mate the setting value by the following formula. Compensation amount ( μ m) = Command speed F(mm/min)2 * SV065 / (Radius R(mm) * SV003 * 16,200,000) Set to "0" when not using. ---Setting range--- -30000 to 30000 (Acceleration ratio 0.1%) #2266-2272 SV066 - SV072 This parameter is set auto matically by the NC system. #2273 SV073 FEEDout Specified speed output speed Set the specified speed. Also set SV082/bit9,8 to output digital signal. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm/min) However, when SV033/bitD=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (100mm/min). (Only for MDS-E/EH and MDS-EM/EMH) #2274-2280 SV074 - SV080 This parameter is set auto matically by the NC system. SV081 SPEC2 Servo specification 2 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. absc szchk npg bit F-A: Not used. Set to "0". bit 9: npg Earth fault detection 0: Disable 1: Enable (standard) Set "0" and it is constantly "Enable" for MDS-EJ/EJH Series. bit 8: Not used. Set to "0". bit 7: szchk Distance-coded reference scale reference mark 0: Check at 4 points (standard) 1: Check at 3 points bit 6-4: Not used. Set to "0". bit 3: absc Distance-coded reference scale 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 2-0: Not used. Set to "0". #2282 SV082 SSF5 Servo function 5 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. lmc3 ccu dos2 dos3 bit F-C: Not used. Set to "0". bit B-A: dos3 Digital si gnal output 3 selection bitB,A= 00: Disable 01: Setting prohibited 10: Contactor control signal output (For MDS-EJ/EJH) 11: Setting prohibited bit 9-8: dos2 Digital signal output 2 selection bit9,8= 00: Disable 01: Specified speed output 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited bit 7-3: Not used. Set to "0". bit 2: ccu Lost motion overshoot compensation compensation amount setting increment 0: Stall current % 1: Stall current 0.01% bit 1: lmc3 Lost motion compensation type 3 Set this when protrusion at a quadrant change is too big. 0: Stop 1: Start Related parameters: SV0 16, SV041, SV085, SV086 bit 0: Not used. Set to "0". SV083 SSF6 Servo function 6 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. nfd4 nfd5 bit F-8 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 7-5 : nfd5 Depth of Notch filter 5 Set the depth of Notch filter 5 (SV088). bit7,6,5= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 4 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 3-1 : nfd4 Depth of Notch filter 4 Set the depth of Notch filter 4 (SV087). bit3,2,1= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". #2284 SV084 SSF7 Servo function 7 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. irms ilm2u odu oru h2c bit F : h2c HAS control cancel amount 0: 1/4 (standard) 1: 1/2 Related parameters: SV034/bit1 bit E : Not used. Set to "0". bit D : oru Overrun detection width unit 0: mm (normal setting) 1: μ m bit C : odu Excessive error detection width unit 0: mm (normal setting) 1: μ m bit B : ilm2u Current limit value ( SV014) in special control setting unit 0: Stall current % (normal setting) 1: Stall current 0.01% bit A-1 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 0 : irms Moto r current display 0: Motor q axis current display (normal) 1: Motor effe ctive current display #2285 SV085 LMCk Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant Set the machine system's spring c onstant when select ing lost motion co mpensation type 3. When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SV016, SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV086 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01%/ μ m) #2286 SV086 LMCc Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient Set the machine system's viscous coefficient w hen selecting lost moti on compensation type 3. When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SV016, SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV086 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01%•s/mm) #2287 SV087 FHz4 Notch filter frequency 4 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Normally, do not set 80 or less.) Set to "0" when not using. Related parameters: SV083/bit3-1, SV115 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) SV088 FHz5 Notch filter frequency 5 Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Normally, do not set 80 or less.) Set to "0" when not using. Related parameters: SV083/bit7-5, SV115 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) SV089 Not used. Set to "0". SV090 Not used. Set to "0". SV091 LMC4G Lost motion compensation 4 gain Use this with LMC compensation type 3. As the delay in path tracking is monitored and compensated, the delay in path tracking will be minimized even if mach ine friction amount changes by aging. Use the lost mo- tion compensation amount (SV016) * 5 (10% of the dynami c friction torque) as the target. The higher the set- ting value is, the more accurate the quadrant change be; however, the more likely vibrations occur. ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (Stall current 0.01%) SV092 Not used. Set to "0". SV093 Not used. Set to "0". SV094 MPV Magnetic pole position error detection speed The magnetic pole position detection function monito rs the command speed and motor speed at the position command stop and detects the magnetic pole position erro r alarm (3E) if any. Set the error detection level for the command speed and motor speed at the position command stop. Be aware when setting the parameter as the setting units for general motors and lin ear motors are different. <<For general motor>> When the command speed error detection level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position error (3E) is detected at 10r/min. Set "10" as standard. This detects the magnetic pole pos ition error (3E) when the motor rotation speed is 100r/min and more. <<For linear motor>> When the command motor speed level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position error (3E) is detected at 1mm/s. Set "10" as standard. This detects the magnetic pole position error (3E) when the motor speed is 10mm/s and more. ---Setting range--- 0 to 31999 <<For general motor>> Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ----------- Co mmand speed error dete ction level (10r/min) Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed error detection level (10r/min) <<For linear motor>> Ten-thousands digit, Th ousands digit ----------- Comm and speed error detect ion speed level (1mm/s) Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed error detection level (1mm/s) #2295 SV095 ZUPD Vertical axis pull up distance Set this parameter to adjust the pull up distance when the vertical axis pull up f unction is enabled. When the pull up function is enabled and this parameter is set to "0", for a rotary motor, 8/1000 of a rotation at the motor end is internally set as the pull up distance, and for a linear motor, 80[ μ m] is set. Related parameters: SV032 : The pull up direction is determined. When "0" is set, the alarm occurs. SV033/bitE : Start-up of the pull up function SV048 : Set the drop prevention time. When "0" is set, the alarm occurs. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 ( μ m) #2296-2305 SV096 - SV105 Not used. Set to "0". #2306 SV106 PGM OMR-FF scale model gain Set the scale model gain (position response) in OMR-FF control. Set the same value as SV003(PGN1). Increase the setting value to perform a high-speed mach ining such as a fine arc or to improve the path er- ror.Lower the value when vibration occurs during acceleration/deceleration. Set to "0" when not using OMR-FF control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (rad/s) #2307-2311 SV107 - SV111 Not used. Set to "0". #2312 SV112 IFF OMR-FF current feed forward gain Set the current feed forwar d rate in OMR-FF control. The standard setting is "10000". Setting value of "0" is equal to "10000(100%)" setting. Set to "0" when not using OMR-FF control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01%) #2313 SV113 SSF8 Servo function 8 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. omrffon nmerc sto bit F-9 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 8 : sto Dedicate d wiring STO function Set this parameter to use dedicated wiring STO function. 0: Dedicated wiring STO function unused 1: Dedicated wiring STO function used (Only for MDS-E/EH and MDS-EJ/EJH) bit 7 : nmerc Machine error compensation amount (Note) Do not turn ON the NC power supply with the setting as disable (set to "1"). The initial parameter error alarm is detected. 0: Enable (Normal setting) 1: Disable bit 0 : omrffon OMR-FF control enabled 0: Disable 1: Enable SV114 SSF9 Servo function 9 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. cse nohis bit F-9 : Set to "8" when HG46, 56, 96 motors are driven by MDS-E-V3. Set to "0" for other cases. bit 8 : nohis History of communication error alarm between NC and DRV (34, 36, 38, 39) 0: Enable 1: Disable bit 7 : cse Command speed monitoring function 0: Disable 1: Enable (Normal setting) bit 6-0 : Not used. Set to "0". #2315 SV115 SSF10 Servo function 10 Select the servo functions. A function is assigned to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. esn dfhz dsn ade1 ade2 ade4 ade5 dsl are bit F : are Notch filter5 all frequencies adapted When enabled, Notch filter5 all frequencies adaptive range is not limited re gardless of SV115/bit4,5 setting. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit E-C: dsl Notch filter frequency display Switch the "AFLT frequency" display on drive monito r screen to check every notch filter frequency. When the selected notch filter is not used, "0" is displayed. bitE,D,C= 000 : Estimated resonance frequency (Normal display) 001 : Notch filter 1 frequency 010 : Notch filter 2 frequency 011 : Notch filter 3 frequency (always displays 1125Hz) 100 : Notch filter 4 frequency 101 : Notch filter 5 frequency Other settings: setting prohibited bit B : ade5 Notch filter 5 / Adaptive follow-up function 0: Disable 1: Enable bit A : ade4 Notch filter 4 / Adaptive follow-up function 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 9 : ade2 Notch filter 2 / Adaptive follow -up function 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 8 : ade1 Notch filter 1 / Adaptive follow -up function 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 7-6 : dsn Estimated resonance frequency display holding time Set the estimated resonance frequency display holding time to the "AFLT frequency" display on drive monitor screen. bit7,6= 00: 4 [s] 01: 8 [s] 10: 12 [s] 11: 16 [s] bit 5-4 : dfhz Notch filter frequency range Set the adaptive range of the notch f ilter frequency. When the adaptive follow-up function is enabled and if the estimated resonance frequency exists in the set range, the notch filter will be adapted. Normally set this parameter to "00". bit5,4= 00: -10 to 10 [%] 01: -20 to 20 [%] 10: -30 to 30 [%] 11: -40 to 40 [%] bit 3-0 : esn Sensitivity of estimated resonance frequency Set the sensitivity of the estimated resonance frequency. Smaller setting value enab les to detect smaller vi- bration component, however, adaptive movement will be repeated freq uently. Normally set this parameter to "0". 0 : Normal setting (same sensitivity as A) 1 : Sensitivity high to F : Sensitivity low SV116 SSF11 Servo function 11 bit1: fctcfw Full-closed torsio n compensation function forward direction compensation enabled Compensate the torsion amount in the forward directio n with the full-closed torsion compensation function. When compensating the torsion amount in the reverse direction only, set to "0". 0: Stop 1: Start SV117 RNG1ex Expansion sub side encoder resolution For high-accuracy binary resolution encoder, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SV117 (high-order) and SV019 (low-order) by pulse (p). When SV117=0, the setting unit of SV019 is (kp). Refer to SV019 for details. Related parameters: SV019, SV020, SV118 ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 SV118 RNG2ex Expansion main side encoder resolution When using high-accuracy binary resolution encoder, se t the number of pulses to four bite data of SV118 (high-order) and SV020 (low-order) by pulse (p). When SV118=0, the setting unit of SV020 is (kp). Refer to SV020 for details. Related parameters: SV019, SV020, SV117 ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 SV119 - SV128 Not used. Set to "0". SV129 Kwf Synchronous control feed forward filter frequency Set the acceleration rate feed forward filter frequency in high-speed synchronous tapping control. The stan- dard setting is "600". Related parame ters: SV244 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (rad/s) SV130 RPITS Base reference mark interval Set the base reference mark intervals of distance-c oded reference scale. When the distance-coded refer- ence scale is not used, set to "0". The interval of basic reference mark (SV130) and auxili ary interval (SV131) must be in the specified relation- ship. Other settings cause the initial parameter error (alarm 37). Following is the specified relationship. The quotient of (SV130×1000) / SV131 must be 4 or more and leaves no remainder. Related parameters: SV081/bit7,3, SV1 31, SV134 to SV137 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm) #2331 SV131 DPITS Auxiliary reference mark interval Set the auxiliary interval of reference mark in t he distance-coded reference scale. When the distance-coded reference scale is not used, set to "0". The interval of basic reference mark (SV130) and auxiliary interval (SV131) must be in the specified relation- ship. Other settings cause the initial parameter error (alarm 37). Following is the specified relationship. The quotient of (SV130×1000) / SV131 must be 4 or more and leaves no remainder. Related parameters: SV081/bit7,3, SV130, SV134 to SV137 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 ( μ m) #2332 SV132 Not used. Set to "0". #2333 SV133 Not used. Set to "0". #2334 SV134 RRn0 Distance-coded reference check / revolution counter Set this parameter to operate distance-coded referenc e check when using distance-coded reference scale. During the distance-coded reference check initial setu p (SV137:RAER=-1), set the following items on the NC drive monitor screen after the distance-coded refere nce check initial setup warning A3 turns OFF. SV134=Rn, SV135=Pn, SV136=MPOS When reference point is set, the warning A3 turns OFF. To enable the distance-coded refe rence check function, SV081/bit3=1s etting and a battery option are need- ed. Related parameters: SV081/bit3 ,7, SV130, SV131, SV134 to SV137 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 #2335 SV135 RPn0H Distance-coded reference check /position within one rotation High Set this parameter to operate distance-coded referenc e check when using distance-coded reference scale. During the distance-coded reference check initial setu p (SV137:RAER=-1), set the following items on the NC drive monitor screen after the distance-coded refere nce check initial setup warning A3 turns OFF. SV134=Rn, SV135=Pn, SV136=MPOS When reference point is set, the warning A3 turns OFF. To enable the distance-coded refe rence check function, SV081/bit3=1s etting and a battery option are need- ed. Related parameters: SV081/bit3 ,7, SV130, SV131, SV134 to SV137 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 #2336 SV136 RPn0L Distance-coded reference check / position within one rotation Low Set this parameter to operate distance-coded referenc e check when using distance-coded reference scale. During the distance-coded reference check initial setu p (SV137:RAER=-1), set the following items on the NC drive monitor screen after the distance-coded refere nce check initial setup warning A3 turns OFF. SV134=Rn, SV135=Pn, SV136=MPOS When reference point is set, the warning A3 turns OFF. To enable the distance-coded refe rence check function, SV081/bit3=1s etting and a battery option are need- ed. Related parameters: SV081/bit3 ,7, SV130, SV131, SV134 to SV137 ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 SV137 RAER Distance-coded reference check allowable width For the distance-coded reference check function when using distance-coded reference scale, set the allow- able gap from the reference point position data calcul ated by the main side encoder. When the gap exceeds the allowable range, reference point created by dist ance-code is judged as wrong and detects alarm 42. The standard setting value is "basic reference mark interval (SV130) / 4". SV137=0 setting carries out the same o peration as the stand ard setting value. SV137=-1 setting enables the distance-coded reference in itial set up mode and displays setting values of SV134 to SV136 on NC drive monitor. To enable the distance-coded reference check function , SV081/bit3=1setting and a battery option are need- ed. When SV137=32767, the distance-coded reference check function is disabled. Related parameters: SV081/bit3,7, SV130, SV131, SV134 to SV136 ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 (mm) SV138 - SV197 Not used. Set to "0". SV198 NSE No signal 2 special detection width Set the special detection width for the no signal 2 (alarm 21). This detects no signal 2 (alarm 21) when machine side feedback is not invoked even if the motor side encod- er feedback exceeds this setting in the rectangular wave signal output linear scale. When "0" is set, the detection will be performed with a 15 μ m width. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 ( μ m) SV199 RTGM Real-time tuning: maximum adaptive gain multiplier In case that machine resonance is induced when mountin g a workpiece, the speed loop gain is switched au- tomatically in response to inertia by setting the sp eed loop gain and workpiece inertia multiplier in advance. The speed loop gain SV199(RTGM) changes in response to the estimated inertia ratio SV200(RTJX) based on the speed loop gain SV005(VGN1) and the inertia multiplier SV037(JL) which were adjusted when no workpiece was mounted. When SV199 is set to "0", the adaptation of the speed loop gain will be disabled. Speed control gain multiplier [%] RTGM (SV199) VGN1 (SV005) 㻌㻌 JL Estimated inertia ratio [%] (SV037) 㻌 RTJX (SV200) Related parameters: SV005, SV037, SV200 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (%) #2400 SV200 RTJX Real-time tuning: maximum adaptive inertia ratio In case that machine resonance is induced when mountin g a workpiece, the speed loop gain is switched au- tomatically in response to inertia by setting the speed loop gain and workpiece inertia multiplier in advance. The speed loop gain SV199(RTGM) changes in response to the estimated inertia ratio SV200(RTJX) based on the speed loop gain SV005(VGN1) and the inertia multiplier SV037(JL) which were adjusted when no workpiece was mounted. When SV199 is set to "0", the adaptation of the speed loop gain will be disabled. Speed control gain multiplier [%] RTGM (SV199) VGN1 (SV005) 㻌㻌 JL Estimated inertia ratio [%] (SV037) 㻌 RTJX (SV200) Related parameters: SV005, SV037, SV199 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (%) #2401-2405 SV201 - SV205 Not used. Set to "0". #2406 SV206 FCTC Full-closed torsion compensation control torsion amount Set the compensation amo unt of full-closed torsion compensation function. Set the torsion amount between the motor-end position and the machine-end position right after the stop as a standard setting value. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01 μ m) #2407-2436 SV207 - SV236 Not used. Set to "0". #2437 SV237 TCF Torque command filter Set the filter for the torque command. The standard value is "3000" w hen using HG46, HG56, or HG96. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (rad/s) #2438-2443 SV238 - SV243 Not used. Set to "0". #2444 SV244 DUNIT Communication inte rpolation unit for communication among drive units Set the communication interpolation unit among drive units in high-speed synchronous tapping control. When set to "0", it will be regarded as 20 (0.05 μ m) is set. Related parameters: SV129 ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (1/ μ m) #2445-2456 SV245 - SV256 Not used. Set to "0". slimt1 Limit rotati on speed (Gear: 00) Set the spindle rotation speed for maximum motor speed when gear 00 is selected. Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output=10V during analog spindle control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) slimt2 Limit rotati on speed (Gear: 01) Set the spindle rotation speed for maximum motor speed when gear 01 is selected. Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output=10V during analog spindle control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) slimt3 Limit rotati on speed (Gear: 10) Set the spindle rotation speed for maximum motor speed when gear 10 is selected. Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output=10V during analog spindle control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) slimt4 Limit rotati on speed (Gear: 11) Set the spindle rotation speed for maximum motor speed when gear 11 is selected. Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output=10V during analog spindle control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) smax 1 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00) Set the maximum spindle rotation speed which is actually commanded when gear 00 is selected. Set this as smax1(#3005)<= slimit1(#3001). By comparing the S command value and the values of ge ar 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) smax 2 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 01) Set the maximum spindle rotation speed which is actually commanded when gear 01 is selected. Set this as smax2(#3006)<= slimit2 (#3002). By comparing the S command value and the values of ge ar 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) smax 3 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 10) Set the maximum spindle rotation speed which is actually commanded when gear 10 is selected. Set this as smax3(#3007)<= slimit3 (#3003). By comparing the S command value and the values of ge ar 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) smax 4 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 11) Set the maximum spindle rotation speed which is actually commanded when gear 11 is selected. Set this as smax4(#3008)<= slimit4 (#3004). By comparing the S command value and the values of ge ar 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) #3009 ssift 1 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 00) Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 00. (Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #3010 ssift 2 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 01) Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 01. (Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #3011 ssift 3 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 10) Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 10. (Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #3012 ssift 4 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 11) Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 11. (Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #3013 stap 1 Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (Gear: 00) Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in synchronous tapping mu lti-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 00 is selected. The inclination of linear accelerati on/deceleration control fo r 1st step is determined by the ratio of "stap1"(#3013) to "stapt1"(#3017). When the inclination is not set after 2nd step or it is hi gher than that of 1st step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 1st step for the rotation speed of "stap1" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3014 stap 2 Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (Gear: 01) Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in synchronous tapping mu lti-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 01 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/ deceleration control for 1st step is determined by the ratio of "stap2" (#3014) to "stapt2" (#3018). When the inclination is not set after 2nd step or it is hi gher than that of 1st step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 1st step for the rotation speed of "stap2" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3015 stap 3 Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (Gear: 10) Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in synchronous tapping mu lti-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 10 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/ deceleration control for 1st step is determined by the ratio of "stap3" (#3015) to "stapt3" (#3019). When the inclination is not set after 2nd step or it is hi gher than that of 1st step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 1st step for the rotation speed of "stap3" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) stap 4 Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (Gear: 11) Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd st ep in synchronous tapping multi-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 11 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration cont rol for 1st step is determined by the ratio of "stap4" (#3016) to "stapt4" (#3020). When the inclination is not set after 2nd step or it is hi gher than that of 1st step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same incl ination as the 1st step for the ro tation speed of "stap4" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) stapt 1 Synchronous tapping 1st step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 00) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 1st step linear acceleration/decelerat ion control when gear 00 is selected. (linear accele ration/deceleration pattern) ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) stapt 2 Synchronous tapping 1st step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 01) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 1st step linear acceleration/decelerat ion control when gear 01 is selected. (linear accele ration/deceleration pattern) ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) stapt 3 Synchronous tapping 1st step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 10) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 1st step linear acceleration/decelerat ion control when gear 10 is selected. (linear accele ration/deceleration pattern) ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) #3020 stapt 4 Synchronous tapping 1st step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 11) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 1st st ep linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 11 is selected. (linear accele ration/deceleration pattern) ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) e motor's maximum rotation speed is set for the limit rotation multiplying the gear ratio on the spindl e motor maximum rotation speed (SP026). is to be limited according to the machine specifications, SP026 ) ( r/min Spindle motor rotation speed 0 smax 1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax ( n ) slimt ( n ) S p indle rotation s p eed ( r/min ) ation/deceleration control parameter> steps in synchronous tapping control to carry out an optimal dle motor characteristics whose output torque steps down han that of 1st step, the acceleration/deceleration control is 10000 slimit1=10000 800 0 600 0 400 0 Spindle rotation speed [r/min] taps21=3000 2000 stap1=1500 0 stapt1=300 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 tapt21=900 0 Time [ms] tapt31=5000 eration/deceleration control parameter> set up to eight steps in spindle synchronization control to carry out an optimal ccordance with the spindle motor characteristics whose output torque steps down rther attenuate in output stepdown zone. s, the specification allows to set the time constant magnification and changeover rotation 10000 slimit1=10000 sptc7=9200 8000 sptc6=8200 sptc5=7200 6000 sptc4=6000 sptc3=4800 4000 sptc2=3000 Spindle rotation speed [r/min] 2000 sptc1=1000 0 spt=400 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Time [ms] 1200(=spt * spdiv1 = 400 * 3) 2000(=spt * spdiv2 = 400 * 5) 2800(=spt * spdiv3 = 400 * 7) 4000(=spt * spdiv4 = 400 * 10) 5600(=spt * spdiv5 = 400 * 14) 8000(=spt * spdiv6 = 400 * 20) 11200(=spt * spdiv7 = 400 * 28) Not used. Set to "0". sgear Encoder gear ratio Set the deceleration rate of the encoder to the spin dle when inputting ABZ pulse output encoder feedback to NC during analog spindle control. 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/4 3: 1/8 ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 #3023 smini Minimum rotation speed Set the minimum spindle speed. If an S command below this setting is issued, the spindle will rotate at the minimum speed set by this param- eter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #3024 sout Spindle connection interface Select the connection interfac e with the spindle drive unit. 0: No unit to connect 1: Digital optical (Mitsubishi spindle drive unit) 2-5: S-analog (Analog I/F spindle drive unit) 10: Pulse train (Analog I/F spindle drive unit) #3025 enc-on Spindle encoder Set the connection specifications of a spindle's encoder. 0: Without encoder feedback when using analog spindle and connecting to NC 1: With encoder feedback when using analog spindle and connecting to NC 2: Mitsubishi spindle drive unit #3026 cs_ori Selection of winding in orientation mode Select the coil control in orientation mode for the spindle motor which performs coil changeover. 0: Perform coil changeover based on the command fr om NC. (depending on t he setting of parameter #1239/bit0) 1: Use the coil L #3027 cs_syn Selection of winding in spindle synchronization control mode Select the coil control in spindle synchronization c ontrol mode for the spindle motor which performs coil changeover. 0: Perform coil changeover based on the command fr om NC. (depending on t he setting of parameter #1239/bit0) 1: Use the coil H #3028 sprcmm Tap cycle M command selection Set the M codes for the spindle forward run/reverse run commands during tapping cycle. High-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle forward run command. Low-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle reve rse run command. When "0" is set, it is handled assuming that "3004" is set (the M code for spindle forward run command is "3" and the M code for spindle reverse run command is "4"). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 #3029 tapsel Asynchronous tap gear selection Select the speed which is compared with S command at gear selection when using asynchronous tapping control with the spindle whic h performs gear changeover. 0: Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (stap)--- Multi-step acceleration/deceleration is not used. 1: Maximum speed (smax)--- Multi-step acceleration/decel eration is used. This parameter is enabled only when "#1272 ext08/bit1 is 1". #3030 Not used. Set to "0". smcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (spindle) Set the interface channel No. of CNC control unit to wh ich the spindle is connect ed and the axis No. within each channel. Set this parameter in 4-digit hexadecimal format. Rotary switch settings Axis No.= 12 3 Channel No.=1 HEX- 4 3 2 1 CNC Channel No.=2 Spindle drive 0 control unit Axis No. unit Axis No.= 1 2n Interface channel Channel No.=m No. HEX-4: Drive unit interface channel No. HEX-3: Not used. Set to "0". HEX-2, 1: Axis No. For an analog spindle, set to "0000". ---Setting range--- 0000, 1001 to 1010, 2001 to 2010 Not used. Set to "0". spunit Output unit Select the data unit for communica tion with the spindle drive unit. This selection is applied to the data communicated bet ween the NC and spindle drive unit as well as the spin- dle movement data. Although the standard setting is B (0.001deg), set the same value as "#1004 ctrl_unit" when using Spindle/C axis control. B: 0.001deg (1 μ m) C: 0.0001deg (0.1 μ m) D: 0.00001deg (10nm) E: 0.000001deg (1nm) taps21 Synchronous tapping 2nd step rotation speed (Gear: 00) Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd step in synchronous tapping multi-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 00 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration control for 2nd step is determined by the ratio of "taps21" (#3037) to "tapt21" (#3041). When the inclination is not set for 3r d step or it is higher than that of 2nd step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same incl ination as the 2nd step for the rota tion speed of "taps21" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) taps22 Synchronous tapping 2nd step rotation speed (Gear: 01) Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd step in synchronous tapping multi-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 01 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration control for 2nd step is determined by the ratio of "taps22" (#3038) to "tapt22" (#3042). When the inclination is not set for 3r d step or it is higher than that of 2nd step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same incl ination as the 2nd step for the rota tion speed of "taps22" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3039 taps23 Synchronous tapping 2nd step rotation speed (Gear: 10) Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd st ep in synchronous tapping multi-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 10 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration contro l for 2nd step is determin ed by the ratio of "taps23" (#3039) to "tapt23" (#3043). When the inclination is not set for 3rd step or it is high er than that of 2nd step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 2nd step for the rotation speed of "taps23" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3040 taps24 Synchronous tapping 2nd step rotation speed (Gear: 11) Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd st ep in synchronous tapping multi-step acceleration/de- celeration control when gear 11 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration contro l for 2nd step is determin ed by the ratio of "taps24" (#3040) to "tapt24" (#3044). When the inclination is not set for 3rd step or it is high er than that of 2nd step, the acceleration/deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 2nd step for the rotation speed of "taps24" or higher. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3041 tapt21 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 00) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 2nd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 00 is selected. ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) #3042 tapt22 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 01) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 2nd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 01 is selected. ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) #3043 tapt23 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 10) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 2nd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 10 is selected. ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) #3044 tapt24 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 11) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 2nd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 11 is selected. ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) #3045 tapt31 Synchronous tapping 3rd step acceleration/decelera- tion time constant (Gear: 00) Set the time constant for synchr onous tapping 3rd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 00 is selected. The inclination of linear accelerati on/deceleration control fo r 3rd step is determined by the ratio of slim- it1(#3001) to tapt31(#3045). ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) tapt32 Synchronous tapping 3rd step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 01) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 3rd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 01 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration cont rol for 3rd step is determine d by the ratio of slimit2 (#3002) to tapt32 (#3046). ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) tapt33 Synchronous tapping 3rd step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 10) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 3rd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 10 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration cont rol for 3rd step is determined by the ratio of slim- it3(#3003) to tapt33(#3047). ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000 (ms) tapt34 Synchronous tapping 3rd step acceleration/decelera- tion time cons tant (Gear: 11) Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 3rd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when gear 11 is selected. The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration cont rol for 3rd step is determined by the ratio of slim- it4(#3004) to tapt34(#3048). ---Setting range--- 1 to 5000(ms) spt Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant under spindle synchronization control. The inclination of acceleration/deceleration control is determined by the ratio to limi t rotation speed (slimit). Set the same value for the refer ence axis and synchronized axis. The time constant for 2nd step or subsequent steps is the magnification setting on the basis of this setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) sprlv Spindle synchronization rotation speed attainment lev- el Set the level of speed difference between the reference and synchronized spindles during spindle synchro- nization control. Setting of the synchronized spindle side is enabled. When the difference becomes below the setting level, the spindle speed synchronization complete signal will turn ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°) spplv Spindle phase synchronization attainment level Set the level of phase difference between the reference and synchronized spindles during spindle synchro- nization. Setting of the synchronized spindle side is enabled. When the difference becomes below the setting level, the spindle phase synchronization complete signal will go ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°) spplr Spindle synchronization relative polarity Set the polarity to match the rotati on direction between the spindles which perform synchronization control under spindle synchronization control. 0: Positive polarity (Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation) 1: Negative polarity (Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation) ---Setting range--- 0000/0001 (HEX) #3053 sppst Spindle encoder Z -phase position Set the deviation amount from the spindle's basic point to the spindle encoder's Z phase. Obtain the deviation amount, considering a clockwise di rection as positive when viewed from the spindle's front side. ---Setting range--- 0 to 359999 (1/1000°) #3054 sptc1 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 1 Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3055 sptc2 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 2 Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd st ep in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3056 sptc3 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 3 Set the speed which switches from 3rd step to 4th step in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3057 sptc4 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 4 Set the speed which switches from 4th step to 5th step in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #3058 sptc5 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 5 Set the speed which switches from 5th step to 6th step in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc6 Spindle synchronizatio n multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 6 Set the speed which switches from 6th step to 7th st ep in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the refer ence axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc7 Spindle synchronizatio n multi-step acceleration/decel- eration changeover speed 7 Set the speed which switches from 7th step to 8th st ep in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set the same value for the refer ence axis and synchronized axis. Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit ) or higher not to carry out a step shift. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) spdiv1 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 1 (sptc1) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv2 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 2 (sptc2) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv3 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 3 (sptc3) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv4 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 4 (sptc4) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv5 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 5 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 5 (sptc5) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv6 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 6 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 6 (sptc6) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set th is as a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acce leration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #3067 spdiv7 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 7 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the spee d of changeover speed 7 (sptc7) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration control. Set this as a magnification in relation to the spindle synch ronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #3068 symtm1 Phase synchronization start confirmation time Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attain ed before spindle phase synchronization control is start- ed. When "0" is set, the time will be 2000ms. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #3069 symtm2 Phase synchronization end confirmation time Set a period of waiting time for spindle phase synchronization control's completion as a time in which the speed stays within the attainment range. When "0" is set, the time will be 500ms. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #3070 syprt Phase synchronization alignment speed Set the amount of speed fluctuati on of synchronized spindle during spindle phase synchronization control. Set this as a proportion to commanded speed. When "0" is set, the amount will be 5%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #3071 SscDrSelSp Speed monitor Door selection Select which door group of the speed monitoring a spindle belongs to. 0000: Belong to the door 1 group. 0001: Belong to the door 1 group. 0002: Belong to the door 2 group. 0003: Belong to the door 1 and 2 groups. (Note) Speed monitoring function is validated when "SP229/bitF=1". ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0003 (HEX) #3072 Ssc Svof Filter Sp Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF Set the error detection time for when an error of command speed monitoring or feedback speed monitoring is detected during servo OFF. The alarm will occur if actual speed exceeds safe speed or safe rotation speed for a period of time longer than this setting. When "0" is set, the detection time will be 200 (ms). (Note) Speed monitoring function is validated when "SP229/bitF=1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #3074 GBsp Guide bushing spindle synchronization control Set the reference spindle and G/B spindle. 1: Reference spindle 2: Guide bushing spindle 0: Other Sname Spindle command name Specify a spindle name to be used for giving a spindle command. When spindle command name has been set for all the spindles, the spindle name type is used. If "0" is set to any spindle, the spindle No. type is selected. (Note) Do not set an identical name to two or more of all the spindles. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9 sp_t 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant with S com- mand (Gear: 00) Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant wi th S command (speed operation mode) when gear 00 is selected. Set the linear acceleration/dec eleration time up to limit rotation speed (slimit1). Set the short time constant that the motor torque at acceleration is always saturated, however, when an abnormal noise or V- belt slip occurs, increase the time constant. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000(ms) sp_t 2 Acceleration/deceleration time constant with S com- mand (Gear: 01) Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant wi th S command (speed operation mode) when gear 01 is selected. Set the linear acceleration/dec eleration time up to limit rotation speed (slimit2). Set the short time constant that the motor torque at acceleration is always saturated, however, when an abnormal noise or V- belt slip occurs, increase the time constant. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sp_t 3 Acceleration/deceleration time constant with S com- mand (Gear: 10) Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant wi th S command (speed operation mode) when gear 10 is selected. Set the linear acceleration/dec eleration time up to limit rotation speed (slimit3). Set the short time constant that the motor torque at acceleration is always saturated, however, when an abnormal noise or V- belt slip occurs, increase the time constant. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sp_t 4 Acceleration/deceleration time constant with S com- mand (Gear: 11) Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant wi th S command (speed operation mode) when gear 11 is selected. Set the linear acceleration/dec eleration time up to limit rotation speed (slimit4). Set the short time constant that the motor torque at acceleration is always saturated, however, when an abnormal noise or V- belt slip occurs, increase the time constant. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sut Speed reach range Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the commanded speed, at which the speed reach signal will be output. It will be 15% when set to "0". If the speed deviation is smaller than 45r/min, it will be set as 45r/min. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #3106 zrn_typ Zero point return specifications Select the zero point return specification. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. Z phase detection direction Orientation direction Z phase detection operation ON Synchronous tapping zero point return/Deceleration stop designation Synchronous tapping zero point return direction Synchronous tapping command polarity Spindle/C axis zero point return/Deceleration stop designation Spindle/C axis zero point return direction Direction of zero point return initiated during spindle rotation Z phase detection method Interpolation mode selection 1 (Return to zero when rotating) Interpolation mode selection 2 (Return to zero when stopping) Spindle zero point proximity switch detection bitF: Spindle zero point detection with proximity switch 0: Normal 1: Enable spindle zero point detection using proximity switch bitE: Interpolation mode selection 2 (Return to zero when stopping) 0: Interpolation mode (Follow the setting of "#1256 set28/bit1") 1: Non-interpolation mode (Use "#13001 SP001 PGV") bitD: Interpolation mode selection 1 (Return to zero when rotating) 0: Non-interpolation mode 1: Interpolation mode bitC: Z phase detection method 0: Follows Z phase detection direction (bit0). 1: Rotates in the commanded direction at Z phase detection speed to detect Z phase. (*) To enable Z phase detection operation, set the par ameter "#3106 zrn_typ/bit3" (Z phase detection oper- ation ON) to "1". bitB: Direction of zero point return initiated during spindle rotation 0: Follow the setting of zero point return direction  Follow the direction settin g of orientation (bit2-1)  Follow the setting of synch tap zero return (bit6-5)  Follow the setting of spindle C axis zero return (bitA-9) 1: Follow the spindle rotation direction bitA-9: Spindle/C axis zero point return direction bitA,9= 00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run bit8: Designate zero point return 0: Compatible operation with our conv entional series (Automatically return to zero point simultaneously with C-axis changeover) 1: Standard setting bit7: Synchronous tapping command polarity 0: Forward direction 1: Reverse direction (The standard setting wh en spindle and motor are directly coupled) bit6-5: Synchronous tapping zero point return direction bit6,5= 00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run bit4: Designate zero point return 0: Automatically return to zero point before synch ronous tapping is started (tapping phase alignment) 1: Not return to zero point and imm ediately synchronous tapping is started bit3: Z phase detection operation ON 0: When Z phase is not detected, det ect Z phase during the rotation executed by a rotation command with- out performing the detection operation. 1: When Z phase is not detected, perf orm the detection operation according to the settings of bitC and bit0, and then rotate the motor acco rding to a rotation command. bit2-1: Orientation direction bit2,1= 00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run bit0: Z phase detection direction 0: Forward direction 1: Reverse direction ori_spd Orientation command speed Set the spindle speed during orientation command. When the spindle is not running or running to the differ ent direction with the orientat ion, the orientation is car- ried out with this speed after a stop. When the spindle is running to the same direction with the orientation, this parameter does not have a meaning because it decel erates directly and the or ientation is carried out. ---Setting range--- 1 to 99999 (r/min) ori_sft Position shift amount for orientation The orientation stop position can be moved by this parameter setting although normally the position is Z- phase position. During multi-point orientation control, the stop position is determined by t he total value of this parameter and the position data for multi-point orientation of PLC input. ---Setting range--- -35999 to 35999 (0.01°) #3109 zdetspd Z phase detection speed For the first S command after power is turned ON, the spindle rotates at the speed of setting value for this parameter until Z phase is detected twice. When "#3106/bitF = 1" (Spindle zero point proximity swit ch detection enabled), also proximity switch is de- tected. (Note) When spindle zero point proxim ity switch detection is enabled, the ro tation direction of the orientation/ zero point return (synchronous tapping, spindle/C ax is) will follow Z phase detection direction. And the speed will follow Z phase detection speed. ---Setting range--- 1 to 99999 (r/min) #3110 tap_spd Synchronous tapping zero point return speed Set the zero point return speed during synchronous tapping control. ---Setting range--- 1 to 99999 (r/min) #3111 tap_sft Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount Set the zero point return shift amount during synchron ous tapping control. Zero point angle shifts from Z phase according to the setting angle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 35999 (0.01°) #3112 cax_spd Spindle C axis zero point return speed Set the zero point return speed during spindle C axis control. ---Setting range--- 1 to 99999 (r/min) #3113 cax_sft Spindle C axis zero point return shift amount Set the spindle C axis zero point return shift amount. Zero point angle shifts from Z phase according to the setting angle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 359999 (0.001°) #3114 cax_para_chg Spindle/C axis parameter switch Parameter switches when switching the encoder system between normal spindle cont rol and C axis control, such as using spindle side encoder only for C axis contro l in spindle drive system. It is validated with replacing a certain servo parameter of the corresponding servo axis to a spindle parameter. 0: Not switch 1: Switch ---Setting range--- 0/1 (Standard: 0) #3115 sp2_t1 Time constant in orientation/interpolation mode auto- matic reference positi on return (Gear: 00) Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant fo r zero point return control (#3106/bit4,8) which is au- tomatically started at the time of sw itching orientation control, C axis c ontrol and synchronous tapping control when gear 00 is selected. The inclination is determined by the ratio to limit rotation speed (slimit1). Set the sufficiently large value compared to the acceleration/ deceleration time constant with S command (sp_t1) so that the output torque is not satu rated. When executing C axis zero po int return manually, it depends on the axis specification parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sp2_t2 Time constant in orientation/interpolation mode auto- matic reference position return (Gear: 01) Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for zero point return control (#3106/bit4,8) which is au- tomatically started at the time of sw itching orientation control, C axis control and synchronous tapping control when gear 01 is selected. The inclination is determined by the ratio to limit rotation speed (slimit2). Set the sufficiently large value compared to the acceleration/d eceleration time constant with S command (sp_t2) so that the output torque is not saturated. When executing C axis zero point return manually, it depends on the axis specification parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sp2_t3 Time constant in orientation/interpolation mode auto- matic reference position return (Gear: 10) Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for zero point return control (#3106/bit4,8) which is au- tomatically started at the time of sw itching orientation control, C axis control and synchronous tapping control when gear 10 is selected. The inclination is determined by the ratio to limit rotation speed (slimit3). Set the sufficiently large value compared to the acceleration/d eceleration time constant with S command (sp_t3) so that the output torque is not saturated. When executing C axis zero point return manually, it depends on the axis specification parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) sp2_t4 Time constant in orientation/interpolation mode auto- matic reference position return (Gear: 11) Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for zero point return control (#3106/bit4,8) which is au- tomatically started at the time of sw itching orientation control, C axis control and synchronous tapping control when gear 11 is selected. The inclination is determined by the ratio to limit rotation speed (slimit4). Set the sufficiently large value compared to the acceleration/d eceleration time constant with S command (sp_t4) so that the output torque is not saturated. When executing C axis zero point return manually, it depends on the axis specification parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) staptr Time constant reduction rate in high-speed synchro- nous tapping When performing high-speed synchronous tapping control(#1281/bit5), set the reduction rate of the time con- stant compared to the time cons tant in normal synchronous tapping. (Setting "0" or "100" will be regarded as reduction rate zero, so the time co nstant won't be reduced.) E.g.) When set to "10", time constant in high-sp eed synchronous tapping will be 90% of that in normal syn- chronous tapping. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) tret Turret indexing Select the validity of turret indexing. 0: Disabled 1: Enable GRC Turret side gear ratio Set the number of teeth on the turret side when the gear se lection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00. Set a value of GRC so that the ratio of GRC to the spindle side gear ratio (#13057 SP057) will be 1: N (an integer). If GRC is set to "0", it will be regarded as "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 tret_spd Turret indexing speed Set the turret end indexing speed when in turret indexing. When this parameter is set to 0, it follows the value set for Orientation command speed (#3107). ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(r/min) #3124 tret_t Turret indexing time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach Limit rotation speed (slimt1) at gear 00 when in turret indexing. Set this para meter to a larger value than time constant in orientation (#3115). ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) #3125 tret_inpos Turret indexing in-position width Set the position error range in which the index positioning complete signal is output when in turret indexing. When this parameter is set to 0, the value of In-position width (#13024 SP024) will be used for this width. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(1°/1000) #3126 tret_fin_off Index positioning complete signal OFF time Set the time to forcedly turn OFF the index positioning complete signal since the indexing start signal turns ON. If this period of time has not passed yet, the index positioning complete signal will not turn ON even at the completion of index positioning. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (ms) #3127 SPECSP Spindle specification bit3: Spindle rotation direction Define the relationship between the motor's actual dire ction of rotation and the spindle rotation signals (Spin- dle forward run start/Spindle reverse run start). 0: Forward direction 1: Reverse direction bit1: Spindle cycle counter direction Specify whether the cycle coun ter counts up or down dur ing the spindl e forward run. 0: Count up during forward run 1: Count down during forward run bit0: Output conditions of spindle change over mode and spindle speed reach signals 0: Conventional operation  Spindle changeover mode signal When the spindle stop signal is ON and when a gear recommended by NC and the one selected in ladder program are different, t he spindle changeover mode signal is output to the spindle drive unit.  Spindle speed reach signal Spindle speed reach signal is turn ON/OFF according to the FB signal. 1: Operation when the gear responds to th e neutral state under full-closed control  Spindle changeover mode signal When both the spindle stop signal and the spindle gear shift signal are ON, the spindle changeover mode signal is output to the spindle drive unit.  Spindle speed reach signal During gear changeover (while gear changeover is being commanded), the spindle speed reach sig- nal is turned ON/OFF according to the virtual spin dle-end speed that is calculated by multiplying the motor-end speed by the gear ratio (moto r-end gear teeth/spin dle-end gear teeth). ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal) ori_spec Orientation control specification bit1: High-speed proximity-switch orientation Select whether to enable high-speed proximity-swit ch orientation. This orientation can be used when Proximity-switch spi ndle zero point detection (#3106 zrn_typ/bitF) is en- abled. 0: Disable high-speed 1: Enable high-speed bit0: Orientation in-position advance output Reduce the orientation time by detecting an in-position faster. The in-position detection width is cha nged from SP024(#13024) to ori_inp2. 0: Disable 1: Enable ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal) cax_spec Spindle/C axis control specification bit5: Retention of coordinate system setti ng offset at switchover to C axis mode Select whether to retain the offset for the coordinate system setting(G92/ G50) or local coordinate system set- ting (G52) when the control is switched to C axis mode. 0: Not retain the offset for coordinate system setting 1: Retain the offset for coordinate system setting bit4: Gain switchover for all the axes within the part system when C axis is selected 0: The gains of servo axes except C axis are not switched when C axis is selected. 1: The gains of servo axes except C axis are switched when C axis is selected. #2203 (PGN1) SV003 --> #2249 (PGN1sp) SV049 #2204 (PGN2) SV004 --> #2250 (PGN2sp) SV050 #2257 (SHGC) SV057 --> #2258 (SHGCsp) SV058 bit3: Mode selection at reset when the program command method is selected 0: Spindle mode 1: The mode at reset is retained. This parameter is enabled when the program command method is selected (#3129 cax_spec/bit0 = 1). bit2: Mode selection at Power ON when the program command method is selected 0: Spindle mode 1: C axis mode This parameter is enabled when the program command method is selected (#3129 cax_spec/bit0 = 1). bit1: Coordinate system setting when the deceleration stop type (no zero point return) is selected Select the C axis coordinate system setting method wh en the deceleration stop type (no zero point return) is selected. 0: Establish the coordinates of the deceleration stop position by using the Z-phase position as the coordi- nate zero point. 1: The deceleration stop position is used as the coordinate zero point. bit0: Spindle position control changeover method Select the method of changing the mode between C axis and spindle. 0: PLC signal method 1: Program command method ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal) #3130 syn_spec Spindle synchronization control specification bit2: Error compensation between reference and synchronized spindles 0: Error compensation is performed. 1: Error compensation is not performed. (*) Set this parameter for the synchronized spindle. bit1: Phase alignment method selection 0: Phase alignment method type 1 (step alignment method) 1: Phase alignment method type 2 (mult i-step acceleration/deceleration method) (*) Set this parameter for the synchronized spindle. bit0: Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) automatic compensation selection 0: No compensation. 1: Compensate hobbing axis delay (advance) with workpiece axis. ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal) #3131 tap_spec Synchronous tapping control specification bitF: Analog spindle encoder polarity This parameter specifies the pol arity of the encoder with res pect to the spindle rotation. 0: Forward 1: Reverse ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal) #3132 ori_inp2 2nd in-position width for orientation Set the in-position width when in-position advance out put control (#3128/bit0) is valid. Reduce the orientation time by setting a bigger value than the value of c onventional SP024 and detecting an in-position faster. Conventional SP024 is used for 2nd in-position signal detection width. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (1deg/1000) #3133 spherr Hobbing axis del ay (advance) allowable angle Set the allowable angle between the commanded position and actual position of hobbing axis when it is in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode (X18AE ON ), and also when hobbing axis and workpiece axis are synchronizing (X18A9 ON). ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (1deg/1000) #3134 sphtc Primary delay time constant for hobbing axis automatic compensation Set the primary delay time constant of hobbing axis automatic compensation primar y delay filter control in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing). When set to "0", primary delay filter control is invalid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (ms) #3135 sfwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing axis Set the feed forward gain for the hobbing axis in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) ptaptr Reduction rate of time constant for high-speed Punch Tap cycle Specify the rate of reduction for the time constant of Punch Tap cycle to be applied when Punch Tap cycle is executed with the high-spee d synchronized tap being enabled (#1281 ext17/bit5 = 1). When "0" or "100" is set, the reduction rate will be interpreted as "0" and the time constant will not be reduced. (Example) When "10" is set, the time constant for normal Punch Tap cycle will be reduced to 90%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) stap_ax_off High-speed synchronous tapping disabled axis Not used. Set to "0". motor_type Sp indle motor type Set the spindle motor type. The set type will be displayed on the drive monitor screen, and it will be also out- put to the system c onfiguration data. ---Setting range--- Character string within 26 characters including A-Z, a- z, 0-9, "." (decimal point), "-" (hyphen), "/" (slash) (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) sp_srvdrv Spindle-mode servo control Select whether to enable spindle control using a servo drive unit and servo motor (spindle-mode servo con- trol). 0: Disable spindle-mode servo control 1: Enable spindle-mode servo control S_DINSp Speed observation input door No. Set the door signal input in the drive unit. Use this parameter only when the axis with a door signal belongs to several door groups. The correspondence between the door signals and bits are as follows. bit0: Door1 signal bit1: Door2 signal If the axis does not receive any door signal, set to "0". An error (Y20 0027) will occur in the following cases. - Several bits are enabled. - Any bit other than those set in "#3071 S_DSlSp" is enabled. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0002 (HEX) spsscfeed1 Observation speed 1 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) spsscfeed2 Observation speed 2 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) #3143 spsscfeed3 Observation speed 3 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger th an 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) #3144 spsscfeed4 Observation speed 4 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger th an 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) #3145 S_SigInSP Safety observation signal input This parameter specifies which observation speed change signal is input in the drive unit. The observation speed change signal corresponds to the following bits of the parameter. bit0: Observation speed change signal 1 is connected. bit1: Observation speed change signal 2 is connected. bit2: Observation speed change signal 3 is connected. If the axis receives no observati on speed change signal, set to "0000". (Note) When a same setting value is set to more than one axis, or when more than one bit is set to turn ON for one axis, the alarm (Y20 0027) will occur. ---Setting range--- 0000 to 0004 (HEX) #3146 RatedOutL(PwrCal) Short-time rated output for power co mputation (L-coil) Specify the short-time rated output of the spindle motor (for L-coil). This value is used for calculating the power consumption of the spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 (W) #3147 RatedOutH(PwrCal) Short-time rated output for power co mputation (H-coil) Specify the short-time rated output of the spindle motor (for H-coil). This value is used for calculating the power consumption of the spindle motor. This parameter is used also when the coil switch function is OFF. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 (W) #3148 sycmpctm Temporary error cancel calculation delay time When a period of time set in this parameter has elaps ed after turning-ON of the spindle chuck close (SPC- MPC) signal, you can temporarily cancel spindle sync error by turning ON the spindle sync error temporary cancel (SPDRPO) signal. If the specified time has not elapsed when the spindl e sync error temporary cancel (SPDRPO) signal is turned ON, temporary cancel of spindle sync error is enabled first when the time of this parameter has elapsed. When "0" is set in this parameter, the delay time will be 284 (ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) spsscfeed5 Observation speed 5 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) spsscfeed6 Observation speed 6 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) spsscfeed7 Observation speed 7 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) spsscfeed8 Observation speed 8 Set the observation speed, which is at the machine end, in the multi-step speed monitor. (Note) When the setting value is larger than 18000, the last 2 digits will be ignored. E.g.: 1234567 -> 1234500 (deg/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6553500 (deg/min) cms1 Spindle viscous friction coefficient 1 Set a viscous friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 1-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover H ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.00001%/rpm) cms2 Spindle viscous friction coefficient 2 Set a viscous friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 2-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover L ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.00001%/rpm) cms3 Spindle viscous friction coefficient 3 Set a viscous friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 3-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover Not use ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.00001%/rpm) #3156 cms4 Spindle viscous friction coefficient 4 Set a viscous friction co efficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 4-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover Not use ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.00001%/rpm) #3157 fms1 Spindle coulomb friction coefficient 1 Set a coulomb friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 1-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover H ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.0001%/Nm) #3158 fms2 Spindle coulomb friction coefficient 2 Set a coulomb friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 2-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover L ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.0001%/Nm) #3159 fms3 Spindle coulomb friction coefficient 3 Set a coulomb friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 3-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover Not use ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.0001%/Nm) #3160 fms4 Spindle coulomb friction coefficient 4 Set a coulomb friction coefficient for spindle. This parameter is to estimate the cutting torque of spindle. #13018(SP018)/bit5=0: Mechanical gear 4-step #13018(SP018)/bit5=1: Coil changeover Not use ---Setting range--- 0 to ± 9999999 (0.0001%/Nm) #3166 disttrq_t Disturbance torque detection filter time constant Set the responsiveness in detecting the disturbance torque. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (ms) (Default value: 0) #3167 spef Spindle motor efficency Calculate the efficiency between the motor current val ue and the output torque, and compensate the distur- bance torque detection at acceleration/deceleration. When set to "0", it controls as 100%. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) (Default value: 0) StlTrqSPSV(PwrCal) Stall torque of spindle-mode servo motor for power computation Specify the stall torque of spindle-mode servo motor. This value is used for calculating the power consumption of the spindle-mode servo motor. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 1000.000 (Nm) rotspzsp Spindle-mode rotary axis Motor zero speed (For spin- dle-mode rotary axis only) Set the motor rotation speed to which the zero speed detection is executed. W hen the motor speed goes below the set speed, the zero speed detection turns ON . The standard setting value is "50". When the setting value is "0", it is on the standard setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (r/min) rotspsdts Spindle-mode rotary axis Speed detection setting value (For spindle-mode rotary axis only) Set the motor speed to which the speed detection is executed. When the motor speed goes below the set speed, the speed detection turns ON. The standard setting value is 10% of the "#3001 slimt1" setting value. When the setting value is "0", it is on the standard setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(r/min) LdMeter thresholdY Loadmeter: Caution (Yellow) threshold Specify the spindle load (%) at which the loadmeter displays a caution sign (yellow). If spindle load exceeds the specified value, the loadmeter displays a caution (yellow). If you wish to avoid showing the caution (yellow), se t this parameter to be the same as "#3193 LdMeter thresholdR". When "0" is set, the value becomes 100% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) LdMeter thresholdR Loadmeter: Warning (Red) threshold Specify the spindle load (%) at which the loadmeter displays a warning sign (red). If spindle load exceeds the specified value, the loadmeter displays a warning (red). If you wish to avoid showing the warning (red), set th is parameter to be the same as "#3194 LdMeter load max". When "0" is set, the value becomes 150% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) LdMeter load max Loadmeter: Maximum spindle load Specify the maximum spindle load (%) for loadmeter display. When "0" is set, the value becomes 200% (default). ---Setting range--- 0 to 300(%) mgrsptyp Spindle's machine group setting type Specify which of the spindle's machine group No. para meters to use for the machine groupwise alarm stop function. 0: "#3196 mgrspnum1" (Spindle's machine group No. 1) 1: "#3197 mgrspnum2" (Spindle's machine group No. 2) mgrspnum1 Spindle's machine group No. 1 Specify the machine group No. to which each spindle belongs. This parameter is enabled when the param- eter "#3195 mgrsptyp" (Spindle's machine group setting type) is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32 #3197 mgrspnum2 Spindle's machine group No. 2 Specify the machine group No. to which each spindle belo ngs, by setting the corresponding bit. This param- eter is enabled when the parameter "#3195 mgrsptyp" (Spindle's machine group setting type) is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 00 to FF Set this in hexadecimal format. #13501 vfths11 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 1 (Gear00) Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13502 vfths12 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 1 (Gear01) Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 01. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13503 vfths13 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 1 (Gear10) Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 10. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13504 vfths14 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 1 (Gear11) Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 11. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13505 vftht11 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 1 (Gear00) Set the time constant to reach the variable speed thre ad multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 at gear 00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13506 vftht12 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 1 (Gear01) Set the time constant to reach the variable speed thre ad multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 at gear 01. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13507 vftht13 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 1 (Gear10) Set the time constant to reach the variable speed thre ad multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 at gear 10. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13508 vftht14 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 1 (Gear11) Set the time constant to reach the variable speed thre ad multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 at gear 11. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) vfths21 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 2 (Gear00) Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) vfths22 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 2 (Gear01) Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 01. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) vfths23 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 2 (Gear10) Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 10. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) vfths24 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change- over speed 2 (Gear11) Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acce leration/deceleration time constant at gear 11. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) vftht21 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 2 (Gear00) Set the time constant to reach t he variable speed thread multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 at gear 00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) vftht22 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 2 (Gear01) Set the time constant to reach t he variable speed thread multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 at gear 01. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) vftht23 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 2 (Gear10) Set the time constant to reach t he variable speed thread multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 at gear 10. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) vftht24 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 2 (Gear11) Set the time constant to reach t he variable speed thread multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 at gear 11. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) vftht31 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 3 (Gear00) Set the time constant to reach t he limit rotation speed at gear 00. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13518 vftht32 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 3 (Gear01) Set the time constant to reach the limit rotation speed at gear 01. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13519 vftht33 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 3 (Gear10) Set the time constant to reach the limit rotation speed at gear 10. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13520 vftht34 Variable speed thread multi-step accel/decel change time constant 3 (Gear11) Set the time constant to reach the limit rotation speed at gear 11. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (10 ms) #13521 spt2 Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (Gear: 01) Spindle synchronization ac celeration/deceleration time constant (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used when the rotation speed of spindle synchro- nization command is changed with the 2nd gear selected under the spindle-mode servo control or spindle synchronizati on control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #13522 sptc21 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 1s t step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13523 sptc22 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13524 sptc23 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 3r d step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13525 sptc24 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 4th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13526 sptc25 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 5th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc26 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 6th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc27 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (Gear: 01) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 7th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 2nd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) spdiv21 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 1 (sptc21) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceler ation changeover speed 2 (sptc22) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv22 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 2 (sptc22) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceler ation changeover speed 3 (sptc23) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv23 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 3 (sptc23) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceler ation changeover speed 4 (sptc24) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv24 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 4 (sptc24) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceler ation changeover speed 5 (sptc25) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13533 spdiv25 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 5 (sptc25) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion changeover speed 6 (sptc26) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13534 spdiv26 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 6 (sptc26) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion changeover speed 7 (sptc27) when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13535 spdiv27 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 01) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleratio n time constant to be used for th e spindle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc27) or a higher speed when the 2nd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnifica tion with respect to the spindle-mode servo control/spin- dle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt2). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13536 spt3 Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant(Gear: 10) Spindle synchronization ac celeration/deceleration time constant(Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleratio n time constant to be used when the commanded spindle synchroniza- tion rotation speed is changed with the 3rd gear selected during the spindle-mode servo control or spindle synchronizati on control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #13537 sptc31 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 1s t step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13538 sptc32 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #13539 sptc33 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 3r d step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc34 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 4th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc35 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 5th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc36 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 6th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc37 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (Gear: 10) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 7th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 3rd step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) spdiv31 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 1 (sptc31) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc32) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv32 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 2 (sptc32) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc33) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv33 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 3 (sptc33) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc34) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13547 spdiv34 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 4 (sptc34) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion changeover speed 5 (sptc35) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13548 spdiv35 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 5 (sptc35) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion changeover speed 6 (sptc36) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13549 spdiv36 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 6 (sptc36) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/decelerat ion changeover speed 7 (sptc37) when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13550 spdiv37 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 10) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleratio n time constant to be used for th e spindle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc37) or a higher speed when the 3rd step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spindle-mode se rvo control/spin- dle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt3). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13551 spt4 Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (Gear: 11) Spindle synchronization ac celeration/deceleration time constant (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleratio n time constant to be used when the commanded spindle synchroniza- tion rotation speed is changed with the 4th gear selected during the spindle-mode servo control or spindle synchronizati on control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #13552 sptc41 Spindle sync multis tep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 1s t step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc42 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to t he 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc43 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a changeover to the 3rd step's accelera tion/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc44 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 4th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc45 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 5th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc46 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 6th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) sptc47 Spindle sync multistep acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (Gear: 11) Specify the spindle speed at which a c hangeover to the 7th step's accelerati on/deceleration time constant is made when the 4th step gear is selected. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) spdiv41 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of the spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decelera tion changeover speed 1 (sptc41) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover sp eed 2 (sptc42) when the 4t h step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with resp ect to the spindle-mode servo contro l/spindle synchroni zation accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13560 spdiv42 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 2 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 2 (sptc42) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc43) when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13561 spdiv43 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 3 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 3 (sptc43) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc44) when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13562 spdiv44 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 4 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 4 (sptc44) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc45) when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13563 spdiv45 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 5 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 5 (sptc45) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc46) when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #13564 spdiv46 Time constant magnif ication for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 6 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used in a range of t he spindle-mode servo control/ spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/decel eration changeover speed 6 (sptc46) to the spindle sync multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc47) when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spin dle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization accelera- tion/deceleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 spdiv47 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 11) Time constant magnification for changeover speed 7 (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used for the spindle-mode servo control/spindle synchronization multi-step accelerati on/deceleration changeover speed 7 (s ptc47) or a higher speed when the 4th step gear is selected. Set this as a magnification with respect to the spindle-mode servo control/spin- dle synchronization acceleration/dec eleration time constant (spt4). ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 sgear_tret Turret gear change ON Select whether to enable turret gear change control (gear change at the spindle gear ratios SGRA1 to SGRB4) for a spindle that is under semi-closed loop control. 0: Disable 1: Enable SGRA1 Spindle-side gear ratio 1 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for gear selection command GI1=0/GI2=0. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SGRA2 Spindle-side gear ratio 2 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for gear selection command GI1=1/GI2=0. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SGRA3 Spindle-side gear ratio 3 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for gear selection command GI1=0/GI2=1. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SGRA4 Spindle-side gear ratio 4 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for gear selection command GI1=1/GI2=1. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SGRB1 Motor shaft-side gear ratio 1 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of teeth of t he motor shaft side gear 1 for gear selection command GI1=0/GI2=0. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SGRB2 Motor shaft-side gear ratio 2 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of teeth of the motor shaft side gear 1 for gear selection command GI1=1/GI2=0. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #43008 SGRB3 Motor shaft-side gear ratio 3 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of teeth of the motor shaft si de gear 1 for gear selection command GI1=0/GI2=1. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #43009 SGRB4 Motor shaft-side gear ratio 4 This ratio is enabled under turret gear change control. Specify the number of teeth of the motor shaft si de gear 1 for gear selection command GI1=1/GI2=1. When 0 is set, the operation will be the same as when 1 is set. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #43046 smax_tap1 Synchro tapping spindle Max rotation speed (Gear: 00) Specify the maximum rotation speed in synchronous t apping multi-step acceleration/deceleration control when gear 00 is selected. Inclination of 3rd linear acceleration/deceleration co ntrol is determined by the ratio of smax_tap1(#43046) and tapt31(#3045). When "0" is set to smax_tap1, use smax1(#3005). When smax_tap1 is smax1 or more, use smax1. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #43047 smax_tap2 Synchro tapping spindle Max rotation speed (Gear: 01) Specify the maximum rotation speed in synchronous t apping multi-step acceleration/deceleration control when gear 01 is selected. Inclination of 3rd linear acceleration/deceleration co ntrol is determined by the ratio of smax_tap2(#43047) and tapt32(#3046). When "0" is set to smax_tap2, use smax2 (#3006). When smax_tap2 is smax2 or more, use smax2. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #43048 smax_tap3 Synchro tapping spindle Max rotation speed (Gear: 10) Specify the maximum rotation speed in synchronous t apping multi-step acceleration/deceleration control when gear 10 is selected. Inclination of 3rd linear acceleration/deceleration co ntrol is determined by the ratio of smax_tap3(#43048) and tapt33(#3047). When "0" is set to smax_tap3, use smax3 (#3007). When smax_tap3 is smax3 or more, use smax3. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #43049 smax_tap4 Synchro tapping spindle Max rotation speed (Gear: 11) Specify the maximum rotation speed in synchronous t apping multi-step acceleration/deceleration control when gear 11 is selected. Inclination of 3rd linear acceleration/deceleration co ntrol is determined by the ratio of smax_tap4(#43049) and tapt34(#3048). When 0 is set to smax_tap4, use smax4(#3008). When smax_tap4 is smax4 or more, use smax4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (r/min) #43070 loadrate_warn Spindle motor equivalent load factor excess warning Specify the equivalent load factor of the spindle motor that causes the warning at the start of automatic op- eration. The warning appears when the equivalent load factor has exceeded the specified value. 0: Disable the warning 1 to 200: Warning display threshold [%] sp_spd_flc_dtc_p Delay time for star ting spindle speed fluctuation detec- tion This parameter is used when address P is omitted from the spindle speed fluctuation detection command (G162). Specify a length of delay ti me from when G162 command is given to when the control detects a fluc- tuation. This delay time is also applied to a change in spindle speed command. A change in spindle speed command means a difference in the final comma nd given to the spindle drive unit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99.999 (s) sp_spd_flc_dtc_r Allowable spindle speed fluctuation rate Specify the allowable spindle speed fl uctuation rate to be applied to the spindle speed fluctuation detection command (G162) from which address R is omitted. When "0" is set, the allowable rate is 15%. If a speed deviation with respect to the command speed is smaller than 45 r/min, the speed deviation is treat- ed as 45 r/min. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) sp_spd_flc_dtc_i Allowable sp indle speed fluctuation range Specify the allowable spindle speed fl uctuation range to be applied to the spindle speed fluctuation detection command (G162) from which address I is omitted. When "0" is set, the allowabl e range is treated as 45 r/min. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) zdet_num Maximum number of revolutions for Z phase detection Specify the maximum number of revolutions for the Z phase detection of proxim ity-switch orientation. If Z phase is not yet detected when the spindle has reached the specified number of revolutions, the opera- tion error (M01 0301) occurs. When this parameter is "0", the maximu m number of revolutions is treated as 2. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (revolutions) GRA1ex Spindle-side extended gear ratio 1 Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for "G ear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 00". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 GRA2ex Spindle-side extended gear ratio 2 Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for "G ear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 01". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 GRA3ex Spindle-side extended gear ratio 3 Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for "G ear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 10". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43079 GRA4ex Spindle-side extended gear ratio 4 Specify the number of spindle-side gear teeth for "Gear selection comm and (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 11". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43080 GRB1ex Motor-side extended gear ratio 1 Specify the number of motor-side gea r teeth for "Gear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 00". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43081 GRB2ex Motor-side extended gear ratio 2 Specify the number of motor-side gea r teeth for "Gear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 01". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43082 GRB3ex Motor-side extended gear ratio 3 Specify the number of motor-side gea r teeth for "Gear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 10". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43083 GRB4ex Motor-side extended gear ratio 4 Specify the number of motor-side gea r teeth for "Gear selection command (Control input 4/bit6, 5) = 11". When 0 is set, extended gear ratio is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 2147483647 #43084 protect_sp_st_tmp Spindle protection start temperature Specify the motor temperature at which spindle protection starts. When the spindle motor temperature reaches the set temperature or higher, the acceleration/deceleration time constant is switched from that of S command to that for spindle protection. Set a temperature that is the same as or higher than the spindle protection cancel temperature. When 0 is set, the spindle accelerati on/deceleration time const ant is not switched according to the tempera- ture. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (°C) #43085 protect_sp_rls_tmp Spindle protection cancel temperature Specify the motor temperature at wh ich spindle protection is cancelled. When the spindle motor temperature drops below the se t temperature, the acceleration/deceleration time constant is switched from that for spindle protecti on to that of S command. Set a temperature that is the same as or lower than the spindle protection start temperature. When the set temperature is 0 or higher than the spindle protection start temperature, the ca ncel temperature is set 10 degrees lower than the start temperature. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (°C) protect_sp_t1 Acceleration/Decelerat ion time constant during spindle protection (Gear: 00) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant fo r S command (speed operation mode) to be applied to the spindle motor (gear 00) that is being protected against in creased temperature. Set the linear acceleration/deceleration ti me up to limit rotation speed (slimit1). When 0 or any value smaller than "#3101 sp_t1" is set, switchover of the time constant is disabled, and ac- celeration/deceleration is performed wi th the time constant "#3101 sp_t1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) protect_sp_t2 Acceleration/Decelerat ion time constant during spindle protection (Gear: 01) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant fo r S command (speed operation mode) to be applied to the spindle motor (gear 01) that is being protected against in creased temperature. Set the linear acceleration/deceleration ti me up to limit rotation speed (slimit2). When 0 or any value smaller than "#3102 sp_t2" is set, switchover of the time constant is disabled, and ac- celeration/deceleration is performed wi th the time constant "#3102 sp_t2". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) protect_sp_t3 Acceleration/Decelerat ion time constant during spindle protection (Gear: 10) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant fo r S command (speed operation mode) to be applied to the spindle motor (gear 10) that is being protected against in creased temperature. Set the linear acceleration/deceleration ti me up to limit rotation speed (slimit3). When "0" or any value smaller than "#3103 sp_t3" is set, switchover of the time constant is disabled, and acceleration/deceleration is performed wi th the time constant "#3103 sp_t3". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) protect_sp_t4 Acceleration/Decelerat ion time constant during spindle protection (Gear: 11) Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant fo r S command (speed operation mode) to be applied to the spindle motor (gear 11) that is being protected against in creased temperature. Set the linear acceleration/deceleration ti me up to limit rotation speed (slimit4). When "0" or any value smaller than "#3104 sp_t4" is set, switchover of the time constant is disabled, and acceleration/deceleration is performed wi th the time constant "#3104 sp_t4". ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) SP002cax(PGNcax) Position loop gain for C axis mode This parameter specifies the position loop gain that is applied when the sp indle is controlled in C axis mode. If the parameter is set to "0", the value of the spindle parameter "#13002 SP002 (PGN)" will be used. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (rad/s) sprotpls Number of pulses per motor revolution When using the "Spindle control with pulse train output " function, subtract 1 from the number of pulses per revolution of the spindle motor, and enter the result in this parameter. (Example) When the number of pulses per revolution of the motor connected is 4096, enter "4095" in this parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #43098 plsspec Form of pulse train output Specify the form of the pu lse train to be output. bit8: Output logic Specify the logic of the pulse train to be output. 0: Positive logic (Active high) 1: Negative logic (Active low) bit7-4: Multiplying factor Specify the multiplying factor fo r the frequency of the pulse train. 0: 1-fold 1: 1/4-fold bit3-0: Output mode Specify the form of the pulse train for forward/reverse rotation. 0: A/B phase mode 1: PULSE/SIGN mode 2: CW/CCW mode ---Setting range--- 0000 to FFFF (HEX) #43099 plsmot Maximum rotation speed of spindle motor controlled with pulse train output Specify the maximum rotation speed of the spindle motor that should be controlled with the pulse train output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (r/min) #43100 plschk Time to check spindle encoder output for control with pulse train output Specify the time period to determine there is an error in feedback signal from the spindle encoder. If the feedback signal from the spindle encoder does not change significantly when the parameterized time period has elapsed after start of output to the spindle, the syst em determines there is an error in the spindle encoder, and an alarm stop takes place. If "0" is specified, the system be haves as if "200" was specified. This parameter is only valid when "#3025 enc-on" (Spindle encoder) is "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (ms) SP001 PGV Position loop gain non-interpolation mode Set the position loop gain for "Non-interpolation" control mode. When the setting value increases, the command tracking ability will enhance and the positioning settling time can be shorter. However, the impact on the machine during acceleration/deceleration will increase. Use the selection command, the control mode "bit 2, 1, 0 = 000" in control input 4. (Note) The control mode is commanded by NC. ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (rad/s) SP002 PGN Position loop gain interpolation mode Set the position loop gain for "interpolation" control mode. When the setting value increases, the command tracking ability will enhance and the positioning settling time can be shorter. However, the impact on the machi ne during acceleration/deceleration will increase. Use the selection command, the control mode "b it 2, 1, 0 = 010 or 100" in control input 4. (Note) The control mode is commanded by NC. When carrying out the SHG cont rol, set SP035/bitC to "1". ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (rad/s) SP003 PGS Position loop gain spindle synchronization Set the position loop gain for "spindle synchronization" control mode. When the setting value increases, the command tracking ability will enhance and the positioning settling time can be shorter. However, the impact on the machi ne during acceleration/deceleration will increase. Use the selection command, the control mode "bit 2, 1, 0 = 001" in control input 4. (Note 1) The control mode is commanded by NC. When carrying out the SHG cont rol, set SP036/bit4 to "1". (Note 2) Set the same value for the basic and synchronous spindles in spindle synchronization. ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (rad/s) SP004 Not used. Set to "0". SP005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1 Set the speed loop gain. Set this according to the load inertia size. The higher setting value will increase the accuracy of control, however, vibr ation tends to occur. If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%. The final value should be 70 to 80% of t he value at which t he vibration stops. ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 SP006 VIA1 Speed loop lead compensation 1 Set the speed loop integral control gain. The standard setting is "1900". Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing the value by about 100. Raise this value to improve the contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position droop does not stab ilize (when the vibration of 10 to 20Hz occurs). ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 SP007 VIL1 Speed loop delay compensation 1 Set this parameter when the limit cycle occurs in the fu ll-closed loop or overshootin g occurs in positioning. When setting this parameter, make sure to set the to rque offset "SP050(TOF)". When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #13008 SP008 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2 Normally SP005(VGN1) is used. By setting "SP035/bit1, SP035/bit9 or SP036/bit1=1", gain 2 can be used according to the application. Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (contr ol input 5/ bitC) = 1". Refer to SP005(VGN1) for adjustment procedures. ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 #13009 SP009 VIA2 Speed loop lead compensation 2 Normally SP006(VIA1) is used. By setting "SP035/bit1, SP035/bit9 or SP036/bit1=1", gain 2 can be used according to the application. Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (contr ol input 5/ bitC) = 1". Refer to SP006(VIA1) for adjustment procedures. ---Setting range--- 1 to 9999 #13010 SP010 VIL2 Speed loop delay compensation 2 Normally SP007(VIL1) is used. By setting "SP035/bit1, SP035/bit9 or SP036/bit1=1", gain 2 can be used according to the application. Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (contr ol input 5/ bitC) = 1". Refer to SP007(VIL1) for adjustment procedures. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #13011 SP011 Not used. Set to "0". #13012 SP012 Not used. Set to "0". #13013 SP013 Not used. Set to "0". #13014 SP014 PY1 Minimum excitation rate 1 Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. The standard setting is "50". Set to "0" when using an IPM spindle motor. If noise including gear noise is loud, select a small va lue. However, a larger setting value is more effective for impact response. (Note) When setting a value at "50 or more", check if there is no problem with gear noise, motor excitation noise, vibration during low-speed rotation or vibration wh en the servo is locked dur ing orientation stop, etc. When setting a value at "less than 50", check if there is no problem with the impact load response or rigidity during servo lock. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #13015 SP015 PY2 Minimum excitation rate 2 Normally, SP014(PY1) is used. By setting "SP035/bit2, SP035/bitA or SP036/bit2=1", the excitation rate 2 can be used according to the ap- plication. The excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting "the minimum excitation rate 2 changeover request (control input 5/ bitB) = 1". Refer to SP014(PY1) for adjustment procedures. Set to "0" when using an IPM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SP016 DDT Phase alignment deceleration rate Set the single-rotation position alignment decelerati on rate for orientation stopping, phase alignment while rotating and switching from non-interpolation mode to spindle synchronization mode while rotating. When the load inertia is larger, the setting value should be smaller. When the setting value is larger, the orientation in-p osition and single-rotation position alignment complete faster, but the impact applied on the machine will increase. To change the deceleration rate only during rotation command (command F Δ T ≠ 0), set this parameter to- gether with SP070 (KDDT). ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 (0.1(r/min)/ms) SP017 SPEC1 Spindle specification 1 Select the spindle specification. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. fdir2 dfbx seqh vfb fdir msr bit F-C : msr Motor series selection 0: 200V specification IM spindle motor 1: 200V specification IPM spindle motor 2: 400V specification IM spindle motor 3: 400V specification IPM spindle motor 4: 200V specification Tool spindle motor bit B-5 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 4 : fdir Position feedback Set the machine side encoder's installation polarity. 0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity bit 3 : vfb Speed feedback filter 0: Disable 1: Enable (4500Hz) bit 2 : seqh READY ON sequence 0: Normal 1: High-speed bit 1 : dfbx Dual feedback control Control the position FB signal in full closed control by the combination of a motor side encoder and machine side encoder. 0: Stop 1: Start Related parameters: SP051, SP052 bit 0 : fdir2 Speed feedback polarity Set the motor side encoder's installation polarity by a built-in motor. 0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity #13018 SP018 SPEC2 Spindle specification 2 Select the spindle specification. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. oplp mkch spsu mpg bit F-A : Not used. Set to "0". bit 9 : mpg Earth fault detection 0: Disable 1: Enable (standard) Set "0" and it is constantly "Enable" for MDS-EJ-SP Series. bit 8 : spsu Command speed limit value 0: 33,750 r/min 1: 135,000 r/min bit 7-6 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 5 : mkch Coil switch function 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 4-2 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 1 : oplp Open loop control This allows the operation in which no encoder feedback signals are used. It is used when adjusting the encoder, etc. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13019 SP019 RNG1 Sub side encoder resolution [For semi-closed loop] Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2). (R efer to the explanation of SP020.) [For full-closed loop] Set the number of pulses per revolution of the machine side encoder. When using the encoder interface unit MDS-EX-HR, use this with SP097(RNG1ex). Encoder OSE-1024 (ABZ pulse): SP019=4096, SP097=-1 TS5690( 64 teeth): SP019 = 2000, SP097=0 TS5690( 90 teeth): SP019 = 2880, SP097=0 TS5690(128 teeth): SP019 = 4000, SP097=0 TS5690(192 teeth): SP019 = 6000, SP097=0 TS5690(256 teeth): SP019 = 8000, SP097=0 TS5690(384 teeth): SP019 =12000, SP097=0 ERM280(1200 teeth): SP019 = 4800, SP097=0 ERM280(2048 teeth): SP019 = 8000, SP097=0 MPCI : SP019 = 7200, SP097=0 MBE205: SP019 = 2000, SP097=0 GEL2449M(524,288(p/rev)): SP019=0, SP097=8 ---Setting range--- When SP097=0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp) When SP097 ≠ 0, the setting range is from 0 to 65535 (p) SP020 RNG2 Main side encoder resolution Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor si de encoder. Set the standard parameters for the motor with frame. ---Setting range--- When SP098=0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp) When SP098 ≠ 0, the setting range is from 0 to 65535 (p) SP021 OLT Overload detection time constant Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (A larm 50). (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) Normally, set to "60". Set to "300" when using an IPM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 1 to 15300 (s) SP022 OLL Overload detection level Set the current detection level of "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) as a percentage against the motor short-time rated output current. (For Mitsubi shi Electric adjustment) Normally, set to "120". Set to "100" when using an IPM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 1 to 200 (Short-time rated %) SP023 OD1 Excessive error detectio n width (interpolation mode - spindle synchronization) Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation mode and spindle synchronization. The standard setting is "120". When set to "0", the excessive error detection will be ignored, so do not set to "0". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 (°) SP024 INP In-position width Set the in-position detection width. Set the positioning accuracy required to the machine. Lower setting value increases the positioning accuracy, but makes the cycle time (settling time) longer. The standard setting is "875". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (1°/1000) SP025 INP2 2nd in-position width Use this when detecting an in-positi on different from normal in-position wi dth such as advancing the in-posi- tion signal. The adjustment procedu re is the same as SP024 (INP). The standard setting is "875". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (1°/1000) SP026 TSP Maximum motor speed Set the maximum motor speed. If the motor speed exceeds the set maximu m speed, an overspeed alarm will occur. ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 (r/min) SP027 ZSP Motor zero speed Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed. If the motor speed drops below the set speed, the zero speed signal turns ON. The standard setting is "50". ---Setting range--- 1 to 1000 (r/min) #13028 SP028 SDTS Speed detection set value Set the motor speed for detecting the speed. If the motor speed drops below the set speed, the speed detection signal turns ON. The standard setting is 10% of the maximum motor speed. ---Setting range--- 10 to 32767 (r/min) #13029 SP029 SDTR Speed detection reset width Set the hysteresis width in which the speed detection changes from ON to OFF. If the setting value is small, the speed detection will chatter easily. The standard setting is "30". ---Setting range--- 10 to 1000 (r/min) #13030 SP030 SDT2 2nd speed detection setting value Set the specified speed of the specified speed output. When carrying out digital output of the specified speed output, set SP229/bitC to "1". It is not available for MDS-EJ-SP Series. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #13031 SP031 MTYP Motor type Set the control syst em of the spindle drive unit. 2200: Semi closed loop control 4200: Full closed loop control by usin g spindle side ABZ pulse output encoder 6200: Full closed loop control by using spindle side serial output encoder SP032 PTYP Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type MDS-E/EH Series: Power supply type When connecting a power supply unit, set a code for each power supply unit. ptyp rtyp amp bit F-C : amp Set the power backup function to be used. No function used : 0 Deceleration and stop function at power failure : 8 Retraction function at power failure: C bit B-8 : rtyp Not used. Set to "0". bit 7-0 : ptyp External emergency stop setting When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled" Power supply unit is not connected : 00 MDS-E-CV-37 / MDS-EH-CV-37 : 04 MDS-E-CV-75 / MDS-EH-CV-75 : 08 MDS-E-CV-110 / MDS-EH-CV-110 : 11 MDS-E-CV-185 / MDS-EH-CV-185 : 19 MDS-E-CV-300 / MDS-EH-CV-300 : 30 MDS-E-CV-370 / MDS-EH-CV-370 : 37 MDS-E-CV-450 / MDS-EH-CV-450 : 45 MDS-E-CV-550 / MDS-EH-CV-550 : 55 MDS-EH-CV-750 : 75 When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled" (Note) Set the power supply rotary switch to "4". Power supply unit is not connected : 00 MDS-E-CV-37 / MDS-EH-CV-37 : 44 MDS-E-CV-75 / MDS-EH-CV-75 : 48 MDS-E-CV-110 / MDS-EH-CV-110 : 51 MDS-E-CV-185 / MDS-EH-CV-185 : 59 MDS-E-CV-300 / MDS-EH-CV-300 : 70 MDS-E-CV-370 / MDS-EH-CV-370 : 77 MDS-E-CV-450 / MDS-EH-CV-450 : 85 MDS-E-CV-550 / MDS-EH-CV-550 : 95 MDS-EH-CV-750 : B5 MDS-EM/EMH Series: Power supply type Set as follows for the spindle drive section of the MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3. ptyp rtyp amp bit F-C : amp Not used. Set to "0". bit B-8 : rtyp Not used. Set to "0". bit 7-0 : ptyp External emergency stop setting Normal MDS-EM: 20, MDS-EMH: 22, MDS-EM-SPV3 -16040S: 16, MDS- EM-SPV3-320120: 37 External emergency stop function MDS-EM: 60, MDS-EMH: 62, MDS-EM-SPV3 -16040S: 56, MDS- EM-SPV3-320120: 77 MDS-EJ-SP Series: Regene rative resistor type Set the regenerative resistor type. 00 0 0 emgx rtyp amp bit F-8 : amp(bit F-C) / rtyp(bit B-8) Setting prohibited : 10-12 MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK : 13 MR-RB32 or GZG200W120OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 14 MR-RB30 or GZG200W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 15 MR-RB50 or GZG300W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 16 Setting prohibited : 17-1F Setting prohibited : 20-23 FCUA-RB22 : 24 FCUA-RB37 : 25 FCUA-RB55 : 26 FCUA-RB75/2 1 unit : 27 R-UNIT1 : 28 R-UNIT2 : 29 R-UNIT3 : 2A R-UNIT4 : 2B R-UNIT5 : 2C FCUA-RB75/2 2 units connected in parallel : 2D FCUA-RB55/2 2 units connected in parallel : 2E Setting prohibited : 2F bit 7-4 : emgx External emergency stop function Set the external emergency stop function. 0: Disable 4: Enable bit 3-0 : Not used. Set to "0". SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1 Select the spindle specification. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. vfct bit F-C : Not used. Set to "0". bit B-A : ovs Overshoot compensation Set this parameter when overshooting occurs during positioning. bitB,A= 00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: Compensation type 3 Set the compensation amount in SP043(OVS1) and SP042(OVS2). bit 9-8 : lmc Lost motion compensation type2 Set this parameter when the protrusi on at quadrant change is too large. bit9,8= 00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited Set the compensation amount in SP048(LMC1) and SP041(LMC2). bit 7 : lmc2a Lost motion compensation 2 timing 0: Normal 1: Change bit 6 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 5-4 : vfct Jitter compensation pulse number Suppress vibration by machine backlash when axis stops. bit5,4= 00: Disable 01: 1 pulse 10: 2 pulse 11: 3 pulses bit 3-0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13034 SP034 SFNC2 Spindle function 2 Select the spindle function. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. fhz3 bit F-D : nfd5 Depth of Notch filter 5 Set the depth of Notch filter 5 (SP088). bit F,E,D= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit C : Not used. Set to "0". bit B-9 : nfd4 Depth of Notch filter 4 Set the depth of Notch filter 4 (SP087). bit B,A,9= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 8 : pwm Current control 0: Standard current control 1: High frequency current control bit 7-5 : nfd2 Depth of Notch filter 2 Set the depth of Notch filter 2 (SP046). bit7,6,5= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 4 : fhz3 Notch filter 3 0: Stop 1: Start (1125Hz) bit 3-1 : nfd1 Depth of Notch filter 1 Set the depth of Notch filter 1 (SP038). bit3,2,1= 000: - ∞ 001: -18.1[dB] 010: -12.0[dB] 011: -8.5[dB] 100: -6.0[dB] 101: -4.1[dB] 110: -2.5[dB] 111: -1.2[dB] bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function 3 Select the spindle function. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. vgin pyin rtt_vgn vgn pyn shgn bit F-D : Not used. Set to "0". bit C : shgn SHG control in interpolation mode 0: Stop 1: Start When using the OMR-FF control, set to "0". bit B : Not used. Set to "0". bit A : pyn Excitation rate selection in interpolation mode 0: Select Excitation rate 1 1: Select Excitation rate 2 bit 9 : vgn Speed loop gain set selection in interpolation mode 0: Select Set 1 1: Select Set 2 bit 8-7 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 6 : rtt_vgn Real-time tuning I in non-interpolation mode / speed gain adaptation stop 0: Stop 1: Start bit 5-3 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 2 : pyin Excitation rate selection in non-interpolation mode The excitation rate after the in-position can be selected. 0: Select Excitation rate 1 1: Select Excitation rate 2 bit 1 : vgin Speed loop gain set selection in non-interpolation mode The speed loop gain set after the in-position can be selected. 0: Select Set 1 1: Select Set 2 bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13036 SP036 SFNC4 Spindle function 4 Select the spindle function. A function is allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. vgs pys shgs rtt_vgns mksl bit F-8 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 7 : mksl Coil selection in spindle synchronization mode 0: Select the coil commanded during synchronization 1: Select high-speed coil bit 6 : rtt_vgns Real-ti me tuning I in spindle synchronization mode / speed gain adaptation stop 0: Stop 1: Start bit 5 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 4 : shgs SHG control in spindle synchronization mode 0: Stop 1: Start When using the OMR-FF control, set to "0". bit 3 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 2 : pys Excitation rate selection in spindle synchronization mode 0: Select Excitation rate 1 1: Select Excitation rate 2 bit 1 : vgs Speed loop gain set selection in spindle synchronization mode 0: Select Set 1 (SP005,SP006,SP007) 1: Select Set 2 (SP008,SP009,SP010) bit 0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13037 SP037 JL Load inertia scale Set the motor axis conversion total load inertia includ ing motor itself in proportion to the motor inertia. SV037(JL)=(Jm+Jl)/Jm×100 Jm: Motor inertia Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (%) #13038 SP038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 50 or more.) When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SP034/bit3-1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) #13039 SP039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing Set this parameter when the lost motion co mpensation type2 timing does not match. Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time. ---Setting range--- 0 to 2000 (ms) SP040 LMCT Lost motion co mpensation non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control. When "0" is set, 2°/1000 is set. Adjust by increasing the value by 1°/1000 at a time. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (1°/1000) SP041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2 Set this parameter with SP048(LMC1) only to vary the lost motion compensation amount depending on the command directions. Normally, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -1 to 200 (Short-time rated %) Note that when SP227/bit2 is "1", the range will be -1 to 20000 (Short-time rated 0.01%). SP042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2 Set this parameter with SP043(OVS1) only to vary the lost motion compensation amount depending on the command directions. Normally, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -1 to 100 (Short-time rated %) Note that when SP227/bit2 is "1", the range will be -1 to 10000 (Short-time rated 0.01%). SP043 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1 Set this parameter when overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected. [Type 3 "When SP033/ bitB,A=11"] Use this when performing overshoot compensation in the feed forward control during arc cutting mode. Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current. Increase the value in increments of 1% to find the value where overshooting ceases. [To vary compensation amount depending on the direction] When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", change the SP043 (OVS1) value in both +/- directions to compensate. To change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this with SP042 (OVS2). (SP043: + direction, SP042: - direction, However, t he directions may be opposite depending on other set- tings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the command direction. ---Setting range--- -1 to 100 (Short-time rated %) Note that when SP227/bit2 is "1", the range will be -1 to 10000 (Short-time rated 0.01%). SP044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain Set the disturbance observer gain . The standard setting is "100". To use the disturbance obse rver, also set SP037(JL), SP045(OBS1) and SP226/ bitE. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (%) SP045 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency Set the disturbance obs erver filter band. Normally, set to "100". To use the disturbance obse rver, also set SP037(JL), SP044(OBS2) and SP226/ bitE. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (rad/s) #13046 SP046 FHz2 Notch filter frequency 2 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 50 or more.) When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SP034/bit7-5 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) #13047 SP047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Normally, set to "100". Lower the gain when the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (%) #13048 SP048 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1 Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, back- lash, etc.) at quadrant change is too large. This sets the compensation torque at quadrant change (when an axis feed direction is reversed) by Short- time rated %. Whether to enable the lost motion compensation and the method can be set with other parameters. [Type 2 "When SP033/bit9,8=10"] Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current. The standard setting is double of the friction torque. The compensation amount will be 0 when "0" is set. Related parameters: SP033/bit9-8 , SP039, SP040, SP041, SP227/bit2 [To vary compensation amount depending on the direction] When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", change SP048 (LMC1) valu e in both of +/- direct ions to compensate. To vary the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this with SP041 (LMC2). (SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction, Howeve r, the directions may be opposite depending on other set- tings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the command direction. ---Setting range--- -1 to 200 (Short-time rated %) Note that when SP227/bit2 is "1", the range will be -1 to 20000 (Sho rt-time rated 0.01%). #13049 SP049 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain When a relative error in the synchronous control is too la rge, set this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The standard setting is "0". The standard setting in the SHG control is "50". Adjust relative errors in acceleration/deceleration by increasing the value by 50. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (%) #13050 SP050 TOF Torque offset Set the imbalance torque. ---Setting range--- -100 to 100 (Short-time rated %) #13051 SP051 DFBT Dual feed back control time constant Set the control time cons tant in dual feed back. When the function is valid, the standard setting is "100". When "0" is set, the value is 1 ms. When the time constant is increased, the operation will get closer to the semi-close d control and the limit of the position loop gain will be raised. However, this cannot be used when the spindle slip o ccurs in machine configuration such as V-belt drive. Related parameters: SP017/bit1, SP052 ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SP052 DFBN Dual feedback control non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control. Normally set to "0". Related parameters: SP017/bit1, SP051 ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (1/1000°) SP053 ODS Excessive error detection width (non-interpolation mode) Set the excessive error detection width in non-interpolation mode. Standard setting value: ODS = Maxi mum motor speed [r/min] × 6/PGV/2 When set to "0", the excessive error detection will not be performed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (°) SP054 ORE Overrun detection width in closed loop control Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control. When the gap between the motor side encoder and the machine side encoder exceeds the set value, it is judged as an overrun and "Alarm 43" is detected. When "-1" is set, if the differential velocity betwe en the motor side encoder and the machine side encoder exceeds the 30% of the maximum motor speed, it wil l be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43" will be detected. When "0" is set, overrun will be detected with 2°. In the full-closed loop control, normally set this para meter to "360". During V-belt drive, set to "-1". ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 (°) SP055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop Set the time required to forcibly execute READY OFF after the emergency stop is input. Normally set to "5000". When 5000ms or more is set for dece leration time constant at emergency stop(SP056), set the same value as SP056. When using the power backup system (MDS-D/DH-PFU) and setting the va lue of this parameter to 5000ms or more, a communication error between NC and drive unit may occur when power restarts after a instanta- neous power interrupt. It is not a problem so turn the NC power ON again to start up. When "0" is set, 7000ms is the actual value to be set. Related parameters: SP056, SP230 ---Setting range--- 0 to 29900 (ms) SP056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set the ti me required to stop from the maximum motor speed (TSP). When "0" is set, the deceleration control is executed with "7000ms". Related parameters: SP055, SP230 ---Setting range--- 0 to 29900 (ms) SP057 GRA1 Spindle side gear ratio 1 Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "00". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 SP058 GRA2 Spindle side gear ratio 2 Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "01". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13059 SP059 GRA3 Spindle side gear ratio 3 Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "10". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13060 SP060 GRA4 Spindle side gear ratio 4 Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "11". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13061 SP061 GRB1 Motor side gear ratio 1 Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "00". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13062 SP062 GRB2 Motor side gear ratio 2 Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "01". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13063 SP063 GRB3 Motor side gear ratio 3 Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "10". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13064 SP064 GRB4 Motor side gear ratio 4 Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)" is set to "11". ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 #13065 SP065 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limi t value when the torque limit (spindle control in put 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "001" (TL3, TL2, TL1 = 001). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) #13066 SP066 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limi t value when the torque limit (spindle control in put 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "010" (TL3, TL2, TL1 = 010). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) #13067 SP067 TLM3 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limi t value when the torque limit (spindle control in put 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "011" (TL3, TL2, TL1 = 011). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) #13068 SP068 TLM4 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limi t value when the torque limit (spindle control in put 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "100" (TL3, TL2, TL1 = 100). ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) SP069 PCMP Phase alignment completion width Set the single-rotation position alignment completion width for phase alignment and changing from non-in- terpolation to spindle synchronization mode during rotation. Set the rotation error that is required to the machine. When the setting value decreases, t he rotation error will decre ase, but the cycle time (settling time) will get longer. The standard setting is "875". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (1°/1000) SP070 KDDT Phase alignment deceleration rate scale Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) to change the decelerat ion rate only during rotation command (command F Δ T ≠ 0). When the setting value increases, the single-rotation position alignment will be completed faster, but the im- pact to the machine will also increase. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (1/16-fold) SP071 DIQM Variable current limit during deceleration, lower limit value Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during deceleration de- pending on the motor speed. As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the curre nt limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use with SP072 (DIQN). When DIQM is set to 100%, the standard current limit value in deceleration (SP152) is applied. SP152 100% DIQM 0 DIQN Motor speed ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (%) SP072 DIQN Variable current limit during deceleration, break point speed Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during deceleration de- pending on the motor speed. As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the curre nt limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use with SP072 (DIQN). When DIQM is set to 100%, the standard current limit value in deceleration (SP152) is applied. SP152 100% DIQM 0 DIQN Motor speed ---Setting range--- 1 to 32767 (r/min) #13073 SP073 VGVN Variable speed gain target value If noise is bothersome during high speed rotation, it may be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain at high speed. Set this value to ensure the adequate response by suppressing noise and vibration at low speeds and in- creasing the speed loop gain at high speeds for a high-speed spindle of machining center, etc. As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN), and use with SP074 (VGVS). When not using, set to "0". The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP). This function can be used when either Speed loop gain set 1 or Speed loop gain set 2 is selected. Scale[%] Scale[%] VGVN (SP073) >100 100 100 VGVN (SP073) <100 Motor speed Motor speed VGVS VLMT [r/min] VGVS VLMT [r/min] (SP074) (SP026x1.15) (SP074) (SP026x1.15) When lowering the speed loop gain at high speed When increasing the speed loop gain at high speed ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (%) #13074 SP074 VGVS Variable speed gain change start speed If noise is bothersome during high speed rotation, it may be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain at high speed. Set this value to ensure the adequate response by suppressing noise and vibration at low speeds and in- creasing the speed loop gain at high speeds for a high-speed spindle of machining center, etc. As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN), and use with SP074 (VGVS). When not using, set to "0". The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP). This function can be used when either Speed loop gain set 1 or Speed loop gain set 2 is selected. Scale[%] Scale[%] VGVN (SP073) >100 100 100 VGVN (SP073) <100 Motor speed Motor speed VGVS VLMT [r/min] VGVS VLMT [r/min] (SP074) (SP026x1.15) (SP074) (SP026x1.15) When lowering the speed loop gain at high speed When increasing the speed loop gain at high speed ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #13075 SP075 DWSH Slip compensation s cale during regeneration high- speed coil Set the slip frequency scale during deceleration. Normally, set to "0". (For Mi tsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (1/16-fold) SP076 DWSL Slip compensation scale during regeneration low- speed coil Set the slip frequency scale at deceler ation when using the low-speed coil. Normally, set to "0". (For Mits ubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (1/16-fold) SP077 IQA Q axis current lead compensation Set the current loop gain. To use the coil switch function, set the curren t loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 SP078 IDA D axis current lead compensation Set the current loop gain. To use the coil switch function, set the curren t loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 SP079 IQG Q axis current gain Set the current loop gain. To use the coil switch function, set the curren t loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 SP080 IDG D axis current gain Set the current loop gain. To use the coil switch function, set the curren t loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 SP081 IQAL Q axis current lead compensation low-speed coil When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 SP082 IDAL D axis current lead compensation low-speed coil When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 20480 #13083 SP083 IQGL Q axis current gain low-speed coil When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 #13084 SP084 IDGL D axis current gain low-speed coil When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected. The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to each mo- tor used. Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) ---Setting range--- 1 to 8192 #13085 SP085 Not used. Set to "0". #13086 SP086 Not used. Set to "0". #13087 SP087 FHz4 Notch filter frequency 4 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 50 or more.) When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SP034/bitB-9 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) #13088 SP088 FHz5 Notch filter frequency 5 Set the vibration frequency to supp ress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 50 or more.) When not using, set to "0". Related parameters: SP034/bitF-D ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (Hz) #13089 SP089 TMKQ Spindle output stabilizing gain Q axis Set the magnification of the torque current stabili zing gain. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) When set to "0", the torque current stabilization is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #13090 SP090 TMKD Spindle output stabilizing gain D axis Set the magnification of the excitation current stabil izing gain. (For Mitsubishi Electric adjustment) When set to "0", the excitation current stabilization is disabled. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #13091 SP091 Not used. Set to "0". #13092 SP092 Not used. Set to "0". #13093 SP093 Not used. Set to "0". SP094 MPV Magnetic pole error detection speed In the magnetic pole position detection function, th e command motor speed and motor speed during the po- sition command stop are monitored. Set the command motor speed level and motor speed level during the position command stop in "r/min" unit. When the command motor speed level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position erro r is detected at 10r/min. Set to "10" as a standard setting when the magnetic pole position erro r detection function is enabled. This detects the magnetic pole position error when the motor speed is "100r/min". Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ------------ Command motor speed level (10r/min) Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones di git ----------- Motor spe ed level (10r/min) ---Setting range--- 0 to 31999 SP095 VIAX Lead compensation scale during high-response accel- eration/deceleration Set the magnification against delay/lead compensation (SP006) of the high-response acceleration/deceler- ation (valid when SP226/ bitD is set to "1"). Normally, set to "0". Set this parameter to s uppress overshooting when the speed is reached. ---Setting range--- 0 to 10000 (0.01%) SP096 SDW Speed slow down allowable width When the spindle slows down due to multiple cutti ng, set the processable speed as percentage against the NC command speed. If the speed reduces below the tolerable range, the alarm 23 (Excessive speed error) will occur. (E.g.) When set to 90 [%] If S1000 is commanded, the speed reduced by 900r/min (=1000r/min × 90%) is the allowable lower limit. Thus if the spindle speed reduces to 10 0r/min or below, the alarm will occur. When "0" is set, the magnif ication is the same as when "85" is set. When set to "-1", the allowable width will be disabled. ---Setting range--- -1,0 to 100 (%) SP097 RNG1ex Extension sub side encoder resolution When setting the machine side encoder resolution in puls e (p) unit, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SP097 (high-order) and SP019 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit. When SP097=0, the setting unit of SP019 is (kp). Refer to SP019 for details. Related parameters: SP019, SP020, SP098 ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 SP098 RNG2ex Extension main side encoder resolution When setting the motor side encoder resolution in pulse (p) unit, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SP098 (high-order) and SP020 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit. When SP098=0, the setting unit of SP020 is (kp). Refer to SP020 for details. Related parameters: SP019, SP020, SP097 ---Setting range--- -1 to 32767 SP099-SP105 Not used. Set to "0". #13106 SP106 PGM OMR-FF scale model gain Set the scale model gain (position response) in OMR-FF control. Set the same value as SV002(PGN). Increase the setting value to perform a high-speed machinin g such as a fine arc or to improve the path error. Lower the value when vibration occurs during acceleration/deceleration. Set to "0" when not using OMR-FF control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 300 (rad/s) #13107- SP107-SP111 13111 Not used. Set to "0". #13112 SP112 IFF OMR-FF current feed forward gain Set the current feed forwar d rate in OMR-FF control. The standard setting is "10000". Setting value of 0 is equal to "10000(100%)" setting. Set to "0" when not using OMR-FF control. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (0.01%) #13113 SP113 OPLP Current command value for open loop Set the current command value for when the open loop control is enabled. When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "50" is set. When not using, set to "0". The open loop control is enabled when "SP018/bit1" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) #13114 SP114 MKT Coil changeover gate cutoff timer Set the time required to cut off the gate when turning OFF/ON the coil switch contactor. The value should be longer than the coil switch contactor's OFF/ON time. The standard setting is "150". ---Setting range--- 0 to 3500 (ms) #13115 SP115 MKT2 Coil changeover current limit timer Set the time required to limit the current immediately af ter the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is completed and the gate is turned ON. The standard setting is "250". ---Setting range--- 0 to 3500 (ms) #13116 SP116 MKIL Coil changeover current limit value Set the time required to limit the current immediately af ter the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is completed and the gate is turned ON. The standard setting is "120". ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) #13117 SP117 SETM Excessive speed deviation timer Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm. Set the time requir ed to the machine. The standard setting is "12". ---Setting range--- 0 to 60 (s) SP118 MSFT Magnetic pole shift amount Set the magnetic pole shift amount of IPM spindle motor. During DC excitation of the initial setup: Set the same value displayed in the "AFLT gain" on the NC monitor screen in SP225/bit4=1. When not using, set to "0". ---Setting range--- -18000 to 18000 (electrical angle 0.01°) SP119 Not used. Set to "0". SP120 Not used. Set to "0". SP121 MP Kpp Magnetic pole detection position loop gain Set the position loop gain in the magnetic polar detection loop. This is used in the initial magnetic polar dete ction when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON. Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SP122 MP Kvp Magnetic pole detection speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain in the magnetic polar detection loop. This is used in the initial magnetic polar dete ction when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON. Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SP123 MP Kvi Magnetic pole detection speed loop lead compensation Set the speed loop lead compensation in the magnetic polar detection loop. This is used in the initial magnetic polar dete ction when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON. Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 SP124 ILMTsp Magnetic pole detection current limit value Set the current limit value for the magnetic polar detection loop. This is used in the initial magnetic polar dete ction when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON. Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) SP125 DA1NO D/A output ch1 data No. / Initial DC excitation level Input the desired data num ber to D/A output channel. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" to the axis that the data will not be output. When the DC excitation is running: Use in the DC excitation function. DC excitation: Set the initial excitation level when SP225/bit4=1. When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "20" is set. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 SP126 DA2NO D/A output ch2 data No. / Final DC excitation level Input the desired data num ber to D/A output channel. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" to the axis that the data will not be output. When the DC excitation is running: Use in the DC excitation function. DC excitation: Set the final excitation level when SP225/bit4=1. When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "50" is set. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 #13127 SP127 DA1MPY D/A output ch1 output scale / Initial DC excitation time Set the output scale in increments of 1/100. When "0" is set, the scale is the same as when "100" is set. When the DC excitation is running: Use in the DC excitation function. DC excitation: Set the initial excitation time when SP225/bit4=1. When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "10000" is set. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold) #13128 SP128 DA2MPY D/A output ch2 output scale Set the output scale in increments of 1/100. When "0" is set, the scale is the same as when "100" is set. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold) #13129- SP129-SP141 13141 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed coil) The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list. #13142 SP142 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed coil) The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list. For IPM spindle motor This parameter is used in initial magnet ic pole detection of IPM spindle motor. (1) Pulse application time: Set it in [ μ s] unit.(0 < application time < 350) (2) Pulse application coil: To select a low-speed coil, add 1000 to the pulse application time. (3) Polarity of estimated magnetic pole: When it is set to the reverse polarity, add "-" to the total of (1) and (2). E.g.: When performing 333 μ s pulse-applied magnetic pole estimation in a low-speed coil and selecting the reverse polarity for the estimated polarity SP142 = -(333+1000) = -1333 #13143- SP143-SP160 13160 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed coil) The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list. #13161- SP161-SP192 13192 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (Low-speed coil) The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list. #13193 SP193 LMR Change magnification for load meter standard output (High-speed coil) Set the standard output to be displayed as 100% in l oad meter using the short-time rated output ratio. To display the continuous rated ou tput as 100%, set as follows. Continuous rated output/S hort-time rated output × 100 When "0" is set, the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter will be the short-time rated output. (Note) When several output characteristics such as 15 -minute rating and 30-minute rating are plotted on the characteristics figure, set the change magnification fo r the characteristic with the highest rated output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SP194 LMN Base speed for load meter standard output (High-speed coil) Set the base speed of the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter. To display the continuous rated output as 100%, set th e base speed of the continuous rated output as fol- lows. Output (kW) Short-time rated output Continuous rated output Speed Base speed of short-time SP194 (r/min) rated output (LMN) When "0" is set, the base speed of the short-time ra ted output will be applied. (Note) When the speed is less than the base speed, the stand ard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter changes with the motor speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) SP195 LMRL Change magnification for load meter standard output (Low-speed coil) Set the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter using the short-time rated output ratio. To display the continuous rated output as 100%, set as follows. Continuous rated output/Shor t-time rated output × 100 When "0" is set, the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter will be the short-time rated output. (Note) When several output characteristics such as 15-minute rating and 30-minute rating are plotted on the characteristics figure, set the change magnification for the characteristic with the highest rated output. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #13196 SP196 LMNL Base speed for load meter standard output (Low-speed coil) Set the base speed of the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter. To display the continuous rated output as 100%, set the base speed of the continuous rated output as fol- lows. Output (kW) Short-time rated output Continuous rated output Speed Base speed of short-time SP196 (r/min) rated output (LMNL) When "0" is set, the base speed of the short-time rated output will be applied. (Note) When the speed is less than the base speed, the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter changes with the motor speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (r/min) #13197- SP197-SP198 13198 Not used. Set to "0". SP199 RTGM Real-time tuning: maximum adaptive gain multiplier In case that machine resonance is induced when mountin g a workpiece, the speed loop gain is switched au- tomatically in response to inertia by setting the sp eed loop gain and workpiece inertia multiplier in advance. The speed loop gain SP199(RTGM) changes in response to the estimated inertia ratio SP200(RTJX) based on the speed loop gain SP005(VGN1) and the inertia multiplier SP037(JL) which were adjusted when no workpiece was mounted. When SP199 is set to "0", the adaptation of the speed loop gain will be disabled. Speed control gain multiplier [%] RTGM (SP199) VGN1 (SP005) 㻌㻌 JL Estimated inertia ratio [%] (SP037) 㻌 RTJX (SP200) Related parameters: SP005, SP037, SP200 ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (%) SP200 RTJX Real-time tuning: maximum adaptive inertia ratio In case that machine resonance is induced when mountin g a workpiece, the speed loop gain is switched au- tomatically in response to inertia by setting the sp eed loop gain and workpiece inertia multiplier in advance. The speed loop gain SP199(RTGM) changes in response to the estimated inertia ratio SP200(RTJX) based on the speed loop gain SP005(VGN1) and the inertia multiplier SP037(JL) which were adjusted when no workpiece was mounted. When SP199 is set to "0", the adaptation of the speed loop gain will be disabled. Speed control gain multiplier [%] RTGM (SP199) VGN1 (SP005) 㻌㻌 JL (SP037) 㻌 RTJX Estimated inertia ratio [%] (SP200) Related parameters: SP005, SP037, SP199 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (%) #13201- SP201-SP224 13224 Not used. Set to "0". #13225 SP225 SFNC5 Spindle function 5 Select the spindle functions. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. mohn thtyp dcd ddir thno ovsn mken bit F-C: ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 non-sensitive band Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation type 3 in increments of 2°/1000. In the feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for the model po sition droop and ignore the model overshooting. Set to "2°/1000" as a standard. bit B-9: Not used. Set to "0". bit 8: mken Coil switch allowance in deceleration control This enables a coil changeover while decelerating after an emergency stop for a spindle motor with coil changeover specification. A coil changeover may enab le an excessive load inertia to stop within the maxi- mum delay time. 0: Normal (Disable) 1: Enable bit 7-6: thno Select the thermistor characteristics. When SP225/bit3=0 (N type) is selected bit7,6= 00: For Mitsubishi spindle motor 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited When SP225/bit3=1 (P type) is selected bit7,6= 00: KTY84-130 (Manufactured by Philips) 01: Setting prohibited 10: Pt1000 (Platinum resistance temperature detector) 11: Setting prohibited bit 5: ddir Proximity switch signal enable edge 0: Falling edge 1: Rising edge bit 4: dcd DC excitation mode 0: Normal 1: Start bit 3: thtyp Select the thermistor type. 0: Type N thermistor (Mits ubishi Electric standard) 1: Type P thermistor or platinum resistance temperature detector bit 2: mohn Thermistor temperature detection 0: Normal 1: Disable (Except for TS5690/5691) bit 1-0: Not used. Set to "0". SP226 SFNC6 Spindle function 6 Select the spindle functions. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. clof pon stod r2c tqof vup obs bit F : Not used. Set to "0". bit E : obs Disturbance observer 0: Normal 1: Enable bit D : vup High response acceleration / deceleration This suppresses a temporal delay wh ich occurs when the target speed is attained from acceleration and when the spindle stops from deceleration. 0: Normal acceleration/deceleration 1: High response acceleration/deceleration Enable bit C : tqof Spindle output stabilization during acceleration 0: Normal 1: Disable bit B-9 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 8 : r2c Temperature compensation adjustment indicator 0: Normal 1: Display bit 7 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 6 : stod 4D-2 detection disa bled during deceleration and stop 0: Normal 1: Alarm 4D-2 detection disabled during deceleration and stop bit 5 : pon IPM spindle pulse appl ication magnetic pole estimation 0: Normal 1: Enable bit 4 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 3 : clof Collision detection estimated disturbance torque offset 0: Disable 1: Enable bit 2-0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13227 SP227 SFNC7 Spindle function 7 Select the spindle functions. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. ccu dos3 dis bit F-C : dis Digital signal input selection 0: No signal 4: Proximity switch signal detection Other settings: setting prohibited bit B-A : dos3 Digital signal ou tput 3 selection (MDS-EJ-SP/SP2) bitB,A= 00: Disable 01: Setting prohibited 10: Contactor control signal output 11: Setting prohibited bit 9-3 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 2 : ccu Lost motion/overshoot compensation compensation amount setting unit 0: Short-time rated % 1: Short-time rated 0.01% bit 1-0 : Not used. Set to "0". #13228 SP228 SFNC8 Spindle function 8 Not used. Set to "0000". SP229 SFNC9 Spindle function 9 Select the spindle functions. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. omrffon sto sdt2 rps bit F-E : Not used. Set to "0". bit D : rps Safely limi ted speed setting unit 0: Normal 1: 100°/min bit C : sdt2 Specified speed output digital signal 2 output 0: Normal 1: Enable bit B-9 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 8 : sto Dedicated wiring STO function Set this parameter to use dedicated wiring STO function. 0: Dedicated wiring STO function unused 1: Dedicated wiring STO function used (Only for MDS-E/EH and MDS-EJ/EJH) bit 7-1 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 0 : omrffon OMR-FF control enabled 0: Disable 1: Enable SP230 SFNC10 Spindle function 10 Select the spindle functions. Functions are allocated to each bit. Set this in hexadecimal format. cse nohis pfdsr bit F-C : Not used. Set to "0". bit B : pfdsr Set the spindle stop operation at a power failure when th e deceleration and stop function at power failure is enabled. Normal (Coast to a stop at power failure) : 0 Deceleration and stop at power failure : 1 bit A-9 : Not used. Set to "0". bit 8 : nohis History of communication er ror alarm between NC and DRV(34,36,38,39) 0: Enable 1: Disable bit 7 : cse Spindle C axis command speed monitoring function 0: Normal setting (function disabled) 1: Function enabled bit 6-0 : Not used. Set to "0". Related parameters: SP055, SP056 #13231 SP231 Not used. Set to "0000". #13232 SP232 Not used. Set to "0000". #13233 SP233 IVC Voltage non-sensitive band compensation When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated. When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed. Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. If the value is too large, vibration or vibration noise may be generated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 (%) #13234 SP234 Not used. Set to "0". #13235 SP235 R2H Temperature compensation gain Set the magnification in converting the thermistor temperature to the control compensation amount. When "0" is set, the temperature co mpensation function is disabled. When not using, or when using an IPM spindle motor, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 400 (%) #13236 SP236 WIH Temperature compensation time constant Set the delay time constant from the thermistor temperature to the cont rol compensation amount. When "0" is set, the delay time constant is disabled. When not using, or when using an IPM spindle motor, set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 150 (min) #13237 SP237 TCF Torque command filter Set the filter for the torque command. The standard value is "500". ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (rad/s) #13238- SP238-SP240 13240 Not used. Set to "0". #13241- SP241-SP256 13256 This is automatically set by the NC system. SVSPEC Spindle-mode servo: Specification [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] bit0: Selection of position lo op gain when C axis is selected 0: Use the position loop gain (#52203 SV003, #52204 SV004, #52257 SV057) 1: Use the spindle sync control position l oop gain (#52249 SV049, #52250 SV050, #52258 SV058) bit1: Selection of sync tap cycle position loop gain 0: Use the position loop gain (#52203 SV003, #52204 SV004, #52257 SV057) 1: Use the spindle sync control position l oop gain (#52249 SV049, #52250 SV050, #52258 SV058) ---Setting range--- 00 to FFFF (HEX) svzsp Spindle-mode servo: Motor zero speed [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] Specify the motor rotation speed at which zero speed det ection is carried out. When the actual motor speed drops to the specified speed or belo w, the zero speed detection signal turns ON. The standard setting value is "50". When the setting value is "0", it is on the st andard setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000 (r/min) svsdts Spindle-mode servo: Speed detection set value [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] Specify the motor speed at which speed detection is ca rried out. When the actual motor speed drops to the specified speed or below, the speed detection signal turns ON. The standard setting value is 10% of the "#3001 slimt1" setting value. When the setting value is "0", it is on the standard setting value. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767(r/min) svtlm1 Spindle-mode servo: Torque limit 1 [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] Specify the torque limit value to be applied when Torque limit (Control input 1/bitA,9,8)=001. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) svtlm2 Spindle-mode servo: Torque limit 2 [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] Specify the torque limit value to be applied when Torque limit (Control input 1/bitA,9,8)=010. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) svtlm3 Spindle-mode servo: Torque limit 3 [Exclusive for spindle-mode servo motor] Specify the torque limit value to be applied when Torque limit (Control input 1/bitA,9,8)=011. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999 (Short-time rated %) SV001-SV256 Spindle-type Servo Parameters The description and setting range for these paramet ers are the same as Servo parameters "SV001" to "SV256". Refer to "Servo Parameters" for details. (Note) Set the same value to #52203 SV003(PGN) for the reference and synchronized spindles in spindle synchronization. nfiguration Parameters #7900 RCDAX_I Orthogonal coor dinate horizontal axis name Set the name of the horizontal axis in the orthogonal coordinate system. Set "0" when horizontal axis is not used. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications #7901 RCDAX_J Orthogonal coordinate vertical axis name Set the name of the vertical axis in the orthogonal coordinate system. Set "0" when vertical axis is not used. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications #7902 RCDAX_K Orthogonal coordinate height axis name Set the name of the height axis in the orthogonal coordinate system. Set "0" when height axis is not used. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications #7903 G92_CRD Origin zero set coordinate selection Select the coordinate to preset when issu ing an origin zero command (G92X_Y_Z_;). 0: Tool center coordinate 1: Holder center coordinate #7904 NO_TIP Tool handle feed function selection Select whether to enable the tool handle feed. 0: Enable (tool handle feed) 1: Disable (standard) #7905 NO_ABS Selection of tool axis tr avel amount display at manual ABS switch ON/OFF Select how to update the display of tool axis travel amount. 0: Update at ABS switch OFF 1: Update at every ON and OFF of ABS switch #7906 PASSTYP Singular point passage type Select the movement after passing a singular point. 0: Type 1 A/B axis rotation angle will be in the same sign direct ion as that when the tool center point control started. 1: Type 2 C axis rotation amount on the singular point will be smaller. #7907 CHK_ANG Near singular judgment angle Set the angle for judging a position near the singular point. When "0.000" is set, it will operate as 1.000 (°). ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 5.000 (°) #7908 SLCT_PRG_COORD Programming coordinate system selection Select the coordinate system for the programming coordinate. 0: Table coordinate system (coordinate syst em that rotates together with workpiece) 1: Workpiece coordinate system IJK_VEC_MR Posture vector mirror image selection Select whether to enable the mirror image on the post ure vector (IJK) when Type 2 is selected in "#7906 PASSTYP". 0: Disable 1: Enable SLCT_INT_MODE Interpolation method selection Select the interpolation method. When combining spline interpolation 2 and tool center poi nt control, only the joint interpolation method is val- id. 0: Joint interpolation method 1: Single axis rotation interpolation method SLCT_STANDARD_POS Reference position of rotary axis Select the reference point of the rotary axis. 0: The workpiece coordinate origin 1: The position at the time when tool center point command is issued (Note) Even if the position is change d, it is not changed during tool cent er point control. It is changed when next tool center point control will be commanded. NO_MANUAL Selection of 3-dimensional manual feed Select whether to enable the 3-dimensional manual feed 0: Enable (3-dimensional manual feed) 1: Disable (standard manual feed) MCHN_SPEED_CTRL Machine sp eed fluctuatio n suppression Select whether to suppress the machine speed fluctuation due to rotary axis movement. 0: Not suppress 1: Suppress (Note) This parameter is disabled when SSS control is enabled. ROT_PREFILT Rotary axis prefilter time constant Set the time constant for rotary axis prefilter. Setting this parameter can smoothen the tool angle chan ge (rotary axis' motion) under tool center point con- trol. Possible to do this setting on [High- accuracy parameter] screen, which you can reach by going to [Setup] Screen and selecting [User parameter]. When set to "0", "Rotary axis prefiltering" will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0 to 200 (ms) SLCT_SLOPE_CRD_MOD Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machin- ing Set the basic position of rotary axis to establish the feature coordinate system when inclined surface machin- ing is commanded. * The position will not change when inclined surface machining is running. It will change when the next in- clined surface machining is commanded. 0: At zero degree 1: At the start position ROT_ERR_MODE Rotation center error compensation method Select the compensation method of rotation center error. 0: Compensation with orthogonal axis only. 1: Compensation with orthogonal and rotary axes. #7917 SLCT_G53_6_ROTAX G53.6 rotary axes rotation order Specify in which order to rotate the rotary axes wh en the address Q is unspecified in G53.6 and when the number of simultaneous contour control axes is limited to 4. 0: In the order of primary and secondary rotary axes 1: In the order of secondary and primary rotary axes #7918 SLCT_ROTAX_ANS Selection of solution for defining primary rotary axis an- gle Select the solution that defines the calculated angle of the primary rotary axis when address P is omitted from G53.1 or G53.6 command. 0: Default solution of each machine type 1: Solution that makes the primary rotary axis value positive 2: Solution that makes the prim ary rotary axis value negative #7920 SLCT_T1 Rotary axis selection Select in which axis direction to rotate the base-side ro tary axis of the rotary head. When the base-side rotary axis is tilting, use the tens place to select the axis around which the rotary axis is tilted. 0: Invalid 1: I axis 2: J axis 3: K axis 1x: Tilted around I axis 2x: Tilted around J axis 3x: Tilted around K axis (Note) A value from 0 to 99 can be set from the screen . However when an invalid value is set, the operation error (M01 0127) occurs at the power ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32 #7921 TIANGT1 Tilt angle Set the tilt angle if the base-side rotary axis of the rota ry head is tilted. Set the angle with the CCW direction of the tilted plane being defined as the positive direction. ---Setting range--- -89.999 to 89.999 (°) #7922 ROTAXT1 Rotary axis name Set the name of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications #7923 DIR_T1 Rotation direction Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis. The rotation direction specifications vary according to the setting of "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" (Select specifi- cations of rotation direction parameter). - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "0" The specifications vary for each function. - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "1" The specifications are common to the functions. 0: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in right-hand screw direction, it is taken as the pos- itive direction. 1: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in left-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. COFST1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis and the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) COFST1V Vertical axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis and the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) COFST1T Height axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the height axis direction between th e rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis and the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) CERRT1H Horizontal axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the horizont al axis direction of t he tool rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is J axis rota tion, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is K axis rota tion, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) CERRT1V Vertical axis rotati on center position deviation Set the position deviation in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is J axis rota tion, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. When tool rotating type base rotary axis is K axis rota tion, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) LCT_T2 Rotary axis selection Select in which axis direction to rotate the tool-side ro tary axis of the rotary head. When the tool-side rotary axis is tilting, use the tens place to select the axis around which the rotary axis is tilted. 0: Invalid 1: I axis 2: J axis 3: K axis 1x: Tilted around I axis 2x: Tilted around J axis 3x: Tilted around K axis (Note) A value from 0 to 99 can be set from the screen . However when an invalid value is set, the operation error (M01 0127) occurs at the power ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32 #7931 TIANGT2 Tilt angle Set the tilt angle if the tool-side rota ry axis of the rotary head is tilted. Set the angle with the CCW direction of the tilted plane being defined as the positive direction. ---Setting range--- -89.999 to 89.999 (°) #7932 ROTAXT2 Rotary axis name Set the name of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications #7933 DIR_T2 Rotation direction Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis. The rotation direction specifications vary according to the setting of "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" (Select specifi- cations of rotation direction parameter). - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "0" The specifications vary for each function. - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "1" The specifications are common to the functions. 0: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in right-hand screw direction, it is taken as the pos- itive direction. 1: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in left-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. #7934 COFST2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation center of the tool-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7935 COFST2V Vertical axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation center of the tool-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7936 COFST2T Height axis rotation center offset Set the distance in the height axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation center of the tool-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7937 CERRT2H Horizontal axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the horizontal axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis rotation center. When tool rotating type tool rotary axis is I ax is rotation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. When tool rotating type tool rotary axis is J axis rota tion, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When tool rotating type tool rotary axis is K axis ro tation, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) CERRT2V Vertical axis rotati on center position deviation Set the position deviation in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis rotation center. When tool rotating type tool rota ry axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When tool rotating type tool rotary axis is J axis rota tion, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. When tool rotating type tool rotary axis is K axis ro tation, set the position dev iation of J axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) SLCT_W1 Rotary axis selection Select in which axis direction to rotate the base-side rota ry axis of the rotary table. When the base-side rotary axis is tilting, use the tens place to select the axis around which the rotary axis is tilted. 0: Invalid 1: I axis 2: J axis 3: K axis 1x: Tilted around I axis 2x: Tilted around J axis 3x: Tilted around K axis (Note) A value from 0 to 99 can be set from the screen . However when an invalid value is set, the operation error (M01 0127) occurs at the power ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32 TIANGW1 Tilt angle Set the tilt angle if the base-s ide rotary axis of the rotary table is t ilted. Set the angle with the CCW direction of the tilted plane being defi ned as the negative direction. ---Setting range--- -89.999 to 89.999 (°) ROTAXW1 Rotary axis name Set the name of the table rotating type base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications DIR_W1 Rotation direction Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type base-side rotary axis. The rotation direction specifications vary according to the setting of "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" (Select specifi- cations of rotation direction parameter). - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "0" The specifications vary for each function. - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "1" The specifications are co mmon to the functions. 0: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in right-hand screw direction, it is taken as the pos- itive direction. 1: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in left-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. COFSW1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the di stance in the horizontal axis direction from the machine zero point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7945 COFSW1V Vertical axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the dist ance in the vertical axis direction from the machine zero point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7946 COFSW1T Height axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the di stance in the height axis direction from the machine zero point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7947 CERRW1H Horizontal axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the horizontal axis direction of the table rotating type base-side rotary axis rota- tion center. When table rotating type base rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. When table rotating type base rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the position deviation of K axis rota- tion. When table rotating type base rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the position devi ation of I axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) #7948 CERRW1V Vertical axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the vertical axis direction of the table rotating type base -side rotary axis rotation center. When table rotating type base rotary axis is I ax is rotation, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When table rotating type base rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. When table rotating type base rotary axis is K axis ro tation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) #7950 SLCT_W2 Rotary axis selection Select in which axis direction to ro tate the workpiece-side rotary axis of the rotary table. When the workpiece- side rotary axis is tilting, use the tens place to select the axis around which the rotary axis is tilted. 0: Invalid 1: I axis 2: J axis 3: K axis 1x: Tilted around I axis 2x: Tilted around J axis 3x: Tilted around K axis (Note) A value from 0 to 99 can be set from the screen . However when an invalid value is set, the operation error (M01 0127) occurs at the power ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32 #7951 TIANGW2 Tilt angle Set the tilt angle if the workpiece-side rotary axis of the rotary table is tilted. Set the angle with the CCW di- rection of the tilted plane being defined as the negative direction. ---Setting range--- -89.999 to 89.999 (°) ROTAXW2 Rotary axis name Set the name of the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 0: Mechanical axis specifications DIR_W2 Rotation direction Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis. The rotation direction specifications vary according to the setting of "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" (Select specifi- cations of rotation direction parameter). - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "0" The specifications vary for each function. - When "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit3" = "1" The specifications are co mmon to the functions. 0: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in right-hand screw direction, it is taken as the pos- itive direction. 1: When the tool motion viewed from the workpiece is in left-hand screw direction, it is taken as the positive direction. COFSW2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the dist ance in the horizontal axis direction between rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) COFSW2V Vertical axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the distance in the vertical ax is direction between rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) COFSW2T Height axis rotation center offset When all axes are at the machine zero point, set the di stance in the height axis direction between rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) CERRW2H Horizontal axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the horiz ontal axis direction of the table rota ting type workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center. When table rotating type workpiece side rota ry axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. When table rotating type workpiece side rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the position devi- ation of K axis rotation. When table rotating type workpiec e side rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the position deviation of I axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) CERRW2V Vertical axis rotation center position deviation Set the position deviation in the vertical axis direction of the table rota ting type workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center. When table rotating type workpiece side rota ry axis is I axis rotation, set the position deviation of K axis rotation. When table rotating type workpiece si de rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the position de- viation of I axis rotation. When table rotating type workpi ece side rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the position deviation of J axis rotation. * Radius value is need to be set. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) (Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit)) #7960 Rot1 Ang Geo Dev1 Angular deviation 1 of center line of 1st rotary axis When 1st rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the angular de viation of J axis rotation. When 1st rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the angular deviation of K axis rotati on. When 1st rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the an- gular deviation of I axis rotation. ---Setting range--- -1.000000 to 1.000000 (deg) #7961 Rot1 Ang Geo Dev2 Angular deviation 2 of center line of 1st rotary axis When 1st rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the angular de viation of K axis rotation. When 1st rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the angular deviation of I axis rotation. When 1st rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the angular deviation of J axis rotation. ---Setting range--- -1.000000 to 1.000000 (deg) #7962 Rot2 Ang Geo Dev1 Angular deviation 1 of center line of 2nd rotary axis When 2nd rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the angular deviation of J axis rotation. When 2nd rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the angular deviation of K axis rotation. When 2nd rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the an- gular deviation of I axis rotation. ---Setting range--- -1.000000 to 1.000000 (deg) #7963 Rot2 Ang Geo Dev2 Angular deviation 2 of center line of 2nd rotary axis When 2nd rotary axis is I axis rotation, set the angular deviation of K axis rotation. When 2nd rotary axis is J axis rotation, set the angular deviation of I axis rotati on. When 2nd rotary axis is K axis rotation, set the an- gular deviation of J axis rotation. ---Setting range--- -1.000000 to 1.000000 (deg) T0 - T703 PLC timer <10ms/100ms> Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder). The 10ms timer and 100ms timer ar e identified by the command used. (Note1) This setting value is valid when bit selection parameter "#6449/bit0" is set to "0". (Note2) Setting the timer setting va lue from the setting and display unit The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods. - Method to validate the setting value (Kn) prog rammed with the sequence program (fixed timer) - Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable timer) (Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of timer T and No. of points can be set with the bit selection parameters (#6454/bit0 to bit3). - #6454/bit0=0, bit1=0, bit2=0, bit3=0 No. of points: 0 Range: None Setting method: All fixed timers - #6454/bit0=1, bit1=0, bit2=0, bit3=0 No. of points: 100 Range: #16000 to #16099 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=0, bit1=1, bit2=0, bit3=0 No. of points: 200 Range: #16000 to #16199 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=1, bit1=1, bit2=0, bit3=0 No. of points: 300 Range: #16000 to #16299 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=0, bit1=0, bit2=1, bit3=0 No. of points: 400 Range: #16000 to #16399 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=1, bit1=0, bit2=1, bit3=0 No. of points: 500 Range: #16000 to #16499 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=0, bit1=1, bit2=1, bit3=0 No. of points: 600 Range: #16000 to #16599 Setting method: Set above range with variable timers. - #6454/bit0=1, bit1=1, bit2=1, bit3=0 No. of points: All points Range: #16000 to #16703 Setting method: All variable timers ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767( x 10ms or x 100ms) #17000- ST0 - ST63 PLC integrated timer <100ms INC.> 17063 Set the time for the integrated timer used with the PLC program (ladder). (Note1) This setting value is valid when bit se lection parameter "#6449/ bit0" is set to "0". (Note2) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit The timer ST setting value can be set with the following two methods. - Method to validate the setting value (K n) programmed with the sequence program (fixed timer) - Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable integrated timer) (Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of timer ST and No. of points can be set with the bit selection parameters (#6453/bit5 to bit7). - #6453/bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 0 Range: None Setting method: All fixed integrated timers - #6453/bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 20 Range: #17000 to #17019 Setting method: Set above range with variable integrated timer. - #6453/bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: 40 Range: #17000 to #17039 Setting method: Set above range with variable integrated timer. - #6453/bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: All points Range: #17000 to #17063 Setting method: All variable integrated timers ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767( x 100ms) C000 - C255 Counter Set the time for the counter used with the PLC program (ladder). (Note1) This setting value is valid when bit selection parameter "#6449/bit1" is set to "0". (Note2) Setting the counter setting va lue from the setting and display unit The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods. - Method to validate the setting value (Kn) prog rammed with the sequence program (fixed counter) - Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable counter) (Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of co unter C and No. of points can be set with the bit se- lection parameters (#6454/bit4 to bit7). - #6454/bit4=0, bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 0 Range: None Setting method: All fixed counters - #6454/bit4=1, bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 40 Range: #17200 to #17239 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=0, bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 80 Range: #17200 to #17279 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=1, bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0 No. of points: 120 Range: #17200 to #17319 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=0, bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: 160 Range: #17200 to #17359 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=1, bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: 200 Range: #17200 to #17399 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=0, bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: 240 Range: #17200 to #17439 Setting method: Set above range with variable counter. - #6454/bit4=1, bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0 No. of points: All points Range: #17200 to #17455 Setting method: All variable counters ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 #18001- R7500,7501 - R7798,7799 PLC constant (Base area) 18150 Set the value to be set in the data type R register used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that correspo nds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed, the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once, and then select this screen again. ---Setting range--- -2 to the power of 31 to 2 to the power of 31 -1 #18151- R8300,8301 - R9798,9799 PLC constant (Extension area) 18900 Set the value to be set in the data type R registe r(R8300 to R9799) used in the PLC program (ladder). The area is valid for the number of PLC constant extension points "#1326 PLC Const Ext. Num" setting value, starting with #18151. Even if the data is set in the R register that correspo nds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed, the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once, and then select this screen again. #18151 to #18900 is used as the PLC constant extended area. The area is valid for the number of PLC constant ex tension points ("#1326 PLC Const Ext. Num" setting val- ue), starting with #18151. ---Setting range--- -2 to the power of 31 to 2 to the power of 31 -1 R7897) that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter Enter a different screen once, and then select this screen again. #6449 to rs used by MITSUBISHI. R7800-Low - R7823-High Bit selection These bit type parameters are used in the user PLC (ladder). R7824-Low Bit selection bit7: Control unit thermal alarm valid bit6: Setting and display unit thermal management valid (This function may not be available for some NC models.) bit5: Set to "0". bit4: Battery alarm/warning detection disabled (Note) When the parameter is set to "1", the "Battery alarm" signal and the "Battery warning" signal will not be turned ON, and the alarm messages will not be displayed. bit3: Counter C retention bit2: Integrated timer ST retention bit1: PLC counter program valid bit0: PLC timer program valid R7824-High Bit selection bit7: Set to "0". bit6: External alarm message display (This function may not be available for some NC models.) bit5: Alarm/operator change (This function may not be available for some NC models.) bit4: Full screen display of message (This function may not be available for some NC models.) bit3: Set to "0". bit2: Operator message valid bit1: Alarm message display interface 1: R method 0: F method bit0: Alarm message valid R7825-Low Bit selection bit7-3: Set to "0". bit2: Built-in edit function edit invalid (This f unction may not be available for some NC models.) bit1: Set to "0". bit0: Built-in edit function valid (This function may not be available for some NC models.) R7825-High Bit selection bit7: Set to "0". bit6: Branch destination label check valid bit5: Set to "0". bit4: Serial handy terminal communication valid bit3-0: Set to "0". R7826-Low Bit selection bit7-5: Integrated timer ST Variabl e/fixed Number of points setting bit4: Set to "0". bit3: Operation by the menu [Ladder Monitor] 0: Screen can transit to PLC on-board screen after MTB password is input. 1: Screen can transit to PLC on-boa rd screen without MTB password input. bit2-0: Message language change code #6454 R7826-High Bit selection bit7-4: Counter C Variable/fixed Number of points setting bit3-0: Timer T Variable/fixed Number of points setting #6455 R7827-Low Bit selection bit7: Enable ladder program writing during RUN bit6: Enable ladder program writing during RUN (in high-speed processing) bit5-4: Set to "0". bit3: Display type switching for operator message 1: R method 0: F method bit2-0: R device access variables decimal point valid region #6456 R7827-High Bit selection bit7-5: Set to "0". bit4: Motor insulation deterioration detection ON bit3: Set to "0". bit2: PLC/PLF instruction Hold ing PLC in STOP state valid bit1-0: Set to "0". #6457-6458 R7828-Low - R7828-High Bit selection High-speed input specification 1 #6459-6460 R7829-Low - R7829-High Bit selection High-speed input specification 2 #6461-6462 R7830-Low - R7830-High Bit selection High-speed output specification 1 #6463-6464 R7831-Low - R7831-High Bit selection High-speed output specification 2 #6465-6466 R7832-Low - R7832-High Bit selection High-speed input specification 3 #6467-6468 R7833-Low - R7833-High Bit selection High-speed input specification 4 #6469-6470 R7834-Low - R7834-High Bit selection Set to "0". #6471 R7835-Low Bit selection Set to "0". #6472 R7835-High Bit selection Set to "0". #6473-6474 R7836-Low - R7836-High Bit selection High-speed output specification 3 #6475-6476 R7837-Low - R7837-High Bit selection High-speed output specification 4 #6477-6480 R7838-Low - R7839-High Bit selection Set to "0". #6481-6496 R7840-Low - R7847-High Bit selection This is reserved for debugging by MITSUBISHI. Set to "0". #6497-6596 R7848-Low - R7897-High Bit selection These bit type parameters are used in the user PLC (ladder). mpensation Parameters Pinc Machine error compensation increment method Select the method to set the machine error compensation data. 0: Absolute amount method 1: Incremental amount method cmpax Base axis <n-th axis> Set the name of the base axis for machine error compensation. (1) For the pitch error compensation, set the name (#1013 axname) of the axis to be compensated. (2) For the relative position compensation, set the name (#1013 axname) of the axis to be used as the refer- ence. For a system configured wit h a single part system, set the axis name only. For a system configured with multiple part systems, set the part system number and the axis name. (Example) Z axis of the 2nd part system: 2Z This parameter can also be set with the axis name and the serial number. (Example) When $1: with C axis, $2: without C axis, a nd $3: with C axis, the C axis of the 3rd part system ($3) is set with "C2". To set a PLC axis as the base axis, set it with P and the serial number of the PLC axis. (Example) 3rd PLC axis: P3 ---Setting range--- Axis name, e.g. X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B and C Part system number + Axis name, e.g. 1X, 1Y, 1Z, 2X, 2Y and 2Z Axis name + Serial number of the axis, e.g. X1, Y1, Z1, P1, P2 and P3 drcax Compensation axis <n-th axis> Set the name of the compensation axis for machine error compensation. (1) For the pitch error compensation, set the same axis name as in "#4001 cmpax". (2) For the relative position compensation, set the nam e (#1013 axname) of the axis to be actually compen- sated. For a system configured wit h a single part system, set the axis name only. For a system configured with multiple part systems, set the part system number and the axis name. (Example) Z axis of the 2nd part system: 2Z This parameter can also be set with the axis name and the serial number. (Example) When $1: with C axis, $2: without C axis, a nd $3: with C axis, the C axis of the 3rd part system ($3) is set with "C2". To set a PLC axis as the compensation axis, set it with P and the serial number of the PLC axis. (Example) 3rd PLC axis: P3 ---Setting range--- Axis name, e.g. X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B and C Part system number + Axis name, e.g. 1X, 1Y, 1Z, 2X, 2Y and 2Z Axis name + Serial number of the axis, e.g. X1, Y1, Z1, P1, P2 and P3 #4003 rdvno Division point number at reference position <n-th axis> Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the refe rence position. As the refe rence position is actually the base position, there is no compensation No. Th erefore set the number that is decremented by 1. (Note) When bidirectional pitch error compensation is enabled, set compensation data No. corresponding to reference point in shifting in plus direction. ---Setting range--- 4101 to 5124 #4004 mdvno Division point number at the most negative side <n-th axis> Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the negative side. (Note) When the axis moves in positive direction wit h bidirectional pitch error compensation enabled, set compensation data No. of which locates on the neare st point to negative side. The compensation point should be set with even number. ---Setting range--- 4101 to 5124 #4005 pdvno Division point number at the most positive side <n-th axis> Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the positive side. (Note) When the axis moves in negative direction wit h bidirectional pitch error compensation enabled, set compensation data No. of which locates on the nearest point to positive side. The compensation point should be set with even number. ---Setting range--- 4101 to 5124 #4006 sc Compensation scale factor <n-th axis> Set the scale factor for the compensation amount. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99 #4007 spcdv Division interval <n-th axis> Set the interval to divide the basic axis. Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these intervals. ---Setting range--- 0.001 to 9999.999 (mm) #4008 twopc Bidirectional pitch error compensation <n-th axis> Select whether to enable bidirectional pitch error compensation. 0: Disable 1: Enable #4009 refcmp Reference position compensation amount <n-th axis> When bidirectional pitch error compensation is enabled, set the compensation amount of the reference po- sition when the axis moves to the position from t he opposite direction of the zero point return. (Note) The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value with the compensation scale. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 #4101-5999 Set the compensation amount for each axis. (Note) The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value with the compensation scale. ---Setting range--- -32768 to 32767 M[01] Code Set the M code used for calling out the macro with the M command. Select codes to be entered other t han the codes basically required by the machine and M codes of M0, M1, M2, M30, M96 through M99, and M198. This is valid when "#1195 Mmac" is set to "1". ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 M[01] TYPE Specify the macro call type. 0: Equivalent to M98 P****; 1: Equivalent to G65 P****; 2: Equivalent to G66 P****; 3: Equivalent to G66.1 P****; 4: Equivalent to G144 D0 A****; (Sub part system control II complete wait method) 5: Equivalent to G144 D1 A****; (Sub part system control II parallel process method) M[01] Program No. Set the No. of the program or file name to be calle d out. The file name can contain up to 32 characters. ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) M[02] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". M[02] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". M[02] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". M[03] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". M[03] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". M[03] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". M[04] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". M[04] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". M[04] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". M[05] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". M[05] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". M[05] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". M[06] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". #7052 M[06] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". #7053 M[06] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". #7061 M[07] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". #7062 M[07] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". #7063 M[07] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". #7071 M[08] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". #7072 M[08] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". #7073 M[08] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". #7081 M[09] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". #7082 M[09] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". #7083 M[09] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". #7091 M[10] Code The setting method is same as "#7001". #7092 M[10] Type The setting method is same as "#7002". #7093 M[10] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7003". #7102 M2mac Type Set the type for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the "#1170 M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 #7103 M2mac Program No. Set the program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the "#1170 M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) #7201 G[01] Code Set the G code to be used when calling the macro with a G command. Do not set a G code used in the system. G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro I codes . However, if a parameter is set for the G code call code, the G code call will have the priority, and these cannot be used as the user macro I. ---Setting range--- 1 to 999 G[01] Type Specify the macro call type. 0: Equivalent to M98 P****; 1: Equivalent to G65 P****; 2: Equivalent to G66 P****; 3: Equivalent to G66.1 P****; ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 G[01] Program No. Set the No. of the program or file name to be calle d out. The file name can contain up to 32 characters. ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) G[02] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[02] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". G[02] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". G[03] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[03] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". G[03] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". G[04] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[04] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". G[04] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". G[05] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[05] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". G[05] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". G[06] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[06] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". G[06] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". G[07] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". G[07] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". #7263 G[07] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". #7271 G[08] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". #7272 G[08] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". #7273 G[08] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". #7281 G[09] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". #7282 G[09] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". #7283 G[09] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". #7291 G[10] Code The setting method is same as "#7201". #7292 G[10] Type The setting method is same as "#7202". #7293 G[10] Program No. The setting method is same as "#7203". #7302 Smac Type Set the type No. for when calling the macro with an S command. This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 #7303 Smac Program No. Set the program No. for when calling the macro with an S command. This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) #7312 Tmac Type Set the type for when calling the macro with a T command. This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 #7313 Tmac Program No. Set the program No. for when calling the macro with a T command. This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to "1". The setting method is same as "M call macro". ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) Man Tmac prg No. Specify the macro program number to be called with t he T code input through a manual numerical value com- mand. When a nonzero value is set in the parameter, macro call is executed irrespective of the setting of "#1197 Tmac". ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) (Setting is cleared when "0" is set) G200 type Specify the macro call type. 0: Equivalent to M98P P****; 1: Equivalent to G65P P****; 2: Equivalent to G66P P****; 3: Equivalent to G66.1P P****; ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 G200 program No. Specify the figures in the hundreds and higher pl aces of the macro program No. to be called. ---Setting range--- 90 to 99, or 1000100 to 1999999 (Note) To set the program No. to "1000100 to 1999999" , set the macro call out type to 0 (M98) or 1 (G65). G300 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G300 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". G400 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G400 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". G500 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G500 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". G600 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G600 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". G700 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G700 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". G800 type The setting method is same as "#7322". G800 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". #7392 G900 type The setting method is same as "#7322". #7393 G900 program No. The setting method is same as "#7323". #7401 ASCII[01] Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to 7405) are validated. 0: Disable 1: Enable #7402 ASCII[01] Code Set the ASCII code used to ca ll macros with the ASCII code. L system: A,B,D,F, H,I,J,K,M,Q,R,S,T M system: A,B,F,H,I,K,M,Q,R,S,T #7403 ASCII[01] Type Set the macro call type. 0: M98 1: G65 2: G66 3: G66.1 #7404 ASCII[01] Program No. Set the program No. ca lled with macro call. ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) #7405 ASCII[01] Variable When the call type is "0", set the va riable No. set a fter the ASCII code. ---Setting range--- 100 to 149 #7411 ASCII[02] Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to 7415) are validated. 0: Disable 1: Enable #7412 ASCII[02] Code Set the ASCII code used to ca ll macros with the ASCII code. L system: A,B,D,F, H,I,J,K,M,Q,R,S,T M system: A,B,F,H,I,K,M,Q,R,S,T #7413 ASCII[02] Type Set the macro call type. 0: M98 1: G65 2: G66 3: G66.1 #7414 ASCII[02] Program No. Set the program No. ca lled with macro call. ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters) #7415 ASCII[02] Variable When the call type is "0", set the va riable No. set a fter the ASCII code. ---Setting range--- 100 to 149 Gmac initial Gcode Specify the initial G code to be used when the macro call via G command is set all at once. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 Gmac batch type Select the type of the macro call. 0: equivalent to M98 P****; 1: equivalent to G65 P****; 2: equivalent to G66 P****; 3: equivalent to G66.1 P****; Others: equivalent to M98 P****; Gmac initial prog. Specify the initial program No. to be used when the macro call via G command is set all at once. This parameter cannot be specified with the file name. When the parameter is set to "0", the batch settings of the macro call via G command will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Gmac qty of macros Specify the number of sequential macr o programs to be called when the macro call via G command is set all at once. When the parameter is set to "0", the batch settings of the macro call via G command will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 Gm.n initial Gcode Specify the initial G code to be used when the macro call via G command with decimal point is set all at once. ---Setting range--- 0.0 to 999.9 Gm.n batch type Select the type of the macro call. 0: equivalent to M98 P****; 1: equivalent to G65 P****; 2: equivalent to G66 P****; 3: equivalent to G66.1 P****; Others: equivalent to M98 P****; Gm.n initial prog. Specify the initial program No. to be used when the ma cro call via G command with decimal point is set all at once. This parameter cannot be specified with the file name. When the parameter is set to "0", the batch settings of the macro call via G command with decimal point will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 Gm.n qty of macros Specify the number of sequential macro programs to be called when the macro call via G command with dec- imal point is set all at once. When the parameter is set to "0", the batch settings of the macro call via G command with decimal point will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 #56501 Gm.n[01] code Specify the G code to be used for the macro call via G command with decimal point. Specify it with one dec- imal place. When the parameter is set to "0.0", the macro ca ll via G command with decimal point will be invalid. ---Setting range--- 0.0 to 999.9 #56502 Gm.n[01] type Select the type of the macro call. 0: equivalent to M98 P****; 1: equivalent to G65 P****; 2: equivalent to G66 P****; 3: equivalent to G66.1 P****; Others: equivalent to M98 P****; #56503 Gm.n[01] prog. No. Specify the number of the program or the name of the file to be called up. The file name can be up to 32 characters long. ---Setting range--- Program name or file name (up to 32 characters long) #56511 Gm.n[02] code The setting method is same as "#56501". #56512 Gm.n[02] type The setting method is same as "#56502". #56513 Gm.n[02] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". #56521 Gm.n[03] code The setting method is same as "#56501". #56522 Gm.n[03] type The setting method is same as "#56502". #56523 Gm.n[03] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". #56531 Gm.n[04] code The setting method is same as "#56501". #56532 Gm.n[04] type The setting method is same as "#56502". #56533 Gm.n[04] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". #56541 Gm.n[05] code The setting method is same as "#56501". #56542 Gm.n[05] type The setting method is same as "#56502". #56543 Gm.n[05] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". #56551 Gm.n[06] code The setting method is same as "#56501". #56552 Gm.n[06] type The setting method is same as "#56502". Gm.n[06] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". Gm.n[07] code The setting method is same as "#56501". Gm.n[07] type The setting method is same as "#56502". Gm.n[07] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". Gm.n[08] code The setting method is same as "#56501". Gm.n[08] type The setting method is same as "#56502". Gm.n[08] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". Gm.n[09] code The setting method is same as "#56501". Gm.n[09] type The setting method is same as "#56502". Gm.n[09] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". Gm.n[10] code The setting method is same as "#56501". Gm.n[10] type The setting method is same as "#56502". Gm.n[10] prog. No. The setting method is same as "#56503". #7500 Pcheck High-speed switching of position switch Specify whether to perform position switch area checking at high speeds. 0: Do not perform position switch area checking at high speed (do it the same as before). 1: Perform position switch area checking at high speed. #7501+10(n-1) PSWn axis Axis name "n" represents the position switch No. (n=1 to 24) Specify the name of the axis for which a position switch is provided. ---Setting range--- X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address #7502+10(n-1) PSWn dog1 Imaginary dog position 1 "n" represents the position switch No. (n=1 to 24) When the machine enters the range between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, a signal is output to the PLC. For the device No., refer to the PLC Interface Manual. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7503+10(n-1) PSWn dog2 Imaginary dog position 2 "n" represents the position switch No. (n=1 to 24) When the machine enters the range between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, a signal is output to the PLC. For the device No., refer to the PLC Interface Manual. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #7504+10(n-1) PSWn check Selection of area check method "n" represents the position switch No. (n=1 to 24) When position switch area checking at high speed is se lected, specify the mode of area checking, i.e., wheth- er to use the command type machine position or enc oder feedback position, for each position switch. 0: Use the command type machine position as the ma chine position for position switch area checking. 1: Use the encoder feedback position as the ma chine position for position switch area checking. (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" set in "#7500 Pcheck". RIO dev assign RIO device allocation method Select whether the fixed allocation method or arbitrar y allocation method is used to assign devices to each remote I/O unit station. 0: Fixed allocation 1: Arbitrary allocation RIO CH No. #1 Remote I/O channel No. for allocation Specify the channel No. of the 1st remote I/O unit station. * When 0 is set, all the RIO allocation parameters of the 1st station will be disabled. ---Setting range--- 0, 1 to 3 RIO Station No. #1 Remote I/O station No. for allocation Specify the station No. of the 1st remote I/O unit station. * Set this parameter to be the same as the rotary swit ch of the remote I/O unit to which PLC devices are assigned. ---Setting range--- 0 to 63 DI dev name #1 DI device name #1 Specify the name of DI allocation device s for the 1st remote I/O unit station. * When 0 is set, this will be left blank. ---Setting range--- 0, X, R, ZR DI dev No. #1 DI device number #1 Specify the head device No. of DI allocation devices for the 1st remote I/O unit station. For device X: Hexadecimal For others: Decimal * This parameter changes to "0" if you change the device name "DI dev name #1". * Specify "DI dev name #1" ahead of this parameter. * The devices corresponding to the occupied station of the operation panel cannot be set. ---Setting range--- Decimal: 0 to 65535 Hexadecimal: 0 to FFFF DO dev name #1 DO device name #1 Specify the name of DO allocation devices for the 1st remote I/O unit station. * When 0 is set, this will be left blank. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, R, ZR DO dev No. #1 DO device number #1 Specify the head device No. of DO allocation devices for the 1st remote I/O unit station. For device Y: Hexadecimal For others: Decimal * This parameter changes to "0" if you change the device name "DO dev name #1". * Specify "DO dev name #1" ahead of this parameter. * The devices corresponding to the occupied station of the operation panel cannot be set. ---Setting range--- Decimal: 0 to 65535 Hexadecimal: 0 to FFFF #53017 DI Hi-Spd #1 High-speed input designation #1 Select at which speed to input 32 points of input data to the 1st remote I/O unit station: PLC high-speed or PLC medium-speed. 0: PLC medium-speed 1: PLC high-speed #53018 DO Hi-Spd #1 High-speed output designation #1 Select at which speed to output 32 po ints of output data from the 1st remo te I/O unit station: PLC high-speed or PLC medium-speed. 0: PLC medium-speed 1: PLC high-speed Parameter list for RIO device 2nd and following stations Parameter Nos and Names for th e RIO device 2nd and following stations are shown below. Refer to the description of RIO 1st st ation by replacing its station No. (or # No) for details of each parameter. RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53012 #53013 #53014 #53015 #53016 #53017 #53018 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #1 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #1 DO Hi-Spd #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #53022 #53023 #53024 #53025 #53026 #53027 #53028 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #2 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #2 DO Hi-Spd #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #53032 #53033 #53034 #53035 #53036 #53037 #53038 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #3 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #3 DO Hi-Spd #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #53042 #53043 #53044 #53045 #53046 #530 47 #53048 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #4 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #4 DO Hi-Spd #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #53052 #53053 #53054 #53055 #53056 #53057 #53058 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #5 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #5 DO Hi-Spd #5 #5 #5 #5 #5 #53062 #53063 #53064 #53065 #53066 #53067 #53068 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #6 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #6 DO Hi-Spd #6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #53072 #53073 #53074 #53075 #53076 #53077 #53078 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #7 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #7 DO Hi-Spd #7 #7 #7 #7 #7 #53082 #53083 #53084 #53085 #53086 #53087 #53088 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #8 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #8 DO Hi-Spd #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #53092 #53093 #53094 #53095 #53096 #53097 #53098 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. #9 DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd #9 DO Hi-Spd #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #53102 #53103 #53104 #53105 #53106 #53107 #53108 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #53112 #53113 #53114 #53115 #53116 #53117 #53118 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #11 #11 #11 #11 #11 #11 #11 #53122 #53123 #53124 #53125 #53126 #53127 #53128 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Sp d DO Hi-Spd #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #53132 #53133 #53134 #53135 #53136 #53137 #53138 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #13 #13 #13 #13 #13 #13 #13 #53142 #53143 #53144 #53145 #53146 #53147 #53148 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #53152 #53153 #53154 #53155 #53156 #53157 #53158 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #15 #15 #15 #15 #15 #15 #15 #53162 #53163 #53164 #53165 #53166 #531 67 #53168 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #16 #16 #16 #16 #16 #16 #16 #53172 #53173 #53174 #53175 #53176 #53177 #53178 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #17 #17 #17 #17 #17 #17 #17 #53182 #53183 #53184 #53185 #53186 #53187 #53188 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #18 #18 #18 #18 #18 #18 #18 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53191 #53192 #53193 #53194 #53195 #53196 #53197 #53198 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #19 #19 #19 #19 #19 #19 #19 #19 #53201 #53202 #53203 #53204 #53205 #53206 #53207 #53208 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #20 #20 #20 #20 #20 #20 #20 #20 #53211 #53212 #53213 #53214 #53215 #53216 #53217 #53218 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #21 #21 #21 #21 #21 #21 #21 #21 #53221 #53222 #53223 #53224 #53225 #53226 #53227 #53228 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #22 #22 #22 #22 #22 #22 #22 #22 #53231 #53232 #53233 #53234 #53235 #53236 #53237 #53238 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #23 #23 #23 #23 #2 3 #23 #23 #23 #53241 #53242 #53243 #53244 #53245 #53246 #53247 #53248 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #24 #24 #24 #24 #24 #24 #24 #24 #53251 #53252 #53253 #53254 #53255 #53256 #53257 #53258 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #25 #25 #25 #25 #25 #25 #25 #25 #53261 #53262 #53263 #53264 #53265 #53266 #53267 #53268 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #26 #26 #26 #26 #26 #26 #26 #26 #53271 #53272 #53273 #53274 #53275 #53276 #53277 #53278 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #27 #27 #27 #27 #27 #27 #27 #27 #53281 #53282 #53283 #53284 #53285 #53286 #53287 #53288 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #28 #28 #28 #28 #28 #28 #28 #28 #53291 #5 3292 #53293 #53294 #53295 #53296 #53297 #53298 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #29 #29 #29 #29 #29 #29 #29 #29 #53301 #53302 #53303 #53304 #53305 #53306 #53307 #53308 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #30 #30 #30 #30 #30 #30 #30 #30 #53311 #53312 #53313 #53314 #53315 #53316 #53317 #53318 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #31 #31 #31 #31 #31 #31 #31 #31 #53321 #53322 #53323 #53324 #53325 #53326 #53327 #53328 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #32 #32 #32 #32 #32 #32 #32 #32 #53331 #53332 #53333 #53334 #53335 #53336 #53337 #53338 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #53341 #53342 #53343 #53344 #5 3345 #53346 #53347 #53348 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #34 #34 #34 #34 #34 #34 #34 #34 #53351 #53352 #53353 #53354 #53355 #53356 #53357 #53358 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #35 #35 #35 #35 #35 #35 #35 #35 #53361 #53362 #53363 #53364 #53365 #53366 #53367 #53368 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #36 #36 #36 #36 #36 #36 #36 #36 #53371 #53372 #53373 #53374 #53375 #53376 #53377 #53378 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #37 #37 #37 #37 #37 #37 #37 #37 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53382 #53383 #53384 #53385 #53386 #53387 #53388 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #38 #38 #38 #38 #38 #38 #38 #53392 #53393 #53394 #53395 #53396 #53397 #53398 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #39 #39 #39 #39 #39 #39 #39 #53402 #53403 #53404 #53405 #53406 #53407 #53408 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #40 #40 #40 #40 #40 #40 #40 #53412 #53413 #53414 #53415 #53416 #53417 #53418 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #41 #41 #41 #41 #41 #41 #41 #53422 #53423 #53424 #53425 #5 3426 #53427 #53428 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #42 #42 #42 #42 #42 #42 #42 #53432 #53433 #53434 #53435 #53436 #53437 #53438 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #43 #43 #43 #43 #43 #43 #43 #53442 #53443 #53444 #53445 #53446 #53447 #53448 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #44 #44 #44 #44 #44 #44 #44 #53452 #53453 #53454 #53455 #53456 #53457 #53458 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #45 #45 #45 #45 #45 #45 #45 #53462 #53463 #53464 #53465 #53466 #53467 #53468 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #46 #46 #46 #46 #46 #46 #46 #53472 #53473 #53474 #53475 #53476 #53477 #53478 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #47 #47 #47 #47 #47 #47 #47 #53482 #53483 #53484 #53485 #53486 #53487 #53488 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd 8 #48 #48 #48 #48 #48 #48 #48 #53492 #53493 #53494 #53495 #53496 #53497 #53498 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #49 #49 #49 #49 #49 #49 #49 #53502 #53503 #53504 #53505 #53506 #53507 #53508 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #50 #50 #50 #50 #50 #50 #50 #53512 #53513 #53514 #53515 #53516 #53517 #53518 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #51 #51 #51 #51 #51 #51 #51 #53522 #53523 #53524 #53525 #53526 #53527 #53528 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #52 #52 #52 #52 #52 #52 #52 #53532 #53533 #53534 #53535 #53536 #53537 #53538 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #53 #53 #5 3 #53 #53 #53 #53 #53542 #53543 #53544 #53545 #53546 #53547 #53548 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #54 #54 #54 #54 #54 #54 #54 #53552 #53553 #53554 #53555 #53556 #53557 #53558 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #55 #55 #55 #55 #55 #55 #55 #53562 #53563 #53564 #53565 #53566 #53567 #53568 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #56 #56 #56 #56 #56 #56 #56 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53571 #53572 #53573 #53574 #53575 #53576 #53577 #53578 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #57 #57 #57 #57 #57 #57 #57 #57 #53581 #53582 #53583 #53584 #53585 #53586 #53587 #53588 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #58 #58 #58 #58 #58 #58 #58 #58 #53591 #53592 #53593 #53594 #53595 #53596 #53597 #53598 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #59 #59 #59 #59 #59 #59 #59 #59 #53601 #53602 #53603 #53604 #53605 #53606 #53607 #53608 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #60 #60 #60 #60 #60 #60 #60 #60 #53611 #53612 #53613 #53614 #53615 #53616 #53617 #53618 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #61 #61 #61 #61 #6 1 #61 #61 #61 #53621 #53622 #53623 #53624 #53625 #53626 #53627 #53628 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #62 #62 #62 #62 #62 #62 #62 #62 #53631 #53632 #53633 #53634 #53635 #53636 #53637 #53638 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #63 #63 #63 #63 #63 #63 #63 #63 #53641 #53642 #53643 #53644 #53645 #53646 #53647 #53648 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #64 #64 #64 #64 #64 #64 #64 #64 #53651 #53652 #53653 #53654 #53655 #53656 #53657 #53658 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #65 #65 #65 #65 #65 #65 #65 #65 #53661 #53662 #53663 #53664 #53665 #53666 #53667 #53668 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #66 #66 #66 #66 #66 #66 #66 #66 #53671 #5 3672 #53673 #53674 #53675 #53676 #53677 #53678 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #67 #67 #67 #67 #67 #67 #67 #67 #53681 #53682 #53683 #53684 #53685 #53686 #53687 #53688 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #68 #68 #68 #68 #68 #68 #68 #68 #53691 #53692 #53693 #53694 #53695 #53696 #53697 #53698 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #69 #69 #69 #69 #69 #69 #69 #69 #53701 #53702 #53703 #53704 #53705 #53706 #53707 #53708 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #70 #70 #70 #70 #70 #70 #70 #70 #53711 #53712 #53713 #53714 #53715 #53716 #53717 #53718 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #71 #71 #71 #71 #71 #71 #71 #71 #53721 #53722 #53723 #53724 #5 3725 #53726 #53727 #53728 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #72 #72 #72 #72 #72 #72 #72 #72 #53731 #53732 #53733 #53734 #53735 #53736 #53737 #53738 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #73 #73 #73 #73 #73 #73 #73 #73 #53741 #53742 #53743 #53744 #53745 #53746 #53747 #53748 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #74 #74 #74 #74 #74 #74 #74 #74 #53751 #53752 #53753 #53754 #53755 #53756 #53757 #53758 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #75 #75 #75 #75 #75 #75 #75 #75 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53762 #53763 #53764 #53765 #53766 #53767 #53768 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #76 #76 #76 #76 #76 #76 #76 #53772 #53773 #53774 #53775 #53776 #53777 #53778 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #77 #77 #77 #77 #77 #77 #77 #53782 #53783 #53784 #53785 #53786 #53787 #53788 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #78 #78 #78 #78 #78 #78 #78 #53792 #53793 #53794 #53795 #53796 #53797 #53798 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #79 #79 #79 #79 #79 #79 #79 #53802 #53803 #53804 #53805 #5 3806 #53807 #53808 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #80 #80 #80 #80 #80 #80 #80 #53812 #53813 #53814 #53815 #53816 #53817 #53818 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #81 #81 #81 #81 #81 #81 #81 #53822 #53823 #53824 #53825 #53826 #53827 #53828 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #82 #82 #82 #82 #82 #82 #82 #53832 #53833 #53834 #53835 #53836 #53837 #53838 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #83 #83 #83 #83 #83 #83 #83 #53842 #53843 #53844 #53845 #53846 #53847 #53848 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #84 #84 #84 #84 #84 #84 #84 #53852 #53853 #53854 #53855 #53856 #53857 #53858 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #85 #85 #85 #85 #85 #85 #85 #53862 #53863 #53864 #53865 #53866 #53867 #53868 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd 6 #86 #86 #86 #86 #86 #86 #86 #53872 #53873 #53874 #53875 #53876 #53877 #53878 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #87 #87 #87 #87 #87 #87 #87 #53882 #53883 #53884 #53885 #53886 #53887 #53888 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #88 #88 #88 #88 #88 #88 #88 #53892 #53893 #53894 #53895 #53896 #53897 #53898 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #89 #89 #89 #89 #89 #89 #89 #53902 #53903 #53904 #53905 #53906 #53907 #53908 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #90 #90 #90 #90 #90 #90 #90 #53912 #53913 #53914 #53915 #53916 #53917 #53918 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #91 #91 #9 1 #91 #91 #91 #91 #53922 #53923 #53924 #53925 #53926 #53927 #53928 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #92 #92 #92 #92 #92 #92 #92 #53932 #53933 #53934 #53935 #53936 #53937 #53938 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #93 #93 #93 #93 #93 #93 #93 #53942 #53943 #53944 #53945 #53946 #53947 #53948 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #94 #94 #94 #94 #94 #94 #94 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #53951 #53952 #53953 #53954 #53955 #53956 #53957 #53958 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #95 #95 #95 #95 #95 #95 #95 #95 #53961 #53962 #53963 #53964 #53965 #53966 #53967 #53968 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #96 #96 #96 #96 #96 #96 #96 #96 #53971 #53972 #53973 #53974 #53975 #53976 #53977 #53978 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #97 #97 #97 #97 #97 #97 #97 #97 #53981 #53982 #53983 #53984 #53985 #53986 #53987 #53988 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #98 #98 #98 #98 #98 #98 #98 #98 #53991 #53992 #53993 #53994 #53995 #53996 #53997 #53998 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #99 #99 #99 #99 #9 9 #99 #99 #99 #54001 #54002 #54003 #54004 #54005 #54006 #54007 #54008 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #100 #100 #100 #100 #100 #100 #100 #100 #54011 #54012 #54013 #54014 #54015 #54016 #54017 #54018 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #101 #101 #101 #101 #101 #101 #101 #101 #54021 #54022 #54023 #54024 #54025 #54026 #54027 #54028 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #102 #102 #102 #102 #102 #102 #102 #102 #54031 #54032 #54033 #54034 #54035 #54036 #54037 #54038 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #103 #103 #103 #103 #103 #103 #103 #103 #54041 #54042 #54043 #54044 #54045 #54046 #54047 #54048 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #104 #104 #104 #104 #104 #104 #104 #104 #54051 #54052 #54053 #54054 #54055 #54056 #54057 #54058 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #10 5 #105 #105 #105 #105 #105 #105 #105 #54061 #54062 #54063 #54064 #54065 #54066 #54067 #54068 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #106 #106 #106 #106 #106 #106 #106 #106 #54071 #54072 #54073 #54074 #54075 #54076 #54077 #54078 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #107 #107 #107 #107 #107 #107 #107 #107 #54081 #54082 #54083 #54084 #54085 #54086 #54087 #54088 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #108 #108 #108 #108 #108 #108 #108 #108 #54091 #54092 #54093 #54094 #54095 #54096 #54097 #54098 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #109 #109 #109 #109 #109 #109 #109 #109 #54101 #54102 #54103 #54104 #5 4105 #54106 #54107 #54108 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #110 #110 #110 #110 #110 #110 #110 #110 #54111 #54112 #54113 #54114 #54115 #54116 #54117 #54118 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #111 #111 #111 #111 #111 #111 #111 #111 #54121 #54122 #54123 #54124 #54125 #54126 #54127 #54128 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #112 #112 #112 #112 #112 #112 #112 #112 #54131 #54132 #54133 #54134 #54135 #54136 #54137 #54138 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #113 #113 #113 #113 #113 #113 #113 #113 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #54142 #54143 #54144 #54145 #54146 #54147 #54148 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #114 #114 #114 #114 #114 #114 #114 #54152 #54153 #54154 #54155 #54156 #54157 #54158 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #115 #115 #115 #115 #115 #115 #115 #54162 #54163 #54164 #54165 #54166 #54167 #54168 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #116 #116 #116 #116 #116 #116 #116 #54172 #54173 #54174 #54175 #54176 #54177 #54178 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #117 #117 #117 #117 #117 #117 #117 #54182 #54183 #54184 #54185 #54186 #54187 #54188 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #118 #118 #118 #11 8 #118 #118 #118 #54192 #54193 #54194 #54195 #54196 #54197 #54198 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #119 #119 #119 #119 #119 #119 #119 #54202 #54203 #54204 #54205 #54206 #54207 #54208 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #120 #120 #120 #120 #120 #120 #120 #54212 #54213 #54214 #54215 #54216 #54217 #54218 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #121 #121 #121 #121 #121 #121 #121 #54222 #54223 #54224 #54225 #54226 #54227 #54228 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #122 #122 #122 #122 #122 #122 #122 #54232 #54233 #54234 #54235 #54236 #54237 #54238 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #123 #123 #123 #123 #123 #123 #123 #54242 #54243 #54244 #54245 #54246 #54247 #54248 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd 124 #124 #124 #124 #124 #124 #124 #124 #54252 #54253 #54254 #54255 #54256 #54257 #54258 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #125 #125 #125 #125 #125 #125 #125 #54262 #54263 #54264 #54265 #54266 #54267 #54268 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #126 #126 #126 #126 #126 #126 #126 #54272 #54273 #54274 #54275 #54276 #54277 #54278 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #127 #127 #127 #127 #127 #127 #127 #54282 #54283 #54284 #54285 #54286 #54287 #54288 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #128 #128 #128 #128 #128 #128 #128 #54292 #54293 #54294 #54295 #54296 #54297 #54298 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #129 #129 # 129 #129 #129 #129 #129 #54302 #54303 #54304 #54305 #54306 #54307 #54308 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #130 #130 #130 #130 #130 #130 #130 #54312 #54313 #54314 #54315 #54316 #54317 #54318 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #131 #131 #131 #131 #131 #131 #131 #54322 #54323 #54324 #54325 #54326 #54327 #54328 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #132 #132 #132 #132 #132 #132 #132 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #54331 #54332 #54333 #54334 #54335 #54336 #54337 #54338 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #133 #133 #133 #133 #133 #133 #133 #133 #54341 #54342 #54343 #54344 #54345 #54346 #54347 #54348 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #134 #134 #134 #134 #134 #134 #134 #134 #54351 #54352 #54353 #54354 #54355 #54356 #54357 #54358 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #135 #135 #135 #135 #135 #135 #135 #135 #54361 #54362 #54363 #54364 #54365 #54366 #54367 #54368 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #136 #136 #136 #136 #136 #136 #136 #136 #54371 #54372 #54373 #54374 #54375 #54376 #54377 #54378 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #137 #137 #137 #137 #1 37 #137 #137 #137 #54381 #54382 #54383 #54384 #54385 #54386 #54387 #54388 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #138 #138 #138 #138 #138 #138 #138 #138 #54391 #54392 #54393 #54394 #54395 #54396 #54397 #54398 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #139 #139 #139 #139 #139 #139 #139 #139 #54401 #54402 #54403 #54404 #54405 #54406 #54407 #54408 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #140 #140 #140 #140 #140 #140 #140 #140 #54411 #54412 #54413 #54414 #54415 #54416 #54417 #54418 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #141 #141 #141 #141 #141 #141 #141 #141 #54421 #54422 #54423 #54424 #54425 #54426 #54427 #54428 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #142 #142 #142 #142 #142 #142 #142 #142 #54431 #54432 #54433 #54434 #54435 #54436 #54437 #54438 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #14 3 #143 #143 #143 #143 #143 #143 #143 #54441 #54442 #54443 #54444 #54445 #54446 #54447 #54448 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #144 #144 #144 #144 #144 #144 #144 #144 #54451 #54452 #54453 #54454 #54455 #54456 #54457 #54458 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #145 #145 #145 #145 #145 #145 #145 #145 #54461 #54462 #54463 #54464 #54465 #54466 #54467 #54468 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #146 #146 #146 #146 #146 #146 #146 #146 #54471 #54472 #54473 #54474 #54475 #54476 #54477 #54478 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #147 #147 #147 #147 #147 #147 #147 #147 #54481 #54482 #54483 #54484 #5 4485 #54486 #54487 #54488 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #148 #148 #148 #148 #148 #148 #148 #148 #54491 #54492 #54493 #54494 #54495 #54496 #54497 #54498 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #149 #149 #149 #149 #149 #149 #149 #149 #54501 #54502 #54503 #54504 #54505 #54506 #54507 #54508 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #150 #150 #150 #150 #150 #150 #150 #150 #54511 #54512 #54513 #54514 #54515 #54516 #54517 #54518 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #151 #151 #151 #151 #151 #151 #151 #151 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #54522 #54523 #54524 #54525 #54526 #54527 #54528 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #152 #152 #152 #152 #152 #152 #152 #54532 #54533 #54534 #54535 #54536 #54537 #54538 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #153 #153 #153 #153 #153 #153 #153 #54542 #54543 #54544 #54545 #54546 #54547 #54548 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #154 #154 #154 #154 #154 #154 #154 #54552 #54553 #54554 #54555 #54556 #54557 #54558 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #155 #155 #155 #155 #155 #155 #155 #54562 #54563 #54564 #54565 #54566 #54567 #54568 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #156 #156 #156 #15 6 #156 #156 #156 #54572 #54573 #54574 #54575 #54576 #54577 #54578 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #157 #157 #157 #157 #157 #157 #157 #54582 #54583 #54584 #54585 #54586 #54587 #54588 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #158 #158 #158 #158 #158 #158 #158 #54592 #54593 #54594 #54595 #54596 #54597 #54598 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #159 #159 #159 #159 #159 #159 #159 #54602 #54603 #54604 #54605 #54606 #54607 #54608 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #160 #160 #160 #160 #160 #160 #160 #54612 #54613 #54614 #54615 #54616 #54617 #54618 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #161 #161 #161 #161 #161 #161 #161 #54622 #54623 #54624 #54625 #54626 #54627 #54628 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd 162 #162 #162 #162 #162 #162 #162 #162 #54632 #54633 #54634 #54635 #54636 #54637 #54638 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #163 #163 #163 #163 #163 #163 #163 #54642 #54643 #54644 #54645 #54646 #54647 #54648 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #164 #164 #164 #164 #164 #164 #164 #54652 #54653 #54654 #54655 #54656 #54657 #54658 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #165 #165 #165 #165 #165 #165 #165 #54662 #54663 #54664 #54665 #54666 #54667 #54668 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #166 #166 #166 #166 #166 #166 #166 #54672 #54673 #54674 #54675 #54676 #54677 #54678 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #167 #167 # 167 #167 #167 #167 #167 #54682 #54683 #54684 #54685 #54686 #54687 #54688 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #168 #168 #168 #168 #168 #168 #168 #54692 #54693 #54694 #54695 #54696 #54697 #54698 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #169 #169 #169 #169 #169 #169 #169 #54702 #54703 #54704 #54705 #54706 #54707 #54708 RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #170 #170 #170 #170 #170 #170 #170 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. DI dev DI dev No. DO dev DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd No. name name #54711 #54712 #54713 #54714 #54715 #54716 #54717 #54718 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #171 #171 #171 #171 #171 #171 #171 #171 #54721 #54722 #54723 #54724 #54725 #54726 #54727 #54728 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #172 #172 #172 #172 #172 #172 #172 #172 #54731 #54732 #54733 #54734 #54735 #54736 #54737 #54738 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #173 #173 #173 #173 #173 #173 #173 #173 #54741 #54742 #54743 #54744 #54745 #54746 #54747 #54748 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #174 #174 #174 #174 #174 #174 #174 #174 #54751 #54752 #54753 #54754 #54755 #54756 #54757 #54758 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #175 #175 #175 #175 #1 75 #175 #175 #175 #54761 #54762 #54763 #54764 #54765 #54766 #54767 #54768 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #176 #176 #176 #176 #176 #176 #176 #176 #54771 #54772 #54773 #54774 #54775 #54776 #54777 #54778 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #177 #177 #177 #177 #177 #177 #177 #177 #54781 #54782 #54783 #54784 #54785 #54786 #54787 #54788 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #178 #178 #178 #178 #178 #178 #178 #178 #54791 #54792 #54793 #54794 #54795 #54796 #54797 #54798 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #179 #179 #179 #179 #179 #179 #179 #179 #54801 #54802 #54803 #54804 #54805 #54806 #54807 #54808 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #180 #180 #180 #180 #180 #180 #180 #180 #54811 #54812 #54813 #54814 #54815 #54816 #54817 #54818 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #18 1 #181 #181 #181 #181 #181 #181 #181 #54821 #54822 #54823 #54824 #54825 #54826 #54827 #54828 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #182 #182 #182 #182 #182 #182 #182 #182 #54831 #54832 #54833 #54834 #54835 #54836 #54837 #54838 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #183 #183 #183 #183 #183 #183 #183 #183 #54841 #54842 #54843 #54844 #54845 #54846 #54847 #54848 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #184 #184 #184 #184 #184 #184 #184 #184 #54851 #54852 #54853 #54854 #54855 #54856 #54857 #54858 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #185 #185 #185 #185 #185 #185 #185 #185 #54861 #54862 #54863 #54864 #5 4865 #54866 #54867 #54868 RIO CH No. RIO Sta. No. DI dev name DI dev No. DO dev name DO dev No. DI Hi-Spd DO Hi-Spd #186 #186 #186 #186 #186 #186 #186 #186 Open param 1 Set LONG data. #29001 to #29896 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily. Open param 2 Set DOUBLE data. #29901 to #29996 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily. #40001- Device Open Parameters 40100 <Data typ> Set the data format (BYTE, WORD, DWO RD, WORD(BIT)) of the assignment area. 0: WORD 1: DWORD 2: BYTE 3: WORD(BIT) <Data no> Set the number of data in the assignment area. The number to be designated varies depending on the unit designated by the data format. 0 to 3000 (Depends on the device assignment and data format.) <Disp typ> Designate the status of data display format, display restrictions and input protection. bit0: Cancellation of protection for input Select whether to check the input protection for the data protection key 2 on the group details screen. (Note) The name of data protection key differs betwe en machine tool builders. Refer to manuals issued by each machine tool builder for details. 0: Check 1: Not check bit1: Cancellation of restriction on display Select whether to display the group details screen even when a machine tool builder password is not entered. 0: Not display 1: Display bit4: BCD format Display the data of the group details screen in BCD format. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit5: BIT format Display the data of the group details screen in BIT format. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit6: HEX format (Hexadecimal format) Display the data of the group details screen in HEX format. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled bit7: Sign (Decimal format only) Select whether to display the data of the group det ails screen in a decimal format with/without a sign. 0: With sign 1: Without sign SRAM Open Parameters <Data typ> Set the data type (CHAR, SHORT, LONG , DOUBLE) of the assignment area. 1: CHAR 2: SHORT 3: LONG 4: DOUBLE <Data no> Set the number of data in the assign ment area. The number to be designat ed varies depending on the unit and free area designated by the data format. 0 to 9999999 (Depends on the data format and free area) <Disp typ> Designate the status of data display format, display restrictions and input protection. bit0: Cancellation of protection for input Select whether to check the input protection for th e data protection key 2 on the group details screen. (Note) The name of data protection key differs between machine tool bu ilders. Refer to manuals issued by each machine tool builder for details. 0: Check 1: Not check bit1: Cancellation of restriction on display Select whether to display the group details screen even when a machine tool builder password is not entered. 0: Not display 1: Display bit4: BCD format Display the data of the group details screen in BCD format. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit5: BIT format Display the data of the group details screen in BIT format. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit6: HEX format (Hexadecimal format) Display the data of the group details screen in HEX format. 0: Disable 1: Enable bit7: Sign (Decimal format only) Select whether to display the data of the group de tails screen in a decimal format with/without a sign. 0: With sign 1: Without sign #24001+40(n-1) SLn station No. CC-Link station No. Set the station No. of the CC-Link I/F unit. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) -1: Invalid 0: Master station 1 to 64: Slave station ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- -1 to 64 #24002+40(n-1) SLn line-spd&Mode CC-Link transmission rate and mode Select the transmission rate and oper ation mode of the CC-Link I/F unit. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) <Online mode> 0: 156Kbps 1: 625Kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps <Circuit test mode> 5: 156Kbps 6: 625Kbps 7: 2.5Mbps 8: 5Mbps 9: 10Mbps <Hardware test mode> 10: 156Kbps 11: 625Kbps 12: 2.5Mbps 13: 5Mbps 14: 10Mbps (Note) Perform hardware test after removing the CC-Link cable. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0 to 14 SLn set fault sta Setting of data link faulty station Select whether to clear or hold the data input from the data li nk faulty station. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: Clear 1: Hold (Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Ma ster/Local Module User's Manual (S H(NA)-080394E)" for the details of the functions. ---Master station--- Set to "0" or "1". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0" or "1". SLn PLC stop set Setting at PLC STOP Set whether to refresh or compulsorily clear the slave stations at PLC STOP. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: Refresh 1: Compulsorily clear (Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Ma ster/Local Module User's Manual (S H(NA)-080394E)" for the details of the functions. ---Master station--- Set to "0" or "1". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0" or "1". SLn occ stations Number of occupied stations Set the number of occupied loca l and standby master stations. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) ---Master station--- Set to "0". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to either of "1" to "4". ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 SLn extended cyc Extended cyclic setting Set the magnification for the extended cyclic operation of the local station whose type corresponds to Ver.2. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "1" for the local station whose type corresponds to Ver.1. This function is out of s pecifications when the pr otocol version is Ver.1. The se tting for the local station is fixed to "1". ---Master station--- Set to "0". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to either of "1", "2", "4" or "8". ---Setting range--- 0, 1, 2, 4, 8 (times) #24007+40(n-1) SLn conn modules Number of connected modules Set the total number of remote statio ns, local stations, intelligent device stations, standby ma ster station and reserved stations connect ed to the master station. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) ---Master station--- Set to either of "1" to "64". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 (modules) #24008+40(n-1) SLn num of retries Number of retries Set the number of retries for when a communication error occurs. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) ---Master station--- Set to either of "1" to "7". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 (times) #24009+40(n-1) SLn auto ret mdls Number of automatic return modules Set the total number of remote stati ons, local stations, intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Ma ster/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E)" for the details of the functions. ---Master station--- Set to either of "1" to "10". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 10 (modules) #24010+40(n-1) SLn STBY master st Standby master station Set the station No. of th e standby master station. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no standby master station is provided. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set "0" (fixed) for the local station. Set "1" (fixed) for the standby station. ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 SLn ope at NC down Operation at NC down Set the data link status for when the master station failure occurs. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: Fixed to stop (Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Ma ster/Local Module User's Manual (S H(NA)-080394E)" for the details of the functions. ---Master station--- Set to "0" (fixed). ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". SLn scan mode Scan mode Select whether to synchronize the link scan with one ladder scan. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: Fixed to synchronize ---Master station--- Set to "0" (fixed). ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". SLn delay time Delay time Set the delay time. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: (Fixed value) ---Master station--- Set to "0" (fixed). ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". SLn RX dev name Remote input (RX) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the remote input (RX) to be au tomatically refreshed. (Example) X "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W, R #24015+40(n-1) SLn RX dev No. Remote input (RX) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the remote input (RX) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output func tion, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote inpu t (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh device name has be en set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1000 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5FF M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 #24016+40(n-1) SLn RY dev name Remote output (RY) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the remote output (RY) to be automatically refreshed. (Example) Y "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W, R SLn RY dev No. Remote output (RY) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the remote ou tput (RY) to be aut omatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with us ing the parameter input/out put function, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote inpu t (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh devic e name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1000 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5FF M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 SLn RWr dev name Remote register (RWr) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the remote r egister (RWr) to be automatically refreshed. (Example) W "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R #24019+40(n-1) SLn RWr dev No. Remote register (RWr) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the remote register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output func tion, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote inpu t (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh device name has be en set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1FF0 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 #24020+40(n-1) SLn RWw dev name Remote register (RWw) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the remote register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed. (Example) W "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R SLn RWw dev No. Remote register (RWw) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the remote regi ster (RWw) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with us ing the parameter input/out put function, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote inpu t (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh devic e name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1FF0 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 SLn SB dev name Special relay (SB) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed. (Example) SB "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SB #24023+40(n-1) SLn SB dev No. Special relay (SB) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output func tion, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote inpu t (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh device name has be en set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1F0 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF SB: 0 to 1FF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 #24024+40(n-1) SLn SW dev name Special relay (SW) refresh device name Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Example) SW Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SW SLn SW dev No. Special relay (SW) refresh device No. Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed. "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) (Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with us ing the parameter input/out put function, input the de- vice No. of decimal digit. (Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows; #24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024" (Note 2) When the refresh devic e name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0". Confirm the refresh device No. afte r changing the refresh device name. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1F0 ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 10239 L: 0 to 511 B: 0 to 1FFF D: 0 to 2047 W: 0 to 1FFF SW: 0 to 1FF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899 SLn Protocol Ver Protocol version Select the CC-Link version mode that has been set to the slide switch SW1-2 on the CC-Link unit (HN566/ HN567). "n" represents the expansion slot No. (n=1 to 3) 0: Ver.2 1: Ver.1 Ver.2 mode has been set to SW1-2 as default. ---Master station--- Set to "0" or "1". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0" or "1". CNm station type Station type Set the type of the connected remote station, local station, intelligent device station and standby master sta- tion. 0: No setting 1: Ver.1 remote I/O station 2: Ver.1 remote device station 3: Ver.1 intelligent device station 4: Ver.2 remote device station 5: Ver.2 intelligent device station "m" means the m-th connected station in asc ending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) ---Master station--- Set to either of "0" to "5". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". #24122+15(m-1) CNm extended cyc Extended cyclic setting Select the magnification for the extended cycling operat ion of the connected remote , local and intelligent sta- tions. Set "1" when the protocol version is Ver.1. Set "0" when no setting is required. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0, 1, 2, 4, 8 (times) #24123+15(m-1) CNm occ stations Number of occupied stations Set the number of the occupied stations by th e connected remote, local and intelligent stations. Set 1 for 8 points I/O and 16 points I/O. Set "0" when no setting is required. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (stations occupied) #24124+15(m-1) CNm station No. Station No. Set the station No. of the connected re mote, local and intelligent stations. Set "0" when no setting is required. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 CNm remote sta pt Remote station points Select the number of points of the connected remote station. "m" means the m-th connected station in asc ending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) The details of setting values differ wit h each protocol version and station type. Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ver.1, remote I/O station) 0: 0 point (reserved station) 1: 8 points 2: 8 points + 8 points reserved 3: 16 points 4: 32 points  Setting "0" is valid only for the reserved station. When "0" is set for the other stat ions, the number of points will be 32.  Set the value so that the total number of points of re mote I/O stations connected in series will be multiple of 16. (Example 1) 2 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" for each (Example 2) 3 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" fo r the first and the second I/O, "2" for the third. Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ve r.1 except remote I/O station) 0: 0 point (reserved station) 1 to 4: Automatically calculated  Setting "0" is valid only for the reserved station. When "0" is set for the other stat ions, the number of points will be automatically calculated.  Unless 0 is set, the number of points will be automatic ally calculated with the number of occupied stations and the setting value of the extended cycling. Protocol: Ver.1 (for all station types) 0 to 4: Automatically calculated  "0" cannot be set even for the reserved station.  Automatically calculated with the setting va lue of the number of occupied stations. ---Master station--- Set a value corresponding to the protocol version and the station type. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". CNm set rsvd sta Reserved station Set the reserved/error invalid station. "m" means the m-th connected station in asc ending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) 0: No setting 1: Reserved station 2: Error invalid station (Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Ma ster/Local Module User's Manual (S H(NA)-080394E)" for the details of the functions. ---Master station--- Set either of "0" to "2". ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". #24131+15(m-1) CNm send size Send buffer size Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the lo cal station, standby master station and intelligent device station when in transient transmission. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) Set "0" when no setting is required. (Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0, 64 to 4096 (words) #24132+15(m-1) CNm receive size Receive buffer size Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the lo cal station, standby master station and intelligent device station when in transient transmission. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) Set "0" when no setting is required. (Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0, 64 to 4096 (words) #24133+15(m-1) CNm auto bfr size Automatic update buffer size Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the lo cal station, standby master station and intelligent device station when in transient transmission. "m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64) Set "0" when no setting is required. ---Master station--- Set a value within the setting range. ---Local/standby master station--- Set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0, 128 to 4096 (words) chgauxno Auxiliary axis number Set the axis No. to be controlled as aux iliary axis using auxiliary axis interface. When "0" is set, the axis will not operate as auxiliary axis. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8: (M800W/M800S Series) 0 to 4: (M80/M80W Series) 0 to 1: (E80) aux_station Number of indexing stations Set the number of stations. For linear axis, this value is expressed by: number of divisions = number of stations -1. Setting "0" or "1" sets the number of stations to 2. ---Setting range--- 0 to 360 aux_Cont1 Control parameter 1 The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0". bit3: 0: Automatic reach signal isn't interlocked with the start signal. 1: Automatic reach signal is interlocked with the start signal. bit4: 0: Automatic reach signal is turned ON again. 1: Automatic reach signal isn't turned ON again. bit5: 0: Station No. Output within fixed position. 1: Station No. Co nstantly output. bit9: 0: Rotation direction determined by operation control signal (DIR) 1: Rotation direction in the shortcut direction bitE: 0: Rotation direction in operation control signal (DIR) or in the shortcut direction 1: Rotation direction in the arbitrary position command sign direction bitF: 0: Stopper direction is in the positioning direction. 1: Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount. aux_Cont2 Control parameter 2 The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0". bit4: 0: Uniform assignment 1: Arbitrary coordinate assignment aux_tleng Linear axis stroke length Set the movement stroke length for linear axes. (Note 1) Setting "0.000" causes an MCP alarm at the power ON. (Note 2) This parameter is meaningless at t he non-uniform index or random position command. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) #12805 aux_ST.offset Station offset Set the distance (offset) from th e reference position to station 1. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12810+10(n-1) aux_Aspeedn Operation parameter group n Automatic operation speed Set the feedrate during automatic operation w hen "operation parameter group n" is selected. "#12810 aux_Aspeed1" is regarded as the clamp value for the automatic operation speeds and manual op- eration speeds of all operation groups. A speed exceeding "aux_Aspeed1" cannot be commanded, even if it is set in a parameter. (Note) Setting "0" causes an operation er ror at the "Operation start" signal's ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min) #12811+10(n-1) aux_Mspeedn Operation parameter group n Manual operation speed Set the feedrate during manual operat ion or JOG operation when "operation parameter group n" is selected. (Note) Setting "0" causes an operation er ror at the "Operation start" signal's ON. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min) #12812+10(n-1) aux_timen.1 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "O peration parameter group 1 automatic operation speed" (clamp speed) when "operation parameter group n" is selected. When "#12818+10(n-1) aux_smgstn" is "F", S-s hape acceleration/deceleration is carried out. When operating at a speed less than the clamp speed, if "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "0", the axis will accel- erate/decelerate with the time constant set in this parameter. If "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "1", the axis will accelerate/decelerate at the constant inclinatio n determined by this parameter and "aux_Aspeed1". Setting "0" cancels acceleration/deceleration: The axis will move with the time constant "0". ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #12813+10(n-1) aux_timen.2 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 Set the total time of the non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear acceleration/ deceleration. (Note) If this parameter is set to "0" while "#12818 aux_smgst1"is set to "F", an MCP alarm will occur. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4000 (ms) #12814+10(n-1) aux_TLn Operation parameter group n Torque limit value Set the motor output torque limit value when "operation parameter gr oup n" is selected. When setting 500%, the torque is limited at the maximu m torque of the motor specifications. Set 500%, when torque is not particularly needed to be limited. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as torque limit value when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates. ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (%) aux_ODn Operation parameter group n Excessive error detection width Set the excessive error detection width when "operation parameter group n" is selected. The excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than this set- ting value. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as excessive error detection width when po- sitioning to the stopper starting coordinates. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767( ° or mm) aux_justn Operation parameter group n Set position output width Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (J ST) or "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) sig- nal is output when "operation parameter group n" is selected. "Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station. During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same condition. These signals will turn OFF when the machine positi on moves away from the station over this value. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_nearn Operation parameter group n Near set position output width Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when "operation parameter group n" is selected. "Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine pos ition is near any station pos ition. This value is gen- erally set wider than the set position output width. During operations, this is related to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0". ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_smgstn Operation para meter group n Acceleration/Deceleration type Select the acceleration/deceleration type when "operation parameter group n" is selected. 0, 1: Linear acceleration/deceleration F: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration aux_stpos2 Station 2 coordinate Set the station 2 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos3 Station 3 coordinate Set the station 3 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos4 Station 4 coordinate Set the station 4 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos5 Station 5 coordinate Set the station 5 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12854 aux_stpos6 Station 6 coordinate Set the station 6 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12855 aux_stpos7 Station 7 coordinate Set the station 7 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12856 aux_stpos8 Station 8 coordinate Set the station 8 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12857 aux_stpos9 Station 9 coordinate Set the station 9 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12858 aux_stpos10 Station 10 coordinate Set the station 10 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12859 aux_stpos11 Station 11 coordinate Set the station 11 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12860 aux_stpos12 Station 12 coordinate Set the station 12 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12861 aux_stpos13 Station 13 coordinate Set the station 13 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12862 aux_stpos14 Station 14 coordinate Set the station 14 coordinate value when ar bitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos15 Station 15 coordinate Set the station 15 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos16 Station 16 coordinate Set the station 16 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos17 Station 17 coordinate Set the station 17 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos18 Station 18 coordinate Set the station 18 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos19 Station 19 coordinate Set the station 19 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_stpos20 Station 20 coordinate Set the station 20 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point). ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSWcheck PSW detection method Select the criterion for the output of position switches 1 to 15. bit0 to E correspond to position switches 1 to 15. 0: Judged by the machine po sition of the command system. 1: Judged by the machine FB position (actual position). (Note) The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0". aux_PSW1dog1 PSW1 area setting 1 Set "PSW1 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 1 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12872 aux_PSW1dog2 PSW1 area setting 2 Set "PSW1 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 1 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12873 aux_PSW2dog1 PSW2 area setting 1 Set "PSW2 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 2 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12874 aux_PSW2dog2 PSW2 area setting 2 Set "PSW2 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 2 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12875 aux_PSW3dog1 PSW3 area setting 1 Set "PSW3 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 3 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12876 aux_PSW3dog2 PSW3 area setting 2 Set "PSW3 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 3 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12877 aux_PSW4dog1 PSW4 area setting 1 Set "PSW4 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 4 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW4dog2 PSW4 area setting 2 Set "PSW4 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 4 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW5dog1 PSW5 area setting 1 Set "PSW5 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 5 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW5dog2 PSW5 area setting 2 Set "PSW5 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 5 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW6dog1 PSW6 area setting 1 Set "PSW6 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 6 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW6dog2 PSW6 area setting 2 Set "PSW6 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 6 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW7dog1 PSW7 area setting 1 Set "PSW7 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 7 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12884 aux_PSW7dog2 PSW7 area setting 2 Set "PSW7 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 7 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12885 aux_PSW8dog1 PSW8 area setting 1 Set "PSW8 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 8 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12886 aux_PSW8dog2 PSW8 area setting 2 Set "PSW8 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 8 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12887 aux_PSW9dog1 PSW9 area setting 1 Set "PSW9 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 9 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12888 aux_PSW9dog2 PSW9 area setting 2 Set "PSW9 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 9 will turn ON when the ma- chine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12889 aux_PSW10dog1 PSW10 area setting 1 Set "PSW10 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 10 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW10dog2 PSW10 area setting 2 Set "PSW10 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 10 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW11dog1 PSW11 area setting 1 Set "PSW11 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 11 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW11dog2 PSW11 area setting 2 Set "PSW11 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 11 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW12dog1 PSW12 area setting 1 Set "PSW12 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 12 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW12dog2 PSW12 area setting 2 Set "PSW12 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 12 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) aux_PSW13dog1 PSW13 area setting 1 Set "PSW13 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 13 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not af fect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12896 aux_PSW13dog2 PSW13 area setting 2 Set "PSW13 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 13 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12897 aux_PSW14dog1 PSW14 area setting 1 Set "PSW14 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 14 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12898 aux_PSW14dog2 PSW14 area setting 2 Set "PSW14 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 14 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12899 aux_PSW15dog1 PSW15 area setting 1 Set "PSW15 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 15 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12900 aux_PSW15dog2 PSW15 area setting 2 Set "PSW15 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the positio n switch 15 will turn ON when the machine is positioned. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (o r vice versa) does not affect the position switch op- eration. For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm) #12910 aux_push Stopper amount Set the command stroke of the stopper operation in the stopper positioning. ---Setting range--- 0.000 to 359.999(° or mm) #12911 aux_pusht1 Stopper standby time Set the standby time from the stopper starting coordi nate positioning to the stopper operation start in the stopper positioning. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) aux_pusht2 Stopper torque release time Set the time from the completion of the stopper operati on to the changeover of the st opper torque in the stop- per positioning. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) aux_pusht3 Set position signal output delay time Set the time from the completion of the stopper operati on to the output of the "aut omatic set position reached" (JSTA), "set position reached" (JST) or "near set position" (NEAR) signal in the stopper positioning. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999(ms) #12621 machine type Select machine type (For L system only) Select the type of lathe: horizontal or vertical. 0: Horizontal-type lathe 1: Vertical-type lathe #12622 turret move dir Select turret move direction (For L system only) Select the linear axis direction to mo ve the turret along for each part system.  Horizontal-type lathe (right-handed) 1: Front upper position 2: Front lower position 3: Rear upper position 4: Rear lower position  Horizontal-type lathe (left-handed) 11: Front upper position 12: Front lower position 13: Rear upper position 14: Rear lower position  Vertical-type lathe (right-handed) 21: Front left position 22: Front right position  Vertical-type lathe (left-handed) 31: Front left position 32: Front right position (Note) Upper/lower position of horizon tal-type lathe and right/left position of vertical-type lathe are the names indicating the turret position wit h general machine configuration. Select a number corresponding to the actual machine configuration and the axis direction to this param- eter. Axis configuration follows the base axis I, J, K (parameters #1026 to #1028). #12623 tool rot ax para Select tool rota tion axis parameters (For L system only) Select which of the following parameters to use as tool rotation axis-related parameters: Rotary axis config- uration parameters or 3D check parameters. 0: Rotary axis configuration parameters 1: 3D check parameters #12624 tool rot ax name Tool rotation axis name (For L system only) Specify the name of tool rotation axis using the 2nd axis name. ---Setting range--- Two alphanumeric characters (A to Z and 1 to 9) #12625 tool rot ax type Select tool rotation axis (For L system only) Select about which axis the tool rotation axis rotates. (Note) When "#12624 tool rot ax name" (Tool rotation ax is name) is not set, this parameter is disabled. If "0: Disable" is selected when "#12624 tool rot ax na me" is set, this parameter is treated as "2: J axis". 0: Disable 1: I axis 2: J axis 3: K axis tool rot dir Tool rotation axis direction (For L system only) Select the tool rotation axis direction. (Note) When "#12624 tool rot ax name" is not set, this parameter is disabled. 0: Right-handed system 1: Left-handed system main sp no Front spindle No. (For L system only) Specify the spindle No. of the front side work spindle. When this parameter is set to 0, the spindle No.is treated as 1. ---Setting range--- 0 to the number of spindles sub sp no Rear spindle No. (For L system only) Specify the spindle No. of the rear side work spindle. If there is no rear-side work sp indle, set this parameter to 0. ---Setting range--- 0 to the number of spindles main sp rot dir Front spindle rotation direction (For L system only) Specify the rotation direction of the front side work spindle. 0: Right-handed system 1: Left-handed system sub sp rot dir Rear spindle rotation direction (For L system only) Specify the rotation direction of the rear side work spindle. 0: Right-handed system 1: Left-handed system main chuck close M Front chuck close M code (For L system only) Specify the M code allocated to the front chuck closing. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 sub chuck close M Back chuck close M code(For L system only) Specify the M code allocated to the back chuck closing. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 main chuck pos X Front chuck position X (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the X axis direction of front chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) main chuck pos Y Front chuck position Y (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the Y axis direction of front chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) main chuck pos Z Front chuck position Z (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the Z axis direction of front chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) sub chuck pos X Back chuck position X (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the X axis direction of back chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #12637 sub chuck pos Y Back chuck position Y (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the Y axis direction of back chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #12638 sub chuck pos Z Back chuck position Z (For L system only) Specify the position from the machine zero po int in the Z axis direction of back chuck. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #12639 main chuck ax name Front chuck moving axis name (For L system only) Specify the name of the axis to move the front chuck with 2nd axis name. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 #12640 sub chuck ax name Back chuck moving axis name (For L system only) Specify the name of the axis to move the back chuck with 2nd axis name. ---Setting range--- Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 #12650 table center posH Horizontal axis table center position (For M system on- ly) Set the center position of the table in the horiz ontal axis direction using the machine position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #12651 table center posV Vertical axis table center position (For M system only) Set the center position of the table in the vert ical axis direction using the machine position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) #12652 table center posT Height axis table center position (For M system only) Set the center position of the table in the height axis direction using the machine position. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) M[n] Code M code for calculating machining time Specify the M code for calculating the machining time. (n=1 to 50) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 M[n] ExeTime Execution time of M code for calculating machining time Specify the execution time of the M code. (n=1 to 50) ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) M[50+n] Code M code for calculating machining time (for each part system) Specify the M code for calculating the machining time. Set the M code that takes different time for each pa rt system. (n=1 to 10) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 M[50+n] ExeTime Execution time of M code for calculating machine time (for each part system) Specify the execution time of the M code. Different values can be set for each part system. (n=1 to 10) ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) M2[n] Code 2nd miscellaneous function code for calculating ma- chining time Specify the 2nd miscellaneous function code for calculating the machining time. (n=1 to 10) ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999999 M2[n] ExeTime Execution time of 2nd m. function code for calculating machining time Specify the execution time of the 2nd mi scellaneous function code. (n=1 to 10) ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) T Code ExeTime Execution time of T code for calculating machining time Specify the execution time of the T code for each part system. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) M Code StdExeTime Standard execution time of M code for calculating ma- chining time Specify the average execution time of the M code for which individual setting is not performed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) M2 Code StdExeTime Standard execution time of 2nd m. function code for cal- culating machine time Specify the average executi on time of the 2nd miscellaneous function code for which individual setting is not performed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42961 S Code ExeTime 1 S code execution time for machining time calculation (1st spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 1st spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42962 S Code ExeTime 2 S code execution time for machining time calculation (2nd spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 2nd spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42963 S Code ExeTime 3 S code execution time for machining time calculation (3rd spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 3rd spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42964 S Code ExeTime 4 S code execution time for machining time calculation (4th spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 4th spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42965 S Code ExeTime 5 S code execution time for machining time calculation (5th spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 5th spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42966 S Code ExeTime 6 S code execution time for machining time calculation (6th spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 6th spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42967 S Code ExeTime 7 S code execution time for machining time calculation (7th spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 7th spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) #42968 S Code ExeTime 8 S code execution time for machining time calculation (8th spindle) Specify the S code execution time of the 8th spindle. ---Setting range--- 0 to 60000 (ms) on Parameters SIO_Enable Enable safety related I/O observation Select whether to enable the sa fety related I/O observation. 0: Disable 1: Enable SLS_Enable Enable SLS observation Select whether to enable the safely limited speed observation. 0: Disable 1: Enable SLP_Enable Enable SLP observation Select whether to enable the sa fely limited position observation. 0: Disable 1: Enable SSM_Enable Enable Safe speed monitor Select whether to enable the safe speed monitor. 0: Disable 1: Enable SCA_Enable Enable safe cam Select whether to enable the safe cam. 0: Disable 1: Enable SOS_Enable Enable Safe operating stop Select whether to enable the safe operating stop. 0: Disable 1: Enable (*) When SS2 is executed, SOS is activated irrespective of this parameter. SS1_Enable Enable Safe stop 1 Select whether to enable the safe stop 1. 0: Disable 1: Enable (*) Irrespective of this parameter, when a smart safety observation error is detected, SS1 may be activated depending on the setting of "#51102 SF_Stoptype". SS2_Enable Enable Safe stop 2 Select whether to enable the safe stop 2. 0: Disable 1: Enable STO_Enable Enable Safe torque off Select whether to enable the safe torque off. 0: Disable 1: Enable (*) Irrespective of this parameter, when a smart safe ty observation error is det ected, STO may be activated depending on the setting of "#51102 SF_Stoptype". SBC_Enable Safe brake control enabled Select whether to enable the safe brake control. 0: Disable 1: Enable #51011 SBT_INT SBT interval Set the time that elapses before the next SBT inco mplete signal (SBTNFEXm / SBTNFMOm) turns ON after completing the brake test. When set "0", the interval will be 8 hours. ---Setting range--- 0 to 255 hours #51012 CRSCHK_TOL Cross-check stat us inconsistency tolerable time Set the tolerable time for inconsistency between CPUs st atus. (When the status is inconsistent for more than tolerable time, the alarm occurs and the motor power shuts OFF.) When set "0", the inconsistency tolerable time is 100 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 5000 (ms) #51013 SF_PSWD Safe password Set the safety password. Setting: 7 or 8 uppercase alphanumeric characters If no password is set, turn ON the machine parameter setup mode to set the safety parameters. ---Setting range--- 7 or 8 uppercase alphanumeric characters #51015 safe_drv_test Drive safety function easy test mode Select whether to enable the simple test mode in whic h the drive safety function operation can be checked without connecting any smart safety observation-capable drive unit. 0: Disable the drive safety function simple test mode 1: Enable the drive safety function simple test mode #51017 SLAD_Step Maximum number of steps in safety ladder Specify the maximum number of st orable steps for safety sequence. The maximum number of executable steps will be double the maximum number of storable steps. 0: 6144 steps 1 to 32: (Setting value) K steps ---Setting range--- 0 (default) 1 to 32 (K steps) SF_Disable Disable smart safety observation Exclude the axis from the smart safety observation target. 0: Enable smart safety observation 1: Disable smart safety observation (Note) The settings of "#51101 SF_Disable" and "#51 301 SF_SDisable" must be the same within a multi- hybrid drive unit. SF_Stoptype Stop method at error Select which of the safe stop methods to use when an error is detected in th e smart safety observation. 0: STO 1: SS1 SLS_Speed1-4 SLS speed tolerance 1-4 Specify the upper limits of machine-end speed determined as safe for each of SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. If the SLS detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the safely-limited speed while SLS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is execut ed. The safely-limited speed to be applied to SLS is calculated using the following equation. Safely-limited speed = SLS speed tolerance x SLS speed override / 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min or °/min) SLS_Override1-16 SLS speed override 1-16 Specify the speed overrides 1 to 16 with respect to SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. For details refer to SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SLS_Clamp SLS speed clamp ratio Specify the speed clamp ratio that is applied while SL S is ON. Set the ratio to about 80 to 90%. While SLS is ON, the command speed is clamped at the following speed: Clamp speed = Safely-limited speed x SLS speed clamp ratio / 100 (Safely-limited speed = SLS speed tolerance x SLS speed override / 100) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SLS_T1 SLS detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a speed error while SLS is ON. A safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed if the period of time set in this parameter has elapsed wit h the command/FB speed exc eeding the safely-limited speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SLS_T2 SLS deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error that is caused due to change of the safely-limited speed at the start of or during SLS. If y ou have changed the safely-limited speed at the start of or during SLS, and the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the safely-limited speed, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. When set to "0", the detection time is treated as 200(ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (ms) #51126+2(n-1) SLP_PositionPn SLP position tolerance n (+) "n" represents the SLP position tolerance No. (n=1 to 4) Specify the upper and lower limits of machine position, which is determined as safe, for each of SLP position tolerances 1(+) to 4(+). If the SLP detection delay time has elapsed while SLP is ON with the command/FB position outside the SLP position tolerance range, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *SLP is not available for a rotation-type rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to +99999.999 (mm) #51127+2(n-1) SLP_PositionMn SLP position tolerance n (-) "n" represents the SLP position tolerance No. (n=1 to 4) Specify the upper and lower limits of machine position, which is determined as safe, for each of SLP position tolerances 1(-) to 4(-). If the SL P detection delay time ha s elapsed while SLP is ON with t he command/FB position outside the SLP position tolerance range, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *SLP is not available for a rotation-type rotary axis. ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to +99999.999 (mm) #51134 SLP_T1 SLP detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a machine position erro r while SLP is ON. If the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB position outside the SLP position tolerance range, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #51135- SSM_Speed1-4 SSM speed 1-4 51138 Specify the upper limits of machine-e nd speed determined as safe for each of SSM speeds 1 to 4. If the com- mand/FB speed is at the safe speed or lower while SSM is ON, the Under SSM safe speed signal turns ON. If the command/FB speed exceeds t he safe speed, the Under SSM safe speed signal turns OFF. The safe speed to be applied to SSM is calculated using the following equation. (When the Under SSM safe speed signal is ON) Safe speed = SSM speed (When the Under SSM safe speed signal is OFF) Safe speed = SSM speed - SSM hysteresis width ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min or °/min) #51139- SSM_Hysteresis1-4 SSM hysteresis width 1-4 51142 Specify the hysteresis widths that correspond to SSM s peeds 1 to 4. For details refer to SSM speeds 1 to 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999 (mm/min or °/min) #51143+2(n-1) SCA_PositionPn SCA position n (+) "n" represents the SCA position No. (n=1 to 16) Specify the upper and lower limits of machine position de termined as safe for each of SCA positions 1(+) to 16(+). If the command/FB position is in the SCA safe position or smaller while SCA is ON, the Safe cam po- sition signal turns OFF. If the position has exceeded the SCA safe position, the Safe cam position signal turns ON. The SCA safe position is calculated using the following equation. (When the Safe cam position signal is ON) SCA safe position = SCA position (+) – SCA hysteresis width (When the Safe cam position signal is OFF) SCA safe position = SCA position (+) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to +99999.999 (mm) SCA_PositionMn SCA position n (-) "n" represents the SCA position No. (n=1 to 16) Specify the upper and lower limits of machine position determined as safe for each of SCA positions 1(-) to 16(-). If the command/FB position is in the SCA safe position or smaller while SCA is ON, the Safe cam po- sition signal turns OFF. If the position has exceeded the SCA safe position, the Safe cam position signal turns ON. The SCA safe position is calculated using the following equation. (When the Safe cam position signal is ON) SCA safe position = SCA positio n (-) – SCA hysteresis width (When the Safe cam position signal is OFF) SCA safe position = SCA position (-) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to +99999.999 (mm) SCA_Hysteresis SCA hysteresis width Specify the hysteresis widths that correspond to SCA positions 1 to 16. For details refer to SCA positions 1(+/-) to 16(+/-). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) SOS_Speed SOS stop speed Specify the upper limit of machine-end s peed determined as a safe operating stop.  If the SOS_V detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the speed of this parameter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed.  The point of time at which the command/FB speed dr ops to that of this parameter or lower while SS1/ SS2 is ON is treated as a standstill. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS speed error" may occur even though the axis is at a standstill. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (mm/min or °/min) SOS_T1 SOS_V detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a speed error while SOS is ON. If the period of time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the SO S stop speed while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SOS_Droop SOS position deviation tolerance Specify the upper limit of machine-en d position deviation determined as a safe operating stop. If the SOS_PD detection delay time has elapsed with the position devia tion (difference between the command and FB posi- tions) exceeding that of this parameter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS position deviati on error" may occur even though the axis is at a stand- still. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.999 (mm or °) SOS_T2 SOS_PD detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a position deviation error while SOS is ON. If a period of time set in this parameter has elapsed with the po sition deviation (difference between the command and FB positions) ex- ceeding the SOS position deviation tolerance while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SOS_PositionM SOS travel distance tolerance (-) Specify the upper limit of machine- end travel distance (minus side) determined as a safe operating stop. If the SOS_P detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB travel distance in the minus direction ex- ceeding that of this parameter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "S OS travel distance error" may occur ev en though the axis is at a standstill. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.999 (mm or °) #51181 SOS_PositionP SOS travel distance tolerance (+) Specify the upper limit of machine-end tr avel distance (plus side) determined as a safe operating stop. If the SOS_P detection delay time has elapsed with the comma nd/FB travel distance in t he plus direction exceed- ing that of this para meter while SOS is ON, a safe st op (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS travel distance error" may occur even though the axis is at a standstill. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.999 (mm or °) #51182 SOS_T3 SOS_P detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a travel distance erro r while SOS is ON. If the period of time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB travel distance exceeding the SOS travel distance tolerance (+/-) while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #51183 SS1_T1 SS1 deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error while SS1 is ON. If the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceedin g the SOS stop speed, STO is activated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (ms) #51184 SS2_T1 SS2 deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error while SS2 is ON. If the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceedin g the SOS stop speed, STO is activated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (ms) #51185 STO_EXEWT Waiting time before STO execution Specify a period of time to wait from when the drive unit receives an STO request from the NC until when STO is actually executed. Set this ti me so that the brake is activated within this period of time. When set to "0", the STO execution standby time is treated as 200 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) #51186 SBTEX_Enable External brake SBT enabled 0: Disable 1: Enable #51187 SBTMO_Enable Motor brake SBT enabled 0: Disable 1: Enable #51191 SBT_ILIM SBT current limit value Set the current limit value in the brak e test in proportion to the stall curr ent. When set to "0", the alarm occurs at the start of the brake test. (The test does not start.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) #51192 SBT_CMDWT SBT command wait time Set the wait time of output of movement command for br ake test from NC since receiving SBT starting signal (SBTSTEXm / SBTSTMOm). When set to "0", the commanded wait time is 400 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) #51193 SBT_FD SBT command movement amount Set the movement amount to command to the test target axis at the time of brake test. When set to "0", the alarm occurs at the start of the br ake test. (The test does not start.) ---Setting range--- -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm or °) SBT_FDRATE SBT command speed Set the command speed to command to the test target ax is at the time of brake te st. When set to "0", the alarm occurs at the start of the brake test. (The test does not start.) ---Setting range--- 0 to 1000000 (mm/min or °/min) SBT_OBTIM SBT observation time Set the time to continue the observ ation of axis movement amount after the output of movement command for test at the time of brak e test. When set to "0", the observation time is 1000 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) SBT_TOL SBT tolerable movement amount Set the tolerable movement amount of t he test target axis at the time of brake test. (The alarm occurs if the movement amount during the test exceeds this parameter value.) When set "0", the tolerable movement amount is 100 mm (or °). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm or °) SLP/SCA_FDTOL SLP/SCA tolerable movement amount during power OFF Sets the tolerable value of the diff erence (error amount) between [sav ed position at power shut OFF] and [restored position at power ON] in SLP/SCA encoder diagnosis during power OFF. When this above differ- ence exceeds the tolerable value, the system starts in STO status. When set "0", the tolerable value is as in below formula. Tolerable movement am ount = SV018(PIT) * 0.9 ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999.999 (mm) MlRtAbsSEnc_FDChk SLP/SCA encoder diagnosis during power OFF applica- tion for Multi revolu tion safety encoder Enables the encoder diagnosis during power OFF to us e SLP/SCA for the axes connected with Multi revolu- tion safety encoder. 0: Disable the encoder diagnosis during power OFF to use SLP/SCA for the axes connected with Multi rev- olution safety encoder 1: Enable the encoder diagnosis during power OFF to use SLP/SCA for the axes connected with Multi rev- olution safety encoder * As for the axes not connected with Multi revoluti on safety encoder, the above diagnosis will be enabled regardless of the setting value of this parameter. * The above diagnosis will not be executed when SLP/ SCA are disabled. (Both SLP_Enable and SCA_En- able are 0.) SF_PDCHK_TOL Servo axi s position deviation di agnosis tolerable value Sets the tolerable value of the position deviation (t he difference between the commanded position generated inside NC and the feedback position received from driv e unit) in the position devi ation diagnosis. When the position deviation exceeds the tolerable value, the Safe stop (SS1/STO) will be carried out. When "0" is set, the tolerable value is as in below formula. Tolerable value = SV018(PIT) * 2.0 ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (mm or °) #51200 SFSPEC1 Safety specification 1 Specify the Safety axis’s specificat ion by turning ON the corresponding bit. Input the hexadecimal value for this parameter. bit0-2: Not used bit3: Motor brake connection status 0: Motor brake connected 1: Motor brake not connected bit4-F: Not used * If the settings of encoder type (bit 0, bit1) are different from the actua lly connected ones, the servo alarm 4D is output. ---Setting range--- 0x0000 to 0xFFFF #51201 SENCTYP Safety encoder type For a safety encoder-connected axis, set the safety encoder type. When the Multi revolution part is connect- ed to the safety encoder that is outside the certific ation of safety standards, and in SLP/SCA enabled, SLP/ SCA encorder diagnosis during power OFF will be carried out regardless of the setting value of #51198 Ml- RtAbsSEnc_FDChk. 0: Safety encoder that is outside the safety certification for Multi revolution 1: Safety encoder that is certified with safety standards for Multi revolution #51202 SEMG_STO_WT STO delay time for safety external emergency stop Specify a length of time it takes to complete deceleration stop when safety external emergency stop is im- plemented. When not executing deceleration st op, set the parameter to "0". When executing deceleration stop, subtract "#5118 5 STO_EXEWT" from "#2256 SV056" and set the differ- ence in the parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) SF_SDisable Disable smart safety observation Exclude the axis from the smart safety observation target. 0: Enable smart safety observation 1: Disable smart safety observation (Note) The settings of "#51101 SF_Disable" and "#51 301 SF_SDisable" must be the same within a multi- hybrid drive unit. SF_SStoptype Stop method at error Select which of the safe stop methods to use when an error is detected in th e smart safety observation. 0: STO 1: SS1 SLS_SSpeed1-4 SLS sp eed tolerance 1-4 Specify the upper limits of machine-end speed determined as safe for each of SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. If the SLS detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the safely-limited speed while SLS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is execut ed. The safely-limited speed to be applied to SLS is calculated using the following equation. Safely-limited speed = SLS speed tolerance x SLS speed override / 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999.9 (r/min) SLS_SOverride1-16 SLS speed override 1-16 Specify the speed overrides 1 to 16 with respect to SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. For details refer to SLS speed tolerances 1 to 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SLS_Sclamp SLS speed clamp ratio Specify the speed clamp ratio that is applied while SL S is ON. Set the ratio to about 80 to 90%. While SLS is ON, the command speed is clamped at the following speed: Clamp speed = Safely-limited speed x SLS speed clamp ratio / 100 (Safely-limited speed = SLS speed tolerance x SLS speed override / 100) ---Setting range--- 0 to 100 (%) SLS_ST1 SLS detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a speed error while SLS is ON. A safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed if the period of time set in this parameter has elapsed wit h the command/FB speed exc eeding the safely-limited speed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SLS_ST2 SLS deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error that is caused due to change of the safely-limited speed at the start of or during SLS. If y ou have changed the safely-limited speed at the start of or during SLS, and the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the safely-limited speed, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. When set to "0", the detection time is treated as 200(ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 99999 (ms) #51326- SSM_SSpeed1-4 SSM speed 1-4 51329 Specify the upper limits of machine-e nd speed determined as safe for each of SSM speeds 1 to 4. If the com- mand/FB speed is at the safe speed or lower while SSM is ON, the Under SSM safe speed signal turns ON. If the command/FB speed exceeds t he safe speed, the Under SSM safe speed signal turns OFF. The safe speed to be applied to SSM is calculated using the following equation. (When the Under SSM safe speed signal is ON) Safe speed = SSM speed (When the Under SSM safe speed signal is OFF) Safe speed = SSM speed - SSM hysteresis width ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999.9 (r/min) #51330- SSM_SHysteresis1-4 SSM hysteresis width 1-4 51333 Specify the hysteresis widths that correspond to SSM s peeds 1 to 4. For details refer to SSM speeds 1 to 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 999999.9 (r/min) #51334 SOS_SSpeed SOS stop speed Specify the upper limit of machine-end spe ed determined as a safe operating stop.  If the SOS_V detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB speed exc eeding that of this pa- rameter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed.  The point of time at which the command/FB speed drops to that of this parameter or lower while SS1/ SS2 is ON is treated as a standstill. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS speed error" may occur even though the spindle is at a standstill. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999.9 (r/min) #51335 SOS_ST1 SOS_V detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a speed error while SO S is ON. If the period of ti me set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceeding the SO S stop speed while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #51336 SOS_SDroop SOS position deviation tolerance Specify the upper limit of machine-en d position deviation determined as a sa fe operating stop. If the SOS_PD detection delay time has elapsed with the position dev iation (difference between the command and FB posi- tions) exceeding that of this para meter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS position deviat ion error" may occur even though the spindle is at a standstill. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (°) #51337 SOS_ST2 SOS_PD detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a position deviation error while SOS is ON. If a period of time set in this parameter has elapsed with the position deviation (difference between the command and FB positions) ex- ceeding the SOS position deviation tolerance while SO S is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) #51338 SOS_SPositionM SOS travel distance tolerance (-) Specify the upper limit of machine-end travel distance (minus side) determi ned as a safe operating stop. If the SOS_P detection delay time has elapsed with the command/FB travel distance in the minus direction ex- ceeding that of this parameter while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "SOS travel distance error" may occur even though the spindle is at a stand- still. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (°) SOS_SPositionP SOS travel distance tolerance (+) Specify the upper limit of machine-e nd travel distance (plus side) determine d as a safe operating stop. If the SOS_P detection delay time has elapsed with the command/ FB travel distance in the plus direction exceed- ing that of this parameter while SOS is ON , a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. *When this parameter is set to 0, "S OS travel distance error" may occur even though the spindle is at a stand- still. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (°) SOS_ST3 SOS_P detection delay time Specify a period of time to detect a travel distance erro r while SOS is ON. If the pe riod of time set in this parameter has elapsed with the comm and/FB travel distance exceeding t he SOS travel distance tolerance (+/-) while SOS is ON, a safe stop (SS1 or STO) is executed. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SS1_ST1 SS1 deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error wh ile SS1 is ON. If the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceed ing the SOS stop speed, STO is activated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) SS2_ST1 SS2 deceleration observation time Specify a period of time to detect a deceleration error wh ile SS2 is ON. If the time set in this parameter has elapsed with the command/FB speed exceed ing the SOS stop speed, STO is activated. ---Setting range--- 0 to 9999 (ms) STO_SEXEWT Waiting time before STO execution Specify a period of time to wait from when the driv e unit receives an STO request from the NC until when STO is actually executed. Set this ti me so that the brake is activated wit hin this period of time. When set to "0", the STO execution standby time is treated as 200 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 20000 (ms) SF_PDCHK_ST1 Spindle position deviation diagnosis waiting time Set the waiting time for starting the position deviat ion diagnosis at Spindle non -interpolation mode. The di- agnosis of the position deviation at Spindle non-inter polation mode starts after the commanded speed be- comes consistent and after the time set by this parameter passes. It stops while the command speed is changing. When set to "0", the Spindle position deviation diagnosis waiting time is 20000 ms. ---Setting range--- 0 to 30000 (ms) SF_PDCHK_STOL Spindle position deviation diagnosis tolerable value Sets the tolerable value of the position deviation (t he difference between the commanded position generated inside NC and the feedback position received from driv e unit) in the position devi ation diagnosis. When the position deviation exceeds the tolerable value, the Safe stop (SS1/STO) will be carried out. When set to "0", the tolerable value is 1080°. ---Setting range--- 0 to 32767 (°) SEMG_STO_SWT STO delay time for safety external emergency stop Specify a length of time it takes to complete decelera tion stop when safety external emergency stop is im- plemented. When not executing deceleration stop, set the parameter to "0". When executing deceleration stop, subtract "#51343 STO_SEXEWT" from "#13056 SP056" and set the dif- ference in the parameter. ---Setting range--- 0 to 29900 (ms) #51501+10(n-1) RIO CH No. #n Target channel number #n Specify the channel No. to which the nth sa fety I/O unit is connected. (n=1 to 8) * When set to "0", the RIO assignment parameters of the nth station are all disabled. ---Setting range--- 0, 1 to 3 #51502+10(n-1) RIO Station No. #n Target station number #n Specify the station No. of the nt h safety I/O unit. (n=1 to 8) * Set this parameter to the same value as of the rota ry switch on the safety I/O unit to which the device is assigned. ---Setting range--- 0 to 63 #51503+10(n-1) DI dev name #n DI device name #n Specify the name of the DI assignment device s of the nth safety I/O unit. (n=1 to 8) * When set to "0", the name is left blank. ---Setting range--- 0, X, ZR #51504+10(n-1) DI dev No. #n DI device number #n Specify the head device No. of DI assignment devices of the nth safety I/O unit. (n=1 to 8) Device X: hexadecimal and on a 32-point basis (a multiple of 32) Device ZR: decimal and on a 2-point basis (an even number) * This parameter changes to "0" if you change the device name "DI dev name #n". * Specify "DI dev name #n" ahead of this parameter. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 1E0 (hexadecimal) ZR: 0 to 62 (decimal) #51505+10(n-1) DO dev name #n DO device name #n Specify the name of the DO assignment device s of the nth safety I/O unit. (n=1 to 8) * When set to "0", the name is left blank. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, ZR #51506+10(n-1) DO dev No. #n DO device number #n Specify the head device No. of t he DO assignment devices of the nth safety I/O unit. (n=1 to 8) Device Y: hexadecimal and on a 32-point basis (a multiple of 32) Device ZR: decimal and on a 2-point basis (an even number) * The setting of this parameter changes to "0" if you change the device name of "DO dev name #n". * Specify "DO dev name #n" ahead of this parameter. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 1E0 (hexadecimal) ZR: 64 to 126 (decimal) #51582 EMG_Dev1_ch Emergency stop signal 1 channel No. Specify the No. of I/O channel to connect the safety I/O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. When specifying the channel No. and statio n No. of the emergency stop signal, se t any of the safety I/O units spec- ified by the parameters RIO CH No. and RIO Station No. When set to "0", the designation of emergency stop signal device by EMG_Dev1 is disabled, irrespective of the settings of EMG_Dev1_stn and EMG_Dev1_bit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 EMG_Dev1_stn Emergency stop signal 1 station No. Specify the No. of station to connect the safety I/O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. ---Setting range--- 0 to 63 EMG_Dev1_bit Emergency stop signal 1 bit No. Specify the bit No. of the safety I/O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 EMG_Dev2_ch Emergency stop signal 2 channel No. Specify the No. of I/O channel to connect the safety I/ O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. When specifying the channel No. and station No. of the emergency stop signal, set any of the safety I/O units spec- ified by the parameters RIO CH No. an d RIO Station No. When set to "0", the designation of emergency stop signal device by EMG_Dev2 is disabled, irrespective of the settings of EMG_Dev2_stn and EMG_Dev2_bit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3 EMG_Dev2_stn Emergency stop signal 2 station No. Specify the No. of station to connect the safety I/O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. ---Setting range--- 0 to 63 EMG_Dev2_bit Emergency stop signal 2 bit No. Specify the bit No. of the safety I/O unit that receives the emergency stop signal. ---Setting range--- 0 to 7 SIO_DIDelay Allowed input signal compare time Specify the allowed time of inconsistency between the PLC1 and PLC2 side input signals. Specify this in in- crements of 10 (ms). When set to "0", the a llowed safety signal compare time is 300 (ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (10 ms) SIO_DODelay Allowed output signal compare time Specify the allowed time of inconsistency between the PLC1 and PLC2 side output signals. Specify this in increments of 10 (ms). When set to "0", the allowed safety signal compare time is 300 (ms). ---Setting range--- 0 to 50 (10 ms) SIO_DOErrtype DO control method at diagnostic error Select the DO control method and PLC status of when a safety signal observation error occurs. 0: PLC is set in RUN state and DO is controlled through user safety sequence 1: PLC is set in STOP state and all DOs are OFF. SIO_DODelay2 Allowed output signal compare time 2 Specify the allowed time of inconsistency between the PLC1 and PLC2 side output signals. Specify this in increments of 10 (ms). When set to "0", the allowed safety signal compare time is 300 (ms). Set tolerable time more than 300 (ms), when an output signal is controlled with 100 (ms) timer. ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (10 ms) #80000+20(n-1) N001 Device Number Scanner function Implicit Message: device No. Specify the No. of the device that is assigned to node. (n=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 1 to 128 #80001+20(n-1) N001 Position No. Scanner func tion Implicit Message: position No. Specify the position No. that is assigned to node. (n=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0 to 63 #80002+20(n-1) N001 Project No. Scanner functi on Implicit Message: PLC project No. Specify the PLC project No. that is assigned to node. (n=1 to 64) This number is set as the project No. of PLC device to which the node input/output /connection status is as- signed. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 #80003+20(n-1) N001 in dev name Scanner function Implicit Message: PLC device name (IN (T->O)) Specify the name of PLC device to which Implicit Message input data is transferred. (n=1 to 64) Example) X ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W #80004+20(n-1) N001 in dev No. Scanner function Implicit Message: PLC device top No. (IN (T->O)) Specify the top No. of PLC device to which Implicit Message input data is transferred. (n=1 to 64) If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #80005+20(n-1) N001 in dev size Scanner functi on Implicit Message: PLC device size (IN (T->O)) Specify the size (bytes) of Implicit Message input data that is transferred to PLC device. (n=1 to 64) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 509 (bytes) * Up to 5000 bytes in total for all nodes N001 out dev name Scanner function Implicit Message: PLC device name (OUT (O->T)) Specify the name of PLC device to which Implicit Message output data is transferred. (n=1 to 64) Example) Y ---Setting range--- Y, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W N001 out dev No. Scanner function Implicit Message: PLC device top No. (OUT (O->T)) Specify the top No. of PLC device to which Implic it Message output data is transferred. (n=1 to 64) If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N001 out dev size Scanner function Implicit Message: PLC device size (OUT (O->T)) Specify the size (bytes) of Implicit Message output data that is transferred to PLC device. (n=1 to 64) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 505 (bytes) * Up to 5000 bytes in total for all nodes N001 sts dev name Scanner function Implicit Message: connection status assign PLC device name Specify the name of PLC device to which connection status of the device assigned to node is transferred. (n=1 to 64) Example) M ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W N001 sts dev No. Scanner function Implicit Message: connection status assign PLC device No. Specify the top No. of PLC device to which connection status of the device assigned to node is transferred. (n=1 to 64) 6 bytes of data starting from the specified device No. are occupied. Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #80011+20(n-1) N001 High in size High-speed refresh area size (IN (T->O)) This parameter specifies the high-speed refresh input area size for the node. (n = 1 to 64) When the setting is greater than that of PLC device size (IN (T->O)) of the same node, an alarm will be is- sued. When the total size of the high-speed refresh input area s for all the nodes and all the areas is greater than 8 (bytes), an alarm will be issued. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 (*) Up to 8 (bytes) in total for all nodes #80012+20(n-1) N001 High out size High-speed refresh area size (OUT (O->T)) This parameter specifies the high-speed refresh output area size for the node. (n = 1 to 64) When the setting is greater than that of PLC device si ze (OUT (O->T)) of the sa me node, an alarm will be issued. When the total size of the high-speed refresh output ar eas for all the nodes and al l the areas is greater than 8 (bytes), an alarm will be issued. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 (*) Up to 8 (bytes) in total for all nodes #81565 PLC Stop Output Setting of output at PLC STOP Select which data is sent to t he hardware connected when the NC enter s the PLC STOP mode, the set PLC device value or the cleared data (the data cleared to "0"). 0: Send the PL C device value 1: Send the data cleared to "0" CH01 Project No. Scanner function Explicit Message: PLC project No. Specify the PLC project No. that is assigned to node. (c=1 to 16) This number is set as the project No. of PLC device to which the node input/outpu t/control structure is as- signed. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 CH01 ctrl dev name Scanner functi on Explicit Message: control structure assign PLC device name Specify the name of PLC device to which "Explicit Me ssage control structure" is assigned. (c=1 to 16) Example) M ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W CH01 ctrl dev No. Scanner function Explicit Message: ctrl structure as- sign PLC device top No. Specify the top No. of PLC device to which "Explici t Message control structure" is assigned. (c=1 to 16) If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. Example) 2048 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 ameter name varies depending on the parameter No. #81440+20(a-1) Imp A1 Proj No. Adapter func tion Implicit Message: PLC project No. Specify the PLC project No. that is assigned to Adapter Implicit (IN/ OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) This number is set as the project No. of PLC device for input/output to/from Adapt er Implicit (IN/OUT) area. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 #81441+20(a-1) Imp A1in offset Adapter functi on Implicit Message: IN area top offset Specify the offset (bytes) from the head of Adapter Implicit (I N) area. (a=1 to 6) The data starting from the specifie d offset is sent from Adapter Implicit (IN) area to PLC device. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 499 (bytes) #81442+20(a-1) Imp A1in dev name Adapter func tion Implicit Message: PLC device name (IN) Specify the name of PLC device to which Adapter Imp licit (IN) area data is transferred. (a=1 to 6) Example) X ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W #81443+20(a-1) Imp A1in dev No. Adapter function Implicit Message: PLC device top No. (IN) Specify the top No. of PLC device to which Adapter Implicit (IN) area data is transferred. (a=1 to 6) If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. Example) 200 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #81444+20(a-1) Imp A1in dev size Adapter function Implicit Message: PLC device size (IN) Specify the size (bytes) of Adapter Implicit (IN) area data that is tr ansferred to PLC device. (a=1 to 6) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (bytes) * Up to 500 bytes in total for all areas #81445+20(a-1) Imp A1out offset Adapter function Implicit Message: OUT area top offset Specify the offset (bytes) from the head of Adapter Implicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) The PLC device data starting from the specified of fset is sent to Adapter Implicit (OUT) area. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 499 (bytes) Imp A1out dev name Adapter func tion Implicit Message: PLC device name (OUT) Specify the name of PLC device that is sent to Adapter Implicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) Example) Y ---Setting range--- Y, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W Imp A1out dev No. Adapter function Implicit Message: PLC device top No. (OUT) Specify the top No. of PLC device that is sent to Adapter Im plicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. Example) 200 ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Imp A1out dev size Adapter func tion Implicit Message: PLC device size (OUT) Specify the size (bytes) of PLC device that is sent to Adapter Implicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 500 (bytes) * Up to 500 bytes in total for all areas Imp A1High in size High-speed refresh area size (IN) This parameter specifies the size of the high-speed refresh area in the I/O (IN) area. (a = 1 to 6) When the setting is greater than that of PLC device size (IN) of the same area, an alarm will be issued. When the total size of the high-speed refresh input area s for all the nodes and all the areas is greater than 8 (bytes), an alarm will be issued. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 (*) Up to 8 (bytes) in total for all areas Imp A1High outsize High-speed refresh area size (OUT) This parameter specifies the size of the high-speed refresh area in the I/O (OUT) area. (a = 1 to 6) When the setting is greater than that of PLC device size (OUT) of the same area, an alarm will be issued. When the total size of the high-speed refresh output ar eas for all the nodes and all the areas is greater than 8 (bytes), an alarm will be issued. ---Setting range--- 0 to 8 (*) Up to 8 (bytes) in total for all areas Imp sts Proj No. Connection status assigned PLC project No. Specify the No. of PLC project to wh ich connection status is transferred. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 #81561 Impsts dev name Connection status assigned PLC device name Specify the name of PLC device to wh ich connection status is transferred. Example) M ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W #81562 Imp sts dev No. Connection status assigned PLC device top No. Specify the top No. of PLC device to wh ich connection status is transferred. 6 bytes of data starting from the specified device No. are occupied. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 rameter name varies depending on the parameter No. Exp A1 Proj No. Adapter func tion Explicit Message: PLC project No. Specify the PLC project No. that is assigned to Adapter Explicit (IN/OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) This number is set as the project No. of PLC device for input/output to/from Adapt er Explicit (IN/OUT) area. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 Exp A1in offset Adapter function Explicit Message: IN area top offset Specify the offset (bytes) from the head of Adapter Explicit (IN) area. (a=1 to 6) The data starting from the specified offset is s ent from Adapter Explicit (IN) area to PLC device. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1388 Exp A1in dev name Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device name (IN) Specify the name of PLC device to which Adapter Explicit (IN) area data is transferred. (a=1 to 6) Example) M ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W Exp A1in dev No. Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device top No. (IN) Specify the top No. of PLC device to which Adapter Explicit (IN) area data is transferred. (a=1 to 6) If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. Example) 512 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Exp A1in dev size Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device size (IN) Specify the size (bytes) of Adapter Explicit (IN) area data that is transferred to PLC device. (a=1 to 6) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1389 (bytes) * Up to 1389 bytes in total for all areas Exp A1out offset Adapter function Explicit Message: OUT area top offset Specify the offset (bytes) from the head of Adapter Explicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) The PLC device data starting from the specified offset is sent to Adapte r Explicit (OUT) area. Example) 100 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1388 #81576+20(a-1) Exp A1out dev name Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device name (OUT) Specify the name of PLC device that is sent to Adapter Explicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) Example) B ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W #81577+20(a-1) Exp A1out dev No. Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device top No. (OUT) Specify the top No. of PLC devic e that is sent to Adapter Explicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) Example) 200 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #81578+20(a-1) Exp A1out dev size Adapter function Explicit Message: PLC device size (OUT) Specify the size (bytes) of PLC de vice that is sent to Adapter Explicit (OUT) area. (a=1 to 6) Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1389 (bytes) * Up to 1389 bytes in total for all areas #1 Slot No. Selection of parameter application slot Select the slot of the CC-Link IE field network ex pansion unit to which you apply the CCIEF common param- eters #82000 to #82695. * If you select the same slot as of "#82700 #2 Slot No.", the parameters #82000 to #82695 are applied to the slot with higher priority. ---Setting range--- 0: No setting (Disable) 1: EXT3 2: EXT4 * For M80/M800S/E80 1: EXT1 2: EXT2 #1 Network Type Network type Specify the station type of the CC-L ink IE field network expansion unit. 0: Master station 1: Local station #1 Network No. Network No. Specify the network No. of the CC-Link IE field network expansion unit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 239 0: No setting #1 Total Stations Total number of slave stations Specify the number of stations other than master stations. If the NC acts as a local station, set "0" in the parameter.  If you set a reserved station, include it in the count. ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 0: No setting #1 Station No. Station No. (local station) Specify the station No. of the CC-L ink IE field network expansion unit. For a master station, the station No. is 0, irrespective of the parameter. * If the NC acts as a master station, the maximum value of the station No. which can be set to the slave station is "64". If the NC acts as a master station and also t he NC is connected as a local station, set "64" or less to the station No. ---Setting range--- 0 to 120 #1 Mode Communication mode Specify the communication mode. 0: Online mode 1: Offline mode 2: H/W test mode #1 DLink Fault St. Data link error station setting Select whether to hold or clear the input data from the slave station where a data link error occurred. 0: Clear 1: Hold #82007 #1 PLC Stop Output Output setting at PLC STOP Select whether to hold or clear the cyclic data output when the PLC is put in STOP status. 0: Output 1: Clear #82008 #1 Loopback Func Loopback function setting Select whether or not to use the loopback function. When ring topology is selected as the method of connecting with other stations, select "1" (Use). For the other connection method s, select "0" (Not use). If the NC acts as a local stat ion, set "0" in the parameter. If the NC acts as a local station, it operates according to the loopba ck function setting of master station. 0: Not use 1: Use #82040 #1 SB Link-d size Number of SB link devices Specify the number of SB link devices for link refresh. Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 #82041 #1 SB Link-d DNo. Start device No. of SB link devices Specify the start device No. of SB lin k devices that perform link refresh. Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1F0 (hexadecimal) #82042 #1 Refr-d PNo.(SB) Refresh device project No. for SB link device Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SB link devices. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #82043 #1 Refr-d name(SB) Refresh device name for SB link device Specify the name of PLC devices that perfor m link refresh with the SB link devices. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SB 0: No setting #82044 #1 Refr-d DNo.(SB) Refresh device start device No. for SB link device Specify the start device No. of PL C devices that perform link refresh with the SB link devices. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF SB: 0 to 7FF0 R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #82050 #1 SW Link-d size Number of SW link devices Specify the number of SW li nk devices for link refresh. Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 #1 SW Link-d DNo. Start device No. of SW link devices Specify the start device No. of SW li nk devices that perform link refresh. Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FC (hexadecimal) #1 Refr-d PNo.(SW) Refresh device project No. for SW link device Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #1 Refr-d name(SW) Refresh device name for SW link device Specify the name of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SW 0: No setting #1 Refr-d DNo.(SW) Refresh device start device No. for SW link device Specify the start device No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF SW: 0 to 7FF0 R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #1 N01 Link-d name Link device name Specify the link device name. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0, RX, RY, RWr, RWw 0: No setting #1 N01 Link-d size Number of link devices Specify the number of link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you designate RX/RY, set the number in increments of 16. If you designate RWr/RWw, set th e number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- RX, RY: 0 to 16384 RWr, RWw: 0 to 8192 #1 N01 Link-d DNo. Link device start device No. Specify the start device number of the link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you designate RX/RY, set the number in increments of 16. If you designate RWr/RWw, set th e number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- RX, RY: 0 to 3FF0 RWr, RWw: 0 to 1FFC (hexadecimal) #82063+10(k-1) #1 N01 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perf orm link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #82064+10(k-1) #1 N01 Refr-d name Refresh device name Specify the name of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- RX: 0, X, M, L, B, D, W, R RY: 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W, R RWr, RWw: 0, M, L, B, D, W, R 0: No setting #82065+10(k-1) #1 N01 Refr-d DNo. Refresh device start device No. Specify the start device No. of PLC de vices that perform link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #2 Slot No. Selection of parameter application slot Select the slot of the CC-Link IE field network ex pansion unit to which you apply the CCIEF common param- eters #82700 to #83395. * If you select the same slot as of "#82000 #1 Slot No.", the parameters #82000 to #82695 are applied to the slot with higher priority. ---Setting range--- 0: No setting (Disable) 1: EXT3 2: EXT4 * For M80/M800S/E80 1: EXT1 2: EXT2 #2 Network Type Network type Specify the station type of the CC-L ink IE field network expansion unit. ---Setting range--- 0: Master station 1: Local station #2 Network No. Network No. Specify the network No. of the CC-Link IE field network expansion unit. ---Setting range--- 0 to 239 0: No setting #2 Total Stations Total number of slave stations Specify the number of stations other than master stations. If the NC acts as a local station, set "0" in the parameter.  If you set a reserved station, include it in the count. ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 0: No setting #2 Station No. Station No. (local station) Specify the station No. of the CC-L ink IE field network expansion unit. For a master station, the station No. is 0, irrespective of the parameter. * If the NC acts as a master station, the maximum value of the station No. which can be set to the slave station is "64". If the NC acts as a master station and also t he NC is connected as a local station, set "64" or less to the station No. ---Setting range--- 0 to 120 #2 Mode Communication mode Specify the communication mode. 0: Online mode 1: Offline mode 2: H/W test mode #2 DLink Fault St. Data link error station setting Select whether to hold or clear the input data fr om the station where a data link error occurred. 0: Clear 1: Hold #82707 #2 PLC Stop Output Output setting at PLC STOP Select whether to hold or clear the cyclic data output when the PLC is put in STOP status. 0: Clear 1: Hold #82708 #2 Loopback Func Loopback function setting Select whether or not to use the loopback function. When ring topology is selected as the method of connecting with other stations, select "1" (Use). For the other connection method s, select "0" (Not use). If the NC acts as a local stat ion, set "0" in the parameter. If the NC acts as a local station, it operates according to the loopba ck function setting of master station. 0: Not use 1: Use #82740 #2 SB Link-d size Number of SB link devices Specify the number of SB link devices for link refresh. Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 #82741 #2 SB Link-d DNo. Start device No. of SB link devices Specify the start device No. of SB lin k devices that perform link refresh. Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1F0 (hexadecimal) #82742 #2 Refr-d PNo.(SB) Refresh device project No. for SB link device Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SB link devices. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #82743 #2 Refr-d name(SB) Refresh device name for SB link device Specify the name of PLC devices that perfor m link refresh with the SB link devices. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SB 0: No setting #82744 #2 Refr-d DNo.(SB) Refresh device start device No. for SB link device Specify the start device No. of PL C devices that perform link refresh with the SB link devices. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF SB: 0 to 7FF0 R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #82750 #2 SW Link-d size Number of SW link devices Specify the number of SW li nk devices for link refresh. Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 #2 SW Link-d DNo. Start device No. of SW link devices Specify the start device No. of SW li nk devices that perform link refresh. Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FC (hexadecimal) #2 Refr-d PNo.(SW) Refresh device project No. for SW link device Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #2 Refr-d name(SW) Refresh device name for SW link device Specify the name of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W, R, SW 0: No setting #2 Refr-d DNo.(SW) Refresh device start device No. for SW link device Specify the start device No. of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the SW link devices. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF SW: 0 to 7FF0 R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #2 N01 Link-d name Link device name Specify the link device name. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0, RX, RY, RWr, RWw 0: No setting #2 N01 Link-d size Number of link devices Specify the number of link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you designate RX/RY, set the number in increments of 16. If you designate RWr/RWw, set th e number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- RX, RY: 0 to 16384 RWr, RWw: 0 to 8192 #2 N01 Link-d DNo. Link device start device No. Specify the start device number of the link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you designate RX/RY, set the number in increments of 16. If you designate RWr/RWw, set th e number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- RX, RY: 0 to 3FF0 RWr, RWw: 0 to 1FFC (hexadecimal) #82763+10(k-1) #2 N01 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. Specify the project No. of PLC devices that perf orm link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #82764+10(k-1) #2 N01 Refr-d name Refresh device name Specify the name of PLC devices that perform link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- RX: 0, X, M, L, B, D, W, R RY: 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W, R RWr, RWw: 0, M, L, B, D, W, R 0: No setting #82765+10(k-1) #2 N01 Refr-d DNo. Refresh device start device No. Specify the start device No. of PLC de vices that perform link refresh with the link devices. (k=1 to 64) If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 CN01 Station No. Station No. (slave station) Specify the station No. of slave station connected to the network. (n=1 to 64) There is no need to number the stations sequentially. (duplication is not acceptable) ---Setting range--- 0 to 64 0: No setting CN01 Station Type Station type (slave station) Specify the station type for slave stations. (n=1 to 64) Set the same station type as that of the un its that are actually connected to the network. ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Remote I/O station 2: Remote device station 3: Intelligent device station 4: Local station CN01 RX/RY size Number of RX/RY link devices Specify the number of RX/RY link devices that pe rform link refresh with slav e stations. (n=1 to 64) Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- Local or intelligent device station: 0 to 2048 Remote device station: 0 to 128 Remote I/O station: 0 to 64 CN01 RX/RY DNo. Start device No. of RX/RY link devices Specify the start device No. of RX/RY link devices th at perform link refresh with slave stations. (n=1 to 64) Set the number in increments of 16. ---Setting range--- 0 to 3FF0 (hexadecimal) CN01 RWr/RWw size Numb er of RWr/RWw link devices Specify the number of RWr/RWw link devices that pe rform link refresh with slav e stations. (n=1 to 64) Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- Local or intelligent device station: 0 to 1024 Remote device station: 0 to 64 Remote I/O station: Setting is disabled (fixed to 0) CN01 RWr/RWw DNo. Start device No. of RWr/RWw link devices Specify the start device No. of RWr/ RWw link devices that perform link refresh with slave stations. (n=1 to 64) Set the number in increments of 4. ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FFC (hexadecimal) CN01 Set rsvd sts Reserved/Error invalid station setting Designate the station as rese rved station or error invalid station. (n=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Reserved station 2: Error invalid station #85000 Enable CCIEF Basic Enable the CC -Link IE Field Network Basic communica- tion. Select whether to enable the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #85001 Station Type Specify the station type of the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. Select whether the local station acts as a master or a slave station. When operating it as a ma ster station, set the parameters #85010 to #85092. When operating it as a slave station, set the parameters #85180 to #85189. 0: Master station 1: Slave station #85002 Err Switch Select the behavior when an error occurs in the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. Select whether to execute emergency stop or indicate a warning when an error occurs in the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. 0: Emergency stop 1: Warning indication #85003 DLink Fault St. Setting of data link faulty station in the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. Select whether to clear the input data (RX for master st ation, RY for slave station) or retain the last value when a data lin k error occurs. 0: Clear 1: Hold #85004 PLC Stop Output Select whether to enable the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication in PLC stop status. Select whether to retain or clear the output data (RY fo r master station, RX for sl ave station) when the PLC enters STOP status. 0: Output 1: Clear #85010 Total Slaves Number of devices to be connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (master). Specify the number of slave devices to be connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (master). ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) #85012 Timeout Value Timeout for the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic commu- nication (master) Specify the length of timeout for cyclic communication in milliseconds. ---Setting range--- 0 or 20 to 65535 (0: 100ms) #85013 Timeout Count Number of times of timeout for the CC-Link IE Field Net- work Basic communication (master) Specify the number of timeou ts for cyclic communication. If the number of consecutive timeouts exceeds the setting, the slave station is disconnected. ---Setting range--- 0, 3, 5, 10 (0: 3 times) N01 Occupied St. Number of stations occupied by the 1st slave device Specify the number of stations occu pied by the 1st slave device. Up to 4 stations can be occupied by one slave device. Example: When the 1st device occupies four stations, stations occupied by the 2nd device start from the 5th station. 1st device occupying four stations (1st to 4th stations) 2nd device occupying one station (5th station) ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) N01 Set rsvd St. Reserved station setting of the 1st slave device Select whether to set the 1st sl ave device as reserved station. When set as reserved station, comm unication with the slave device is no t performed. This enables you to reserve the stations that are to be used in the future. (The reserved station is available in version D4 or later systems. Set "0" fo r D3 or earlier systems.) Example: When the 1st device occupies four reserved stations, stations occupied by the 2nd device start from the 5th station. Comm unication is not performed for the 1st to 4th stations. 1st device (reserved station) occupying four stations (1st to 4th stations) (Communication is not performed) 2nd device occupying one station (5th station) ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Reserved station N01 IP Address IP address of 1st slave device Specify the IP address of the 1st slave device. Set the slave's IP address in the same network as the par ameter "#1926 Global IP address". It is not possible to communication with a device on a different network. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254 (0.0.0.0: No setting) N01 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. for 1st slave device Specify the project No. of PLC devices for which link refr esh is performed with the link devices of the 1st slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 (0: No setting) N01 Refr-d to RX Refresh device name for 1st slave device (RX) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 1st slave device. Link refresh-enabled devices X, M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85026 N01 Refr-No to RX Refresh device start device No. for 1st slave device (RX) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 1st slave device. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85027 N01 Refr-d to RY Refresh device name for 1st slave device (RY) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 1st slave device. Link refresh-enabled devices Y, M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85028 N01 Refr-No to RY Refresh device start device No. for 1st slave device (RY) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 1st slave device. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85029 N01 Refr-d to RWr Refresh device name for 1st slave device (RWr) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 1st slave device. Link refresh-enabled devices M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N01 Refr-No to RWr Refresh device start device No. for 1st slave device (RWr) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 1st slave device. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N01 Refr-d to RWw Refresh device name for 1st slave device (RWw) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 1st slave device. Link refresh-enabled devices M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N01 Refr-No to RWw Refresh device start device No. for 1st slave device (RWw) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 1st slave device. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N02 Occupied St. Number of stations occupied by 2nd slave device Specify the number of stations occu pied by the 2nd slave device. Up to 4 stations can be occupied by one slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) N02 Set rsvd St. Reserved station setting of the 2nd slave device Select whether to set the 2nd sl ave device as reserved station. (The reserved station is available in version D4 or later systems. Set "0 : No setting" for ve rsion D3 or earlier systems.) ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Reserved station N02 IP Address IP address of 2nd slave device Specify the IP address of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254 (0.0.0.0: No setting) #85044 N02 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. for 2nd slave device Specify the project No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 (0: No setting) #85045 N02 Refr-d to RX Refresh device name for 2nd slave device (RX) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85046 N02 Refr-No to RX Refresh device start device No. for 2nd slave device (RX) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85047 N02 Refr-d to RY Refresh device name for 2nd slave device (RY) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85048 N02 Refr-No to RY Refresh device start device No. for 2nd slave device (RY) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85049 N02 Refr-d to RWr Refresh device name for 2nd slave device (RWr) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N02 Refr-No to RWr Refresh device start device No. for 2nd slave device (RWr) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N02 Refr-d to RWw Refresh device name for 2nd slave device (RWw) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N02 Refr-No to RWw Refresh device start device No. for 2nd slave device (RWw) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 2nd slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N03 Occupied St. Number of stat ions occupied by 3rd slave device Specify the number of stations occupi ed by the 3rd slave device. Up to 4 stations can be occupied by one slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) N03 Set rsvd St. Reserved station setting of the 3rd slave device Select whether to set the 3rd sl ave device as reserved station. (The reserved station is available in version D4 or later systems. Set "0 : No setting" for ve rsion D3 or earlier systems.) ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Reserved station N03 IP Address IP address of 3rd slave device Specify the IP address of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254 (0.0.0.0: No setting) N03 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. for 3rd slave device Specify the project No. of PLC devices for which link re fresh is performed with the link devices of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 (0: No setting) #85065 N03 Refr-d to RX Refresh device name for 3rd slave device (RX) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85066 N03 Refr-No to RX Refresh device start device No. for 3rd slave device (RX) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85067 N03 Refr-d to RY Refresh device name for 3rd slave device (RY) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85068 N03 Refr-No to RY Refresh device start device No. for 3rd slave device (RY) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85069 N03 Refr-d to RWr Refresh device name for 3rd slave device (RWr) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85070 N03 Refr-No to RWr Refresh device start device No. for 3rd slave device (RWr) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N03 Refr-d to RWw Refresh device name for 3rd slave device (RWw) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N03 Refr-No to RWw Refresh device start device No. for 3rd slave device (RWw) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 3rd slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N04 Occupied St. Number of stations occupied by 4th slave device Specify the number of stations occu pied by the 4th slave device. Up to 4 stations can be occupied by one slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) N04 Set rsvd St. Reserved station setting of the 4th slave device Select whether to set the 4th sl ave device as reserved station. (The reserved station is available in version D4 or later systems. Set "0 : No setting" for ve rsion D3 or earlier systems.) ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1: Reserved station N04 IP Address IP address of 4th slave device Specify the IP address of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254 (0.0.0.0: No setting) N04 Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. for 4th slave device Specify the project No. of PLC devices for which link refr esh is performed with the link devices of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 (0: No setting) N04 Refr-d to RX Refresh device name for 4th slave device (RX) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85086 N04 Refr-No to RX Refresh device start device No. for 4th slave device (RX) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85087 N04 Refr-d to RY Refresh device name for 4th slave device (RY) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85088 N04 Refr-No to RY Refresh device start device No. for 4th slave device (RY) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85089 N04 Refr-d to RWr Refresh device name for 4th slave device (RWr) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85090 N04 Refr-No to RWr Refresh device start device No. for 4th slave device (RWr) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85091 N04 Refr-d to RWw Refresh device name for 4th slave device (RWw) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refres h is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) N04 Refr-No to RWw Refresh device st art device No. for 4th slave device (RWw) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of the 4th slave device. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 S Occupied St. Number of stations occupied for the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave) Specify the number of stations o ccupied for the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). Up to 4 stations can be occupied. ---Setting range--- 0 to 4 (0: No setting) S Refr-d PNo. Refresh device project No. for slave function Specify the project No. of PLC devices for which link re fresh is performed with the lin k devices of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 (0: No setting) S Refr-d to RX Refresh device name for slave function (RX) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). Link refresh-enabled devices Y, M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) S Refr-No to RX Refresh device start device No. for slave function (RX) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for whic h link refresh is performed with the link devices "RX" of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 S Refr-d to RY Refresh device name for slave function (RY) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). Link refresh-enabled devices X, M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85185 S Refr-No to RY Refresh device start device No. for slave function (RY) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RY" of CC-Link IE Field Networ k Basic communication (slave). If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85186 S Refr-d to RWr Refresh device name for slave function (RWr) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refr esh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). Link refresh-enabled devices M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85187 S Refr-No to RWr Refresh device start device No. for slave function (RWr) Specify the starting device No. of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWr" of CC-Link IE Field Networ k Basic communication (slave). If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #85188 S Refr-d to RWw Refresh device name for slave function (RWw) Specify the name of PLC devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication (slave). Link refresh-enabled devices M, L, B, D, W and R ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, B, D, W or R (0: No setting) #85189 S Refr-No to RWw Refresh device start device No. for slave function (RWw) Specify the starting device No. of PL C devices for which link refresh is performed with the link devices "RWw" of CC-Link IE Field Networ k Basic communication (slave). If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 B: 0 to EFF0 D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #n I/O reg PROFIBUS I/O area Select whether to allocate the devices to PX or PY of PROFIBUS-DP. (n=1 to 64) (Note) If 0 is set, the PROFIBUS allocation parameters of the n-th set are all disabled. 0: Disable 1: PX 2: PY #n sect No. PROFIBUS section number Select the section of PROFIBUS-DP I/O data (PX/PY) to which the devices are allocated. (n=1 to 64) ---Setting range--- 0 to 31 #n dev name PROFIBUS device name Select the device that is allo cated to the section of PROFIBUS -DP I/O data(PX/PY). (n=1 to 64) (Note) The setting range varies according to the value of "#n I/O reg". ---Setting range--- X, Y, M, L, B, D, R or W When "#n I/O reg" is "1", "Y" is out of the setting range. When "#n I/O reg" is "2", "X" is out of the setting range. #n dev No. PROFIBUS device number Select the 32 bytes of devices to which PROFIBUS-DP I/O data is allocated. Specify the starting device num- ber. (n=1 to 64) * If the set value is out of the following r anges, an alarm occurs at the start of NC. Hexadecimal setting: X: 0 to 1C0, 300 to 500 Y: 0 to 1C0, 300 to 500 B: 0 to DF00 W: 0 to 2FF0 Decimal setting: M: 0 to 61184 L: 0 to 768 D: 0 to 4080 R: 8300 to 9884, 18300 to 19884, 28300 to 29884 (Note) Due to the multi-project function, if the number of the first project points is smaller than the default value, the range becomes narrower corresponding to the number of the first project points. ---Setting range--- The setting range varies according to the value of "#n dev name". X, Y, B, W: 0 to FFFF M, L, D, R: 0 to 65535 PLC Stop Output Setting of output at PLC STOP When the PLC of the NC unit is in the STOP state or erro r state, select the value to send to the slave device, either the value of the PLC device allocated by NC parameters or the value cleared to "0". 0: Send the PL C device value 1: Send the data cleared to "0" #86000 PFN dev assign PROFINET device assignment method Select whether to automatically or manually assign t he PLC devices that are used for refreshing the data of cyclic communication. 0: Automatic assignment 1: Manual assignment #86001 PLC Stop Output Setting of output at PLC STOP Select which data is sent to t he hardware connected when the NC enter s the PLC STOP mode, the set PLC device value or the cleared data (the data cleared to "0"). 0: Send the PL C device value 1: Send the data cleared to "0" #86010 N001 Device Number IO-Controller fu nction cyclic communication: device No. Specify the device number of the hardware to be assigned to the node. ---Setting range--- 0 to 127 #86011 N001 Project No. IO-Controller fu nction cyclic communication: PLC proj- ect No. Specify the number of the PLC proj ect to be assigned to the node. The number specified is used as the project No. of t he input/output/connection status devices of the node. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #86012 N001 in dev name IO-Controller function cyclic communication: PLC de- vice name (IN) Specify the name of the PLC device used for sending the input data of cyclic communication. (Example) X ---Setting range--- 0, X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R or W 0: No setting #86013 N001 in dev No. IO-Controller function cyclic communication: start No. of PLC device (IN) Specify the start number of the PLC device used fo r sending the input data of cyclic communication. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N001 in dev size IO-Controller function cyclic communication: PLC de- vice size (IN) Specify the size of the input data (bytes) to be sent to the PLC device of cyclic communication. (Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1440 (bytes) * Up to 5000 bytes in total for all nodes N001 out dev name IO-Controller function cyclic communication: PLC de- vice name (OUT) Specify the name of the PLC device used for sending the output data of cyclic communication. (Example) Y ---Setting range--- 0, Y, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R or W 0: No setting N001 out dev No. IO-Controller function cyclic communication: start No. of PLC device (OUT) Specify the start number of the PLC device used for sending the out put data of cyclic communication. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N001 out dev size IO-Controller function cyclic communication: PLC de- vice size (OUT) Specify the size of the output data (bytes) to be sent from the PLC device of cyclic communication. (Example) 1 ---Setting range--- 0 to 1440 (bytes) * Up to 5000 bytes in total for all nodes N001 sts dev name IO-Controller function cyclic comm.: connection status- assigned device name Specify the name of the PLC device used for sending t he connection status of the hardware assigned to the node. (Example) M ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R or W 0: No setting #86019 N001 sts dev No. IO-Controller function cyclic comm.: connection status- assigned device No. Specify the start number of the PLC device used for sending the connection status of the hardware assigned to the node. Six bytes of area starting from the set device No. are occupied. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 ALM MGT A Proj No. Alarm management area: PLC project No. Specify the number of the PLC project to wh ich the alarm management area is assigned. When the setting is omitted, the PLC program is not informed of an alarm, and the alarm is automatically processed (ACK response). ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting ALM MGT A dev name Alarm management area: PLC device name Specify the name of the PLC device to which the alarm management area is assigned. (Example) M ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, W or R 0: No setting ALM MGT A dev No. Alarm management area: start No. of PLC device Specify the number of the PLC device to which the alarm management area is assigned. 16 bytes of area starting from the set device No. are occupied. If you specify bit devices, set th em in increments of 16 points. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 ALM IND A Proj No. Alarm notification area: PLC project No. Specify the number of the PLC project to which the alarm notification area is assigned. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting ALM IND A dev name Alarm notification area: PLC device name Specify the name of the PLC device to wh ich the alarm notification area is assigned. (Example) SB ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, W or R 0: No setting #87295 ALM IND A dev No. Alarm notification area: start No. of PLC device Specify the number of the PLC device to whic h the alarm notification area is assigned. 16 bytes of area starting from the set device No. are occupied. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. (Example) 400 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #87310 CH01 Project No. IO-Controller function acyclic control structure: PLC project No. Specify the number of the PLC projec t to be assigned to the channel. The number specified is used as the project No. of th e input/output/acyclic contro l structure PLC devices of the channel. ---Setting range--- 0 to 6 0: No setting #87311 CH01 ctrl dev name IO-Controller function acyclic control structure: PLC device name Specify the name of the PLC device to whic h "Acyclic control structure" is assigned. (Example) M ---Setting range--- 0, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, W or R 0: No setting #87312 CH01 ctrl dev No. IO-Controller function acyclic control structure: start No. of PLC device Specify the start number of the PLC device to which "Acyclic control st ructure" is assigned. If you specify bit devices, set t hem in increments of 16 points. (Example) 2048 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Node name Node name Specify the node name for the NC to be used in FL-net communication. This parameter is used for resp onse of message transmission. The communication is possible even when the node name is unspecified. ---Setting range--- Up to 10 characters in length, cont aining alphanumeric characters and symbols 0: No setting Token Wdog Time Token watchdog time Specify the length of token watchdog time. Set the value in increments of 1 ms. This parameter has the following 2 uses. (1) Monitoring local node When a token cannot be issued within the token watchdo g time set by this parameter and a time-out oc- curs, "token watchdog time error flag" in "local node management information" is turned to "1" (ON). When the time-out is counted for 3 consecutive ti mes, the node is released from the netw ork and the sys- tem alarm (Z103) occurs. When a time-out occurs, set the larger value than current value to this param- eter. (2) Monitoring other node Check the release of the other no des based on token watchdog time fo r each node, and the token is to be re-issued. Calculate the token watchdog time with the following formula. [Calculation method] Token watchdog time = (Total number of cyclic frames for local nodes + 2) × 2.0 ms + (Total number of cyclic frames for local nodes + 2) × the allo wable minimum frame interval time (*) The maximum data size for 1 packet is 1024 bytes. ---Setting range--- 1 to 255 (ms) Min. Frame Time Minimu m permissible frame interval Specify the allowable minimum frame interval time. The minimum frame interval time is ensured the time fr om the end of a frame to the subsequent frame to be sent. This parameter has the following 2 uses. (1) Time until any frame is sending from local node after the local node address token was received (2) Transmission interval for cycl ic frames or message frames Note that this does not apply between the token frame and the preceding cyclic frame. The largest value of the allowable minimum frame interv al time within the network is used for all devices. When any restriction is needed for the configuration of devices or communication path, set "1" or larger value to this parameter. Set "0" when no restriction is needed. ---Setting range--- 0: No setting 1 to 9: 1 (ms) 10 to 19: 2 (ms) 20 to 29: 3 (ms) 30 to 39: 4 (ms) 40 to 49: 5 (ms) 50: 6 (ms) #88003 PLC Stop Output Setting of output at PLC STOP Select which data is sent to t he hardware connected when the NC enter s the PLC STOP mode, the set PLC device value or the cleared data (the data cleared to "0"). 0: Send the PL C device value 1: Send the data cleared to "0" #88010 CyC1 My Addr Start address in local node area of common memory area 1 Specify the start address (word) in the local node area of the common memory area 1. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FF (word) (hexadecimal) #88011 CyC1 My Size Size of local node area in common memory area 1 Specify the size (word) of the loca l node area of the common memory area 1. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 (words) #88012 CyC1 My Proj. No. PLC project number for local node area in common memory area 1 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assign ed to the local node area of the common memory area 1. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88013 CyC1 My dev name PLC device name for local node area in common mem- ory area 1 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to the local node area of the common memory area 1. (Example) Y When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88014 CyC1 My dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- Y, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88014 CyC1 My dev No. Start number of PLC device for local node area in com- mon memory area 1 Specify the start number of PLC device to be assigned to the local node area of the common memory area 1. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 CyC1 A1 Addr Start address in other node area 1 of common memory area 1 Specify the start address (word) in the other node area 1 of the common memory area 1. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FF (word) (hexadecimal) CyC1 A1 Size Size of other node area 1 in common memory area 1 Specify the size (word) of the other node area 1 of the common memory area 1. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 (words) CyC1 A1 Proj. No. PLC project number for other node area 1 in common memory area 1 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assi gned to the other node area 1 of the common memory area 1. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting CyC1 A1 dev name PLC device name for other node area 1 in common memory area 1 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to the other node area 1 of the common memory area 1. (Example) X When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88024 CyC1 A1 dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting CyC1 A1 dev No. Start number of PLC device for other node area 1 in common memory area 1 Specify the start number of PLC device to be assigned to the other node area 1 of the common memory area 1. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 CyC1 A2 Addr Start address in other node area 2 of common memory area 1 Specify the start address (word) in the other node area 2 of the common memory area 1. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FF (word) (hexadecimal) #88031 CyC1 A2 Size Size of other node area 2 in common memory area 1 Specify the size (word) of the other no de area 2 of the common memory area 1. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 200 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 512 (words) #88032 CyC1 A2 Proj. No. PLC project number for other node area 2 in common memory area 1 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assig ned to the other node area 2 of the common memory area 1. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88033 CyC1 A2 dev name PLC device name for other node area 2 in common memory area 1 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to th e other node area 2 of the common memory area 1. (Example) X When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88034 CyC1 A2 dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88034 CyC1 A2 dev No. Start number of PLC device for other node area 2 in common memory area 1 Specify the start number of PLC device to be assigned to the other node area 2 of the common memory area 1. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #88040 CyC2 My Addr Start address in local node area of common memory area 2 Specify the start address (wor d) in the local node area of the common memory area 2. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FFF (word) (hexadecimal) #88041 CyC2 My Size Size of local node area in common memory area 2 Specify the size (word) of the local node area of the common memory area 2. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 8192 (words) CyC2 My Proj. No. PLC project number for local node area in common memory area 2 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assigne d to the local node area of the common memory area 2. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting CyC2 My dev name PLC device name for local node area in common mem- ory area 2 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to the local node area of the common memory area 2. (Example) Y When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88044 CyC2 My dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- Y, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting CyC2 My dev No. Start number of PLC device for local node area in com- mon memory area 2 Specify the start number of PLC dev ice to be assigned to the local node area of the common memory area 2. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- Y: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 CyC2 A1 Addr Start address in other node area 1 of common memory area 2 Specify the start address (word) in the other node area 1 of the common memory area 2. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FFF (word) (hexadecimal) CyC2 A1 Size Size of other node area 1 in common memory area 2 Specify the size (word) of the other node area 1 of the common memory area 2. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 8192 (words) CyC2 A1 Proj. No. PLC project number for other node area 1 in common memory area 2 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assi gned to the other node area 1 of the common memory area 2. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88053 CyC2 A1 dev name PLC device name for other node area 1 in common memory area 2 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to th e other node area 1 of the common memory area 2. (Example) X When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88054 CyC2 A1 dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88054 CyC2 A1 dev No. Start number of PLC device for other node area 1 in common memory area 2 Specify the start number of PLC device to be assigned to the other node area 1 of the common memory area 2. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #88060 CyC2 A2 Addr Start address in other node area 2 of common memory area 2 Specify the start address (word) in the other node area 2 of the common memory area 2. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 1FFF (word) (hexadecimal) #88061 CyC2 A2 Size Size of other node area 2 in common memory area 2 Specify the size (word) of the other no de area 2 of the common memory area 2. When "0" is set, the data will not be transmitted. The sum of the start address and its size cannot exceed 2000 (HEX). ---Setting range--- 0 to 8192 (words) #88062 CyC2 A2 Proj. No. PLC project number for other node area 2 in common memory area 2 Specify the project number of PLC device to be assig ned to the other node area 2 of the common memory area 2. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88063 CyC2 A2 dev name PLC device name for other node area 2 in common memory area 2 Specify the PLC device name to be assigned to th e other node area 2 of the common memory area 2. (Example) X When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88064 CyC2 A2 dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- X, M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting CyC2 A2 dev No. Start number of PLC device for other node area 2 in common memory area 2 Specify the start number of PLC device to be assigned to the other node area 2 of the common memory area 2. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). (Example) 100 ---Setting range--- X: 0 to 5F0 M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 My sts Proj. No. PLC project number for Local node management infor- mation Specify the project number of the PLC device t hat stores the local node management information. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting My sts dev name PLC device name for Local node management informa- tion Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the Local node management information. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88072 My sts dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting My sts dev No. PLC device number for Local node management infor- mation Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the Local node management information. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The eight bytes of area starting fr om the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 N List Proj. No. PLC project number for List of participating nodes Specify the project number of the PLC device that stores the list of participating nodes. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88081 N List dev name PLC device name for List of participating nodes Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the List of participating nodes. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88082 N List dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88082 N List dev No. PLC device number for List of participating nodes Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the List of participating nodes. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The 32 bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #88090 Warnig Proj. No. PLC projec t number for W ARNING information Specify the project number of the PLC device that stores the WARNING information. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88091 Warnig dev name PLC device name for WARNING information Specify the name of the PLC device th at stores the WA RNING information. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88092 Warning dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88092 Warnig dev No. PLC device number for WARNING information Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the WARNING information. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The 32 bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Alarm Proj. No. PLC project number for ALARM information Specify the project number of the PLC de vice that stores the ALARM information. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting Alarm dev name PLC device name for ALARM information Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the ALARM information. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88102 Alarm dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting Alarm dev No. PLC device number for ALARM information Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the ALARM information. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The 32 bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Run Stop Proj. No. PLC project number for RUN/STOP information Specify the project number of the PLC de vice that stores the RUN/STOP information. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting Run Stop dev name PLC device name for RUN/STOP information Specify the name of the PLC device th at stores the RUN/STOP information. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88112 Run Stop dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88112 Run Stop dev No. PLC device number for RUN/STOP information Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the RUN/STOP information. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The 32 bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #88120 CM Comp. Proj. No. PLC project number for info. of Completion of common memory setting Specify the project number of the PLC device that stores the information of completion of common memory setting. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting #88121 CM Comp. dev name PLC device name for information of Completion of com- mon memory setting Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the information of Completion of common memory setting. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the value of "#88122 CM Comp. dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88122 CM Comp. dev No. PLC device number for information of Completion of common memory setting Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the information of completion of common memory setting. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The eight bytes of area starting fr om the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 #88130 CM Valid Proj. No. PLC project number for information of Common memo- ry data valid Specify the project number of the PLC device that stores the information of common memory data valid. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting CM Valid dev name PLC device name for information of Common memory data valid Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the information of Common memory data valid. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88132 CM Valid dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting CM Valid dev No. PLC device number for information of Common memo- ry data valid Specify the number of the PLC de vice that stores the information of common memory data valid. If you specify bit devices, set them with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The 32 bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Net sts Proj. No. PLC project number for Network management informa- tion Specify the project number of the PLC device that stores the network management information. ---Setting range--- 1 to 6 0: No setting Net sts dev name PLC device name for Network management information Specify the name of the PLC device that stores the Network management information. (Example) M When the setting of this parameter is changed, the va lue of "#88142 Net sts dev No." is cleared to "0". ---Setting range--- M, L, SB, B, SW, D, R, W 0: No setting #88142 Net sts dev No. PLC device number for Network management informa- tion Specify the number of the PLC device that stores the Network management information. If you specify bit devices, set t hem with numbers divisible by 16 (in increments of 16 points). The four bytes of area starting from the specified device are occupied. (Example) 1024 ---Setting range--- M: 0 to 61424 L: 0 to 32752 SB: 0 to 7FF0 B: 0 to EFF0 SW: 0 to 7FFF D: 0 to 32767 W: 0 to 7FFF R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899, 18300 to 19799, 19800 to 19899, 28300 to 29799, 29800 to 29899 Revision History Manual No. Revision details IB(NA)1501279-A First edition created. IB(NA)1501279-B The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version A4 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The following chapters were added/revised. - 15.22 Device Open Parameters - 15.23 SRAM Open Parameters The following chapters were revised. - 3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S) - 6 Absolute Position Detect ion System Alarms (Z7*) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-C The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version B2 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-D The descriptions were revised corre sponding to S/W version C1 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The descriptions were revised corresponding to S/W version A1 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 series. The following chapters were added. - 14 Multi CPU Errors (A) [C80] - 16.32 Multi CPU Parameters [C80] The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S) - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors (Z8*) - 8 Emergency Stop Alarms (EMG) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. Manual No. Revision details IB(NA)1501279-E The descriptions were revised corres ponding to S/W version C3 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters The following chapter was deleted. - 16.26 Rotary-axis Angle Deviation Parameters [M8] Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-F The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version A2 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 8 Emergency Stop Alarms (EMG) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-G The descriptions were revised corre sponding to S/W version C7 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The following chapters were added. - 15.16 Tolerance Parameters[M8] - 16.27 Machining Ti me Parameters[M8] - 16.33 PROFIBUS-DP Parameters[M8] The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. Manual No. Revision details IB(NA)1501279-H The descriptions were revised corresponding to Mitsubishi Electric CNC E80 series. The descriptions were revised corresponding to S/W version D1 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80 series. The following chapters were added. - 16.32 EtherNet/IP Parameters [M8] - 16.33 CC Link IE Field Parameters [M8] The following chapter numbers were changed. - 16.34 PROFIBUS-DP Parameters [M80] - 16.35 Multi CPU Parameters [C80] The following chapters were revised. - 3 Servo/Spindle Alarms - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-J The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version B0 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 15 User Parameters - 16 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. J) were divided to create the respective manuals, "M800/M80/E80 Series" and "C80 Series". The descriptions were revised corresponding to S/W version E0 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80/E80 series. The following chapters were added. - 15.33.4 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic - 15.35 PROFINET Parameters The following chapters were revised. - 6 Absolute Position Detect ion System Alarms (Z7*) - 8 Emergency Stop Alarms (EMG) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. Manual No. Revision details IB(NA)1501279-L The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version E1 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80/E80 series. The following chapters were added. - 15.36 FL-net Parameters The following chapters were revised. - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 6 Absolute Position Detect ion System Alarms (Z7*) - 10 User PLC Alarms (U) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-M The descriptions were revised corr esponding to S/W version F1 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80/E80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 2 Stop Codes (T) - 3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S) - 4 MCP Alarms (Y) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. IB(NA)1501279-N The descriptions were revised corres ponding to S/W version F4 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800/M80/E80 series. The following chapters were revised. - 3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S) - 6 Absolute Position Detect ion System Alarms (Z7*) - 7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors (Z8*) - 13 Smart Safety Observation Alarm (V) - 14 User Parameters - 15 Machine Parameters Other mistakes were corrected. Global Service Network EUROPE E C T R I C A U T O M A T I O N I N C . ( A M E R I C A F A C E N T E R ) M European Service Headquarters (Dusseldorf, GERMANY) I T S U B I S H I E L E C T R I C E U R O P E B . V . A 7 8 T - E 2 5 W 0 O 0 O / F D A S X P : A + 1 R - K 8 W 4 7 A - 4 Y 7 , 8 V - 2 E 6 R 5 N 0 O N H I L L S , I L L I N O I S 6 0 0 6 1 , U . S . A . M T E i t L s u : b + i 4 s 9 h - i 2 - E 1 l 0 e 2 c - t 4 r i 8 c - 6 P - 5 l a 0 t 0 z 0 1 / 4 F 0 A 8 X 8 2 : + R 4 A 9 T - 2 I N 1 0 G 2 E - 4 N 8 , 6 G - 5 E 9 R 1 M 0 A N Y South Germany Service Center (Stuttgart) SCHELMENWASENSTRASSE 16-20, 70567 STUTTGART, GERMANY TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141 France Service Center (Paris) 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 France Service Satellite (Lyon) 5 8 - 4 5 2 9 / F A X + 1 - 6 7 8 - 2 5 8 - 4 5 1 9 TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 1 2 0 , A L L E E J A C Q U E S M O N O D 6 9 8 0 0 S A I N T P R I E S T F R A N C E Italy Service Center (Milan) CENTRO DIR. COLLEONI, PALAZZO SIRIO, VIALE COLLEONI 7, 20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB) ITALY TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Italy Service Satellite (Padova) VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 U.K. Service Center TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. TEL: +49-2102-486-5000 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 Spain Service Center L L A A V E . - 5 9 0 0 - A K A T E L L A A V E . C Y P R E S S , C A L I F O R N I A 9 0 6 3 0 , U . S . A . CTRA. RUBI, 76-80 8174 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN T E L : + 3 4 - 9 3 5 - 6 5 - 2 2 3 6 / F A X : + 3 4 - 9 3 5 - 8 9 - 1 5 7 9 Poland Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND TEL: +48-12-347-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701 Hungary Service Center K , M A D A R A S Z V I K T O R U T 4 7 - 4 9 , 1 1 3 8 B U D A P E S T , H U N G A R Y 5 E 4 N - 3 U 8 E 0 5 M / A F R A K X H : A + M 1 - , 9 O 0 5 N - T 4 A 7 5 R - I 7 O 9 3 L 5 3 R O J 2 , C A N A D A T M E A L D : A + R 4 8 A - S 1 Z 2 - I 3 R 4 O 7 - D 6 A 5 0 P 0 A R / F A X : + 4 8 - 1 2 - 6 3 0 - 4 7 0 1 Turkey Service Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TURKEY A.Ş UMRANIYE, ISTANBUL SERIFALI MAHALLESI NUTUK SOKAK. NO.41 34775 a c h o r r a , C P 7 6 2 4 6 , E l M a r q u é s , Q u e r é t a r o , M é x i c o T E L : + 9 0 - 2 1 6 - 9 6 9 - 2 5 0 0 , TURKEY / F A X : + 9 0 - 2 1 6 - 5 2 6 - 3 9 9 5 Czech Republic Service Center AutoCont Control Systems s.r.o (Service Partner) KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199 Russia Service Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC RUSSIA LLC LETNIKOVSKAYA STREET 2, BLD.1, 5TH 115114 MOSCOW, RUSSIA TEL: +7-495-721-2070 / FAX: +7-495-721-2071 Sweden Service Center HAMMARBACKEN 14, P.O.BOX 750 SE-19127, SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877 Bulgaria Service Center AKHNATON Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061 Ukraine Service Center (Kiev) CSC Automation Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 B, YEVHENA SVERSTYUKA STR., 02002 KIEV, UKRAINE TEL: +380-44-494-3344 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366 Belarus Service Center TECHNIKON Ltd. (Service Partner) NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081 South Africa Service Center MOTIONTRONIX (Service Partner) P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513 CHINA I C A S I A P T E . L T D . ( A S E A N F A C E N T E R ) M TEL: +86-400-921-5130 CNC Call Center I T S U B I S H I E L E C T R I C A U T O M A T I O N ( C H I N A ) L T D . ( C H I N A F A C E N T E R ) Shanghai Service Center 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU, SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-3000*8422 Qingdao Service Center Suzhou Service Center Wuhan Service Center Ningbo Service Center Hefei Service Center Beijing Service Center Tianjin Service Center Xian Service Center Dalian Service Center Chengdu Service Center Shenzhen Service Center LEVEL8, GALAXY WORLD TOWER B, 1 YABAO ROAD, LONGGANG DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518129, CHINA TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86- Dongguan Service Center 755-8229-3686 Xiamen Service Center KOREA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER) Korea Service Center 8F GANGSEO HANGANG XI-TOWER A, 401 YANGCHEON-RO, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 07528 KOREA TEL: +82-2-3660-9609 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668 ( Cikaran g) Korea Daegu Service Satellite 4 TAIWAN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. Taiwan Taichun g Service Center ( TAIWAN FA CENTER ) NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST., ( Kuala Lum p ur Service Center ) TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-068 9 Taiwan Taipei Service Center 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433 Taiwan Tainan Service Center 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031 OCEANI A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. Oceania Service Center 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA TEL: +61-2-9684-7269/ FAX: +61-2-9684-7245 Notice Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product. Duplication Prohibited This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. COPYRIGHT 2015-2021 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED